Configuration Guide
Instructions for setting up and maintaining Red Hat JBoss Enterprise Application Platform, including running applications and services.
Abstract
Chapter 1. Introduction
Before using this guide to configure JBoss EAP, it is assumed that the latest version of JBoss EAP has been downloaded and installed. For installation instructions, see the JBoss EAP Installation Guide.
Since the installation location of JBoss EAP will vary between host machines, this guide refers to the installation location as EAP_HOME
. The actual location of the JBoss EAP installation should be used instead of EAP_HOME
when performing administrative tasks.
Chapter 2. Starting and Stopping JBoss EAP
2.1. Starting JBoss EAP
JBoss EAP is supported on Red Hat Enterprise Linux, Windows Server, and Oracle Solaris, and runs in either a standalone server or managed domain operating mode. The specific command to start JBoss EAP depends on the underlying platform and the desired operating mode.
Servers are initially started in a suspended state and will not accept any requests until all required services have started, at which time the servers are placed into a normal running state and can start accepting requests.
Start JBoss EAP as a Standalone Server
$ EAP_HOME/bin/standalone.sh
For Windows Server, use the EAP_HOME\bin\standalone.bat
script.
This startup script uses the EAP_HOME/bin/standalone.conf
file, or standalone.conf.bat
for Windows Server, to set some default preferences, such as JVM options. You can customize the settings in this file.
JBoss EAP uses the standalone.xml
configuration file by default, but can be started using a different one. For details on the available standalone configuration files and how to use them, see the Standalone Server Configuration Files section.
For a complete listing of all available startup script arguments and their purposes, use the --help
argument or see the Server Runtime Arguments section.
Start JBoss EAP in a Managed Domain
The domain controller must be started before the servers in any of the server groups in the domain. Use this script to first start the domain controller, and then for each associated host controller.
$ EAP_HOME/bin/domain.sh
For Windows Server, use the EAP_HOME\bin\domain.bat
script.
This startup script uses the EAP_HOME/bin/domain.conf
file, or domain.conf.bat
for Windows Server, to set some default preferences, such as JVM options. You can customize the settings in this file.
JBoss EAP uses the host.xml
host configuration file by default, but can be started using a different one. For details on the available managed domain configuration files and how to use them, see the Managed Domain Configuration Files section.
When setting up a managed domain, additional arguments will need to be passed into the startup script. For a complete listing of all available startup script arguments and their purposes, use the --help
argument or see the Server Runtime Arguments section.
2.2. Stopping JBoss EAP
The way that you stop JBoss EAP depends on how it was started.
Stop an Interactive Instance of JBoss EAP
Press Ctrl+C
in the terminal where JBoss EAP was started.
Stop a Background Instance of JBoss EAP
Use the management CLI to connect to the running instance and shut down the server.
Launch the management CLI.
$ EAP_HOME/bin/jboss-cli.sh --connect
Issue the
shutdown
command.shutdown
When running in a managed domain, you must specify the host name to shut down by using the --host
argument with the shutdown
command.
2.3. Running JBoss EAP in Admin-only Mode
JBoss EAP has the ability to be started in admin-only mode. This enables JBoss EAP to run and accept management requests but not start other runtime services or accept end user requests. Admin-only mode is available in both standalone servers as well as managed domains.
Running a Standalone Server in Admin-only Mode
Start the Server in Admin-only Mode
To start a JBoss EAP instance in admin-only mode, use the --start-mode=admin-only
runtime argument when starting the JBoss EAP instance.
$ EAP_HOME/bin/standalone.sh --start-mode=admin-only
Check If the Server is Running in Admin-only Mode
Use the following command to check the running mode of the server. The result will be ADMIN_ONLY
if the server is running in admin-only mode.
:read-attribute(name=running-mode) { "outcome" => "success", "result" => "ADMIN_ONLY" }
Additionally, you can check the initial running mode in which JBoss EAP was launched by using the following command.
/core-service=server-environment:read-attribute(name=initial-running-mode)
Reload in a Different Mode from the Management CLI
In addition to stopping and starting a JBoss EAP instance with a different runtime switch, the management CLI may also be used to reload it in a different mode.
To reload the server in admin-only mode:
reload --start-mode=admin-only
To reload the server in normal mode:
reload --start-mode=normal
Note that if the server was started in admin-only mode and no --start-mode
argument is specified to the reload
command, the server will be started in normal mode.
Running a Managed Domain in Admin-only Mode
In a managed domain, if a domain controller is started in admin-only mode, it will not accept incoming connections from slave host controllers.
Start a Host Controller in Admin-only Mode
Pass in the --admin-only
runtime argument to start a host controller in admin-only mode.
$ EAP_HOME/bin/domain.sh --admin-only
Check If a Host Controller is Running in Admin-only Mode
Use the following command to check the running mode of a host controller. The result will be ADMIN_ONLY
if the host controller is running in admin-only mode.
/host=HOST_NAME:read-attribute(name=running-mode)
{
"outcome" => "success",
"result" => "ADMIN_ONLY"
}
Reload in a Different Mode from the Management CLI
In addition to stopping and starting a host controller with a different runtime switch, the management CLI may also be used to reload it in a different mode.
To reload the host controller in admin-only mode:
reload --host=HOST_NAME --admin-only=true
To reload a host controller in normal mode:
reload --host=HOST_NAME --admin-only=false
Note that if the host controller was started in admin-only mode and no --admin-only
argument is specified to the reload
command, the host controller will be started in normal mode.
2.4. Suspend and Shut Down JBoss EAP Gracefully
JBoss EAP can be suspended or shut down gracefully. This allows active requests to complete normally, without accepting any new requests. A timeout value specifies how long that the suspend or shut down operation will wait for active requests to complete. While the server is suspended, management requests are still processed.
Graceful shutdown is coordinated at a server-wide level, mostly focused on the entry points at which a request enters the server. The following subsystems support graceful shutdown:
- Undertow
-
The
undertow
subsystem will wait for all requests to finish. - mod_cluster
-
The
modcluster
subsystem will notify the load balancer that the server is suspending in thePRE_SUSPEND
phase. - EJB
-
The
ejb3
subsystem will wait for all remote EJB requests and MDB message deliveries to finish. Delivery to MDBs is stopped in thePRE_SUSPEND
phase. EJB timers are suspended, and missed timers will be activated when the server is resumed. - Transactions
Once suspended, the server will not accept new requests, but in-flight transactions and requests are allowed to continue until they complete or until the timeout period expires. This also applies for web service requests associated with an XTS transaction.
NoteBy default, transaction graceful shutdown is disabled for the
ejb
subsystem. You must enable transaction graceful shutdown if you want the server to wait for EJB-related transactions to complete before suspending. For example:/subsystem=ejb3:write-attribute(name=enable-graceful-txn-shutdown,value=true)
- EE Concurrency
The server will wait for all active jobs to finish. All queued jobs will be skipped. Currently, since EE Concurrency does not have persistence, those queued jobs that were skipped will be lost.
While the server is in a suspended state, scheduled tasks will continue to execute at their scheduled times but will throw a
java.lang.IllegalStateException
. Once the server is resumed, scheduled tasks will continue to execute normally, and in most cases tasks will not need to be rescheduled.- Batch
- The server will stop all running jobs within the timeout period and defer all scheduled jobs.
Graceful shutdown currently will not reject new inbound JMS messages. EE batch jobs and EE concurrency tasks scheduled by in-flight activity are currently allowed to proceed; however, EE concurrency tasks submitted that pass the timeout window currently error when executed.
Requests are tracked by the request-controller
subsystem. Without this subsystem, suspend and resume capabilities are limited and the server will not wait for requests to complete before suspending or shutting down; however, if you do not need this capability, the request-controller
subsystem can be removed for a small performance improvement.
2.4.1. Suspend Servers
JBoss EAP 7 introduced a suspend mode, which suspends server operations gracefully. This allows all active requests to complete normally, but will not accept any new requests. Once the server has been suspended, it can be shut down, returned back to a running state, or left in a suspended state to perform maintenance.
The management interfaces are not impacted by suspending the server.
The server can be suspended and resumed using the management console or the management CLI.
Check the Server Suspend State
The server suspend state can be viewed using the following management CLI commands. The resulting value will be one of RUNNING
, PRE_SUSPEND
, SUSPENDING
, or SUSPENDED
.
Check the suspend state for a standalone server.
:read-attribute(name=suspend-state)
Check the suspend state for a server in a managed domain.
/host=master/server=server-one:read-attribute(name=suspend-state)
Suspend
Use the following management CLI commands to suspend the server, specifying the timeout value, in seconds, for the server to wait for active requests to complete. The default is 0
, which will suspend immediately. A value of -1
will cause the server to wait indefinitely for all active requests to complete.
Each example waits up to 60 seconds for requests to complete before suspending.
Suspend a standalone server.
:suspend(suspend-timeout=60)
Suspend all servers in a managed domain.
:suspend-servers(suspend-timeout=60)
Suspend a single server in a managed domain.
/host=master/server-config=server-one:suspend(suspend-timeout=60)
Suspend all servers in a server group.
/server-group=main-server-group:suspend-servers(suspend-timeout=60)
Suspend all servers at the host level.
/host=master:suspend-servers(suspend-timeout=60)
Resume
The resume
command returns the server to a normal running state to accept new requests. You can initiate the command at the host, server, server group, or domain level. For example:
:resume
Start a Server in a Suspended State
You can start a server in a suspended state so that no requests are accepted by the server until it is resumed.
To start a standalone server in a suspended state, use the
--start-mode=suspend
runtime argument when starting the JBoss EAP instance.$ EAP_HOME/bin/standalone.sh --start-mode=suspend
To start a managed domain server in a suspended state, pass the
start-mode=suspend
argument to thestart
operation in the management CLI command./host=HOST_NAME/server-config=SERVER_NAME:start(start-mode=suspend)
NoteYou can also pass the
start-mode
argument to thereload
andrestart
operations for a server.To start all servers in a managed domain server group in a suspended state, pass the
start-mode=suspend
argument to thestart-servers
operation in the management CLI command./server-group=SERVER_GROUP_NAME:start-servers(start-mode=suspend)
NoteYou can also pass the
start-mode
argument to thereload-servers
andrestart-servers
operations for a server group.
2.4.2. Shut Down Servers Gracefully Using the Management CLI
A server will be shut down gracefully if an appropriate timeout value is specified when stopping the server. Once the command is issued, the server will be suspended and will wait up to the specified timeout for all requests to finish before shutting down.
Use the following management CLI commands to shut down the server gracefully. Specify the timeout value, in seconds, for the server to wait for active requests to complete. The default is 0
, which will shut down the server immediately. A value of -1
will cause the server to wait indefinitely for all active requests to complete before shutting down.
Each example waits up to 60 seconds for requests to complete before shutting down.
Shut down a standalone server gracefully.
shutdown --suspend-timeout=60
Stop all servers in a managed domain gracefully.
:stop-servers(suspend-timeout=60)
Stop a single server in a managed domain gracefully.
/host=master/server-config=server-one:stop(suspend-timeout=60)
Stop all servers in a server group gracefully.
/server-group=main-server-group:stop-servers(suspend-timeout=60)
Shutdown the host controller and all the servers it manages.
/host=master:shutdown(suspend-timeout=60)
NoteThe
suspend-timeout
attribute is only applied to the servers managed by the host controller, not the host controller itself.
2.4.3. Shut Down Servers Gracefully Using an OS Signal
A server can be shut down gracefully by sending an OS TERM
signal, such as with kill -15 PID
. By default, this value is identical to the management CLI’s shutdown --suspend-timeout=0
command, resulting in immediate termination of any currently processing requests. The timeout can be configured by org.wildfly.sigterm.suspend.timeout
system property, indicating the maximum number of seconds to wait for requests to complete before the server shuts down. A value of -1
indicates that the server will wait indefinitely.
In a managed domain OS signals should not be used to shut down servers. Instead, servers should be shut down using the management CLI and through the managing Host Controller.
Graceful shutdown using an OS signal will not work if the JVM is configured to disable signal handling, such as if the -Xrs
java argument has been passed to the JVM options, or if the signal sent is not one the process can respond to, such as if a KILL
signal is sent.
2.5. Starting and Stopping JBoss EAP (RPM Installation)
Starting and stopping JBoss EAP is different for an RPM installation compared to a ZIP or installer installation.
2.5.1. Starting JBoss EAP (RPM Installation)
The command for starting an RPM installation of JBoss EAP depends on which operating mode you want to start, a standalone server or a managed domain, and which Red Hat Enterprise Linux version you are running.
Start JBoss EAP as a Standalone Server (RPM Installation)
For Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6:
$ service eap7-standalone start
For Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7 and later:
$ systemctl start eap7-standalone.service
This will start JBoss EAP using the standalone.xml
configuration file by default. You can start JBoss EAP with a different standalone server configuration file by setting a property in the RPM service configuration file. For more information, see the Configure RPM Service Properties section below.
Start JBoss EAP in a Managed Domain (RPM Installation)
For Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6:
$ service eap7-domain start
For Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7 and later:
$ systemctl start eap7-domain.service
This will start JBoss EAP using the host.xml
configuration file by default. You can start JBoss EAP with a different managed domain configuration file by setting a property in the RPM service configuration file. For more information, see the Configure RPM Service Properties section below.
Configure RPM Service Properties
This section shows you how to configure the RPM service properties and other startup options for your JBoss EAP installation. Note that it is recommended to back up your configuration files before making modifications.
For a listing of all available startup options for an RPM installation, see the RPM Service Configuration Properties section.
For Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7 and later, RPM service configuration files are loaded using systemd
, so variable expressions are not expanded.
Specify the server configuration file.
When starting a standalone server, the
standalone.xml
file is used by default. When running in a managed domain, thehost.xml
file is used by default. You can start JBoss EAP with a different configuration file by setting theWILDFLY_SERVER_CONFIG
property in the appropriate RPM configuration file, for example,eap7-standalone.conf
.WILDFLY_SERVER_CONFIG=standalone-full.xml
Bind to a specific IP address.
By default, a JBoss EAP RPM installation binds to
0.0.0.0
. You can bind JBoss EAP to a specific IP address by setting theWILDFLY_BIND
property in the appropriate RPM configuration file, for example,eap7-standalone.conf
.WILDFLY_BIND=192.168.0.1
NoteIf you want to bind the management interfaces to a specific IP address, this can be configured in the JBoss EAP startup configuration file as shown in the next example.
Set JVM options or Java properties.
You can specify JVM options or Java properties to pass into the JBoss EAP startup script by editing the startup configuration file. This file is
EAP_HOME/bin/standalone.conf
for a standalone server orEAP_HOME/bin/domain.conf
for a managed domain. The below example configures the heap size and binds the JBoss EAP management interfaces to an IP address.JAVA_OPTS="$JAVA_OPTS -Xms2048m -Xmx2048m" JAVA_OPTS="$JAVA_OPTS -Djboss.bind.address.management=192.168.0.1"
NoteIf required, the JBoss EAP bind address must be configured using the
WILDFLY_BIND
property and not using thejboss.bind.address
standard property here.
If a property has the same name in both the RPM service configuration file, such as /etc/sysconfig/eap7-standalone
, and in the JBoss EAP startup configuration file, such as EAP_HOME/bin/standalone.conf
, the value that takes precedence is the one in the JBoss EAP startup configuration file. One such property is JAVA_HOME
.
2.5.2. Stopping JBoss EAP (RPM Installation)
The command for stopping an RPM installation of JBoss EAP depends on which operating mode that was started, a standalone server or a managed domain, and which Red Hat Enterprise Linux version you are running.
Stop JBoss EAP as a Standalone Server (RPM Installation)
For Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6:
$ service eap7-standalone stop
For Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7 and later:
$ systemctl stop eap7-standalone.service
Stop JBoss EAP in a Managed Domain (RPM Installation)
For Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6:
$ service eap7-domain stop
For Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7 and later:
$ systemctl stop eap7-domain.service
For a listing of all available startup options for an RPM installation, see the RPM Service Configuration Files section.
2.6. PowerShell Scripts (Windows Server)
The collection of PowerShell scripts is provided as Technology Preview only. Technology Preview features are not supported with Red Hat production service level agreements (SLAs), might not be functionally complete, and Red Hat does not recommend to use them for production. These features provide early access to upcoming product features, enabling customers to test functionality and provide feedback during the development process.
See Technology Preview Features Support Scope on the Red Hat Customer Portal for information about the support scope for Technology Preview features.
JBoss EAP includes PowerShell script equivalents for most of the JBoss EAP management scripts. This includes a PowerShell script to start JBoss EAP on Microsoft Windows Server.
The JBoss EAP PowerShell scripts are designed to work with PowerShell version 2 and newer running on tested versions of Windows Server.
The JBoss EAP PowerShell scripts are located in EAP_HOME\bin
, and are used in mostly the same way as the JBoss EAP batch scripts.
For example, to start a standalone JBoss EAP server with the standalone-full.xml
configuration file, use the following PowerShell command:
.\standalone.ps1 "-c=standalone-full.xml"
Arguments of the JBoss EAP PowerShell scripts must be in quotes.
Chapter 3. JBoss EAP Management
JBoss EAP uses a simplified configuration, with one configuration file per standalone server or managed domain. Default configuration for a standalone server is stored in the EAP_HOME/standalone/configuration/standalone.xml
file and default configuration for a managed domain is stored in the EAP_HOME/domain/configuration/domain.xml
file. Additionally, the default configuration for a host controller is stored in the EAP_HOME/domain/configuration/host.xml
file.
JBoss EAP can be configured using the command-line management CLI, web-based management console, Java API, or HTTP API. Changes made using these management interfaces persist automatically, and the XML configuration files are overwritten by the Management API. The management CLI and management console are the preferred methods, and it is not recommended to edit the XML configuration files manually.
3.1. About Subsystems, Extensions, and Profiles
Different aspects of JBoss EAP functionality are configured in different subsystems. For example, application and server logging are configured in the logging
subsystem.
An extension is a module that extends the core functionality of the server. Extensions are loaded as they are needed by deployments, and are unloaded when they are no longer needed. See the JBoss EAP Management CLI Guide for how to add and remove extensions.
A subsystem provides configuration options for a particular extension. For more information on the available subsystems, see Overview of JBoss EAP Subsystems.
A collection of subsystem configurations makes up a profile, which is configured to satisfy the needs for the server. A standalone server has a single, unnamed profile. A managed domain can define many profiles for use by server groups in the domain.
Using the Management Console or the Management CLI
Both the management console and the management CLI are valid, supported ways of updating the configuration of a JBoss EAP instance. Deciding between the two is a matter of preference. Those who prefer to use a graphical, web-based interface should use the management console. Those who prefer a command-line interface should use the management CLI.
3.2. Management Users
The default JBoss EAP configuration provides local authentication so that a user can access the management CLI on the local host without requiring authentication.
However, you must add a management user if you want to access the management CLI remotely or use the management console, which is considered remote access even if the traffic originates on the local host. If you attempt to access the management console before adding a management user, you will receive an error message.
If JBoss EAP is installed using the graphical installer, then a management user is created during the installation process.
This guide covers simple user management for JBoss EAP using the add-user
script, which is a utility for adding new users to the properties files for out-of-the-box authentication.
For more advanced authentication and authorization options, such as LDAP or Role-Based Access Control (RBAC), see the Core Management Authentication section of the JBoss EAP Security Architecture.
3.2.1. Adding a Management User
Run the
add-user
utility script and follow the prompts.$ EAP_HOME/bin/add-user.sh
NoteFor Windows Server, use the
EAP_HOME\bin\add-user.bat
script.Press
ENTER
to select the default optiona
to add a management user.This user will be added to the ManagementRealm and will be authorized to perform management operations using the management console or management CLI. The other choice,
b
, adds a user to the ApplicationRealm, which is used for applications and provides no particular permissions.Enter the desired username and password. You will be prompted to confirm the password.
NoteUser names can only contain the following characters, in any number and in any order:
- Alphanumeric characters (a-z, A-Z, 0-9)
- Dashes (-), periods (.), commas (,), at sign (@)
- Backslash (\)
- Equals (=)
By default, JBoss EAP allows weak passwords but will issue a warning.
See Setting Add-User Utility Password Restrictions for details on changing this default behavior.
-
Enter a comma-separated list of groups to which the user belongs. If you do not want the user to belong to any groups, press
ENTER
to leave it blank. -
Review the information and enter
yes
to confirm. Determine whether this user represents a remote JBoss EAP server instance. For a basic management user, enter
no
.One type of user that may need to be added to the ManagementRealm is a user representing another instance of JBoss EAP, which must be able to authenticate to join as a member of a cluster. If this is the case, then answer
yes
to this prompt and you will be given a hashed secret value representing the user’s password, which will need to be added to a different configuration file.
Users can also be created non-interactively by passing parameters to the add-user
script. This approach is not recommended on shared systems, because the passwords will be visible in log and history files. For more information, see Running the Add-User Utility Non-Interactively.
3.2.2. Running the Add-User Utility Non-Interactively
You can run the add-user
script non-interactively by passing in arguments on the command line. At a minimum, the username and password must be provided.
This approach is not recommended on shared systems, because the passwords will be visible in log and history files.
Create a User Belonging to Multiple Groups
The following command adds a management user, mgmtuser1
, with the guest
and mgmtgroup
groups.
$ EAP_HOME/bin/add-user.sh -u 'mgmtuser1' -p 'password1!' -g 'guest,mgmtgroup'
Specify an Alternative Properties File
By default, user and group information created using the add-user
script are stored in properties files located in the server configuration directory.
User information is stored in the following properties files:
-
EAP_HOME/standalone/configuration/mgmt-users.properties
-
EAP_HOME/domain/configuration/mgmt-users.properties
Group information is stored in the following properties files:
-
EAP_HOME/standalone/configuration/mgmt-groups.properties
-
EAP_HOME/domain/configuration/mgmt-groups.properties
These default directories and properties file names can be overridden. The following command adds a new user, specifying a different name and location for the user properties files.
$ EAP_HOME/bin/add-user.sh -u 'mgmtuser2' -p 'password1!' -sc '/path/to/standaloneconfig/' -dc '/path/to/domainconfig/' -up 'newname.properties'
The new user was added to the user properties files located at /path/to/standaloneconfig/newname.properties
and /path/to/domainconfig/newname.properties
. Note that these files must already exist or you will see an error.
For a complete listing of all available add-user
arguments and their purposes, use the --help
argument or see the Add-User Utility Arguments section.
3.2.3. Add-User Utility Password Restrictions
The password restrictions for the add-user
utility script can be configured using the EAP_HOME/bin/add-user.properties
file.
The add-user.properties
file is an unprotected plain-text file and must be secured to avoid unwarranted access to its contents.
To avoid setting an unintentional password, check that your keyboard’s system keymap is correct. The default system keymap is en-qwerty
. If you change this default setting and create a new password, you must check that the password meets the criteria located in the class SimplePasswordStrengthChecker
.
By default, JBoss EAP allows weak passwords but issues a warning. To reject passwords that do not meet the minimum requirements specified, set the password.restriction
property to REJECT
.
The following table describes the additional password requirement settings that can be configured in the EAP_HOME/bin/add-user.properties
file:
Attribute | Description |
---|---|
|
The minimum number of characters for a password. For example, |
| Sets the threshold that a password must meet to be valid. Valid threshold entries include:
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
The default value is
NOTE: If you do not specify a threshold value, |
|
The minimum number of alphabetic characters set for a password. For example, |
|
The minimum number of numeric characters set for a password. For example, |
|
The minimum number of symbols set for a password. For example, |
|
Restricts a user from setting an easily determined password, such as root. For example, |
|
Restricts the user from setting their user name as the password. For example, |
Additional Resources
See the Configuring Basic System Settings guide on the Red Hat Customer Portal.
3.2.4. Updating a Management User
You can update the settings for an existing management user using the add-user
utility script by entering the username when prompted.
$ EAP_HOME/bin/add-user.sh
What type of user do you wish to add?
a) Management User (mgmt-users.properties)
b) Application User (application-users.properties)
(a): a
Enter the details of the new user to add.
Using realm 'ManagementRealm' as discovered from the existing property files.
Username : test-user
User 'test-user' already exists and is enabled, would you like to...
a) Update the existing user password and roles
b) Disable the existing user
c) Type a new username
(a):
When you enter a username that already exists, you are presented with several options:
-
Type
a
to update the password for the existing user. -
Type
b
to disable the existing user. -
Type
c
to enter a new username.
When updating a user using the add-user
script non-interactively, the user is updated automatically with no confirmation prompt.
3.3. Optimizing the JBoss EAP Server Configuration
Once you have installed the JBoss EAP server, and you have created a management user, Red Hat recommends that you optimize your server configuration.
Make sure you review information in the Performance Tuning Guide for information about how to optimize the server configuration to avoid common problems when deploying applications in a production environment. Common optimizations include setting ulimits, enabling garbage collection, creating Java heap dumps, and adjusting the thread pool size.
It is also a good idea to apply any existing patches for your release of the product. Each patch for EAP contains numerous bug fixes. For more information, see Patching JBoss EAP in the Patching and Upgrading Guide for JBoss EAP.
3.4. Management Interfaces
3.4.1. Management CLI
The management command-line interface (CLI) is a command-line administration tool for JBoss EAP.
Use the management CLI to start and stop servers, deploy and undeploy applications, configure system settings, and perform other administrative tasks. Operations can be performed in batch mode, allowing multiple tasks to be run as a group.
Many common terminal commands are available, such as ls
, cd
, and pwd
. The management CLI also supports tab completion.
For detailed information on using the management CLI, including commands and operations, syntax, and running in batch mode, see the JBoss EAP Management CLI Guide.
Launch the Management CLI
$ EAP_HOME/bin/jboss-cli.sh
For Windows Server, use the EAP_HOME\bin\jboss-cli.bat
script.
Connect to a Running Server
connect
Or you can launch the management CLI and connect in one step by using the EAP_HOME/bin/jboss-cli.sh --connect
command.
Display Help
Use the following command for general help.
help
Use the --help
flag on a command to receive instructions on using that specific command. For instance, to receive information on using deploy
, the following command is executed.
deploy --help
Quit the Management CLI
quit
View System Settings
The following command uses the read-attribute
operation to display whether the example datasource is enabled.
/subsystem=datasources/data-source=ExampleDS:read-attribute(name=enabled) { "outcome" => "success", "result" => true }
When running in a managed domain, you must specify which profile to update by preceding the command with /profile=PROFILE_NAME
.
/profile=default/subsystem=datasources/data-source=ExampleDS:read-attribute(name=enabled)
Update System Settings
The following command uses the write-attribute
operation to disable the example datasource.
/subsystem=datasources/data-source=ExampleDS:write-attribute(name=enabled,value=false)
Start Servers
The management CLI can also be used to start and stop servers when running in a managed domain.
/host=HOST_NAME/server-config=server-one:start
3.4.2. Management Console
The management console is a web-based administration tool for JBoss EAP.
Use the management console to start and stop servers, deploy and undeploy applications, tune system settings, and make persistent modifications to the server configuration. The management console also has the ability to perform administrative tasks, with live notifications when any changes performed by the current user require the server instance to be restarted or reloaded.
In a managed domain, server instances and server groups in the same domain can be centrally managed from the management console of the domain controller.
For a JBoss EAP instance running on the local host using the default management port, the management console can be accessed through a web browser at http://localhost:9990/console/index.html. You will need to authenticate with a user that has permissions to access the management console.
The management console provides the following tabs for navigating and managing your JBoss EAP standalone server or managed domain.
- Home
- Learn how to accomplish several common configuration and management tasks. Take a tour to become familiar with the JBoss EAP management console.
- Deployments
- Add, remove, and enable deployments. In a managed domain, assign deployments to server groups.
- Configuration
- Configure available subsystems, which provide capabilities such as web services, messaging, or high availability. In a managed domain, manage the profiles that contain different subsystem configurations.
- Runtime
- View runtime information, such as server status, JVM usage, and server logs. In a managed domain, manage your hosts, server groups, and servers.
- Patching
- Apply patches to your JBoss EAP instances.
- Access Control
- Assign roles to users and groups when using Role-Based Access Control.
3.4.2.1. Updating Attributes in the Management Console
Once you have navigated to the appropriate section of the management console for the resource that you want to modify, you can edit its attributes as long as you have the proper permissions.
- Click the Edit link.
Make the desired changes.
Required fields are marked with an asterisk (*). You can view attribute descriptions by clicking the Help link.
NoteDepending on the attribute type, the input field can be a text field, ON/OFF field, or drop down. In some text fields, as you type, values from elsewhere in the configuration may appear as suggestions.
- Click Save to save the changes.
If necessary, reload the server for the changes to take effect.
A popup appears when saving changes that require a reload in order to take effect. To reload a standalone server, click the Reload link in the popup. To reload a server in a managed domain, click the Topology link, select the appropriate server, and click the Reload drop down option.
To view the history of recent configuration actions you have performed, click the notification icon in the top-right of the management console.
3.4.2.2. Enable/Disable Management Console
You can enable or disable the management console by setting the console-enabled
boolean attribute of the /core-service=management/management-interface=http-interface
resource. For the master host in domain mode, use /host=master/core-service=management/management-interface=http-interface
.
For example, to enable:
/core-service=management/management-interface=http-interface:write-attribute(name=console-enabled,value=true)
For example, to disable:
/core-service=management/management-interface=http-interface:write-attribute(name=console-enabled,value=false)
3.4.2.3. Change the Language of the Management Console
By default, the language settings of the management console is English. You can choose to use one of the following languages instead:
- German (de)
- Simplified Chinese (zh-Hans)
- Brazilian Portuguese (pt-BR)
- French (fr)
- Spanish (es)
- Japanese (ja)
To Change the Language of the Management Console
- Log in to the management console.
- Click the Settings link in the lower-right corner of the management console.
- Select the required language from the Locale selection box.
- Select Save. A confirmation box informs you that you need to reload the application.
- Click Yes. The system refreshes your web browser automatically to use the selected locale.
3.4.2.4. Customizing the Management Console Title
You can customize the management console title so that each of your JBoss EAP instances can be identified at a quick glance.
To customize the management console title:
- Log in to the management console.
- Click Settings in the lower-right corner of the management console.
- In the Settings window, modify the title in the Title field.
Click Save.
A confirmation box informs you that you must reload the management console.
Click Yes.
The system refreshes your web browser automatically and the new title is displayed on the tab header.
3.5. Management APIs
3.5.1. HTTP API
The HTTP API endpoint is the entry point for management clients that rely on the HTTP protocol to integrate with the JBoss EAP management layer.
The HTTP API is used by the JBoss EAP management console but offers integration capabilities for other clients as well. By default, the HTTP API is accessible at http://HOST_NAME:9990/management
. This URL will display the raw attributes and values exposed to the API.
Read Resources
While you can read, write, or perform other operations using the HTTP POST
method, you can perform some read operations using a GET
request. The HTTP GET
method uses the following URL format.
http://HOST_NAME:9990/management/PATH_TO_RESOURCE?operation=OPERATION&PARAMETER=VALUE
Be sure to replace all of the replaceable values with those that are appropriate for your request. The following values are the available options for the OPERATION
replaceable value:
Value | Description |
---|---|
attribute |
Performs the |
operation-description |
Performs the |
operation-names |
Performs the |
resource |
Performs the |
resource-description |
Performs the |
snapshots |
Performs the |
The following example URLs show how to perform read operations using the HTTP API.
Example: Read All Attributes and Values for a Resource
http://HOST_NAME:9990/management/subsystem/undertow/server/default-server/http-listener/default
This displays all attributes and their values for the default
HTTP listener.
The default operation is read-resource
.
Example: Read the Value of an Attribute for a Resource
http://HOST_NAME:9990/management/subsystem/datasources/data-source/ExampleDS?operation=attribute&name=enabled
This reads the value of the enabled
attribute for the ExampleDS
datasource.
Update Resources
You can use the HTTP POST
method to update configuration values or perform other operations using the HTTP API. You must provide authentication for these operations.
The following examples show how to update resources using the HTTP API.
Example: Update the Value of an Attribute for a Resource
$ curl --digest http://HOST_NAME:9990/management --header "Content-Type: application/json" -u USERNAME:PASSWORD -d '{"operation":"write-attribute", "address":["subsystem","datasources","data-source","ExampleDS"], "name":"enabled", "value":"false", "json.pretty":"1"}'
This updates the value of the enabled
attribute for the ExampleDS
datasource to false
.
Example: Issue an Operation to the Server
$ curl --digest http://localhost:9990/management --header "Content-Type: application/json" -u USERNAME:PASSWORD -d '{"operation":"reload"}'
This reloads the server.
See Deploying Applications Using the HTTP API for information on how to deploy applications to JBoss EAP using the HTTP API.
3.5.2. Native API
The native API endpoint is the entry point for management clients that rely on the native protocol to integrate with the JBoss EAP management layer. The native API is used by the JBoss EAP management CLI but offers integration capabilities for other clients as well.
The following Java code shows an example of how to execute management operations from Java code using the native API.
You must add the required JBoss EAP libraries, found in the EAP_HOME/bin/client/jboss-cli-client.jar
file, to your class path.
Example: Using the Native API to Read Resources
// Create the management client ModelControllerClient client = ModelControllerClient.Factory.create("localhost", 9990); // Create the operation request ModelNode op = new ModelNode(); // Set the operation op.get("operation").set("read-resource"); // Set the address ModelNode address = op.get("address"); address.add("subsystem", "undertow"); address.add("server", "default-server"); address.add("http-listener", "default"); // Execute the operation and manipulate the result ModelNode returnVal = client.execute(op); System.out.println("Outcome: " + returnVal.get("outcome").toString()); System.out.println("Result: " + returnVal.get("result").toString()); // Close the client client.close();
3.6. Configuration Data
3.6.1. Standalone Server Configuration Files
The standalone configuration files are located in the EAP_HOME/standalone/configuration/
directory. A separate file exists for each of the five predefined profiles (default, ha, full, full-ha, load-balancer).
Configuration File | Purpose |
---|---|
| This standalone configuration file is the default configuration that is used when you start your standalone server. It contains all information about the server, including subsystems, networking, deployments, socket bindings, and other configurable details. It does not provide the subsystems necessary for messaging or high availability. |
|
This standalone configuration file includes all of the default subsystems and adds the |
|
This standalone configuration file includes all of the default subsystems and adds the |
| This standalone configuration file includes support for every possible subsystem, including those for messaging and high availability. |
| This standalone configuration file includes the minimum subsystems necessary to use the built-in mod_cluster front-end load balancer to load balance other JBoss EAP instances. |
By default, starting JBoss EAP as a standalone server uses the standalone.xml
file. To start JBoss EAP with a different configuration, use the --server-config
argument. For example,
$ EAP_HOME/bin/standalone.sh --server-config=standalone-full.xml
3.6.2. Managed Domain Configuration Files
The managed domain configuration files are located in the EAP_HOME/domain/configuration/
directory.
Configuration File | Purpose |
---|---|
| This is the main configuration file for a managed domain. Only the domain master reads this file. This file contains the configurations for all of the profiles (default, ha, full, full-ha, load-balancer). |
|
This file includes configuration details specific to a physical host in a managed domain, such as network interfaces, socket bindings, the name of the host, and other host-specific details. The |
| This file includes only the configuration details necessary to run a server as the master domain controller. |
| This file includes only the configuration details necessary to run a server as a managed domain host controller. |
By default, starting JBoss EAP in a managed domain uses the host.xml
file. To start JBoss EAP with a different configuration, use the --host-config
argument. For example,
$ EAP_HOME/bin/domain.sh --host-config=host-master.xml
3.6.3. Backing Up Configuration Data
In order to later restore the JBoss EAP server configuration, items in the following locations should be backed up:
EAP_HOME/standalone/configuration/
- Back up the entire directory to save user data, server configuration, and logging settings for standalone servers.
EAP_HOME/domain/configuration/
- Back up the entire directory to save user and profile data, domain and host configuration, and logging settings for managed domains.
EAP_HOME/modules/
- Back up any custom modules.
EAP_HOME/welcome-content/
- Back up any custom welcome content.
EAP_HOME/bin/
- Back up any custom scripts or startup configuration files.
3.6.4. Configuration File Snapshots
To assist in the maintenance and management of the server, JBoss EAP creates a timestamped version of the original configuration file at the time of startup. Any additional configuration changes made by management operations will result in the original file being automatically backed up, and a working copy of the instance being preserved for reference and rollback. Additionally, configuration snapshots can be taken, which are point-in-time copies of the current server configuration. These snapshots can be saved and loaded by an administrator.
The following examples use the standalone.xml
file, but the same process applies to the domain.xml
and host.xml
files.
Take a Snapshot
Use the management CLI to take a snapshot of the current configurations.
:take-snapshot
{
"outcome" => "success",
"result" => "EAP_HOME/standalone/configuration/standalone_xml_history/snapshot/20151022-133109702standalone.xml"
}
List Snapshots
Use the management CLI to list all snapshots that have been taken.
:list-snapshots
{
"outcome" => "success",
"result" => {
"directory" => "EAP_HOME/standalone/configuration/standalone_xml_history/snapshot",
"names" => [
"20151022-133109702standalone.xml",
"20151022-132715958standalone.xml"
]
}
}
Delete a Snapshot
Use the management CLI to delete a snapshot.
:delete-snapshot(name=20151022-133109702standalone.xml)
Start the Server with a Snapshot
The server can be started using a snapshot or an automatically-saved version of the configuration.
-
Navigate to the
EAP_HOME/standalone/configuration/standalone_xml_history
directory and identify the snapshot or saved configuration file to be loaded. Start the server and point to the selected configuration file. Pass in the file path relative to the configuration directory,
EAP_HOME/standalone/configuration/
.$ EAP_HOME/bin/standalone.sh --server-config=standalone_xml_history/snapshot/20151022-133109702standalone.xml
When running in a managed domain, use the --host-config
argument instead to specify the configuration file.
3.6.5. View Configuration Changes
JBoss EAP 7 provides the ability to track configuration changes made to the running system. This allows administrators to view a history of configuration changes made by other authorized users.
Changes are stored in memory and are not persisted between server restarts. This feature is not a replacement for management audit logging.
You can enable tracking and view configuration changes from either the management CLI or the management console.
Track and View Configuration Changes from the Management CLI
To enable tracking of configuration changes, use the following management CLI command. You can specify how many entries to store using the max-history
attribute.
/subsystem=core-management/service=configuration-changes:add(max-history=20)
In a managed domain, configuration changes are tracked at the host level for host and server-related modifications. Enabling configuration changes for a host controller enables it for all of its managed servers. You can track configuration changes per host using the following command.
/host=HOST_NAME/subsystem=core-management/service=configuration-changes:add(max-history=20)
To view the list of most recent configuration changes, use the following management CLI command.
/subsystem=core-management/service=configuration-changes:list-changes
In a managed domain, you can list the configuration changes for a host using the following command.
/host=HOST_NAME/subsystem=core-management/service=configuration-changes:list-changes
You can list the configuration changes that affect a particular server using the following command.
/host=HOST_NAME/server=SERVER_NAME/subsystem=core-management/service=configuration-changes:list-changes
This lists each configuration change made, with the date, origin, outcome, and operation details. For example, the below output from the list-changes
command shows configuration changes, with the most recent displayed first.
{ "outcome" => "success", "result" => [ { "operation-date" => "2016-02-12T18:37:00.354Z", "access-mechanism" => "NATIVE", "remote-address" => "127.0.0.1/127.0.0.1", "outcome" => "success", "operations" => [{ "address" => [], "operation" => "reload", "operation-headers" => { "caller-type" => "user", "access-mechanism" => "NATIVE" } }] }, { "operation-date" => "2016-02-12T18:34:16.859Z", "access-mechanism" => "NATIVE", "remote-address" => "127.0.0.1/127.0.0.1", "outcome" => "success", "operations" => [{ "address" => [ ("subsystem" => "datasources"), ("data-source" => "ExampleDS") ], "operation" => "write-attribute", "name" => "enabled", "value" => false, "operation-headers" => { "caller-type" => "user", "access-mechanism" => "NATIVE" } }] }, { "operation-date" => "2016-02-12T18:24:11.670Z", "access-mechanism" => "HTTP", "remote-address" => "127.0.0.1/127.0.0.1", "outcome" => "success", "operations" => [{ "operation" => "remove", "address" => [ ("subsystem" => "messaging-activemq"), ("server" => "default"), ("jms-queue" => "ExpiryQueue") ], "operation-headers" => {"access-mechanism" => "HTTP"} }] } ] }
This example lists the details of three operations performed that impacted the configuration:
- Reloading the server from the management CLI.
-
Disabling the
ExampleDS
datasource from the management CLI. -
Removing the
ExpiryQueue
queue from the management console.
Track and View Configuration Changes from the Management Console
To enable tracking of configuration changes from the management console, select to the Runtime tab, navigate to the server or host to track changes for and select Configuration Changes from the drop down. Click Enable Configuration Changes and provide a maximum history value.
The table on this page then lists each configuration change made, with the date, origin, outcome, and operation details.
3.6.6. Property Replacement
JBoss EAP allows you to use expressions to define replaceable properties in place of literal values in the configuration. Expressions use the format ${PARAMETER:DEFAULT_VALUE}
. If the specified parameter is set, then the parameter’s value will be used. Otherwise, the default value provided will be used.
The supported sources for resolving expressions are system properties, environment variables, and the vault. For deployments only, the source can be properties listed in a META-INF/jboss.properties
file in the deployment archive. For deployment types that support subdeployments, the resolution is scoped to all subdeployments if the properties file is in the outer deployment, for example the EAR. If the properties file is in the subdeployment, then the resolution is scoped just to that subdeployment.
The example below from the standalone.xml
configuration file sets the inet-address
for the public
interface to 127.0.0.1
unless the jboss.bind.address
parameter is set.
<interface name="public"> <inet-address value="${jboss.bind.address:127.0.0.1}"/> </interface>
The jboss.bind.address
parameter can be set when starting EAP as a standalone server with the following command:
$ EAP_HOME/bin/standalone.sh -Djboss.bind.address=IP_ADDRESS
Nested Expressions
Expressions can be nested, which allows for more advanced use of expressions in place of fixed values. The format of a nested expression is like that of a normal expression, but one expression is embedded in the other, for example:
${SYSTEM_VALUE_1${SYSTEM_VALUE_2}}
Nested expressions are evaluated recursively, so the inner expression is first evaluated, then the outer expression is evaluated. Expressions may also be recursive, where an expression resolves to another expression, which is then resolved. Nested expressions are permitted anywhere that expressions are permitted, with the exception of management CLI commands.
An example of where a nested expression might be used is if the password used in a datasource definition is masked. The configuration for the datasource might have the following line:
<password>${VAULT::ds_ExampleDS::password::1}</password>
The value of ds_ExampleDS
could be replaced with a system property (datasource_name
) using a nested expression. The configuration for the datasource could instead have the following line:
<password>${VAULT::${datasource_name}::password::1}</password>
JBoss EAP would first evaluate the expression ${datasource_name}
, then input this to the larger expression and evaluate the resulting expression. The advantage of this configuration is that the name of the datasource is abstracted from the fixed configuration.
Descriptor-Based Property Replacement
Application configuration, such as datasource connection parameters, typically varies between development, testing, and production environments. This variance is sometimes accommodated by build system scripts, as the Jakarta EE specification does not contain a method to externalize these configurations. With JBoss EAP, you can use descriptor-based property replacement to manage configuration externally.
Descriptor-based property replacement substitutes properties based on descriptors, allowing you to remove assumptions about the environment from the application and the build chain. Environment-specific configurations can be specified in deployment descriptors rather than annotations or build system scripts. You can provide configuration in files or as parameters at the command line.
There are several flags in the ee
subsystem that control whether property replacement is applied.
JBoss-specific descriptor replacement is controlled by the jboss-descriptor-property-replacement
flag and is enabled by default. When enabled, properties can be replaced in the following deployment descriptors:
-
jboss-ejb3.xml
-
jboss-app.xml
-
jboss-web.xml
-
*-jms.xml
-
*-ds.xml
The following management CLI command can be used to enable or disable property replacement in JBoss-specific descriptors:
/subsystem=ee:write-attribute(name="jboss-descriptor-property-replacement",value=VALUE)
Jakarta EE descriptor replacement controlled by the spec-descriptor-property-replacement
flag and is disabled by default. When enabled, properties can be replaced in the following deployment descriptors:
-
ejb-jar.xml
-
persistence.xml
-
application.xml
-
web.xml
The following management CLI command can be used to enable or disable property replacement in Jakarta EE descriptors:
/subsystem=ee:write-attribute(name="spec-descriptor-property-replacement",value=VALUE)
3.6.7. Using Git to Manage Configuration Data
As of JBoss EAP 7.3, you can use Git to manage and persist your server configuration data, properties files, and deployments. This not only allows you to manage the version history for these files, but it also allows you to share server and application configurations across multiple servers and nodes using one or more Git repositories. This feature only works for standalone servers that use the default configuration directory layout.
You can choose to use configuration data in a local Git repository or you can pull the data from a remote Git repository. The Git repository is configured in the jboss.server.base.dir
directory, which is the base directory for standalone server content. Once the jboss.server.base.dir
directory is configured to use Git, JBoss EAP automatically commits every update you make to the configuration using the management CLI or management console. Any changes made outside of the server by manually editing the configuration files are not committed or persisted; however, you can use the Git CLI to add and commit manual changes. You can also use the Git CLI to view the commit history, manage branching, and manage the content.
To use this feature, pass one or more of the following arguments on the command line when you start the server.
Argument | Description |
---|---|
--git-repo |
The location of the Git repository that is used to manage and persist server configuration data. This can be |
--git-branch | The branch or tag name in the Git repository to use. This argument should name an existing branch or tag name as it will not be created if it does not exist. If you use a tag name, you put the repository in a detached HEAD state, meaning future commits are not attached to any branches. Tag names are read-only and are normally used when you need to replicate a configuration across several nodes. |
--git-auth |
The URL to an Elytron configuration file that contains the credentials to be used when connecting to a remote Git repository. This argument is required if your remote Git repository requires authentication. Although Git supports SSH authentication, Elytron does not; therefore, it is currently only possible to specify credentials to authenticate with HTTP or HTTPS, not SSH. This argument is not used with a |
Using a Local Git Repository
To use a local Git repository, start the server with the --git-repo=local
argument. You can also specify an optional branch or tag name in the remote repository by adding the --git-branch=GIT_BRANCH_NAME
argument when you start the server. This argument should name an existing branch or tag name as it will not be created if it does not exist. If you use a tag name, you put the repository in a detached HEAD state, meaning future commits are not attached to any branches.
The following is an example of a command to start the server using the 1.0.x
branch of the local
repository.
$ EAP_HOME/bin/standalone.sh --git-repo=local --git-branch=1.0.x
If you start the server with the argument to use a local
Git repository, JBoss EAP checks whether the jboss.server.base.dir
directory is already configured for Git. If not, JBoss EAP creates and initializes the Git repository in the jboss.server.base.dir
directory using the existing configuration content. JBoss EAP checks out a branch name passed by the --git-branch
argument. If that argument is not passed, it checks out the master
branch. After initialization, you should see a .git/
directory and a .gitignore
file in the base directory for standalone server content.
Using a Remote Git Repository
To use a remote Git repository, start the server with the --git-repo=REMOTE_REPO
argument. The value of the argument can be a URL or a remote alias that you have manually added to the local Git configuration.
You can also specify an optional branch or tag name in the remote repository by adding the --git-branch=GIT_BRANCH_NAME
argument when you start the server. This argument should name an existing branch or tag name as it will not be created if it does not exist. If you use a tag name, you put the repository in a detached HEAD state, meaning future commits are not attached to any branches.
If your Git repository requires authentication, you must also add the --git-auth=AUTH_FILE_URL
argument when you start the server. This argument should be the URL to an Elytron configuration file containing the credentials required to connect to the Git repository. The following is an example of an Elytron configuration file that can be used for authentication.
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> <configuration> <authentication-client xmlns="urn:elytron:client:1.2"> <authentication-rules> <rule use-configuration="test-login"> </rule> </authentication-rules> <authentication-configurations> <configuration name="test-login"> <sasl-mechanism-selector selector="BASIC" /> <set-user-name name="eap-user" /> <credentials> <clear-password password="my_api_key" /> </credentials> <set-mechanism-realm name="testRealm" /> </configuration> </authentication-configurations> </authentication-client> </configuration>
Although Git supports SSH authentication, Elytron does not; therefore, it is currently only possible to specify credentials to authenticate with HTTP or HTTPS, not SSH.
The following is an example of a command to start the server with the full profile, using the 1.0.x
branch of the remote eap-configuration
repository, and passing the URL to an Elytron configuration file containing authentication credentials.
$ EAP_HOME/bin/standalone.sh --git-repo=https://github.com/MY_GIT_ID/eap-configuration.git --git-branch=1.0.x --git-auth=file:///home/USER_NAME/github-wildfly-config.xml --server-config=standalone-full.xml
If you start the server with the argument to use a remote Git repository, JBoss EAP checks whether the jboss.server.base.dir
directory is already configured for Git. If not, JBoss EAP deletes the existing configuration files in the jboss.server.base.dir
directory and replaces them with the remote Git configuration data. JBoss EAP checks out a branch name passed by the --git-branch
argument. If that argument is not passed, it checks out the master
branch. Once this process is complete, you should see a .git/
directory and a .gitignore
file in the base directory for standalone server content.
If you later start the server passing a different --git-repo
URL or --git-branch
name than was originally used, you will see the error message java.lang.RuntimeException: WFLYSRV0268: Failed to pull the repository GIT_REPO_NAME
when you attempt to start the server. This is because JBoss EAP attempts to pull configuration data from a different repository and branch than the one that is currently configured in the jboss.server.base.dir
directory and the Git pull results in conflicts.
Publishing Remote Configuration Data When Using Git
You can push your Git repository changes to the remote repository using the management CLI publish-configuration
operation. Because JBoss EAP pulls the configuration from the remote Git repository during the boot process when you start the server, this allows you to share the configuration data across multiple servers. You can only use this operation with a remote repository. It does not work for a local repository.
The following management CLI operation publishes the configuration data to the remote eap-configuration
repository.
:publish-configuration(location="=https://github.com/MY_GIT_ID/eap-configuration.git")
{"outcome" => "success"}
Using Snapshots with Git
In addition to using the Git commit history to track configuration changes, you can also take snapshots to preserve a configuration at a specific point in time. You can list the snapshots and delete them.
Taking Snapshots When Using Git
Snapshots are stored as tags in Git. You specify the snapshot tag name and commit message as arguments on the take-snapshot
operation.
The following management CLI operation takes a snapshot and names the tag "snapshot-01".
:take-snapshot(name="snapshot-01", comment="1st snapshot") { "outcome" => "success", "result" => "1st snapshot" }
Listing Snapshots When Using Git
You can list all of the snapshot tags using the list-snapshots
operation.
The following management CLI operation lists the snapshot tags.
:list-snapshots { "outcome" => "success", "result" => { "directory" => "", "names" => [ "snapshot : 1st snapshot", "refs/tags/snapshot-01", "snapshot2 : 2nd snapshot", "refs/tags/snapshot-02" ] } }
Deleting Snapshots When Using Git
You can delete a specific snapshot by passing the tag name on the delete-snapshot
operation.
The following management CLI operation deletes the snapshot with the tag name "snapshot-01".
:delete-snapshot(name="snapshot-01") {"outcome" => "success"}
3.7. File System Paths
JBoss EAP uses logical names for file system paths. Other areas of the configuration can then reference the paths using their logical name, avoiding the need to use absolute paths for each instance and allowing specific host configurations to resolve to universal logical names.
For example, the default logging
subsystem configuration declares jboss.server.log.dir
as the logical name for the server log directory.
Example: Relative Path Example for the Server Log Directory
<file relative-to="jboss.server.log.dir" path="server.log"/>
JBoss EAP automatically provides a number of standard paths without any need for the user to configure them in a configuration file.
Property | Description |
---|---|
java.home | The Java installation directory |
jboss.controller.temp.dir |
A common alias for standalone servers and managed domains. The directory to be used for temporary file storage. Equivalent to |
jboss.domain.base.dir | The base directory for domain content. |
jboss.domain.config.dir | The directory that contains the domain configuration. |
jboss.domain.data.dir | The directory that the domain will use for persistent data file storage. |
jboss.domain.log.dir | The directory that the domain will use for persistent log file storage. |
jboss.domain.temp.dir | The directory that the domain will use for temporary file storage. |
jboss.domain.deployment.dir | The directory that the domain will use for storing deployed content. |
jboss.domain.servers.dir | The directory that the domain will use for storing outputs of the managed domain instances. |
jboss.home.dir | The root directory of the JBoss EAP distribution. |
jboss.server.base.dir | The base directory for standalone server content. |
jboss.server.config.dir | The directory that contains the standalone server configuration. |
jboss.server.data.dir | The directory the standalone server will use for persistent data file storage. |
jboss.server.log.dir | The directory the standalone server will use for log file storage. |
jboss.server.temp.dir | The directory the standalone server will use for temporary file storage. |
jboss.server.deploy.dir | The directory that the standalone server will use for storing deployed content. |
user.dir | The user’s current working directory. |
user.home | The user home directory. |
You can override a standard path or add a custom path.
3.7.1. View File System Paths
Use the following management CLI command to list the file system paths:
ls /path
In a managed domain, you can list the file system paths for a specific server using the following management CLI command:
ls /host=HOST_NAME/server=SERVER_NAME/path
Use the following management CLI command to read the value of a file system path:
/path=PATH_NAME:read-resource
In a managed domain, you can read the value of a file system path for a specific server using the following management CLI command:
/host=HOST_NAME/server=SERVER_NAME/path=PATH_NAME:read-resource
3.7.2. Override a Standard Path
You can override the default locations of the standard paths that begin with jboss.server.*
or jboss.domain.*
. This can be done in one of two ways:
Pass in the command-line argument when you start the server. For example:
$ EAP_HOME/bin/standalone.sh -Djboss.server.log.dir=/var/log
Modify the
JAVA_OPTS
variable in the server configuration file, eitherstandalone.conf
ordomain.conf
, to contain the new location. For example:JAVA_OPTS="$JAVA_OPTS -Djboss.server.log.dir=/var/log"
Overriding a Managed Domain’s Standard Paths
In this example, the objective is to store domain files in the /opt/jboss_eap/domain_data
directory, and give each top-level directory a custom name. The default directory grouping, by-server
, is used.
-
Log files are to be stored in the
all_logs
subdirectory -
Data files are to be stored in the
all_data
subdirectory -
Temporary files are to be stored in the
all_temp
subdirectory -
Servers' files are to be stored in the
all_servers
subdirectory
To achieve this configuration, you would override several system properties when starting JBoss EAP.
$ EAP_HOME/bin/domain.sh -Djboss.domain.temp.dir=/opt/jboss_eap/domain_data/all_temp -Djboss.domain.log.dir=/opt/jboss_eap/domain_data/all_logs -Djboss.domain.data.dir=/opt/jboss_eap/domain_data/all_data -Djboss.domain.servers.dir=/opt/jboss_eap/domain_data/all_servers
The resulting path structure will be as follows:
/opt/jboss_eap/domain_data/ ├── all_data ├── all_logs ├── all_servers │ ├── server-one │ │ ├── data │ │ ├── log │ │ └── tmp │ └── server-two │ ├── data │ ├── log │ └── tmp └── all_temp
3.7.3. Add a Custom Path
You can add a custom file system path using the management CLI or the management console.
From the management CLI, you can add a new path using the following management CLI command.
/path=my.custom.path:add(path=/my/custom/path)
- From the management console, you can configure file system paths by navigating to the Configuration tab, selecting Paths, and clicking View. From there, you can add, modify, and remove paths.
You can then use this custom path in your configuration. For example, the below log handler uses a custom path for its relative path.
<subsystem xmlns="urn:jboss:domain:logging:6.0"> ... <periodic-rotating-file-handler name="FILE" autoflush="true"> <formatter> <named-formatter name="PATTERN"/> </formatter> <file relative-to="my.custom.path" path="server.log"/> <suffix value=".yyyy-MM-dd"/> <append value="true"/> </periodic-rotating-file-handler> ... </subsystem>
3.8. Directory Grouping
In a managed domain, each server’s files are stored in the EAP_HOME/domain
directory. You can specify how to organize the subdirectories for servers using the host controller’s directory-grouping
attribute. Directories can be grouped either by server or by type. By default, directories are grouped by server.
Directory Grouping by Server
By default, directories are grouped by server. If your administration is server-centric, this configuration is recommended. For example, it allows backups and log file handling to be configured per server instance.
If JBoss EAP is installed using the ZIP installation method, the default directory structure (grouped by server) will be as follows.
EAP_HOME/domain
└─ servers
├── server-one
│ ├── data
│ ├── tmp
│ └── log
└── server-two
├── data
├── tmp
└── log
To group domain directories by server, enter the following management CLI command:
/host=HOST_NAME:write-attribute(name=directory-grouping,value=by-server)
This will update the host controller’s host.xml
configuration file:
<servers directory-grouping="by-server"> <server name="server-one" group="main-server-group"/> <server name="server-two" group="main-server-group" auto-start="true"> <socket-bindings port-offset="150"/> </server> </servers>
Directory Grouping by Type
Instead of grouping directories by server, you can instead group by file type. If your administration is file type-centric, this configuration is recommended. For example, this would allow you to easily back up only data
files.
If JBoss EAP is installed using the ZIP installation method and the domain’s files are grouped by type, the directory structure will be as follows.
EAP_HOME/domain
├── data
│ └── servers
│ ├── server-one
│ └── server-two
├── log
│ └── servers
│ ├── server-one
│ └── server-two
└── tmp
└── servers
├── server-one
└── server-two
To group domain directories by type, enter the following management CLI command:
/host=HOST_NAME:write-attribute(name=directory-grouping,value=by-type)
This will update the host controller’s host.xml
configuration file:
<servers directory-grouping="by-type"> <server name="server-one" group="main-server-group"/> <server name="server-two" group="main-server-group" auto-start="true"> <socket-bindings port-offset="150"/> </server> </servers>
3.9. System Properties
You can use Java system properties to configure many JBoss EAP options, as well as set any name-value pair for use within the application server.
System properties can be used to override default values in the JBoss EAP configuration. For example, the following XML configuration for the public interface bind address shows that it can be set by the jboss.bind.address
system property, but if the system property is not provided, it will default to 127.0.0.1
.
<inet-address value="${jboss.bind.address:127.0.0.1}"/>
There are a few ways you can set system properties in JBoss EAP, including:
If you use a JBoss EAP managed domain, system properties can be applied to either the whole domain, a specific server group, a specific host and all its server instances, or just to one specific server instance. As with most other JBoss EAP domain settings, a system property set at a more specific level will override a more abstract one. See the Domain Management chapter for more information.
Passing a System Property to the Startup Script
You can pass a system property to the JBoss EAP startup script by using the -D
argument. For example:
$ EAP_HOME/bin/standalone.sh -Djboss.bind.address=192.168.1.2
This method of setting the system property is especially useful for JBoss EAP options that need to be set before JBoss EAP starts.
Setting a System Property Using the Management CLI
Using the management CLI, you can set a system property using the following syntax:
/system-property=PROPERTY_NAME:add(value=PROPERTY_VALUE)
For example:
/system-property=jboss.bind.address:add(value=192.168.1.2)
When setting system properties using the management CLI, some JBoss EAP options, including the above example of jboss.bind.address
, will only take effect after the next server restart.
For a managed domain, the above example configures a system property for the entire domain, but you can also set or override system properties at more specific levels of the domain configuration.
Setting a System Property Using the Management Console
- For a standalone JBoss EAP server, you can configure system properties in the management console under the Configuration tab. Select System Properties, and click the View button.
For a managed domain:
- Domain-level system properties can be set in the Configuration tab. Select System Properties, and click the View button.
- Server group and server-level system properties can be set in the Runtime tab. Select the server group or server you want to configure, click the View button next to the server group or server name, and select the System Properties tab.
- Host-level system properties can be set in the Runtime tab. Select the host you want to configure, then using the drop-down menu next to the host name, select Properties.
Setting a System Property Using JAVA_OPTS
System properties can also be configured using the JAVA_OPTS
environment variable. There are many ways to modify JAVA_OPTS
, but JBoss EAP provides a configuration file for setting JAVA_OPTS
that is used by the JBoss EAP process.
For a standalone server, this file is EAP_HOME/bin/standalone.conf
, or, for a managed domain, it is EAP_HOME/bin/domain.conf
. For Microsoft Windows systems these files have a .bat
extension.
For an RPM installation, the RPM service configuration file is the preferred location to modify JAVA_OPTS
to configure system properties. For more information, see Configure RPM Service Properties.
Add your system property definition to JAVA_OPTS
in the relevant configuration file. The examples below demonstrate setting the bind address on a Red Hat Enterprise Linux system.
For
standalone.conf
, add yourJAVA_OPTS
system property definition at the end of the file. For example:... # Set the bind address JAVA_OPTS="$JAVA_OPTS -Djboss.bind.address=192.168.1.2"
For
domain.conf
,JAVA_OPTS
must be set before the process controllerJAVA_OPTS
setting. For example:... # Set the bind address JAVA_OPTS="$JAVA_OPTS -Djboss.bind.address=192.168.1.2" # The ProcessController process uses its own set of java options if [ "x$PROCESS_CONTROLLER_JAVA_OPTS" = "x" ]; then ...
3.10. Management Audit Logging
You can enable audit logging for the management interfaces, which will log all operations performed using the management console, management CLI, or custom application that uses the Management API. Audit log entries are stored in JSON format. By default, audit logging is disabled.
You can configure audit logging to output to a file or to a syslog server.
Login and logout events cannot be audited as there is no authenticated session in JBoss EAP. Instead, audit messages are logged when an operation is received from the user.
Standalone Server Audit Logging
Though disabled by default, the default audit logging configuration writes to a file.
<audit-log> <formatters> <json-formatter name="json-formatter"/> </formatters> <handlers> <file-handler name="file" formatter="json-formatter" path="audit-log.log" relative-to="jboss.server.data.dir"/> </handlers> <logger log-boot="true" log-read-only="false" enabled="false"> <handlers> <handler name="file"/> </handlers> </logger> </audit-log>
This configuration can be read using the following management CLI command.
/core-service=management/access=audit:read-resource(recursive=true)
See Enable Audit Logging to enable audit logging for a standalone server.
Managed Domain Audit Logging
Though disabled by default, the default audit logging configuration writes a file for each host and for each server.
<audit-log> <formatters> <json-formatter name="json-formatter"/> </formatters> <handlers> <file-handler name="host-file" formatter="json-formatter" relative-to="jboss.domain.data.dir" path="audit-log.log"/> <file-handler name="server-file" formatter="json-formatter" relative-to="jboss.server.data.dir" path="audit-log.log"/> </handlers> <logger log-boot="true" log-read-only="false" enabled="false"> <handlers> <handler name="host-file"/> </handlers> </logger> <server-logger log-boot="true" log-read-only="false" enabled="false"> <handlers> <handler name="server-file"/> </handlers> </server-logger> </audit-log>
This configuration can be read using the following management CLI command.
/host=HOST_NAME/core-service=management/access=audit:read-resource(recursive=true)
See Enable Audit Logging to enable audit logging for a managed domain.
3.10.1. Enable Management Audit Logging
JBoss EAP is preconfigured with file handlers for audit logging, though audit logging is disabled by default. The management CLI command to enable audit logging depends on whether you are running as a standalone server or in a managed domain. See Management Audit Logging Attributes for file handler attributes.
The following instructions enable NATIVE
and HTTP
audit logging. To configure JMX audit logging, see Enable JMX Management Audit Logging.
To set up syslog audit logging, see Send Management Audit Logging to a Syslog Server.
Enable Standalone Server Audit Logging
Audit logging can be enabled using the following command.
/core-service=management/access=audit/logger=audit-log:write-attribute(name=enabled,value=true)
By default, this will write the audit log to EAP_HOME/standalone/data/audit-log.log
.
Enable Managed Domain Audit Logging
The default audit logging configuration for a managed domain is preconfigured to write an audit log for each host and each server.
Audit logging for each host can be enabled using the following command.
/host=HOST_NAME/core-service=management/access=audit/logger=audit-log:write-attribute(name=enabled,value=true)
By default, this will write the audit logs to EAP_HOME/domain/data/audit-log.log
.
Audit logging for each server can be enabled using the following command.
/host=HOST_NAME/core-service=management/access=audit/server-logger=audit-log:write-attribute(name=enabled,value=true)
By default, this will write the audit logs to EAP_HOME/domain/servers/SERVER_NAME/data/audit-log.log
.
3.10.2. Enable JMX Management Audit Logging
JBoss EAP is preconfigured with file handlers for JMX audit logging, though these logs are disabled by default. The management CLI command to enable audit logging depends on whether you are running as a standalone server or a managed domain.
To configure NATIVE
or HTTP
audit logging, see Enable Management Audit Logging.
Enable Standalone Server JMX Audit Logging
JMX audit logging can be enabled for a standalone server using the following commands.
/subsystem=jmx/configuration=audit-log:add() /subsystem=jmx/configuration=audit-log/handler=file:add()
This enables JMX audit logging, and then uses the defined file
handler to write these logs to EAP_HOME/standalone/data/audit-log.log
.
Enable Managed Domain JMX Audit Logging
JMX audit logging can be enabled for each host and profile in a managed domain.
Enable JMX Audit Logging for a Host
Enable audit logging in the host’s
jmx
subsystem./host=HOST_NAME/subsystem=jmx/configuration=audit-log:add()
Once audit logging for the
jmx
subsystem has been enabled, a handler can be defined for the host with the following command./host=HOST_NAME/subsystem=jmx/configuration=audit-log/handler=host-file:add()
By default, this will write the JMX audit logs to
EAP_HOME/domain/data/audit-log.log
.
Enable JMX Audit Logging for a Profile
Enable audit logging in the profile’s
jmx
subsystem./profile=PROFILE_NAME/subsystem=jmx/configuration=audit-log:add()
Once audit logging for the
jmx
subsystem has been enabled, a handler can be defined for the profile with the following command./profile=PROFILE_NAME/subsystem=jmx/configuration=audit-log/handler=server-file:add()
By default, this will write the JMX audit logs to
EAP_HOME/domain/servers/SERVER_NAME/data/audit-log.log
.
3.10.3. Send Management Audit Logging to a Syslog Server
A syslog handler specifies the parameters by which audit log entries are sent to a syslog server, specifically the syslog server’s host name and the port on which the syslog server is listening. Sending audit logging to a syslog server provides more security options than logging to a local file or local syslog server. Multiple syslog handlers can be defined and be active at the same time.
By default, audit logging is preconfigured to output to a file when enabled. Use the following steps to set up and enable audit logging to a syslog server. See Management Audit Logging Attributes for syslog handler attributes.
Add a syslog handler.
Create the syslog handler, specifying the host and port of the syslog server. In a managed domain, you must precede the
/core-service
commands with/host=HOST_NAME
.batch /core-service=management/access=audit/syslog-handler=SYSLOG_HANDLER_NAME:add(formatter=json-formatter) /core-service=management/access=audit/syslog-handler=SYSLOG_HANDLER_NAME/protocol=udp:add(host=HOST_NAME,port=PORT) run-batch
NoteThe parameters to pass in differ depending on the protocol specified.
To configure the handler to use TLS to communicate securely with the syslog server, you must also configure the authentication, for example:
/core-service=management/access=audit/syslog-handler=SYSLOG_HANDLER_NAME/protocol=tls/authentication=truststore:add(keystore-path=PATH_TO_TRUSTSTORE,keystore-password=TRUSTSTORE_PASSWORD)
Add a reference to the syslog handler.
In a managed domain, you must precede this command with
/host=HOST_NAME
./core-service=management/access=audit/logger=audit-log/handler=SYSLOG_HANDLER_NAME:add
Enable audit logging.
See Enable Management Audit Logging to enable audit logging.
Enabling audit logging to a syslog server in JBoss EAP will not work unless logging is enabled in the operating system as well.
For more information on rsyslog
configurations on Red Hat Enterprise Linux, see the Basic Configuration of Rsyslog section of the System Administrator’s Guide for Red Hat Enterprise Linux at https://access.redhat.com/documentation/en/red-hat-enterprise-linux/.
3.10.4. Read Audit Log Entries
Audit log entries output to files are best viewed with a text viewer, while those output to a syslog server are best viewed using a syslog viewer application.
Using a text editor for viewing log files is not recommended as some may prevent further log entries being written to the log file.
The audit log entries are stored in JSON format. Each log entry begins with an optional timestamp, followed by the fields in the below table.
Field Name | Description |
---|---|
access | This can have one of the following values:
|
booting |
Has the value |
domainUUID | An ID to link together all operations as they are propagated from the domain controller to its servers, slave host controllers, and slave host controller servers. |
ops | The operations being executed. This is a list of the operations serialized to JSON. At boot, this is the operations resulting from parsing the XML. Once booted, the list typically contains a single entry. |
r/o |
Has the value |
remote-address | The address of the client executing this operation. |
success |
Has the value |
type |
This can have the value |
user |
The username of the authenticated user. If the operation occurred using the management CLI on the same machine as the running server, the special user |
version | The version number of the JBoss EAP instance. |
3.11. Server Lifecycle Event Notifications
You can set up notifications for server lifecycle events using the JBoss EAP core-management
subsystem or JMX. A change in server runtime configuration state or server running state will trigger a notification.
The server runtime configuration states for JBoss EAP are STARTING
, RUNNING
, RELOAD_REQUIRED
, RESTART_REQUIRED
, STOPPING
, and STOPPED
.
The server running states for JBoss EAP are STARTING
, NORMAL
, ADMIN_ONLY
, PRE_SUSPEND
, SUSPENDING
, SUSPENDED
, STOPPING
, and STOPPED
.
3.11.1. Monitor Server Lifecycle Events Using the Core Management Subsystem
You can register a listener to the JBoss EAP core-management
subsystem to monitor for server lifecycle events. The following steps show how to create and register an example listener that logs the events to a file.
Create the listener.
Create an implementation of
org.wildfly.extension.core.management.client.ProcessStateListener
, like the example below.Example: Listener Class
package org.simple.lifecycle.events.listener; import java.io.File; import java.io.FileWriter; import java.io.IOException; import org.wildfly.extension.core.management.client.ProcessStateListener; import org.wildfly.extension.core.management.client.ProcessStateListenerInitParameters; import org.wildfly.extension.core.management.client.RunningStateChangeEvent; import org.wildfly.extension.core.management.client.RuntimeConfigurationStateChangeEvent; public class SimpleListener implements ProcessStateListener { private File file; private FileWriter fileWriter; private ProcessStateListenerInitParameters parameters; public void init(ProcessStateListenerInitParameters parameters) { this.parameters = parameters; this.file = new File(parameters.getInitProperties().get("file")); try { fileWriter = new FileWriter(file, true); } catch (IOException e) { e.printStackTrace(); } } public void cleanup() { try { fileWriter.close(); } catch (IOException e) { e.printStackTrace(); } finally { fileWriter = null; } } public void runtimeConfigurationStateChanged(RuntimeConfigurationStateChangeEvent evt) { try { fileWriter.write(String.format("Runtime configuration state change for %s: %s to %s\n", parameters.getProcessType(), evt.getOldState(), evt.getNewState())); fileWriter.flush(); } catch (IOException e) { e.printStackTrace(); } } public void runningStateChanged(RunningStateChangeEvent evt) { try { fileWriter.write(String.format("Running state change for %s: %s to %s\n", parameters.getProcessType(), evt.getOldState(), evt.getNewState())); fileWriter.flush(); } catch (IOException e) { e.printStackTrace(); } } }
NoteKeep the following in mind when implementing the listener.
- In the event of a server reload, listeners stop listening while the server attempts to stop, and the listeners are reloaded when the server starts. Because of this, implementations must ensure that they can be loaded, initialized, and removed properly several times inside the same JVM.
- Notifications to the listeners are blocking to allow reactions to server state changes. Implementations must ensure that they do not block or deadlock.
- Each listener instance is executed in its own thread and the order is not guaranteed.
Compile the class and package it into a JAR.
Note that to compile, you need to depend on the
org.wildfly.core:wildfly-core-management-client
Maven module.Add the JAR as a JBoss EAP module.
Use the following management CLI command and provide the module name and path to the JAR.
module add --name=org.simple.lifecycle.events.listener --dependencies=org.wildfly.extension.core-management-client --resources=/path/to/simple-listener-0.0.1-SNAPSHOT.jar
ImportantUsing the
module
management CLI command to add and remove modules is provided as Technology Preview only. This command is not appropriate for use in a managed domain or when connecting to the management CLI remotely. Modules should be added and removed manually in a production environment.Technology Preview features are not supported with Red Hat production service level agreements (SLAs), might not be functionally complete, and Red Hat does not recommend to use them for production. These features provide early access to upcoming product features, enabling customers to test functionality and provide feedback during the development process.
See Technology Preview Features Support Scope on the Red Hat Customer Portal for information about the support scope for Technology Preview features.
Register the listener.
Add the listener to the
core-management
subsystem using the following management CLI command. Specify the class, module, and file location to log the server lifecycle events./subsystem=core-management/process-state-listener=my-simple-listener:add(class=org.simple.lifecycle.events.listener.SimpleListener, module=org.simple.lifecycle.events.listener,properties={file=/path/to/my-listener-output.txt})
Now, server lifecycle events will be logged to the my-listener-output.txt
file based on the SimpleListener
class above. For example, issuing a :suspend
command in the management CLI will output the following to the my-listener-output.txt
file.
Running state change for STANDALONE_SERVER: normal to suspending Running state change for STANDALONE_SERVER: suspending to suspended
This shows that the running state changed from normal
to suspending
, and then from suspending
to suspended
.
3.11.2. Monitor Server Lifecycle Events Using JMX Notifications
You can register a JMX notification listener to monitor for server lifecycle events. The following steps show how to create and add an example listener that logs events to a file.
Create the listener.
Create an implementation of
javax.management.NotificationListener
, like the example below.Example: Listener Class
import java.io.BufferedWriter; import java.io.IOException; import java.nio.charset.StandardCharsets; import java.nio.file.Files; import java.nio.file.Path; import java.nio.file.Paths; import java.nio.file.StandardOpenOption; import javax.management.AttributeChangeNotification; import javax.management.Notification; import javax.management.NotificationListener; import org.jboss.logging.Logger; public class StateNotificationListener implements NotificationListener { public static final String RUNTIME_CONFIGURATION_FILENAME = "runtime-configuration-notifications.txt"; public static final String RUNNING_FILENAME = "running-notifications.txt"; private final Path targetFile; public StateNotificationListener() { this.targetFile = Paths.get("notifications/data").toAbsolutePath(); init(targetFile); } protected Path getRuntimeConfigurationTargetFile() { return this.targetFile.resolve(RUNTIME_CONFIGURATION_FILENAME); } protected Path getRunningConfigurationTargetFile() { return this.targetFile.resolve(RUNNING_FILENAME); } protected final void init(Path targetFile) { try { Files.createDirectories(targetFile); if (!Files.exists(targetFile.resolve(RUNTIME_CONFIGURATION_FILENAME))) { Files.createFile(targetFile.resolve(RUNTIME_CONFIGURATION_FILENAME)); } if (!Files.exists(targetFile.resolve(RUNNING_FILENAME))) { Files.createFile(targetFile.resolve(RUNNING_FILENAME)); } } catch (IOException ex) { Logger.getLogger(StateNotificationListener.class).error("Problem handling JMX Notification", ex); } } @Override public void handleNotification(Notification notification, Object handback) { AttributeChangeNotification attributeChangeNotification = (AttributeChangeNotification) notification; if ("RuntimeConfigurationState".equals(attributeChangeNotification.getAttributeName())) { writeNotification(attributeChangeNotification, getRuntimeConfigurationTargetFile()); } else { writeNotification(attributeChangeNotification, getRunningConfigurationTargetFile()); } } private void writeNotification(AttributeChangeNotification notification, Path path) { try (BufferedWriter in = Files.newBufferedWriter(path, StandardCharsets.UTF_8, StandardOpenOption.APPEND)) { in.write(String.format("%s %s %s %s", notification.getType(), notification.getSequenceNumber(), notification.getSource().toString(), notification.getMessage())); in.newLine(); in.flush(); } catch (IOException ex) { Logger.getLogger(StateNotificationListener.class).error("Problem handling JMX Notification", ex); } } }
Register the notification listener.
Add the notification listener to the
MBeanServer
.Example: Add a Notification Listener
MBeanServer server = ManagementFactory.getPlatformMBeanServer(); server.addNotificationListener(ObjectName.getInstance("jboss.root:type=state"), new StateNotificationListener(), null, null);
- Package and deploy to JBoss EAP.
Server lifecycle events are now logged to a file based on the StateNotificationListener
class above. For example, issuing a :suspend
command in the management CLI outputs the following to the running-notifications.txt
file.
jmx.attribute.change 5 jboss.root:type=state The attribute 'RunningState' has changed from 'normal' to 'suspending' jmx.attribute.change 6 jboss.root:type=state The attribute 'RunningState' has changed from 'suspending' to 'suspended'
This shows that the running state changed from normal
to suspending
, and then from suspending
to suspended
.
Chapter 4. Network and Port Configuration
4.1. Interfaces
JBoss EAP references named interfaces throughout the configuration. This allows the configuration to reference individual interface declarations with logical names, rather than requiring the full details of the interface at each use.
This also allows for easier configuration in a managed domain, where network interface details can vary across multiple machines. Each server instance can correspond to a logical name group.
The standalone.xml
, domain.xml
, and host.xml
files all include interface declarations. There are several preconfigured interface names, depending on which default configuration is used. The management
interface can be used for all components and services that require the management layer, including the HTTP management endpoint. The public
interface can be used for all application-related network communications. The unsecure
interface is used for IIOP sockets in the standard configuration. The private
interface is used for JGroups sockets in the standard configuration.
4.1.1. Default Interface Configurations
<interfaces> <interface name="management"> <inet-address value="${jboss.bind.address.management:127.0.0.1}"/> </interface> <interface name="public"> <inet-address value="${jboss.bind.address:127.0.0.1}"/> </interface> <interface name="private"> <inet-address value="${jboss.bind.address.private:127.0.0.1}"/> </interface> <interface name="unsecure"> <inet-address value="${jboss.bind.address.unsecure:127.0.0.1}"/> </interface> </interfaces>
By default, JBoss EAP binds these interfaces to 127.0.0.1
, but these values can be overridden at runtime by setting the appropriate property. For example, the inet-address
of the public
interface can be set when starting JBoss EAP as a standalone server with the following command.
$ EAP_HOME/bin/standalone.sh -Djboss.bind.address=IP_ADDRESS
Alternatively, you can use the -b
switch on the server start command line. For more information about server start options, see Server Runtime Arguments.
If you modify the default network interfaces or ports that JBoss EAP uses, you must also remember to change any scripts that use the modified interfaces or ports. These include JBoss EAP service scripts, as well as remembering to specify the correct interface and port when accessing the management console or management CLI.
4.1.2. Configuring Interfaces
Network interfaces are declared by specifying a logical name and selection criteria for the physical interface. The selection criteria can reference a wildcard address or specify a set of one or more characteristics that an interface or address must have in order to be a valid match. For a listing of all available interface selection criteria, see the Interface Attributes section.
Interfaces can be configured using the management console or the management CLI. Below are several examples of adding and updating interfaces. The management CLI command is shown first, followed by the corresponding configuration XML.
Add an Interface with a NIC Value
Add a new interface with a NIC value of eth0
.
/interface=external:add(nic=eth0)
<interface name="external"> <nic name="eth0"/> </interface>
Add an Interface with Several Conditional Values
Add a new interface that matches any interface/address on the correct subnet if it is up, supports multicast, and is not point-to-point.
/interface=default:add(subnet-match=192.168.0.0/16,up=true,multicast=true,not={point-to-point=true})
<interface name="default"> <subnet-match value="192.168.0.0/16"/> <up/> <multicast/> <not> <point-to-point/> </not> </interface>
Update an Interface Attribute
Update the public
interface’s default inet-address
value, keeping the jboss.bind.address
property to allow for this value to be set at runtime.
/interface=public:write-attribute(name=inet-address,value="${jboss.bind.address:192.168.0.0}")
<interface name="public"> <inet-address value="${jboss.bind.address:192.168.0.0}"/> </interface>
Add an Interface to a Server in a Managed Domain
/host=HOST_NAME/server-config=SERVER_NAME/interface=INTERFACE_NAME:add(inet-address=127.0.0.1)
<servers> <server name="SERVER_NAME" group="main-server-group"> <interfaces> <interface name="INTERFACE_NAME"> <inet-address value="127.0.0.1"/> </interface> </interfaces> </server> </servers>
4.2. Socket Bindings
Socket bindings and socket binding groups allow you to define network ports and their relationship to the networking interfaces required for your JBoss EAP configuration. A socket binding is a named configuration for a socket. A socket binding group is a collection of socket binding declarations that are grouped under a logical name.
This allows other sections of the configuration to reference socket bindings by their logical name, rather than requiring the full details of the socket configuration at each use.
The declarations for these named configurations can be found in the standalone.xml
and domain.xml
configuration files. A standalone server contains only one socket binding group, while a managed domain can contain multiple groups. You can create a socket binding group for each server group in the managed domain, or share a socket binding group between multiple server groups.
The ports JBoss EAP uses by default depend on which socket binding groups are used and the requirements of your individual deployments.
There are three types of socket bindings that can be defined in a socket binding group in the JBoss EAP configuration:
- Inbound Socket Bindings
The
socket-binding
element is used to configure inbound socket bindings for the JBoss EAP server. The default JBoss EAP configurations provide several preconfiguredsocket-binding
elements, for example, for HTTP and HTTPS traffic. Another example can be found in the Broadcast Groups section of Configuring Messaging for JBoss EAP.Attributes for this element can be found in the Inbound Socket Binding Attributes table.
- Remote Outbound Socket Bindings
The
remote-destination-outbound-socket-binding
element is used to configure outbound socket bindings for destinations that are remote to the JBoss EAP server. The default JBoss EAP configurations provide an example remote destination socket binding that can be used for a mail server. Another example can be found in the Using the Integrated Artemis Resource Adapter for Remote Connections section of Configuring Messaging for JBoss EAP.Attributes for this element can be found in the Remote Outbound Socket Binding Attributes table.
- Local Outbound Socket Bindings
The
local-destination-outbound-socket-binding
element is used to configure outbound socket bindings for destinations that are local to the JBoss EAP server. This type of socket binding is not expected to be commonly used.Attributes for this element can be found in the Local Outbound Socket Binding Attributes table.
4.2.1. Management Ports
Management ports were consolidated in JBoss EAP 7. By default, JBoss EAP 7 uses port 9990
for both native management, used by the management CLI, and HTTP management, used by the web-based management console. Port 9999
, which was used as the native management port in JBoss EAP 6, is no longer used but can still be enabled if desired.
If HTTPS is enabled for the management console, then port 9993
is used by default.
4.2.2. Default Socket Bindings
JBoss EAP ships with a socket binding group for each of the five predefined profiles (default, ha, full, full-ha, load-balancer).
For detailed information about the default socket bindings, such as default ports and descriptions, see the Default Socket Bindings section.
If you modify the default network interfaces or ports that JBoss EAP uses, you must also remember to change any scripts that use the modified interfaces or ports. These include JBoss EAP service scripts, as well as remembering to specify the correct interface and port when accessing the management console or management CLI.
Standalone Server
When running as a standalone server, only one socket binding group is defined per configuration file. Each standalone configuration file (standalone.xml
, standalone-ha.xml
, standalone-full.xml
, standalone-full-ha.xml
, standalone-load-balancer.xml
) defines socket bindings for the technologies used by its corresponding profile.
For example, the default standalone configuration file (standalone.xml
) specifies the below socket bindings.
<socket-binding-group name="standard-sockets" default-interface="public" port-offset="${jboss.socket.binding.port-offset:0}"> <socket-binding name="management-http" interface="management" port="${jboss.management.http.port:9990}"/> <socket-binding name="management-https" interface="management" port="${jboss.management.https.port:9993}"/> <socket-binding name="ajp" port="${jboss.ajp.port:8009}"/> <socket-binding name="http" port="${jboss.http.port:8080}"/> <socket-binding name="https" port="${jboss.https.port:8443}"/> <socket-binding name="txn-recovery-environment" port="4712"/> <socket-binding name="txn-status-manager" port="4713"/> <outbound-socket-binding name="mail-smtp"> <remote-destination host="localhost" port="25"/> </outbound-socket-binding> </socket-binding-group>
Managed Domain
When running in a managed domain, all socket binding groups are defined in the domain.xml
file. There are five predefined socket binding groups:
-
standard-sockets
-
ha-sockets
-
full-sockets
-
full-ha-sockets
-
load-balancer-sockets
Each socket binding group specifies socket bindings for the technologies used by its corresponding profile. For example, the full-ha-sockets
socket binding group defines several jgroups
socket bindings, which are used by the full-ha profile for high availability.
<socket-binding-groups> <socket-binding-group name="standard-sockets" default-interface="public"> <!-- Needed for server groups using the 'default' profile --> <socket-binding name="ajp" port="${jboss.ajp.port:8009}"/> <socket-binding name="http" port="${jboss.http.port:8080}"/> <socket-binding name="https" port="${jboss.https.port:8443}"/> <socket-binding name="txn-recovery-environment" port="4712"/> <socket-binding name="txn-status-manager" port="4713"/> <outbound-socket-binding name="mail-smtp"> <remote-destination host="localhost" port="25"/> </outbound-socket-binding> </socket-binding-group> <socket-binding-group name="ha-sockets" default-interface="public"> <!-- Needed for server groups using the 'ha' profile --> ... </socket-binding-group> <socket-binding-group name="full-sockets" default-interface="public"> <!-- Needed for server groups using the 'full' profile --> ... </socket-binding-group> <socket-binding-group name="full-ha-sockets" default-interface="public"> <!-- Needed for server groups using the 'full-ha' profile --> <socket-binding name="ajp" port="${jboss.ajp.port:8009}"/> <socket-binding name="http" port="${jboss.http.port:8080}"/> <socket-binding name="https" port="${jboss.https.port:8443}"/> <socket-binding name="iiop" interface="unsecure" port="3528"/> <socket-binding name="iiop-ssl" interface="unsecure" port="3529"/> <socket-binding name="jgroups-mping" interface="private" port="0" multicast-address="${jboss.default.multicast.address:230.0.0.4}" multicast-port="45700"/> <socket-binding name="jgroups-tcp" interface="private" port="7600"/> <socket-binding name="jgroups-udp" interface="private" port="55200" multicast-address="${jboss.default.multicast.address:230.0.0.4}" multicast-port="45688"/> <socket-binding name="modcluster" port="0" multicast-address="224.0.1.105" multicast-port="23364"/> <socket-binding name="txn-recovery-environment" port="4712"/> <socket-binding name="txn-status-manager" port="4713"/> <outbound-socket-binding name="mail-smtp"> <remote-destination host="localhost" port="25"/> </outbound-socket-binding> </socket-binding-group> <socket-binding-group name="load-balancer-sockets" default-interface="public"> <!-- Needed for server groups using the 'load-balancer' profile --> ... </socket-binding-group> </socket-binding-groups>
The socket configuration for the management interfaces is defined in the domain controller’s host.xml
file.
4.2.3. Configuring Socket Bindings
When defining a socket binding, you can configure the port
and interface
attributes, as well as multicast settings such as multicast-address
and multicast-port
. For details on all available socket bindings attributes, see the Socket Binding Attributes section.
Socket bindings can be configured using the management console or the management CLI. The following steps go through adding a socket binding group, adding a socket binding, and configuring socket binding settings using the management CLI.
Add a new socket binding group. Note that this step cannot be performed when running as a standalone server.
/socket-binding-group=new-sockets:add(default-interface=public)
Add a socket binding.
/socket-binding-group=new-sockets/socket-binding=new-socket-binding:add(port=1234)
Change the socket binding to use an interface other than the default, which is set by the socket binding group.
/socket-binding-group=new-sockets/socket-binding=new-socket-binding:write-attribute(name=interface,value=unsecure)
The following example shows how the XML configuration may look after the above steps have been completed.
<socket-binding-groups> ... <socket-binding-group name="new-sockets" default-interface="public"> <socket-binding name="new-socket-binding" interface="unsecure" port="1234"/> </socket-binding-group> </socket-binding-groups>
4.2.4. Viewing Socket Bindings and Open Ports for a Server
You can view the socket binding name and the open ports for a server from the management console. The information is visible when the server is in the following states:
-
running
-
reload-required
-
restart-required
To view the socket bindings and the open ports for a server:
- Access the management console and navigate to Runtime.
- Click the server to view the socket binding name and the open ports in the right pane.
4.2.5. Port Offsets
A port offset is a numeric offset value added to all port values specified in the socket binding group for that server. This allows the server to inherit the port values defined in its socket binding group, with an offset to ensure that it does not conflict with any other servers on the same host. For instance, if the HTTP port of the socket binding group is 8080
, and a server uses a port offset of 100
, then its HTTP port is 8180
.
Below is an example of setting a port offset of 250
for a server in a managed domain using the management CLI.
/host=master/server-config=server-two/:write-attribute(name=socket-binding-port-offset,value=250)
Port offsets can be used for servers in a managed domain and for running multiple standalone servers on the same host.
You can pass in a port offset when starting a standalone server using the jboss.socket.binding.port-offset
property.
$ EAP_HOME/bin/standalone.sh -Djboss.socket.binding.port-offset=100
4.3. IPv6 Addresses
By default, JBoss EAP is configured to run using IPv4 addresses. The steps below show how to configure JBoss EAP to run using IPv6 addresses.
Configure the JVM Stack for IPv6 Addresses
Update the startup configuration to prefer IPv6 addresses.
Open the startup configuration file.
-
When running as a standalone server, edit the
EAP_HOME/bin/standalone.conf
file (orstandalone.conf.bat
for Windows Server). -
When running in a managed domain, edit the
EAP_HOME/bin/domain.conf
file (ordomain.conf.bat
for Windows Server).
-
When running as a standalone server, edit the
Set the
java.net.preferIPv4Stack
property tofalse
.-Djava.net.preferIPv4Stack=false
Append the
java.net.preferIPv6Addresses
property and set it totrue
.-Djava.net.preferIPv6Addresses=true
The following example shows how the JVM options in the startup configuration file may look after making the above changes.
# Specify options to pass to the Java VM. # if [ "x$JAVA_OPTS" = "x" ]; then JAVA_OPTS="-Xms1303m -Xmx1303m -Djava.net.preferIPv4Stack=false" JAVA_OPTS="$JAVA_OPTS -Djboss.modules.system.pkgs=$JBOSS_MODULES_SYSTEM_PKGS -Djava.awt.headless=true" JAVA_OPTS="$JAVA_OPTS -Djava.net.preferIPv6Addresses=true" else
Update Interface Declarations for IPv6 Addresses
The default interface values in the configuration can be changed to IPv6 addresses. For example, the below management CLI command sets the management
interface to the IPv6 loopback address (::1
).
/interface=management:write-attribute(name=inet-address,value="${jboss.bind.address.management:[::1]}")
The following example shows how the XML configuration may look after running the above command.
<interfaces> <interface name="management"> <inet-address value="${jboss.bind.address.management:[::1]}"/> </interface> .... </interfaces>
Chapter 5. JBoss EAP Security
JBoss EAP offers the ability to configure security for its own interfaces and services as well as provide security for applications that are running on it.
- See the Security Architecture guide for an overview of general security concepts as well as JBoss EAP-specific security concepts.
- See How to Configure Server Security for information on securing JBoss EAP itself.
- See How to Configure Identity Management for information on providing security for applications deployed to JBoss EAP.
- See How to Set Up SSO with Kerberos for information on configuring single sign-on for JBoss EAP using Kerberos.
- See How To Set Up SSO with SAML v2 for information on configuring single sign-on for JBoss EAP using SAML v2.
Chapter 6. JBoss EAP Class Loading
JBoss EAP uses a modular class loading system for controlling the class paths of deployed applications. This system provides more flexibility and control than the traditional system of hierarchical class loaders. Developers have fine-grained control of the classes available to their applications, and can configure a deployment to ignore classes provided by the application server in favor of their own.
The modular class loader separates all Java classes into logical groups called modules. Each module can define dependencies on other modules in order to have the classes from that module added to its own class path. Because each deployed JAR and WAR file is treated as a module, developers can control the contents of their application’s class path by adding module configuration to their application.
6.1. Modules
A module is a logical grouping of classes used for class loading and dependency management. JBoss EAP identifies two different types of modules: static and dynamic. The main difference between the two is how they are packaged.
Static Modules
Static modules are defined in the EAP_HOME/modules/
directory of the application server. Each module exists as a subdirectory, for example, EAP_HOME/modules/com/mysql/
. Each module directory then contains a slot subdirectory, which defaults to main
and contains the module.xml
configuration file and any required JAR files. All the application server-provided APIs are provided as static modules, including the Jakarta EE APIs as well as other APIs.
Example: MySQL JDBC Driver module.xml
File
<?xml version="1.0" ?> <module xmlns="urn:jboss:module:1.1" name="com.mysql"> <resources> <resource-root path="mysql-connector-java-8.0.12.jar"/> </resources> <dependencies> <module name="javaee.api"/> <module name="sun.jdk"/> <module name="ibm.jdk"/> <module name="javax.api"/> <module name="javax.transaction.api"/> </dependencies> </module>
The module name, com.mysql
, must match the directory structure for the module, excluding the slot name, main
.
Creating custom static modules can be useful if many applications are deployed on the same server that use the same third-party libraries. Instead of bundling those libraries with each application, a module containing these libraries can be created and installed by an administrator. The applications can then declare an explicit dependency on the custom static modules.
The modules provided in JBoss EAP distributions are located in the system
directory within the EAP_HOME/modules
directory. This keeps them separate from any modules provided by third parties. Any Red Hat provided products that layer on top of JBoss EAP also install their modules within the system
directory.
Users must ensure that custom modules are installed into the EAP_HOME/modules
directory, using one directory per module. This ensures that custom versions of modules that already exist in the system
directory are loaded instead of the shipped versions. In this way, user-provided modules will take precedence over system modules.
If you use the JBOSS_MODULEPATH
environment variable to change the locations in which JBoss EAP searches for modules, then the product will look for a system
subdirectory structure within one of the locations specified. A system
structure must exist somewhere in the locations specified with JBOSS_MODULEPATH
.
Starting with JBoss EAP 7.1, the use of absolute paths in the resource-root path
element of the module.xml
file is also supported. This way, your resource libraries can be made accessible without needing to move them to the EAP_HOME/modules
directory.
Example: Absolute Path in the module.xml
File
<?xml version="1.0" ?> <module xmlns="urn:jboss:module:1.1" name="oracle.jdbc"> <resources> <resource-root path="/home/redhat/test.jar"/> </resources> </module>
Dynamic Modules
Dynamic modules are created and loaded by the application server for each JAR or WAR deployment, or for each subdeployment in an EAR. The name of a dynamic module is derived from the name of the deployed archive. Because deployments are loaded as modules, they can configure dependencies and be used as dependencies by other deployments.
Modules are only loaded when required. This usually only occurs when an application is deployed that has explicit or implicit dependencies.
Predefined Modules
Starting with JBoss EAP 7.2, a set of predefined modules is available to you when you use the default module loader. The special module, org.jboss.modules
, which includes all of the JBoss Modules API, is always available and is provided by JBoss Modules. The standard Java Platform Module System (JPMS) modules, which are provided in Java 9 and later, are also available by their standard names. When using JDK 8, the JDK 9 modules are emulated by JBoss Modules.
For a list of platform modules available on Java 9 or later, see the appropriate JDK documentation.
For the list the platform modules provided for Java 8, see Platform Modules Provided for Java 8.
6.2. Module Dependencies
A module dependency is a declaration that one module requires the classes of one or more other modules in order to function. When JBoss EAP loads a module, the modular class loader parses the dependencies of that module and adds the classes from each dependency to its class path. If a specified dependency cannot be found, the module will fail to load.
See the Modules section for complete details about modules and the modular class loading system.
Deployed applications, such as a JAR or WAR, are loaded as dynamic modules and make use of dependencies to access the APIs provided by JBoss EAP.
There are two types of dependencies: explicit and implicit.
- Explicit Dependencies
-
Explicit dependencies are declared by the developer in a configuration file. A static module can declare dependencies in its
module.xml
file. A dynamic module can declare dependencies in the deployment’sMANIFEST.MF
orjboss-deployment-structure.xml
deployment descriptor. - Implicit Dependencies
Implicit dependencies are added automatically by JBoss EAP when certain conditions or meta-data are found in a deployment. The Jakarta EE APIs supplied with JBoss EAP are examples of modules that are added by detection of implicit dependencies in deployments.
Deployments can also be configured to exclude specific implicit dependencies by using the
jboss-deployment-structure.xml
deployment descriptor file. This can be useful when an application bundles a specific version of a library that JBoss EAP will attempt to add as an implicit dependency.
Optional Dependencies
Explicit dependencies can be specified as optional. Failure to load an optional dependency will not cause a module to fail to load. However, if the dependency becomes available later it will not be added to the module’s class path. Dependencies must be available when the module is loaded.
Export a Dependency
A module’s class path contains only its own classes and that of its immediate dependencies. A module is not able to access the classes of the dependencies of one of its dependencies. However, a module can specify that an explicit dependency is exported. An exported dependency is provided to any module that depends on the module that exports it.
For example, Module A depends on Module B, and Module B depends on Module C. Module A can access the classes of Module B, and Module B can access the classes of Module C. Module A cannot access the classes of Module C unless:
- Module A declares an explicit dependency on Module C, or
- Module B exports its dependency on Module C.
Global Modules
A global module is a module that JBoss EAP provides as a dependency to every application. Any module can be made global by adding it to JBoss EAP’s list of global modules. It does not require changes to the module.
See the Define Global Modules section for details.
6.3. Create a Custom Module
Custom static modules can be added to make resources available for deployments running on JBoss EAP. You can create the module manually or by using the management CLI.
Once you create the module, you must add the module as a dependency if its resources need to be made available to applications.
Create a Custom Module Manually
You can create a custom module manually using the following steps.
Create the appropriate directory structure in the
EAP_HOME/modules/
directory.Example: Create MySQL JDBC Driver Directory Structure
$ cd EAP_HOME/modules/ $ mkdir -p com/mysql/main
Copy the JAR files or other necessary resources to the
main/
subdirectory.Example: Copy MySQL JDBC Driver JAR
$ cp /path/to/mysql-connector-java-8.0.12.jar EAP_HOME/modules/com/mysql/main/
Create a
module.xml
file in themain/
subdirectory, specifying the appropriate resources and dependencies in the file.Example: MySQL JDBC Driver
module.xml
File<?xml version="1.0" ?> <module xmlns="urn:jboss:module:1.1" name="com.mysql"> <resources> <resource-root path="mysql-connector-java-8.0.12.jar"/> </resources> <dependencies> <module name="javaee.api"/> <module name="sun.jdk"/> <module name="ibm.jdk"/> <module name="javax.api"/> <module name="javax.transaction.api"/> </dependencies> </module>
Create a Custom Module Using the Management CLI
You can create a custom module using the module add
management CLI command.
Using the module
management CLI command to add and remove modules is provided as Technology Preview only. This command is not appropriate for use in a managed domain or when connecting to the management CLI remotely. Modules should be added and removed manually in a production environment.
Technology Preview features are not supported with Red Hat production service level agreements (SLAs), might not be functionally complete, and Red Hat does not recommend to use them for production. These features provide early access to upcoming product features, enabling customers to test functionality and provide feedback during the development process.
See Technology Preview Features Support Scope on the Red Hat Customer Portal for information about the support scope for Technology Preview features.
- Start the JBoss EAP server.
Launch the management CLI.
$ EAP_HOME/bin/jboss-cli.sh
Use the
module add
management CLI command to add the new core module.module add --name=MODULE_NAME --resources=PATH_TO_RESOURCE --dependencies=DEPENDENCIES
Example: Create a MySQL Module
module add --name=com.mysql --resources=/path/to/mysql-connector-java-8.0.12.jar --dependencies=javaee.api,sun.jdk,ibm.jdk,javax.api,javax.transaction.api
See Module Command Arguments for the available arguments to customize this command, such as providing your own
module.xml
file, using an external module directory, or specifying an alternative slot for the module. You can also executemodule --help
for more details on using this command to add and remove modules.
Add the Module as a Dependency
In order for your application to be able to access this module’s resources, you must add the module as a dependency.
- See the Add an Explicit Module Dependency to a Deployment section of the JBoss EAP Development Guide for adding application-specific dependencies using deployment descriptors.
- See the Define Global Modules section for instructions on adding modules as dependencies to all applications.
As an example, the following steps add a JAR file containing several properties files as a module and define a global module, so that an application can then load these properties.
Add the JAR file as a core module.
module add --name=myprops --resources=/path/to/properties.jar
Define this module as a global module so that it is made available to all deployments.
/subsystem=ee:list-add(name=global-modules,value={name=myprops})
The application can then retrieve the properties from one of the properties files contained within the JAR.
Thread.currentThread().getContextClassLoader().getResource("my.properties");
6.4. Remove a Custom Module
Custom static modules can be removed manually or by using the management CLI.
Remove a Custom Module Manually
Before manually removing a module, ensure that it is not required by deployed applications or elsewhere in the server configuration, such as by a datasource.
To remove a custom module, remove the module’s directory under EAP_HOME/modules/
, which includes its module.xml
file and associated JAR files or other resources. For example, remove the EAP_HOME/modules/com/mysql/main/
directory to remove a custom MySQL JDBC driver module in the main
slot.
Remove a Custom Module Using the Management CLI
You can remove a custom module using the module remove
management CLI command.
Using the module
management CLI command to add and remove modules is provided as Technology Preview only. This command is not appropriate for use in a managed domain or when connecting to the management CLI remotely. Modules should be added and removed manually in a production environment.
Technology Preview features are not supported with Red Hat production service level agreements (SLAs), might not be functionally complete, and Red Hat does not recommend to use them for production. These features provide early access to upcoming product features, enabling customers to test functionality and provide feedback during the development process.
See Technology Preview Features Support Scope on the Red Hat Customer Portal for information about the support scope for Technology Preview features.
- Start the JBoss EAP server.
Launch the management CLI.
$ EAP_HOME/bin/jboss-cli.sh
Use the
module remove
management CLI command to remove the custom module.module remove --name=MODULE_NAME
-
Use the
--slot
argument if the module to remove is in a slot other thanmain
.
Example: Remove a MySQL Module
module remove --name=com.mysql
-
Use the
Execute module --help
for more details on using this command to add and remove modules.
6.5. Define Global Modules
A list of global modules can be defined for JBoss EAP, which will add the modules as dependencies to all deployments.
You must know the name of the modules that are to be configured as global modules. For the complete listing of the included modules and whether they are supported, see Red Hat JBoss Enterprise Application Platform 7 Included Modules on the Red Hat Customer Portal. See the Dynamic Module Naming section for naming conventions for modules in deployments.
Use the following management CLI command to define the list of global modules.
/subsystem=ee:write-attribute(name=global-modules,value=[{name=MODULE_NAME_1},{name=MODULE_NAME_2}]
Use the following management CLI command to add a single module to the list of existing global modules.
/subsystem=ee:list-add(name=global-modules,value={name=MODULE_NAME})
Global modules can also be added and removed using the management console by navigating to the EE subsystem from the Configuration tab and selecting the Global Modules section.
If you want a global module to be accessible by external dependencies, you must explicitly make it available. The following options are available to make the services in a global module available externally.
-
Add
services="import"
to the module in yourjboss-deployment-structure.xml
Add
services="true"
to the global module definition./subsystem=ee:write-attribute(name=global-modules,value=[{name=module1,services=true}]
Or, when adding multiple modules:
/subsystem=ee:write-attribute(name=global-modules,value=[{name=module1,services=true},{name=module2,services=false}]
To add a new module to an existing list:
/subsystem=ee:list-add(name=global-modules,value={name=module1,services=true})
-
When defining the global module using the management console, make sure that the value of the Services property is
On
.
6.6. Configure Subdeployment Isolation
Each subdeployment in an Enterprise Archive (EAR) is a dynamic module with its own class loader. Subdeployments always have an implicit dependency on the parent module, which gives them access to classes in EAR/lib
. By default, a subdeployment can access the resources of other subdeployments within that EAR.
If you do not want a subdeployment to be allowed to access classes belonging to other subdeployments, then strict subdeployment isolation can be enabled in JBoss EAP. This setting will affect all deployments.
Enable Subdeployment Module Isolation for All Deployments
Subdeployment isolation can be enabled or disabled using the management console or the management CLI from the ee
subsystem. By default, subdeployment isolation is set to false, which allows the subdeployments to access resources of other subdeployments within an EAR deployment.
Use the following management CLI to enable EAR subdeployment isolation.
/subsystem=ee:write-attribute(name=ear-subdeployments-isolated,value=true)
Subdeployments in an EAR will no longer be able to access resources from other subdeployments.
6.7. Define an External JBoss EAP Module Directory
The default directory for JBoss EAP modules is EAP_HOME/modules
. You can specify a different directory for JBoss EAP modules using the JBOSS_MODULEPATH
variable. Follow the below steps to set this variable in the JBoss EAP startup configuration file.
You can also set JBOSS_MODULEPATH
as an environment variable instead of setting this in the JBoss EAP startup configuration files.
Edit the startup configuration file.
-
When running as a standalone server, edit the
EAP_HOME/bin/standalone.conf
file, orstandalone.conf.bat
for Windows Server. -
When running in a managed domain, edit the
EAP_HOME/bin/domain.conf
file, ordomain.conf.bat
for Windows Server.
-
When running as a standalone server, edit the
Set the
JBOSS_MODULEPATH
variable, for example:JBOSS_MODULEPATH="/path/to/modules/directory/"
To specify a list of directories use a colon (
:
) to delimit the list of directories.NoteFor Windows Server, use the following syntax to set the
JBOSS_MODULEPATH
variable:set "JBOSS_MODULEPATH /path/to/modules/directory/"
To specify a list of directories use a semicolon (
;
) to delimit the list of directories.
6.8. Dynamic Module Naming Conventions
JBoss EAP loads all deployments as modules, which are named according to the following conventions.
Deployments of WAR and JAR files are named using the following format:
deployment.DEPLOYMENT_NAME
For example,
inventory.war
andstore.jar
will have the module names ofdeployment.inventory.war
anddeployment.store.jar
respectively.Subdeployments within an Enterprise Archive (EAR) are named using the following format:
deployment.EAR_NAME.SUBDEPLOYMENT_NAME
For example, the subdeployment of
reports.war
within the enterprise archiveaccounts.ear
will have the module name ofdeployment.accounts.ear.reports.war
.
Chapter 7. Deploying Applications
JBoss EAP features a range of application deployment and configuration options to cater to both administrators and developers. For administrators, the management console and the management CLI offer ideal graphical and command-line interfaces to manage application deployment in a production environment. For developers, the range of application deployment testing options include a configurable file system deployment scanner, the HTTP API, an IDE such as Red Hat CodeReady Studio, and Maven.
When deploying applications, you may want to enable validation for deployment descriptors by setting the org.jboss.metadata.parser.validate
system property to true
. This can be done one of the following ways:
While starting the server.
$ EAP_HOME/bin/standalone.sh -Dorg.jboss.metadata.parser.validate=true
By adding it to the server configuration with the following management CLI command.
/system-property=org.jboss.metadata.parser.validate:add(value=true)
7.1. Deploying Applications Using the Management CLI
Deploying applications using the management CLI gives you the benefit of a single command-line interface with the ability to create and run deployment scripts. You can use this scripting ability to configure specific application deployment and management scenarios. You can manage the deployments for a single server when running as a standalone server, or an entire network of servers when running in a managed domain.
7.1.1. Deploy an Application to a Standalone Server Using the Management CLI
Deploy an Application
From the management CLI, use the deployment deploy-file
command and specify the path to the application deployment.
deployment deploy-file /path/to/test-application.war
A successful deployment does not produce any output to the management CLI, but the server log displays deployment messages.
WFLYSRV0027: Starting deployment of "test-application.war" (runtime-name: "test-application.war") WFLYUT0021: Registered web context: /test-application WFLYSRV0010: Deployed "test-application.war" (runtime-name : "test-application.war")
Similarly, you can use the following deployment
commands:
-
Use the
deployment deploy-cli-archive
to deploy the content from a.cli
archive file. A CLI deployment archive is aJAR
file with the.cli
extension. It contains application archives that should be deployed and the CLI script files,deploy.scr
andundeploy.scr
, containing commands and operations. One script file,deploy.scr
, contains the commands and operations that deploy the application archives and set up the environment; the other script file,undeploy.scr
, contains the commands to undeploy the application archives and clean up the environment. -
Use the
deployment deploy-url
to deploy the content referenced by a URL.
You can also enable the disabled applications using the deployment enable
command.
Undeploy an Application
From the management CLI, use the deployment undeploy
command and specify the deployment name. This will delete the deployment content from the repository. See Disable an Application for keeping the deployment content when undeploying.
deployment undeploy test-application.war
A successful undeployment does not produce any output to the management CLI, but the server log displays undeployment messages.
WFLYUT0022: Unregistered web context: /test-application WFLYSRV0028: Stopped deployment test-application.war (runtime-name: test-application.war) in 62ms WFLYSRV0009: Undeployed "test-application.war" (runtime-name: "test-application.war")
Similarly, you can use the deployment undeploy-cli-archive
to undeploy the content from a .cli
archive file. You can also undeploy all deployments using a wildcard (*
).
deployment undeploy *
Disable an Application
Disable a deployed application without removing the deployment content from the repository.
deployment disable test-application.war
You can use the deployment disable-all
command to disable all the deployments.
deployment disable-all
Enable an Application
Enable a disabled deployed application.
deployment enable test-application.war
You can use the deployment enable-all
command to enable all the deployments.
deployment enable-all
List Deployments
From the management CLI, use the deployment info
command to list deployment information.
deployment info
The output will show details about each deployment, such as the runtime name, status, and whether it is enabled.
NAME RUNTIME-NAME PERSISTENT ENABLED STATUS helloworld.war helloworld.war true true OK test-application.war test-application.war true true OK
To display deployment information by name:
deployment info helloworld.war
You can also list all the deployments using the deployment list
command.
7.1.2. Deploy an Application in a Managed Domain Using the Management CLI
Deploy an Application
From the management CLI, use the deployment deploy-file
command and specify the path to the application deployment. You must also specify the server groups to which the application should be deployed.
To deploy the application to all server groups.
deployment deploy-file /path/to/test-application.war --all-server-groups
To deploy the application to specific server groups.
deployment deploy-file /path/to/test-application.war --server-groups=main-server-group,other-server-group
A successful deployment does not produce any output to the management CLI, but the server log displays deployment messages for each affected server.
[Server:server-one] WFLYSRV0027: Starting deployment of "test-application.war" (runtime-name: "test-application.war") [Server:server-one] WFLYUT0021: Registered web context: /test-application [Server:server-one] WFLYSRV0010: Deployed "test-application.war" (runtime-name : "test-application.war")
Similarly, you can use the following deployment
commands:
-
Use the
deployment deploy-cli-archive
command to deploy the content from a.cli
archive file. A CLI deployment archive is aJAR
file with the.cli
extension. It contains application archives that should be deployed and the CLI script files,deploy.scr
andundeploy.scr
, containing commands and operations. One script file,deploy.scr
, contains the commands and operations that deploy the application archives and set up the environment; the other script file,undeploy.scr
, contains the commands to undeploy the application archives and clean up the environment. -
Use the
deployment deploy-url
command to deploy the content referenced by a URL.
You can also enable the disabled applications using the deployment enable
command.
Undeploy an Application
From the management CLI, use the deployment undeploy
command and specify the deployment name. You must also specify the server groups from which the application should be undeployed. See Disable an Application for undeploying from specific server groups.
Undeploy the application from all server groups with that deployment.
deployment undeploy test-application.war --all-relevant-server-groups
A successful undeployment does not produce any output to the management CLI, but the server log displays undeployment messages for each affected server.
[Server:server-one] WFLYUT0022: Unregistered web context: /test-application [Server:server-one] WFLYSRV0028: Stopped deployment test-application.war (runtime-name: test-application.war) in 74ms [Server:server-one] WFLYSRV0009: Undeployed "test-application.war" (runtime-name: "test-application.war")
Similarly, you can use the deployment undeploy-cli-archive
command to undeploy the content from a .cli
archive file. You can also undeploy all deployments using a wildcard (*
).
deployment undeploy * --all-relevant-server-groups
Disable an Application
Disable a deployed application from specific server groups and retain its content in the repository for other server groups with that deployment.
deployment disable test-application.war --server-groups=other-server-group
You can use the deployment disable-all
command to disable all the deployments.
deployment disable-all --server-groups=other-server-group
Enable an Application
Enable a disabled deployed application.
deployment enable test-application.war
You can use the deployment enable-all
command to enable all the deployments.
deployment enable-all --server-groups=other-server-group
List Deployments
From the management CLI, use the deployment info
command to list deployment information. You can list deployment information by deployment name or by server group.
To display deployment information by name:
deployment info helloworld.war
The output will list the deployment and its state in each server group.
NAME RUNTIME-NAME helloworld.war helloworld.war SERVER-GROUP STATE main-server-group enabled other-server-group added
To display deployment information by server group:
deployment info --server-group=other-server-group
The output will list the deployments and their state for the specified server group.
NAME RUNTIME-NAME STATE helloworld.war helloworld.war added test-application.war test-application.war enabled
You can also list all deployments in the domain using the deployment list
command.
7.2. Deploying Applications Using the Management Console
Deploying applications using the management console gives you the benefit of a graphical interface that is easy to use. You can see at a glance which applications are deployed to your server or server groups, and you can enable, disable or remove applications from the content repository as required.
7.2.1. Deploy an Application to a Standalone Server Using the Management Console
Deployments can be viewed and managed from the Deployments tab of the JBoss EAP management console.
Deploy an Application
Click the Add (+) button. You can choose to deploy an application by uploading a deployment, adding an unmanaged deployment, or creating an empty deployment. Deployments are enabled by default.
Upload a deployment
Upload an application that will be copied to the server’s content repository and managed by JBoss EAP.
Adding an unmanaged deployment
Specify the location of a deployment. This deployment will not be copied to the server’s content repository and will not be managed by JBoss EAP.
Creating an empty deployment
Create an empty, exploded deployment. You can add files to the deployment after it has been created.
Undeploy an Application
Select the deployment and choose the Undeploy option. JBoss EAP removes the deployment from the content repository.
Disable an Application
Select the deployment and choose the Disable option to disable the application. This undeploys the deployment, but does not remove it from the content repository.
Replace an Application
Select the deployment and choose the Replace option. Select the new version of the deployment, which must have the same name as the original, and click Finish. This undeploys and removes the original version of the deployment, and then deploys the new version.
7.2.2. Deploy an Application in a Managed Domain Using the Management Console
From the Deployments tab of the JBoss EAP management console, deployments can be viewed and managed by:
Content Repository
All managed and unmanaged deployments are listed in the Content Repository section. Deployments can be added and deployed to server groups here.
Server Groups
Deployments that have been deployed to one or more server groups are listed in the Server Groups section. Deployments can be enabled and added directly to a server group here.
Add an Application
- From Content Repository, click the Add button.
- Choose to add an application by uploading a deployment or adding an unmanaged deployment.
Follow the prompts to deploy the application.
Note that a deployment must be deployed to a server group before it can be enabled.
Deploy an Application to a Server Group
- From Content Repository, select a deployment and click the Deploy button.
- Select one or more server groups to which this deployment should be deployed.
- Optionally, select the option to enable the deployment on the selected server groups.
Undeploy an Application from a Server Group
- From Server Groups, select the appropriate server group.
- Select the desired deployment and click the Undeploy button.
Deployments can also be undeployed from multiple server groups at once by selecting the Undeploy button for the deployment in Content Repository.
Remove an Application
- If the deployment is still deployed to any server groups, be sure to undeploy the deployment.
- From Content Repository, select the deployment and click the Remove button.
This removes the deployment from the content repository.
Disable an Application
- From Server Groups, select the appropriate server group.
- Select the desired deployment and click the Disable button.
This undeploys the deployment, but does not remove it from the content repository.
Replace an Application
- From Content Repository, select the deployment and click the Replace button.
- Select the new version of the deployment, which must have the same name as the original, and click Replace.
This undeploys and removes the original version of the deployment, and then deploys the new version.
7.3. Deploying Applications Using the Deployment Scanner
The deployment scanner monitors the deployment directory for applications to deploy. By default, the deployment scanner scans the EAP_HOME/standalone/deployments/
directory every five seconds for changes. Marker files are used to indicate the status of a deployment and to trigger actions against deployments, such as undeploying or redeploying.
While it is recommended to use the management console or management CLI for application deployment in a production environment, deploying using the deployment scanner is provided for the convenience of developers. This allows users to build and test applications in a manner suited for rapid development cycles. Additionally, the deployment scanner should not be used in conjunction with other deployment methods.
The deployment scanner is only available when running JBoss EAP as a standalone server.
7.3.1. Deploy an Application to a Standalone Server Using the Deployment Scanner
The deployment scanner can be configured to allow or disallow automatic deployment of XML, zipped, and exploded content. If automatic deployment is disabled, you must manually create marker files to trigger deployment actions. For more information about the available marker file types and their purposes, see the Deployment Scanner Marker Files section.
By default, automatic deployment for XML and zipped content is enabled. For details on configuring automatic deployment for each content type, see Configure the Deployment Scanner.
Deploying using the deployment scanner is provided for the convenience of developers and is not recommended for use in a production environment. It should also not be used in conjunction with other deployment methods.
Deploy an Application
Copy the content to the deployment folder.
$ cp /path/to/test-application.war EAP_HOME/standalone/deployments/
If auto-deployment is enabled, this file will be picked up automatically, deployed, and a .deployed
marker file will be created. If auto-deployment is not enabled, then you will need to manually add a .dodeploy
marker file to trigger deployment.
$ touch EAP_HOME/standalone/deployments/test-application.war.dodeploy
Undeploy an Application
Trigger an undeployment by removing the .deployed
marker file.
$ rm EAP_HOME/standalone/deployments/test-application.war.deployed
If auto-deployment is enabled, you can also remove the test-application.war
file, which will trigger the undeployment. Note that this does not apply for exploded deployments.
Redeploy an Application
Create a .dodeploy
marker file to initiate redeployment.
$ touch EAP_HOME/standalone/deployments/test-application.war.dodeploy
7.3.2. Configure the Deployment Scanner
The deployment scanner can be configured using the management console or the management CLI. You can configure the deployment scanner’s behavior, such as the scan interval, deployment folder location, and autodeployment of certain application file types. You can also disable the deployment scanner entirely.
For details on all available deployment scanner attributes, see the Deployment Scanner Attributes section.
Use the below management CLI commands to configure the default deployment scanner.
Disable the Deployment Scanner
/subsystem=deployment-scanner/scanner=default:write-attribute(name=scan-enabled,value=false)
This disables the default
deployment scanner.
Change the Scan Interval
/subsystem=deployment-scanner/scanner=default:write-attribute(name=scan-interval,value=10000)
This updates the scan interval time from 5000
milliseconds (five seconds) to 10000
milliseconds (ten seconds).
Change the Deployment Folder
/subsystem=deployment-scanner/scanner=default:write-attribute(name=path,value=/path/to/deployments)
This changes the location of the deployment folder from the default location of EAP_HOME/standalone/deployments
to /path/to/deployments
.
The path
value will be treated as an absolute path unless the relative-to
attribute is specified, in which case it will be relative to that path.
Enable the Automatic Deployment of Exploded Content
/subsystem=deployment-scanner/scanner=default:write-attribute(name=auto-deploy-exploded,value=true)
This enables the automatic deployment of exploded content, which is disabled by default.
Disable the Automatic Deployment of Zipped Content
/subsystem=deployment-scanner/scanner=default:write-attribute(name=auto-deploy-zipped,value=false)
This disables the automatic deployment of zipped content, which is enabled by default.
Disable the Automatic Deployment of XML Content
/subsystem=deployment-scanner/scanner=default:write-attribute(name=auto-deploy-xml,value=false)
This disables the automatic deployment of XML content, which is enabled by default.
7.3.3. Define a Custom Deployment Scanner
A new deployment scanner can be added using the management CLI or by navigating to the Deployment Scanners subsystem from the Configuration tab in the management console. This will define a new directory to scan for deployments. The default deployment scanner monitors EAP_HOME/standalone/deployments
. See Configure the Deployment Scanner for details on configuring an existing deployment scanner.
The following management CLI command adds a new deployment scanner that will check EAP_HOME/standalone/new_deployment_dir
every five seconds for deployments.
/subsystem=deployment-scanner/scanner=new-scanner:add(path=new_deployment_dir,relative-to=jboss.server.base.dir,scan-interval=5000)
The specified directory must already exist or this command will fail with an error.
A new deployment scanner has been defined and the specified directory will be monitored for deployments.
7.4. Deploying Applications Using Maven
Deploying applications using Apache Maven allows you to easily incorporate deployment to JBoss EAP into your existing development workflow.
You can use Maven to deploy applications to JBoss EAP using the WildFly Maven Plugin, which provides simple operations to deploy and undeploy applications to the application server.
7.4.1. Deploy an Application to a Standalone Server Using Maven
The following instructions show how to deploy and undeploy the JBoss EAP helloworld
quickstart to a standalone server using Maven.
See Using the Quickstart Examples in the JBoss EAP Getting Started Guide for more information on the JBoss EAP quickstarts.
Deploy an Application
Initialize the WildFly Maven Plugin in your Maven pom.xml
file. This should already be configured in the JBoss EAP quickstart pom.xml
files.
<plugin> <groupId>org.wildfly.plugins</groupId> <artifactId>wildfly-maven-plugin</artifactId> <version>${version.wildfly.maven.plugin}</version> </plugin>
From the helloworld
quickstart directory, execute the following Maven command.
$ mvn clean install wildfly:deploy
After issuing the Maven command to deploy, the terminal window shows the following output indicating a successful deployment.
[INFO] ------------------------------------------------------------------------ [INFO] BUILD SUCCESS [INFO] ------------------------------------------------------------------------ [INFO] Total time: 2.981 s [INFO] Finished at: 2015-12-23T15:06:13-05:00 [INFO] Final Memory: 21M/231M [INFO] ------------------------------------------------------------------------
The deployment can also be confirmed by viewing the server log of the active server instance.
WFLYSRV0027: Starting deployment of "helloworld.war" (runtime-name: "helloworld.war") WFLYUT0021: Registered web context: /helloworld WFLYSRV0010: Deployed "helloworld.war" (runtime-name : "helloworld.war")
Undeploy an Application
From the helloworld
quickstart directory, execute the following Maven command.
$ mvn wildfly:undeploy
After issuing the Maven command to undeploy, the terminal window shows the following output indicating a successful undeployment.
[INFO] ------------------------------------------------------------------------ [INFO] BUILD SUCCESS [INFO] ------------------------------------------------------------------------ [INFO] Total time: 1.237 s [INFO] Finished at: 2015-12-23T15:09:10-05:00 [INFO] Final Memory: 10M/183M [INFO] ------------------------------------------------------------------------
The undeployment can also be confirmed by viewing the server log of the active server instance.
WFLYUT0022: Unregistered web context: /helloworld WFLYSRV0028: Stopped deployment helloworld.war (runtime-name: helloworld.war) in 27ms WFLYSRV0009: Undeployed "helloworld.war" (runtime-name: "helloworld.war")
7.4.2. Deploy an Application in a Managed Domain Using Maven
The following instructions show how to deploy and undeploy the JBoss EAP helloworld
quickstart in a managed domain using Maven.
See Using the Quickstart Examples in the JBoss EAP Getting Started Guide for more information on the JBoss EAP quickstarts.
Deploy an Application
When deploying an application in a managed domain, you must specify the server groups to which the application should be deployed. This is configured in the Maven pom.xml
file.
The following configuration in the pom.xml
initializes the WildFly Maven Plugin and specifies main-server-group
as the server group to which the application should be deployed.
<plugin> <groupId>org.wildfly.plugins</groupId> <artifactId>wildfly-maven-plugin</artifactId> <version>${version.wildfly.maven.plugin}</version> <configuration> <domain> <server-groups> <server-group>main-server-group</server-group> </server-groups> </domain> </configuration> </plugin>
From the helloworld
quickstart directory, execute the following Maven command.
$ mvn clean install wildfly:deploy
After issuing the Maven command to deploy, the terminal window shows the following output indicating a successful deployment.
[INFO] ------------------------------------------------------------------------ [INFO] BUILD SUCCESS [INFO] ------------------------------------------------------------------------ [INFO] Total time: 4.005 s [INFO] Finished at: 2016-09-02T14:36:17-04:00 [INFO] Final Memory: 21M/226M [INFO] ------------------------------------------------------------------------
The deployment can also be confirmed by viewing the server log of the active server instance.
WFLYSRV0027: Starting deployment of "helloworld.war" (runtime-name: "helloworld.war") WFLYUT0021: Registered web context: /helloworld WFLYSRV0010: Deployed "helloworld.war" (runtime-name : "helloworld.war")
Undeploy an Application
From the helloworld
quickstart directory, execute the following Maven command.
$ mvn wildfly:undeploy
After issuing the Maven command to undeploy, the terminal window shows the following output indicating a successful undeployment.
[INFO] ------------------------------------------------------------------------ [INFO] BUILD SUCCESS [INFO] ------------------------------------------------------------------------ [INFO] Total time: 1.750 s [INFO] Finished at: 2016-09-02T14:45:10-04:00 [INFO] Final Memory: 10M/184M [INFO] ------------------------------------------------------------------------
The undeployment can also be confirmed by viewing the server log of the active server instance.
WFLYUT0022: Unregistered web context: /helloworld WFLYSRV0028: Stopped deployment helloworld.war (runtime-name: helloworld.war) in 106ms WFLYSRV0009: Undeployed "helloworld.war" (runtime-name: "helloworld.war")
7.5. Deploying Applications Using the HTTP API
Applications can be deployed to JBoss EAP using the HTTP API with the curl
command. For more information on using the HTTP API, see the HTTP API section.
7.5.1. Deploy an Application to a Standalone Server Using the HTTP API
By default, the HTTP API is accessible at http://HOST:PORT/management
, for example, http://localhost:9990/management
.
Deploy an Application
$ curl --digest -L -D - http://HOST:PORT/management --header "Content-Type: application/json" -u USER:PASSWORD -d '{"operation" : "composite", "address" : [], "steps" : [{"operation" : "add", "address" : {"deployment" : "test-application.war"}, "content" : [{"url" : "file:/path/to/test-application.war"}]},{"operation" : "deploy", "address" : {"deployment" : "test-application.war"}}],"json.pretty":1}'
Undeploy an Application
$ curl --digest -L -D - http://HOST:PORT/management --header "Content-Type: application/json" -u USER:PASSWORD -d '{"operation" : "composite", "address" : [], "steps" : [{"operation" : "undeploy", "address" : {"deployment" : "test-application.war"}},{"operation" : "remove", "address" : {"deployment" : "test-application.war"}}],"json.pretty":1}'
See this Red Hat Knowledgebase article to learn more about programmatically generating the JSON requests.
7.5.2. Deploy an Application in a Managed Domain Using the HTTP API
By default, the HTTP API is accessible at http://HOST:PORT/management
, for example, http://localhost:9990/management
.
Deploy an Application
Add the deployment to the content repository.
$ curl --digest -L -D - http://HOST:PORT/management --header "Content-Type: application/json" -u USER:PASSWORD -d '{"operation" : "add", "address" : {"deployment" : "test-application.war"}, "content" : [{"url" : "file:/path/to/test-application.war"}],"json.pretty":1}'
Add the deployment to the desired server group.
$ curl --digest -L -D - http://HOST:PORT/management --header "Content-Type: application/json" -u USER:PASSWORD -d '{"operation" : "add", "address" : {"server-group" : "main-server-group","deployment":"test-application.war"},"json.pretty":1}'
Deploy the application to the server group.
$ curl --digest -L -D - http://HOST:PORT/management --header "Content-Type: application/json" -u USER:PASSWORD -d '{"operation" : "deploy", "address" : {"server-group" : "main-server-group","deployment":"test-application.war"},"json.pretty":1}'
Undeploy an Application
Remove the deployment from all server groups to which it is assigned.
$ curl --digest -L -D - http://HOST:PORT/management --header "Content-Type: application/json" -u USER:PASSWORD -d '{"operation" : "remove", "address" : {"server-group" : "main-server-group","deployment":"test-application.war"},"json.pretty":1}'
Remove the deployment from the content repository.
$ curl --digest -L -D - http://HOST:PORT/management --header "Content-Type: application/json" -u USER:PASSWORD -d '{"operation" : "remove", "address" : {"deployment" : "test-application.war"}, "json.pretty":1}'
7.6. Customizing Deployment Behavior
7.6.1. Define a Custom Directory for Deployment Content
You can define a custom location for JBoss EAP to store deployed content.
Define a Custom Directory for a Standalone Server
By default, deployed content for a standalone server is stored in the EAP_HOME/standalone/data/content
directory. This location can be changed by passing in the -Djboss.server.deploy.dir
argument when starting the server.
$ EAP_HOME/bin/standalone.sh -Djboss.server.deploy.dir=/path/to/new_deployed_content
The chosen location should be unique among JBoss EAP instances.
The jboss.server.deploy.dir
property specifies the directory to be used for storing content that has been deployed using the management console or management CLI. To define a custom deployment directory to be monitored by the deployment scanner, see Configure the Deployment Scanner.
Define a Custom Directory for a Managed Domain
By default, deployed content for a managed domain is stored in the EAP_HOME/domain/data/content
directory. This location can be changed by passing in the -Djboss.domain.deployment.dir
argument when starting the domain.
$ EAP_HOME/bin/domain.sh -Djboss.domain.deployment.dir=/path/to/new_deployed_content
The chosen location should be unique among JBoss EAP instances.
7.6.2. Control the Order of Deployments
JBoss EAP offers fine-grained control over the order of deployments when the server is started. Strict order of the deployment of applications present in multiple EAR files can be specified along with persistence of the order after a restart.
You can use the jboss-all.xml
deployment descriptor to declare dependencies between top-level deployments.
For example, if you have an app.ear
that depends on framework.ear
being deployed first, then you can create an app.ear/META-INF/jboss-all.xml
file as shown below.
<jboss xmlns="urn:jboss:1.0"> <jboss-deployment-dependencies xmlns="urn:jboss:deployment-dependencies:1.0"> <dependency name="framework.ear" /> </jboss-deployment-dependencies> </jboss>
You can use the deployment’s runtime name as the dependency name in the jboss-all.xml
file.
This ensures that framework.ear
is deployed before app.ear
.
If you create a jboss-all.xml
file in app.ear
and you do not deploy framework.ear
, the server attempts to deploy app.ear
and fails.
7.6.3. Override Deployment Content
A deployment overlay can be used to overlay content into an existing deployment without physically modifying the contents of the deployment archive. It allows you to override deployment descriptors, library JAR files, classes, JSP pages, and other files at runtime without rebuilding the archive.
This can be useful if you need to adapt a deployment for different environments that need different configurations or settings. For example, when moving a deployment through the application lifecycle from development, to testing, to stage, and finally into production, you might want to swap deployment descriptors, modify static web resources to change the branding of the application, or even replace JAR libraries with different versions depending on the target environment. It is also a useful feature for installations that need to change a configuration but can not modify or crack an archive due to policy or security restrictions.
When defining a deployment overlay, you specify the file on a file system that will replace the file in the deployment archive. You must also specify which deployments should be affected by the deployment overlay. Any affected deployments must be redeployed in order for the changes to take effect.
Parameters
You can use any of the following parameters to configure your deployment overlay:
-
name
:: The name of the deployment overlay. -
content
:: A comma-separated list that maps the file on the file system to the file in the archive that it replaces. The format for each entry isARCHIVE_PATH=FILESYSTEM_PATH
. -
deployments
:: Comma-separated list of deployments to which this overlay is linked. -
redeploy-affected
:: Redeploys all affected deployments.
For full usage details, execute deployment-overlay --help
.
Procedure
Use the
deployment-overlay add
management CLI command to add a deployment overlay:deployment-overlay add --name=new-deployment-overlay --content=WEB-INF/web.xml=/path/to/other/web.xml --deployments=test-application.war --redeploy-affected
NoteIn a managed domain, specify the applicable server groups by using
--server-groups
or specify all server groups with--all-server-groups
.- After you created a deployment overlay, you can add content to an existing overlay, link the overlay to a deployment, or remove the overlay.
Optional: You can specify an overlay configuration to link to an external directory that contains static web resources, such as HTML, images, or videos, in the
<overlay>
element. The<overlay>
element is located in the applicationjboss-web.xml
file. With this configuration, you do not need to repackage the application.The following example shows system property substitution in the
<overlay>
element, where ${example.path.to.overlay} defines the /PATH/TO/STATIC/WEB/CONTENT location.Example:
<overlay>
element in ajboss-web.xml
file<jboss-web> <overlay>${example.path.to.overlay}</overlay> </jboss-web>
You can specify a system property in the
<overlay>
element ifjboss-descriptor-property-replacement
is set totrue
, which is the default value for the descriptor property.To configure
jboss-descriptor-property-replacement
, use the following management CLI command:/subsystem=ee:write-attribute(name=jboss-descriptor-property-replacement,value=true)
This command adds the following XML content to the
ee
subsystem in the JBoss EAP configuration:<subsystem xmlns="urn:jboss:domain:ee:4.0"> <jboss-descriptor-property-replacement>true</jboss-descriptor-property-replacement> </subsystem>
7.6.4. Using Rollout Plans
About Rollout Plans
In a managed domain, operations targeted at domain or host level resources can potentially impact multiple servers. Such operations can include a roll out plan detailing the sequence in which the operation would be applied to the servers, as well as the policies for detailing whether the operation could be reverted if it fails to execute successfully on some servers. If no rollout plan is specified, the default rollout plan is used.
Below is an example rollout plan involving five server groups. Operations can be applied to server groups serially, in-series
, or concurrently, concurrent-groups
. The syntax is described in more detail in Rollout Plan Syntax.
{"my-rollout-plan" => {"rollout-plan" => { "in-series" => [ {"concurrent-groups" => { "group-A" => { "max-failure-percentage" => "20", "rolling-to-servers" => "true" }, "group-B" => undefined }}, {"server-group" => {"group-C" => { "rolling-to-servers" => "false", "max-failed-servers" => "1" }}}, {"concurrent-groups" => { "group-D" => { "max-failure-percentage" => "20", "rolling-to-servers" => "true" }, "group-E" => undefined }} ], "rollback-across-groups" => "true" }}}
Looking at the example above, applying the operation to the servers in the domain is done in three phases. If the policy for any server group triggers a rollback of the operation across the server group, all other server groups will be rolled back as well.
- Server groups group-A and group-B will have the operation applied concurrently. The operation will be applied to the servers in group-A in series, while all servers in group-B will handle the operation concurrently. If more than 20% of the servers in group-A fail to apply the operation, it will be rolled back across that group. If any servers in group-B fail to apply the operation it will be rolled back across that group.
- Once all servers in group-A and group-B are complete, the operation will be applied to the servers in group-C. Those servers will handle the operation concurrently. If more than one server in group-C fails to apply the operation it will be rolled back across that group.
- Once all servers in group-C are complete, server groups group-D and group-E will have the operation applied concurrently. The operation will be applied to the servers in group-D in series, while all servers in group-E will handle the operation concurrently. If more than 20% of the servers in group-D fail to apply the operation, it will be rolled back across that group. If any servers in group-E fail to apply the operation it will be rolled back across that group.
Rollout Plan Syntax
You can specify a rollout plan in either of the following ways.
-
By defining the rollout plan in the
deploy
command operation headers. See Deploy Using a Rollout Plan for details. -
By storing the rollout plan using the
rollout-plan
command and then referencing the plan name in thedeploy
command operation headers. See Deploy Using a Stored Rollout Plan for details.
Although each method has a different initial command, both methods use the rollout
operation header to define the rollout plan. This uses the following syntax.
rollout (id=PLAN_NAME | SERVER_GROUP_LIST) [rollback-across-groups]
-
PLAN_NAME
is the name for the rollout plan that was stored using therollout-plan
command. SERVER_GROUP_LIST
is the list of server groups. Use a comma (,
) to separate multiple server groups to indicate that operations should be performed on each server group sequentially. Use a caret (^
) separator to indicate that operations should be performed on each server group concurrently.For each server group, set any of the following policies in parentheses. Use a comma to separate multiple policies.
-
rolling-to-servers
: A boolean that, if set totrue
, applies the operation to each server in the group in series. If the value isfalse
or not specified, the operation will be applied to the servers in the group concurrently. -
max-failed-servers
: An integer which takes the maximum number of servers in the group that can fail to apply the operation before it should be reverted on all servers in the group. The default value if not specified is0
, meaning that a failure on any server will trigger rollback across the group. max-failure-percentage
: An integer between0
and100
that represents the maximum percentage of the total number of servers in the group that can fail to apply the operation before it should be reverted on all servers in the group. The default value if not specified is0
, meaning that a failure on any server will trigger rollback across the group.NoteIf both
max-failed-servers
andmax-failure-percentage
are set to non-zero values,max-failure-percentage
takes precedence.
-
-
rollback-across-groups
: A boolean that indicates whether the need to rollback the operation on all the servers in one server group triggers a rollback across all the server groups. This defaults tofalse
.
Deploy Using a Rollout Plan
You can provide the full details of a rollout plan directly to the deploy
command by passing the rollout
settings into the headers
argument. See the Rollout Plan Syntax for more information on the format.
The following management CLI command deploys an application to the main-server-group
server group using a deployment plan that specifies rolling-to-servers=true
for serial deployment.
deploy /path/to/test-application.war --server-groups=main-server-group --headers={rollout main-server-group(rolling-to-servers=true)}
Deploy Using a Stored Rollout Plan
Since rollout plans can be complex, you have the option to store the details of a rollout plan. This allows you to reference the rollout plan name when you want to use it instead of requiring the full details of the rollout plan each time.
Use the
rollout-plan
management CLI command to store a rollout plan. See the Rollout Plan Syntax for more information on the format.rollout-plan add --name=my-rollout-plan --content={rollout main-server-group(rolling-to-servers=false,max-failed-servers=1),other-server-group(rolling-to-servers=true,max-failure-percentage=20) rollback-across-groups=true}
This creates the following deployment plan.
"rollout-plan" => { "in-series" => [ {"server-group" => {"main-server-group" => { "rolling-to-servers" => false, "max-failed-servers" => 1 }}}, {"server-group" => {"other-server-group" => { "rolling-to-servers" => true, "max-failure-percentage" => 20 }}} ], "rollback-across-groups" => true }
Specify the stored rollout plan name when deploying the application.
The following management CLI command deploys an application to all server groups using the
my-rollout-plan
stored rollout plan.deploy /path/to/test-application.war --all-server-groups --headers={rollout id=my-rollout-plan}
Remove a Stored Rollout Plan
You can remove a stored rollout plan using the rollout-plan
management CLI command by specifying the name of the rollout plan to remove.
rollout-plan remove --name=my-rollout-plan
Default Rollout Plan
All operations that impact multiple servers will be executed with a rollout plan. If no rollout plan is specified in the operation request, a default rollout plan will be generated. The plan will have the following characteristics.
- There will only be a single high-level phase. All server groups affected by the operation will have the operation applied concurrently.
- Within each server group, the operation will be applied to all servers concurrently.
- Failure on any server in a server group will cause rollback across the group.
- Failure of any server group will result in rollback of all other server groups.
7.7. Managing Exploded Deployments
Prior to JBoss EAP 7.1, you could only manage exploded deployments by manipulating files on the file system. Starting with JBoss EAP 7.1, you can manage exploded deployments using the management interfaces. This allows you to change the contents of an exploded application without deploying a new version of the application.
Updates to static files in a deployment, such as JavaScript and CSS files, take effect immediately. Changes to other files, such as Java classes, might require an application redeployment for the changes to take effect.
You can either start with an empty deployment or explode an existing archive deployment and then add or remove content.
See Viewing Deployment Content to browse the files in a deployment or read the contents of the files.
Create an Empty Exploded Deployment
You can create an empty exploded deployment to which you can later add content as necessary. Use the following management CLI command to create an empty exploded deployment.
/deployment=DEPLOYMENT_NAME.war:add(content=[{empty=true}])
The empty=true
option is required to confirm that you intended to create an empty deployment.
Explode an Existing Archive Deployment
You can explode an existing archive deployment to be able to update its contents. Note that a deployment must be disabled before it can be exploded. Use the following management CLI command to explode a deployment.
/deployment=ARCHIVE_DEPLOYMENT_NAME.ear:explode
You can now add or remove content from this deployment.
You can also explode an existing archive deployment from the management console. From the Deployments tab, select the deployment and select the Explode drop down option.
Add Content to an Exploded Deployment
To add content to a deployment, use the add-content
management CLI operation. Provide the path to the location in the deployment where the content should be added, and provide the content to be uploaded. The content to upload can be provided as a local file stream, URL, hash of content that already exists in the JBoss EAP content repository, or a byte array of the content. The following management CLI command uses the input-stream-index
option to upload the contents of a local file to the deployment.
/deployment=DEPLOYMENT_NAME.war:add-content(content=[{target-path=/path/to/FILE_IN_DEPLOYMENT, input-stream-index=/path/to/LOCAL_FILE_TO_UPLOAD}]
When adding content to a deployment using the add-content
operation, content in the deployment is overwritten by default. You can change this behavior by setting the overwrite
option to false
.
Remove Content from an Exploded Deployment
To remove content from a deployment, use the remove-content
management CLI operation and provide the path of the content in the deployment to remove.
/deployment=DEPLOYMENT_NAME.war:remove-content(paths=[/path/to/FILE_1, /path/to/FILE_2])
7.8. Viewing Deployment Content
You can browse information about files in a managed deployment and read the contents of the files using the JBoss EAP management interfaces.
7.8.1. Browse Files in a Deployment
Use the browse-content
operation to view the files and directories in a managed deployment. Provide no arguments to return the entire deployment structure or use the path
argument to provide the path to a specific directory.
You can also browse contents of a deployment from the management console by navigating to the Deployments tab, selecting the deployment, and selecting View from the drop down.
/deployment=helloworld.war:browse-content(path=META-INF/)
This displays the files and directories in the META-INF/
directory of the helloworld.war
deployment.
{ "outcome" => "success", "result" => [ { "path" => "MANIFEST.MF", "directory" => false, "file-size" => 827L }, { "path" => "maven/org.jboss.eap.quickstarts/helloworld/pom.properties", "directory" => false, "file-size" => 106L }, { "path" => "maven/org.jboss.eap.quickstarts/helloworld/pom.xml", "directory" => false, "file-size" => 2713L }, { "path" => "maven/org.jboss.eap.quickstarts/helloworld/", "directory" => true }, { "path" => "maven/org.jboss.eap.quickstarts/", "directory" => true }, { "path" => "maven/", "directory" => true }, { "path" => "INDEX.LIST", "directory" => false, "file-size" => 251L } ] }
You can also specify the following arguments to the browse-content
operation.
- archive
- Whether to only return archive files.
- depth
- Specify the depth of files to return.
7.8.2. Read Deployment Content
You can read the contents of a file in a managed deployment using the read-content
operation. Provide no arguments to return the entire deployment or use the path
argument to provide the path to a specific file. For example:
/deployment=helloworld.war:read-content(path=META-INF/MANIFEST.MF)
This returns a file stream, which can be displayed in the management CLI or saved to the file system.
{ "outcome" => "success", "result" => {"uuid" => "24ba8e06-21bd-4505-b4d4-bdfb16451b95"}, "response-headers" => {"attached-streams" => [{ "uuid" => "24ba8e06-21bd-4505-b4d4-bdfb16451b95", "mime-type" => "text/plain" }]} }
7.8.2.1. Display the Contents of a File
Use the attachment display
command to read the contents of the MANIFEST.MF
file.
attachment display --operation=/deployment=helloworld.war:read-content(path=META-INF/MANIFEST.MF)
This displays the contents of the MANIFEST.MF
file from the helloworld.war
deployment to the management CLI.
ATTACHMENT 8af87836-2abd-423a-8e44-e731cc57bd80: Manifest-Version: 1.0 Implementation-Title: Quickstart: helloworld Implementation-Version: 7.3.0.GA Java-Version: 1.8.0_131 Built-By: username Scm-Connection: scm:git:git@github.com:jboss/jboss-parent-pom.git/quic kstart-parent/helloworld Specification-Vendor: JBoss by Red Hat ...
7.8.2.2. Save the Contents of a File
Use the attachment save
command to save the contents of the MANIFEST.MF
file to the file system.
attachment save --operation=/deployment=helloworld.war:read-content(path=META-INF/MANIFEST.MF) --file=/path/to/MANIFEST.MF
This saves the MANIFEST.MF
file from the helloworld.war
deployment to the file system at path/to/MANIFEST.MF
. If you do not specify a file path using the --file
argument, the file will be named using its unique attachment ID and saved in the working directory of the management CLI, which by default is EAP_HOME/bin/
.
Chapter 8. Domain Management
This section discusses concepts and configuration specific to the managed domain operating mode.
For information on securing a managed domain, see the Securing a Managed Domain section of JBoss EAP How to Configure Server Security.
8.1. About Managed Domains
The managed domain operating mode allows for the management of multiple JBoss EAP instances from a single control point.
Centrally-managed JBoss EAP server collections are known as members of a domain. All JBoss EAP instances in a domain share a common management policy.
A domain consists of one domain controller, one or more host controllers, and zero or more server groups per host.
A domain controller is the central point from which the domain is controlled. It ensures that each server is configured according to the management policy of the domain. The domain controller is also a host controller.
A host controller is a physical or virtual host that interacts with the domain controller to control the lifecycle of the application server instances running on its host and to assist the domain controller to manage them. Each host can contain multiple server groups.
A server group is a set of server instances which have JBoss EAP installed on them and are managed and configured as one. The domain controller manages the configuration of and applications deployed onto server groups. Consequently, each server in a server group shares the same configuration and deployments.
Host controllers are tied to specific physical, or virtual, hosts. You can run multiple host controllers on the same hardware if you use different configurations, ensuring their ports and other resources do not conflict. It is possible for a domain controller, a single host controller, and multiple servers to run within the same JBoss EAP instance, on the same physical system.
8.1.1. About the Domain Controller
A domain controller is the JBoss EAP server instance that acts as a central management point for a domain. One host controller instance is configured to act as a domain controller.
The primary responsibilities of the domain controller are:
- Maintain the domain’s central management policy.
- Ensure all host controllers are aware of its current contents.
- Assist the host controllers in ensuring that all running JBoss EAP server instances are configured in accordance with this policy.
By default, the central management policy is stored in the EAP_HOME/domain/configuration/domain.xml
file. This file is required in this directory of the host controller that is set to run as the domain controller.
The domain.xml
file contains profile configurations available for use by the servers in the domain. A profile contains the detailed settings of the various subsystems available in that profile. The domain configuration also includes the definition of socket groups and the server group definitions.
It is possible for a JBoss EAP 7 domain controller to administer JBoss EAP 6 hosts and servers, as long as the hosts and servers are running JBoss EAP 6.2 or later. For more information, see Configure a JBoss EAP 7.x Domain Controller to Administer JBoss EAP 6 Instances.
For more information, see the Start a Managed Domain and Domain Controller Configuration sections.
8.1.2. About Host Controllers
The primary responsibility of a host controller is server management. It delegates domain management tasks and is responsible for starting and stopping the individual application server processes that run on its host.
It interacts with the domain controller to help manage the communication between the servers and the domain controller. Multiple host controllers of a domain can interact with only a single domain controller. Hence, all the host controllers and server instances running on a single domain mode have a single domain controller and must belong to the same domain.
By default, each host controller reads its configuration from the EAP_HOME/domain/configuration/host.xml
file located in the unzipped JBoss EAP installation file on its host’s file system. The host.xml
file contains the following configuration information that is specific to the particular host:
- The names of the server instances meant to run from this installation.
-
Configurations specific to the local physical installation. For example, named interface definitions declared in
domain.xml
can be mapped to an actual machine-specific IP address inhost.xml
. And abstract path names in domain.xml can be mapped to actual file system paths inhost.xml
. Any of the following configurations:
- How the host controller contacts the domain controller to register itself and access the domain configuration.
- How to find and contact a remote domain controller.
- Whether the host controller is to act as the domain controller
For more information, see the Start a Managed Domain and Host Controller Configuration sections.
8.1.3. About Process Controllers
A process controller is a small, lightweight process that is responsible for spawning the host controller process and monitoring its lifecycle. If the host controller crashes, the process controller will restart it. It also starts server processes as directed by the host controller; however, it will not automatically restart server processes that crash.
The process controller logs to the EAP_HOME/domain/log/process-controller.log
file. You can set JVM options for the process controller in the EAP_HOME/bin/domain.conf
file using the PROCESS_CONTROLLER_JAVA_OPTS
variable.
8.1.4. About Server Groups
A server group is a collection of server instances that are managed and configured as one. In a managed domain, every application server instance belongs to a server group, even if it is the only member. The server instances in a group share the same profile configuration and deployed content.
A domain controller and a host controller enforce the standard configuration on all server instances of every server group in its domain.
A domain can consist of multiple server groups. Different server groups can be configured with different profiles and deployments. For example, a domain can be configured with different server tiers providing different services.
Different server groups can also have the same profile and deployments. This can, for example, allow for rolling application upgrades where the application is upgraded on one server group and then updated on a second server group, avoiding a complete service outage.
For more information, see the Configuring Server Groups section.
8.1.5. About Servers
A server represents an application server instance. In a managed domain, all server instances are members of a server group. The host controller launches each server instance in its own JVM process.
For more information, see the Configuring Servers section.
8.3. Launching a Managed Domain
8.3.1. Start a Managed Domain
Domain and host controllers can be started using the domain.sh
or domain.bat
script provided with JBoss EAP. For a complete listing of all available startup script arguments and their purposes, use the --help
argument or see the Server Runtime Arguments section.
The domain controller must be started before any slave servers in any server groups in the domain. Start the domain controller first, then start any other associated host controllers in the domain.
Start the Domain Controller
Start the domain controller with the host-master.xml
configuration file, which is preconfigured for a dedicated domain controller.
$ EAP_HOME/bin/domain.sh --host-config=host-master.xml
Depending on your domain setup, you will need to make additional configurations to allow host controllers to connect. Also see the following example domain setups:
Start a Host Controller
Start the host controller with the host-slave.xml
configuration file, which is preconfigured for a slave host controller.
$ EAP_HOME/bin/domain.sh --host-config=host-slave.xml
Depending on your domain setup, you will need to make additional configurations connect to, and not conflict with, the domain controller. Also see the following example domain setups:
8.3.2. Domain Controller Configuration
You must configure one host in the domain as the domain controller.
It is not supported to configure multiple domain or host controllers on the same machine when using the RPM installation method to install JBoss EAP.
Configure a host as the domain controller by adding the <local/>
element in the <domain-controller>
declaration. The <domain-controller>
should include no other content.
<domain-controller> <local/> </domain-controller>
The host acting as the domain controller must expose a management interface that is accessible to other hosts in the domain. The HTTP interface is the standard management interface.
<management-interfaces> <http-interface security-realm="ManagementRealm" http-upgrade-enabled="true"> <socket interface="management" port="${jboss.management.http.port:9990}"/> </http-interface> </management-interfaces>
The sample minimal domain controller configuration file, EAP_HOME/domain/configuration/host-master.xml
, includes these configuration settings.
8.3.3. Host Controller Configuration
A host controller must be configured to connect to the domain controller so that the host controller can register itself with the domain.
It is not supported to configure multiple domain or host controllers on the same machine when using the RPM installation method to install JBoss EAP.
Use the <domain-controller>
element of the configuration to configure a connection to the domain controller.
<domain-controller> <remote security-realm="ManagementRealm"> <discovery-options> <static-discovery name="primary" protocol="${jboss.domain.master.protocol:remote}" host="${jboss.domain.master.address}" port="${jboss.domain.master.port:9990}"/> </discovery-options> </remote> </domain-controller>
The sample minimal host controller configuration file, EAP_HOME/domain/configuration/host-slave.xml
, includes the configuration settings to connect to a domain controller. The configuration assumes that you provide the jboss.domain.master.address
property when starting the host controller.
$ EAP_HOME/bin/domain.sh --host-config=host-slave.xml -Djboss.domain.master.address=IP_ADDRESS
For more information on domain controller discovery, see the Domain Controller Discovery and Failover section.
Depending on your domain setup, you may also need to provide authentication for the host controller to be authenticated by the domain controller. See Set Up a Managed Domain on Two Machines for details on generating a management user with a secret value and updating the host controller configuration with that value.
8.3.4. Configure the Name of a Host
Every host running in a managed domain must have a unique host name. To ease administration and allow for the use of the same host configuration files on multiple hosts, the server uses the following precedence for determining the host name.
-
If set, the host element name attribute in the
host.xml
configuration file. -
The value of the
jboss.host.name
system property. -
The value that follows the final period (
.
) character in thejboss.qualified.host.name
system property, or the entire value if there is no final period (.
) character. -
The value that follows the period (
.
) character in theHOSTNAME
environment variable for POSIX-based operating systems, theCOMPUTERNAME
environment variable for Microsoft Windows, or the entire value if there is no final period (.
) character.
A host controller’s name is configured in the host
element at the top of the relevant host.xml
configuration file, for example:
<host xmlns="urn:jboss:domain:8.0" name="host1">
Use the following procedure to update the host name using the management CLI.
Start the JBoss EAP host controller.
$ EAP_HOME/bin/domain.sh --host-config=host-slave.xml
Launch the management CLI, connecting to the domain controller.
$ EAP_HOME/bin/jboss-cli.sh --connect --controller=DOMAIN_CONTROLLER_IP_ADDRESS
Use the following command to set a new host name.
/host=EXISTING_HOST_NAME:write-attribute(name=name,value=NEW_HOST_NAME)
This modifies the host name attribute in the
host-slave.xml
file as follows:<host name="NEW_HOST_NAME" xmlns="urn:jboss:domain:8.0">
Reload the host controller in order for the changes to take effect.
reload --host=EXISTING_HOST_NAME
If a host controller does not have a name set in the configuration file, you can also pass in the host name at runtime.
$ EAP_HOME/bin/domain.sh --host-config=host-slave.xml -Djboss.host.name=HOST_NAME
8.4. Managing Servers
8.4.1. Configure Server Groups
The following is an example of a server group definition:
<server-group name="main-server-group" profile="full"> <jvm name="default"> <heap size="64m" max-size="512m"/> </jvm> <socket-binding-group ref="full-sockets"/> <deployments> <deployment name="test-application.war" runtime-name="test-application.war"/> <deployment name="helloworld.war" runtime-name="helloworld.war" enabled="false"/> </deployments> </server-group>
Server groups can be configured using the management CLI or from the management console Runtime tab.
Add a Server Group
The following management CLI command can be used to add a server group.
/server-group=SERVER_GROUP_NAME:add(profile=PROFILE_NAME,socket-binding-group=SOCKET_BINDING_GROUP_NAME)
Update a Server Group
The following management CLI command can be used to update server group attributes.
/server-group=SERVER_GROUP_NAME:write-attribute(name=ATTRIBUTE_NAME,value=VALUE)
Remove a Server Group
The following management CLI command can be used to remove a server group.
/server-group=SERVER_GROUP_NAME:remove
Server Group Attributes
A server group requires the following attributes:
-
name
: The server group name. -
profile
: The server group profile name. -
socket-binding-group
: The default socket binding group used for servers in the group. This can be overridden on a per-server basis.
A server group includes the following optional attributes:
-
management-subsystem-endpoint
: Set totrue
to have servers belonging to the server group connect back to the host controller using the endpoint from theirremoting
subsystem. Theremoting
subsystem must be present for this to work. -
socket-binding-default-interface
: The socket binding group default interface for this server. -
socket-binding-port-offset
: The default offset to be added to the port values given by the socket binding group. -
deployments
: The deployment content to be deployed on the servers in the group. -
jvm
: The default JVM settings for all servers in the group. The host controller merges these settings with any other configuration provided inhost.xml
to derive the settings used to launch the server’s JVM. -
deployment-overlays
: Links between a defined deployment overlay and deployments in this server group. -
system-properties
: The system properties to be set on servers in the group.
8.4.2. Configure Servers
The default host.xml
configuration file defines three servers:
<servers> <server name="server-one" group="main-server-group"> </server> <server name="server-two" group="main-server-group" auto-start="true"> <socket-bindings port-offset="150"/> </server> <server name="server-three" group="other-server-group" auto-start="false"> <socket-bindings port-offset="250"/> </server> </servers>
A server instance named server-one
is associated with main-server-group
and inherits the subsystem configuration and socket bindings specified by that server group. A server instance named server-two
is also associated with main-server-group
, but also defines a socket binding port-offset
value, so as not to conflict with the port values used by server-one
. A server instance named server-three
is associated with other-server-group
and uses that group’s configurations. It also defines a port-offset
value and sets auto-start
to false
so that this server does not start when the host controller starts.
Servers can be configured using the management CLI or from the management console Runtime tab.
Add a Server
The following management CLI command can be used to add a server.
/host=HOST_NAME/server-config=SERVER_NAME:add(group=SERVER_GROUP_NAME)
Update a Server
The following management CLI command can be used to update server attributes.
/host=HOST_NAME/server-config=SERVER_NAME:write-attribute(name=ATTRIBUTE_NAME,value=VALUE)
Remove a Server
The following management CLI command can be used to remove a server.
/host=HOST_NAME/server-config=SERVER_NAME:remove
Server Attributes
A server requires the following attributes:
-
name
: The name of the server. -
group
: The name of a server group from the domain model.
A server includes the following optional attributes:
-
auto-start
: Whether or not this server should be started when the host controller starts. -
socket-binding-group
: The socket binding group to which this server belongs. -
socket-binding-port-offset
: An offset to be added to the port values given by the socket binding group for this server. -
update-auto-start-with-server-status
: Update theauto-start
attribute with the status of the server. -
interface
: A list of fully-specified named network interfaces available for use on the server. -
jvm
: The JVM settings for this server. If not declared, the settings are inherited from the parent server group or host. -
path
: A list of named file system paths. -
system-property
: A list of system properties to set on this server.
8.4.3. Start and Stop Servers
You can perform operations on servers, such as starting, stopping, and reloading, from the management console by navigating to the Runtime tab and selecting the appropriate host or server group.
See the below commands for performing these operations using the management CLI.
Start Servers
You can start a single server on a particular host.
/host=HOST_NAME/server-config=SERVER_NAME:start
You can start all servers in a specified server group.
/server-group=SERVER_GROUP_NAME:start-servers
Stop Servers
You can stop a single server on a particular host.
/host=HOST_NAME/server-config=SERVER_NAME:stop
You can stop all servers in a specified server group.
/server-group=SERVER_GROUP_NAME:stop-servers
Reload Servers
You can reload a single server on a particular host.
/host=HOST_NAME/server-config=SERVER_NAME:reload
You can reload all servers in a specified server group.
/server-group=SERVER_GROUP_NAME:reload-servers
Kill Servers
You can kill all server processes in a specified server group.
/server-group=SERVER_GROUP_NAME:kill-servers
8.5. Domain Controller Discovery and Failover
When setting up a managed domain, each host controller must be configured with information needed to contact the domain controller. In JBoss EAP, each host controller can be configured with multiple options for finding the domain controller. Host controllers iterate through the list of options until one succeeds.
A backup host controller can be promoted to domain contoller if there is a problem with the primary domain controller. This allows host controllers to automatically fail over to the new domain controller once it has been promoted.
8.5.1. Configure Domain Discovery Options
The following is an example of how to configure a host controller with multiple options for finding the domain controller.
Example: A Host Controller with Multiple Domain Controller Options
<domain-controller> <remote security-realm="ManagementRealm"> <discovery-options> <static-discovery name="primary" protocol="${jboss.domain.master.protocol:remote}" host="172.16.81.100" port="${jboss.domain.master.port:9990}"/> <static-discovery name="backup" protocol="${jboss.domain.master.protocol:remote}" host="172.16.81.101" port="${jboss.domain.master.port:9990}"/> </discovery-options> </remote> </domain-controller>
A static discovery option includes the following required attributes:
- name
- The name for this domain controller discovery option.
- host
- The remote domain controller’s host name.
- port
- The remote domain controller’s port.
In the example above, the first discovery option is the one expected to succeed. The second can be used in failover situations.
8.5.2. Start a Host Controller with a Cached Domain Configuration
A host controller can be started without a connection to the domain controller by using the --cached-dc
option; however, the host controller must have previously cached its domain configuration locally from the domain controller. Starting a host controller with this --cached-dc
option will cache the host controller’s domain configuration from the domain controller.
$ EAP_HOME/bin/domain.sh --host-config=host-slave.xml --cached-dc
This creates a domain.cached-remote.xml
file in the EAP_HOME/domain/configuration/
directory that contains the information necessary for this host controller to temporarily manage its current servers without a domain controller connection.
By default, using the --cached-dc
option only caches configuration used by this host controller, which means that it cannot be promoted to domain controller for the entire domain. See Cache the Domain Configuration for information on caching the entire domain configuration to allow a host controller to act as the domain controller.
If the domain controller is unavailable when starting this host controller with --cached-dc
, the host controller will start using the cached configuration saved in the domain.cached-remote.xml
file. Note that this file must exist or the host controller will fail to start.
While in this state, the host controller cannot modify the domain configuration, but can launch servers and manage deployments.
Once started with the cached configuration, the host controller will continue to attempt to reconnect to the domain controller. Once the domain controller becomes available, the host controller will automatically reconnect to it and synchronize the domain configuration. Note that some configuration changes may require you to reload the host controller to take effect. A warning will be logged on the host controller if this occurs.
8.5.3. Promote a Host Controller to Act as Domain Controller
You can promote a host controller to act as the domain controller if a problem arises with the primary domain controller. The host controller must first cache the domain configuration locally from the domain controller before it can be promoted.
Cache the Domain Configuration
Use the --backup
option for any host controller that you might want to become the domain controller.
$ EAP_HOME/bin/domain.sh --host-config=host-slave.xml --backup
This creates a domain.cached-remote.xml
file in the EAP_HOME/domain/configuration/
directory that contains a copy of the entire domain configuration. This configuration will be used if the host controller is reconfigured to act as the domain controller.
The ignore-unused-configuration
attribute is used to determine how much configuration to cache for a particular host. A value of true
means that only the configuration relevant to this host controller is cached, which would not allow it to take over as domain controller. A value of false
means that the entire domain configuration is cached.
The --backup
argument defaults this attribute to false
to cache the entire domain. However, if you set this attribute in the host.xml
file, that value is used.
You can also use the --cached-dc
option alone to create a copy of the domain configuration, but must set ignore-unused-configuration
to false
in the host.xml
to cache the entire domain. For example:
<domain-controller> <remote username="$local" security-realm="ManagementRealm" ignore-unused-configuration="false"> <discovery-options> ... </discovery-options> </remote> </domain-controller>
Promote a Host Controller to Be the Domain Controller
- Ensure the original domain controller is stopped.
- Use the management CLI to connect to the host controller that is to become the new domain controller.
Execute the following command to configure the host controller to act as the new domain controller.
/host=backup:write-attribute(name=domain-controller.local, value={})
Execute the following command to reload the host controller.
reload --host=HOST_NAME
This host controller will now act as the domain controller.
8.6. Managed Domain Setups
8.6.1. Set Up a Managed Domain on a Single Machine
You can run multiple host controllers on a single machine by using the jboss.domain.base.dir
property.
It is not supported to configure more than one JBoss EAP host controller as a system service on a single machine.
Copy the
EAP_HOME/domain
directory for the domain controller.$ cp -r EAP_HOME/domain /path/to/domain1
Copy the
EAP_HOME/domain
directory for a host controller.$ cp -r EAP_HOME/domain /path/to/host1
Start the domain controller using
/path/to/domain1
.$ EAP_HOME/bin/domain.sh --host-config=host-master.xml -Djboss.domain.base.dir=/path/to/domain1
Start the host controller using
/path/to/host1
.$ EAP_HOME/bin/domain.sh --host-config=host-slave.xml -Djboss.domain.base.dir=/path/to/host1 -Djboss.domain.master.address=IP_ADDRESS -Djboss.management.http.port=PORT
NoteWhen starting a host controller, you must specify the address of the domain controller using the
jboss.domain.master.address
property.Additionally, since this host controller is running on the same machine as the domain controller, you must change the management interface so that it does not conflict with the domain controller’s management interface. This command sets the
jboss.management.http.port
property.
Each instance started in this manner will share the rest of the resources in the base installation directory, for example, EAP_HOME/modules/
, but use the domain configuration from the directory specified by jboss.domain.base.dir
.
8.6.2. Set Up a Managed Domain on Two Machines
You may need to configure your firewall to run this example.
You can create managed domain on two machines, where one machine is a domain controller and the other machine is a host. For more information, see About the Domain Controller.
-
IP1
= IP address of the domain controller (Machine 1) -
IP2
= IP address of the host (Machine 2)
Create a Managed Domain on Two Machines
On Machine 1
Add a management user so that the host can be authenticated by the domain controller.
Use the
add-user.sh
script to add the management user for the host controller,HOST_NAME
. Make sure to answeryes
to the last prompt and note the secret value provided. This secret value will be used in the host controller configuration, and will appear similar to the line below:<secret value="SECRET_VALUE" />
Start the domain controller.
Specify the
host-master.xml
configuration file, which is preconfigured for a dedicated domain controller. Also, set thejboss.bind.address.management
property to make the domain controller visible to other machines.$ EAP_HOME/bin/domain.sh --host-config=host-master.xml -Djboss.bind.address.management=IP1
On Machine 2
Update the host configuration with the user credentials.
Edit
EAP_HOME/domain/configuration/host-slave.xml
and set the host name,HOST_NAME
, and secret value,SECRET_VALUE
.<host xmlns="urn:jboss:domain:8.0" name="HOST_NAME"> <management> <security-realms> <security-realm name="ManagementRealm"> <server-identities> <secret value="SECRET_VALUE" /> </server-identities> ...
Start the host controller.
Specify the
host-slave.xml
configuration file, which is preconfigured for a slave host controller. Also, set thejboss.domain.master.address
property to connect to the domain controller and thejboss.bind.address
property to set the host controller bind address.$ EAP_HOME/bin/domain.sh --host-config=host-slave.xml -Djboss.domain.master.address=IP1 -Djboss.bind.address=IP2
You can now manage the domain from the management CLI by specifying the domain controller address with the --controller
parameter when launching.
$ EAP_HOME/bin/jboss-cli.sh --connect --controller=IP1
Or you can manage the domain from the management console at http://IP1:9990
.
8.7. Managing Multiple JBoss EAP Versions
The latest version of JBoss EAP can manage JBoss EAP servers and host that are running an earlier version. See the appropriate section depending on which versions of JBoss EAP you need to manage.
8.7.1. Configure a JBoss EAP 7.x Domain Controller to Administer JBoss EAP 6 Instances
A JBoss EAP 7.1 domain controller can manage hosts and servers running JBoss EAP 6 as long as they are JBoss EAP 6.2 or later.
For a JBoss EAP 7.0 domain controller managing JBoss EAP 7.0 hosts that are on a different patch release, there are no configuration changes needed. However, the JBoss EAP 7.0 domain controller must be running a patch release that is equal to or higher than the versions on the host controllers that it manages.
Complete the following tasks to successfully manage JBoss EAP 6 instances in a JBoss EAP 7 managed domain.
Once these tasks are complete, you can manage your JBoss EAP 6 servers and configurations from the JBoss EAP 7 domain controller using the management CLI. Note that JBoss EAP 6 hosts will not be able to take advantage of new JBoss EAP 7 features, such as batch processing.
Because the management console is optimized for the latest version of JBoss EAP, you should not use it to update your JBoss EAP 6 hosts, servers, and profiles. Use the management CLI instead when managing your JBoss EAP 6 configurations from a JBoss EAP 7 managed domain.
8.7.1.1. Add the JBoss EAP 6 Configuration to the JBoss EAP 7 Domain Controller
To allow the domain controller to manage your JBoss EAP 6 servers, you must provide the JBoss EAP 6 configuration details in the JBoss EAP 7 domain configuration. You can do this by copying the JBoss EAP 6 profiles, socket binding groups, and server groups to the JBoss EAP 7 domain.xml
configuration file.
You will need to rename resources if any conflict with the existing names in the JBoss EAP 7 configuration. There are also some additional adjustments to make to ensure the proper behavior.
The following procedure uses the JBoss EAP 6 default
profile, standard-sockets
socket binding group, and main-server-group
server group.
-
Edit the JBoss EAP 7
domain.xml
configuration file. It is recommended to back up this file before editing. Copy the applicable JBoss EAP 6 profiles to the JBoss EAP 7
domain.xml
file.This procedure assumes that the JBoss EAP 6
default
profile was copied and renamed toeap6-default
.JBoss EAP 7
domain.xml
<profiles> ... <profile name="eap6-default"> ... </profile> </profiles>
Add the necessary extensions used by this profile.
If your JBoss EAP 6 profile uses subsystems that are no longer present in JBoss EAP 7, you must add the appropriate extensions to the JBoss EAP domain configuration.
JBoss EAP 7
domain.xml
<extensions> ... <extension module="org.jboss.as.configadmin"/> <extension module="org.jboss.as.threads"/> <extension module="org.jboss.as.web"/> <extensions>
Copy the applicable JBoss EAP 6 socket binding groups to the JBoss EAP 7
domain.xml
file.This procedure assumes that the JBoss EAP 6
standard-sockets
socket binding group was copied and renamed toeap6-standard-sockets
.JBoss EAP 7
domain.xml
<socket-binding-groups> ... <socket-binding-group name="eap6-standard-sockets" default-interface="public"> ... </socket-binding-group> </socket-binding-groups>
Copy the applicable JBoss EAP 6 server groups to the JBoss EAP 7
domain.xml
file.This procedure assumes that the JBoss EAP 6
main-server-group
server group was copied and renamed toeap6-main-server-group
. You must also update this server group to use the JBoss EAP 6 profile,eap6-default
, and the JBoss EAP 6 socket binding group,eap6-standard-sockets
.JBoss EAP 7
domain.xml
<server-groups> ... <server-group name="eap6-main-server-group" profile="eap6-default"> ... <socket-binding-group ref="eap6-standard-sockets"/> </server-group> </server-groups>
8.7.1.2. Update the Behavior for the JBoss EAP 6 Profiles
Additional updates to the profiles used by your JBoss EAP 6 instances are necessary depending on the JBoss EAP version and desired behavior. You may require additional changes depending on the subsystems and configuration that your existing JBoss EAP 6 instances use.
Start the JBoss EAP 7 domain controller and launch its management CLI to perform the following updates. These examples assume that the JBoss EAP 6 profile is eap6-default
.
Remove the
bean-validation
subsystem.JBoss EAP 7 moved bean validation functionality from the
ee
subsystem into its own subsystem,bean-validation
. If a JBoss EAP 7 domain controller sees a legacyee
subsystem, it adds the newbean-validation
subsystem. However, the JBoss EAP 6 hosts will not recognize this subsystem, so it must be removed.JBoss EAP 7 Domain Controller CLI
/profile=eap6-default/subsystem=bean-validation:remove
Set CDI 1.0 behavior.
This is only necessary if you want CDI 1.0 behavior for your JBoss EAP 6 servers, as opposed to behavior of later CDI versions used in JBoss EAP 7. If you want CDI 1.0 behavior, make the following updates to the
weld
subsystem.JBoss EAP 7 Domain Controller CLI
/profile=eap6-default/subsystem=weld:write-attribute(name=require-bean-descriptor,value=true) /profile=eap6-default/subsystem=weld:write-attribute(name=non-portable-mode,value=true)
Enable datasource statistics for JBoss EAP 6.2.
This is only necessary if your profile is being used by JBoss EAP 6.2 servers. JBoss EAP 6.3 introduced the
statistics-enabled
attribute, which defaults tofalse
to not collect statistics; however, the JBoss EAP 6.2 behavior was to collect statistics. If this profile is used by a JBoss EAP 6.2 host and a host running a newer JBoss EAP version, the behavior would be inconsistent between hosts, which is not allowed. Therefore, profiles intended for use by a JBoss EAP 6.2 host should make the following change for their datasources.JBoss EAP 7 Domain Controller CLI
/profile=eap6-default/subsystem=datasources/data-source=ExampleDS:write-attribute(name=statistics-enabled,value=true)
8.7.1.3. Set the Server Group for the JBoss EAP 6 Servers
If you renamed the server groups, you need to update the JBoss EAP 6 host configuration to use the new server groups specified in the JBoss EAP 7 configuration. This example uses the eap6-main-server-group
server group specified in the JBoss EAP 7 domain.xml
.
JBoss EAP 6 host-slave.xml
<servers> <server name="server-one" group="eap6-main-server-group"/> <server name="server-two" group="eap6-main-server-group"> <socket-bindings port-offset="150"/> </server> </servers>
A host cannot use features or configuration settings that were introduced in a newer version of JBoss EAP than the one the host is running.
8.7.1.4. Prevent the JBoss EAP 6 Instances from Receiving JBoss EAP 7 Updates
The domain controller in a managed domain forwards configuration updates to its host controllers. You must use the host-exclude
configuration to specify the resources that should be hidden from particular versions. Choose the appropriate preconfigured host-exclude
option for your JBoss EAP 6 version: EAP62
, EAP63
, EAP64
, or EAP64z
.
The active-server-groups
attribute of the host-exclude
configuration specifies the list of server groups that are used by a particular version. These server groups and their associated profiles, socket binding groups, and deployment resources will be available to hosts of this version, but all others will be hidden from these hosts.
This example assumes that the version is JBoss EAP 6.4.z and adds the JBoss EAP 6 server group eap6-main-server-group
as an active server group.
JBoss EAP 7 Domain Controller CLI
/host-exclude=EAP64z:write-attribute(name=active-server-groups,value=[eap6-main-server-group])
If necessary, you can specify additional socket binding groups used by your servers using the active-socket-binding-groups
attribute. This is only required for socket binding groups that are not associated with the server groups specified in active-server-groups
.
8.7.2. Configure a JBoss EAP 7.3 Domain Controller to Administer Previous Minor Releases of JBoss EAP
A JBoss EAP 7.3 domain controller can manage hosts and servers running from a previous minor release of JBoss EAP.
For a JBoss EAP 7.3 domain controller managing JBoss EAP 7.2 hosts that are on a different patch release, you do not need to make any configuration changes. However, you must run the JBoss EAP 7.2 domain controller on a patch release that is equal to or higher than the versions on the host controllers that it manages.
Complete the following tasks to successfully manage JBoss EAP 7.2 instances in a JBoss EAP 7.3 managed domain.
After you complete these tasks, you can manage your JBoss EAP 7.2 servers and configurations from the JBoss EAP 7.3 domain controller using the management CLI.
Because the management console is optimized for the latest version of JBoss EAP, you must use the CLI to manage your JBoss EAP 7.2 configurations from a JBoss EAP 7.3 managed domain. Do not use the management console to update JBoss EAP 7.2 hosts, servers, and profiles.
8.7.2.1. Add the JBoss EAP 7.2 Configuration to the JBoss EAP 7.3 Domain Controller
To enable the domain controller to manage your JBoss EAP 7.2 servers, you must provide the JBoss EAP 7.2 configuration details in the JBoss EAP 7.3 domain configuration. You can do this by copying the JBoss EAP 7.2 profiles, socket binding groups, and server groups to the JBoss EAP 7.3 domain.xml
configuration file.
You must rename a resource if its name conflicts with resource names in the JBoss EAP 7.3 configuration.
The following procedure uses the JBoss EAP 7.2 default
profile, standard-sockets
socket binding group, and main-server-group
server group.
Prerequisites
-
You have copied and renamed the JBoss EAP 7.2
default
profile toeap72-default
. -
You have copied and renamed the JBoss EAP 7.2
standard-sockets
socket binding group toeap72-standard-sockets
. You have copied and renamed the JBoss EAP 7.2
main-server-group
server group toeap72-main-server-group
.-
You have updated the server group to use the JBoss EAP 7.2 profile,
eap72-default
, and to use the JBoss EAP 7.2 socket binding group,eap72-standard-sockets
.
-
You have updated the server group to use the JBoss EAP 7.2 profile,
Procedure
Edit the JBoss EAP 7.3
domain.xml
configuration file.ImportantBack up the JBoss EAP 7.3
domain.xml
configuration file before you edit the file.Copy the applicable JBoss EAP 7.2 profiles to the JBoss EAP 7.3
domain.xml
file. For example:<profiles> ... <profile name="eap72-default"> ... </profile> </profiles>
Copy the applicable JBoss EAP 7.2 socket binding groups to the JBoss EAP 7.3
domain.xml
file. For example:<socket-binding-groups> ... <socket-binding-group name="eap72-standard-sockets" default-interface="public"> ... </socket-binding-group> </socket-binding-groups>
Copy the applicable JBoss EAP 7.2 server groups to the JBoss EAP 7.3
domain.xml
file. For example:<server-groups> ... <server-group name="eap72-main-server-group" profile="eap72-default"> ... <socket-binding-group ref="eap72-standard-sockets"/> </server-group> </server-groups>
8.7.2.2. Set the Server Group for the JBoss EAP7.2 Servers
If you renamed the server groups, you need to update the JBoss EAP 7.2 host configuration to use the new server groups specified in the JBoss EAP 7.3 configuration. This example uses the eap72-main-server-group
server group specified in the JBoss EAP 7.3 domain.xml
.
JBoss EAP 7.2 host-slave.xml
<servers> <server name="server-one" group="eap72-main-server-group"/> <server name="server-two" group="eap72-main-server-group"> <socket-bindings port-offset="150"/> </server> </servers>
A host cannot use features or configuration settings that were introduced in a newer version of JBoss EAP than the one the host is running.
8.7.2.3. Prevent the JBoss EAP 7.2 Instances from Receiving JBoss EAP 7.3 Updates
A managed domain controller forwards configuration updates to its host controllers, so that a JBoss EAP 7.2 host does not receive configuration and resources that are specific to JBoss EAP 7.3. You must configure the JBoss EAP 7.2 host to ignore those resources. You can do this by setting the ignore-unused-configuration
attribute on the JBoss EAP 7.2 host.
You can also use the host-exclude
configuration to instruct the domain controller to hide certain resources from hosts running certain JBoss EAP versions. For an example of how to use the host-exclude
configuration, see Prevent the JBoss EAP 6 Instances from Receiving JBoss EAP 7 Updates. For JBoss EAP 7.2, you use the EAP72
host-exclude
option.
Set the ignore-unused-configuration
attribute to true
in the JBoss EAP 7.2 host controller connection configuration to the remote domain controller.
JBoss EAP 7.2 host-slave.xml
<domain-controller> <remote security-realm="ManagementRealm" ignore-unused-configuration="true"> <discovery-options> <static-discovery name="primary" protocol="${jboss.domain.master.protocol:remote}" host="${jboss.domain.master.address}" port="${jboss.domain.master.port:9990}"/> </discovery-options> </remote> </domain-controller>
With this setting, only the server groups used by this host, and their associated profiles, socket binding groups, and deployment resources, are made available to the host. All other resources are ignored.
8.8. Managing JBoss EAP Profiles
8.8.1. About Profiles
JBoss EAP uses profiles as a way to organize which subsystems are available to a server. A profile consists of a collection of available subsystems along with each subsystem’s specific configuration. A profile with a large number of subsystems results in a server with a large set of capabilities. A profile with a small, focused set of subsystems will have fewer capabilities but a smaller footprint.
JBoss EAP comes with five predefined profiles that should satisfy most use cases:
- default
-
Includes commonly used subsystems, such as
logging
,security
,datasources
,infinispan
,webservices
,ee
,ejb3
,transactions
, and so on. - ha
-
Includes the subsystems provided in the default profile with the addition of the
jgroups
andmodcluster
subsystems for high availability - full
-
Includes the subsystems provided in the default profile with the addition of the
messaging-activemq
andiiop-openjdk
subsystems - full-ha
-
Includes the subsystems provided in the full profile with the addition of the
jgroups
andmodcluster
subsystems for high availability - load-balancer
- Includes the minimum subsystems necessary to use the built-in mod_cluster front-end load balancer to load balance other JBoss EAP instances.
JBoss EAP offers the ability to disable extensions or unload drivers and other services manually by removing the subsystems from the configuration of existing profiles. However, for most cases this is unnecessary. Since JBoss EAP dynamically loads subsystems as they are needed, if the server or an application never use a subsystem, it will not be loaded.
In cases where the existing profiles do not provide the necessary capabilities, JBoss EAP also provides the ability to define custom profiles as well.
8.8.2. Cloning a Profile
JBoss EAP allows you to create a new profile in a managed domain by cloning an existing profile. This will create a copy of the original profile’s configuration and subsystems.
A profile can be cloned using the management CLI by using the clone
operation on the desired profile to clone.
/profile=full-ha:clone(to-profile=cloned-profile)
You can also clone a profile from the management console by selecting the desired profile to clone and clicking Clone.
8.8.3. Creating Hierarchical Profiles
In a managed domain, you can create a hierarchy of profiles. This allows you to create a base profile with common extensions that other profiles can inherit.
The managed domain defines several profiles in domain.xml
. If multiple profiles use the same configuration for a particular subsystem, you can configure it in just one place instead of different profiles. The values in parent profiles cannot be overridden.
In addition, each profile must be self-sufficient. If an element or subsystem is referenced, then it must be defined in the profile where it is referenced.
A profile can include other profiles in a hierarchy using the management CLI by using the list-add
operation and providing the profile to include.
/profile=new-profile:list-add(name=includes, value=PROFILE_NAME)
Chapter 9. Configuring JVM Settings
Configuration of Java Virtual Machine (JVM) settings is different for a standalone JBoss EAP server, or a JBoss EAP server in a managed domain.
For a standalone JBoss EAP server instance, the server startup processes pass JVM settings to the JBoss EAP server at startup. These can be declared from the command line before launching JBoss EAP, or using the System Properties page under Configuration in the management console.
In a managed domain, JVM settings are declared in the host.xml
and domain.xml
configuration files, and can be configured at host, server group, or server levels.
System properties must be configured in JAVA_OPTS
to be used by JBoss EAP modules (such as the logging manager) during startup.
9.1. Configuring JVM Settings for a Standalone Server
JVM settings for standalone JBoss EAP server instances can be declared at runtime by setting the JAVA_OPTS
environment variable before starting the server.
An example of setting the JAVA_OPTS
environment variable on Linux is shown below.
$ export JAVA_OPTS="-Xmx1024M"
The same setting can be used in a Microsoft Windows environment:
set JAVA_OPTS="Xmx1024M"
Alternatively, JVM settings can be added to the standalone.conf
file, or standalone.conf.bat
for Windows Server, in the EAP_HOME/bin
folder, which contains examples of options to pass to the JVM.
Setting the JAVA_OPTS
environment variable will override the default values from standalone.conf
, which may cause JBoss EAP startup issues.
9.2. Configuring JVM Settings for a Managed Domain
In a JBoss EAP managed domain, you can define JVM settings at multiple levels. You can define custom JVM settings on a particular host, and then apply those settings to server groups, or to individual server instances.
By default, server groups and individual servers will inherit the JVM settings from their parent, but you can choose to override JVM settings at each level.
The JVM settings in domain.conf
, or domain.conf.bat
for Windows Server, are applied to the Java process of the JBoss EAP host controller, and not the individual JBoss EAP server instances controlled by that host controller.
9.2.1. Defining JVM Settings on a Host Controller
You can define JVM settings on a host controller, and apply those settings to server groups or individual servers. JBoss EAP comes with a default
JVM setting, but the following management CLI command demonstrates creating a new JVM setting named production_jvm
with some custom JVM settings and options.
/host=HOST_NAME/jvm=production_jvm:add(heap-size=2048m, max-heap-size=2048m, max-permgen-size=512m, stack-size=1024k, jvm-options=["-XX:-UseParallelGC"])
See Managed Domain JVM Configuration Attributes for descriptions of all available options.
You can also create and edit JVM settings in the JBoss EAP management console by navigating to Runtime → Hosts, choosing a host and clicking View, and selecting the JVMs tab.
These settings are stored in the within the <jvm>
tag in host.xml
.
9.2.2. Applying JVM Settings to a Server Group
When creating a server group, you can specify a JVM configuration that all servers in the group will use. The following management CLI commands demonstrate creating a server group name groupA
that uses the production_jvm
JVM settings that were shown in the previous example.
/server-group=groupA:add(profile=default, socket-binding-group=standard-sockets) /server-group=groupA/jvm=production_jvm:add
All servers in the server group will inherit JVM settings from production_jvm
.
You can also override specific JVM settings at the server group level. For example, to set a different heap size, you can use the following command:
/server-group=groupA/jvm=production_jvm:write-attribute(name=heap-size,value="1024m")
After applying the above command, the server group groupA
will inherit the JVM settings from production_jvm
, except for the heap size which has an overridden value of 1024m
.
See Managed Domain JVM Configuration Attributes for descriptions of all available options.
You can also edit server group JVM settings in the JBoss EAP management console by navigating to Runtime → Server Groups, choosing a server group and clicking View, and selecting the JVMs tab.
These settings for a server group are stored in domain.xml
.
9.2.3. Applying JVM Settings to an Individual Server
By default, an individual JBoss EAP server instance will inherit the JVM settings of the server group it belongs to. However, you can choose to override the inherited settings with another complete JVM setting definition from the host controller, or choose to override specific JVM settings.
For example, the following command overrides the JVM definition of the server group in the previous example, and sets the JVM settings for server-one
to the default
JVM definition:
/host=HOST_NAME/server-config=server-one/jvm=default:add
Also, similar to server groups, you can override specific JVM settings at the server level. For example, to set a different heap size, you can use the following command:
/host=HOST_NAME/server-config=server-one/jvm=default:write-attribute(name=heap-size,value="1024m")
See Managed Domain JVM Configuration Attributes for descriptions of all available options.
You can also edit server JVM settings in the JBoss EAP management console by navigating to Runtime → Hosts, choosing the host, clicking View on the server, and selecting the JVMs tab.
These settings for an individual server are stored in host.xml
.
9.3. Displaying the JVM Status
You can view the status of JVM resources, such as heap and thread usage, for standalone or managed domain servers from the management console. While statistics are not displayed in real time, you can click Refresh to provide an up-to-date overview of JVM resources.
To display the JVM status for a standalone JBoss EAP server:
- Navigate to the Runtime tab, select the server, and select Status.
To display the JVM status for a JBoss EAP server in a managed domain:
- Navigate to Runtime → Hosts, select the host and server, and select Status.
This shows the following heap usage information:
- Max
- The maximum amount of memory that can be used for memory management.
- Used
- The amount of used memory.
- Committed
- The amount of memory that is committed for the Java Virtual Machine to use.
Other information, such as JVM uptime and thread usage, is also available.
9.4. Tuning the JVM
For tips on optimizing JVM performance, see the JVM Tuning section of the Performance Tuning Guide.
Chapter 10. Mail Subsystem
10.1. Configuring the Mail Subsystem
The mail
subsystem allows you to configure mail sessions in JBoss EAP and then inject those sessions into applications using JNDI. It also supports configuration using the Jakarta EE @MailSessionDefinition
and @MailSessionDefinitions
annotations.
Configuring SMTP server for use in an application
Configure the SMTP server and the outbound socket binding using the following CLI commands, for example:
/socket-binding-group=standard-sockets/remote-destination-outbound-socket-binding=my-smtp:add(host=localhost, port=25)
/subsystem=mail/mail-session=mySession:add(jndi-name=java:jboss/mail/MySession)
/subsystem=mail/mail-session=mySession/server=smtp:add(outbound-socket-binding-ref=my-smtp, username=user, password=pass, tls=true)
Call the configured mail session within an application
@Resource(lookup="java:jboss/mail/MySession") private Session session;
For a full list of the attributes available for configuring mail sessions and servers, see Mail Subsystem Attributes.
10.2. Configuring Custom Transports
When using a standard mail server, such as POP3 or IMAP, the mail server has a set of attributes that can be defined. Some of these attributes are mandatory. The most important of these is the outbound-socket-binding-ref
, which is a reference to the outbound mail socket binding and is defined with a host address and port number.
Defining the outbound-socket-binding-ref
may not be the most effective solution for users who have their host configuration using multiple hosts for load balancing purposes. Standard Jakarta Mail does not support host configuration using multiple hosts for load balancing. Therefore, users who have this configuration using multiple hosts are required to implement custom mail transports. These custom mail transports do not require the outbound-socket-binding-ref
and allow custom host property formats.
You can configure custom mail transports from the management CLI.
Add a new mail session and specify the JNDI name.
/subsystem=mail/mail-session=mySession:add(jndi-name=java:jboss/mail/MySession)
Add an outbound socket binding and specify the host and port.
/socket-binding-group=standard-sockets/remote-destination-outbound-socket-binding=my-smtp-binding:add(host=localhost, port=25)
Add an SMTP server and specify the outbound socket binding, username, and password.
/subsystem=mail/mail-session=mySession/server=smtp:add(outbound-socket-binding-ref=my-smtp-binding, username=user, password=pass, tls=true)
You can configure a POP3 or IMAP server using similar steps.
POP3 Server
/socket-binding-group=standard-sockets/remote-destination-outbound-socket-binding=my-pop3-binding:add(host=localhost, port=110) /subsystem=mail/mail-session=mySession/server=pop3:add(outbound-socket-binding-ref=my-pop3-binding, username=user, password=pass)
IMAP Server
/socket-binding-group=standard-sockets/remote-destination-outbound-socket-binding=my-imap-binding:add(host=localhost, port=143) /subsystem=mail/mail-session=mySession/server=imap:add(outbound-socket-binding-ref=my-imap-binding, username=user, password=pass)
To use a custom server, create a custom mail server without an outbound socket binding. You can specify the host information in the properties definition of the custom mail server. For example:
/subsystem=mail/mail-session=mySession/custom=myCustomServer:add(username=user,password=pass, properties={"host" => "myhost", "my-property" =>"value"})
If you define a custom protocol, any property name that includes a period (.
) is considered a fully-qualified name and is passed directly. Any other format, such as my-property
, is translated in the following format: mail.server-name.my-property
.
The following XML is an example mail configuration that includes custom servers.
<subsystem xmlns="urn:jboss:domain:mail:3.0"> <mail-session name="default" jndi-name="java:jboss/mail/Default"> <smtp-server outbound-socket-binding-ref="mail-smtp"/> </mail-session> <mail-session name="myMail" from="user.name@domain.org" jndi-name="java:/Mail"> <smtp-server password="password" username="user" tls="true" outbound-socket-binding-ref="mail-smtp"/> <pop3-server outbound-socket-binding-ref="mail-pop3"/> <imap-server password="password" username="nobody" outbound-socket-binding-ref="mail-imap"/> </mail-session> <mail-session name="custom" jndi-name="java:jboss/mail/Custom" debug="true"> <custom-server name="smtp" password="password" username="username"> <property name="host" value="mail.example.com"/> </custom-server> </mail-session> <mail-session name="custom2" jndi-name="java:jboss/mail/Custom2" debug="true"> <custom-server name="pop3" outbound-socket-binding-ref="mail-pop3"> <property name="custom-prop" value="some-custom-prop-value"/> </custom-server> </mail-session> </subsystem>
10.3. Use a Credential Store for Passwords
In addition to providing clear-text passwords in the mail
subsystem, you can also use a credential store to provide passwords. The elytron
subsystem provides the ability to create credential stores to securely house and use your passwords throughout JBoss EAP. You can find more details on creating and using credential stores in the Credential Store section of How to Configure Server Security.
Using a Credential Store Using the Management CLI
/subsystem=mail/mail-session=mySession/server=smtp:add(outbound-socket-binding-ref=my-smtp-binding, username=user, credential-reference={store=exampleCS, alias=mail-session-pw}, tls=true)
The following is an example of how to specify a credential-reference
attribute that uses a clear-text password.
credential-reference={clear-text="MASK-Ewcyuqd/nP9;A1B2C3D4;351"}
Using a Credential Store Using the Management Console
- Access the management console. For more information, see the Management Console.
- Navigate to Configuration → Subsystems → Mail.
- Select the appropriate mail session and click View.
- Select Server and choose the appropriate mail session server. You can configure the credential reference in the Credential Reference tab and edit other attributes in the Attributes tab.
Chapter 11. Logging with JBoss EAP
JBoss EAP provides highly-configurable logging facilities for both its own internal use and for use by deployed applications. The logging
subsystem is based on JBoss LogManager and supports several third-party application logging frameworks in addition to JBoss Logging.
11.1. About Server Logging
11.1.1. Server Logging
By default, all JBoss EAP log entries are written to the server.log
file. The location of this file depends on your operating mode.
-
Standalone server:
EAP_HOME/standalone/log/server.log
-
Managed domain:
EAP_HOME/domain/servers/SERVER_NAME/log/server.log
This file is often referred to as the server log. For more information, see the Root Logger section.
11.1.2. Bootup Logging
During bootup, JBoss EAP logs information about the Java environment and the startup of each service. This log can be useful when troubleshooting. By default, all log entries are written to the server log.
Bootup logging configuration is specified in the logging.properties
configuration file, which is active until the JBoss EAP logging
subsystem is started and takes over. The location of this file depends on your operating mode.
-
Standalone server:
EAP_HOME/standalone/configuration/logging.properties
Managed domain:
There is a
logging.properties
file for the domain controller and for each server.-
Domain controller:
EAP_HOME/domain/configuration/logging.properties
-
Server:
EAP_HOME/domain/servers/SERVER_NAME/data/logging.properties
-
Domain controller:
It is recommended that you do not directly edit the logging.properties
file unless you know of a specific use case that requires it. Before doing so, it is recommended that you open a support case from the Red Hat Customer Portal.
Changes made manually to the logging.properties
file are overwritten on startup.
11.1.2.1. View Bootup Errors
When troubleshooting JBoss EAP, checking for errors that occurred during bootup should be one of the first steps taken. You can then use the information provided to diagnose and resolve their causes. Open a support case for assistance in troubleshooting bootup errors.
There are two methods of viewing bootup errors, each with its advantages. You can examine the server.log
file or read the boot errors using the read-boot-errors
management CLI command.
Examine the Server Log File
You can open the server.log
file to view any errors that occurred during bootup.
This method allows you to see each error message together with possibly related messages, allowing you to get more information about why an error might have occurred. It also allows you to see error messages in plain text format.
-
Open the file
server.log
in a file viewer. - Navigate to the end of the file.
-
Search backward for the
WFLYSRV0049
message identifier, which marks the start of the latest bootup sequence. -
Search the log from that point onward for instances of
ERROR
. Each instance will include a description of the error and list the modules involved.
The following is an example error description from the server.log
log file.
2016-03-16 14:32:01,627 ERROR [org.jboss.msc.service.fail] (MSC service thread 1-7) MSC000001: Failed to start service jboss.undertow.listener.default: org.jboss.msc.service.StartException in service jboss.undertow.listener.default: Could not start http listener at org.wildfly.extension.undertow.ListenerService.start(ListenerService.java:142) at org.jboss.msc.service.ServiceControllerImpl$StartTask.startService(ServiceControllerImpl.java:1948) at org.jboss.msc.service.ServiceControllerImpl$StartTask.run(ServiceControllerImpl.java:1881) at java.util.concurrent.ThreadPoolExecutor.runWorker(ThreadPoolExecutor.java:1142) at java.util.concurrent.ThreadPoolExecutor$Worker.run(ThreadPoolExecutor.java:617) at java.lang.Thread.run(Thread.java:745) Caused by: java.net.BindException: Address already in use ...
Read the Boot Errors from the Management CLI
You can use the read-boot-errors
management CLI command to view errors if a server starts but reported errors during bootup.
This method does not require access to the server’s file system, which is useful for anyone responsible for monitoring for errors who does not have file system access. Since it is a management CLI command, it can be used in a script. For example, you could write a script that starts multiple JBoss EAP instances, then checks for errors that occurred on bootup.
Run the following management CLI command.
/core-service=management:read-boot-errors
Any errors that occurred during bootup will be listed.
{ "outcome" => "success", "result" => [ { "failed-operation" => { "operation" => "add", "address" => [ ("subsystem" => "undertow"), ("server" => "default-server"), ("http-listener" => "default") ] }, "failure-description" => "{\"WFLYCTL0080: Failed services\" => {\"jboss.undertow.listener.default\" => \"org.jboss.msc.service.StartException in service jboss.undertow.listener.default: Could not start http listener Caused by: java.net.BindException: Address already in use\"}}", "failed-services" => {"jboss.undertow.listener.default" => "org.jboss.msc.service.StartException in service jboss.undertow.listener.default: Could not start http listener Caused by: java.net.BindException: Address already in use"} } ... ] }
11.1.3. Garbage Collection Logging
Garbage collection logging logs all garbage collection activity to plain text log files. These log files can be useful for diagnostic purposes. Garbage collection logging is enabled by default for a JBoss EAP standalone server on all supported configurations except IBM Java development kit.
The location of the garbage collection log is EAP_HOME/standalone/log/gc.log.DIGIT.current
. Garbage collection logs are limited to 3 MB each, and up to five files are rotated.
It is strongly recommended to leave garbage collection logging enabled as it can be useful in troubleshooting and should have minimal overhead. However, you can disable garbage collection logging for a standalone server by setting the GC_LOG
variable to false
before starting the server. For example:
$ export GC_LOG=false
$ EAP_HOME/bin/standalone.sh
11.1.4. Default Log File Locations
The following log files are created for the default logging configurations. The default configuration writes the server log files using periodic log handlers.
Log File | Description |
---|---|
EAP_HOME/standalone/log/server.log | Contains server log messages, including server startup messages. |
EAP_HOME/standalone/log/gc.log.DIGIT.current | Contains garbage collection details. |
Log File | Description |
---|---|
EAP_HOME/domain/log/host-controller.log | Contains log messages related to the startup of the host controller. |
EAP_HOME/domain/log/process-controller.log | Contains log messages related to the startup of the process controller. |
EAP_HOME/domain/servers/SERVER_NAME/log/server.log | Contains log messages for the named server, including server startup messages. |
11.1.5. Set the Default Locale of the Server
You can configure the default locale for JBoss EAP by setting JVM properties in the appropriate startup configuration file. The startup configuration file is EAP_HOME/bin/standalone.conf
for a standalone server or EAP_HOME/bin/domain.conf
for a managed domain.
For Windows Server, the JBoss EAP startup configuration files are standalone.conf.bat
and domain.conf.bat
.
Log messages that have been internationalized and localized will use this default locale. See the JBoss EAP Development Guide for information on creating internationalized log messages.
Set the Language
Specify the language by setting the user.language
property using the JAVA_OPTS
variable. For example, add the following line to the startup configuration file to set a French locale.
JAVA_OPTS="$JAVA_OPTS -Duser.language=fr"
Log messages that have been internationalized and localized will now output in French.
Set the Language and Country
In addition to the language, it may also be necessary to specify the country by setting the user.country
property. For example, add the following line to the startup configuration file to set the Portuguese locale for Brazil.
JAVA_OPTS="$JAVA_OPTS -Duser.language=pt -Duser.country=BR"
Log messages that have been internationalized and localized will now output in Brazilian Portuguese.
Set the Server Locale Using the org.jboss.logging.locale Property
You can configure the org.jboss.logging.locale
property to override the locale for messages logged using JBoss Logging, including any messages from JBoss EAP and its owned dependencies. Other dependencies, such as JSF, cannot get an overridden locale.
To start the JBoss EAP server with a different locale than the system default, you can edit EAP_HOME/bin/standalone.conf
or the EAP_HOME/bin/domain.conf
file, depending on your operating mode, and append the following command to set the JVM parameter for the required locale. The value of the property must be specified in the BCP 47 format. For example, to set Brazilian Portuguese, use pt-BR.
JAVA_OPTS="$JAVA_OPTS -Dorg.jboss.logging.locale=pt-BR"
11.2. Viewing Log Files
Viewing server and application logs is important in order to help diagnose errors, performance problems, and other issues. Some users may prefer to view logs directly on the server file system. For those who do not have direct access to the file system, or who prefer a graphical interface, JBoss EAP allows you to view logs from the management console. You can also view logs using the management CLI.
For a log to be accessible from one of the management interfaces, it must be located in the directory specified by the server’s jboss.server.log.dir
property and be defined as a file, periodic rotating, size rotating, or periodic size rotating log handler. RBAC role assignments are also honored, so a user logged in to the management console or CLI can only view logs that they are authorized to access.
View Logs from the Management Console
You can view logs directly from the management console.
- Select the Runtime tab and select the appropriate server.
- Select Log Files and choose a log file from the list.
- Click View to view and search log contents, or choose Download from the drop down to download the log file to your local file system.
The management console log viewer is not intended to be a text editor replacement for viewing very large log files, for example, greater than 100MB. You will be prompted for confirmation if you attempt to open a log file that is larger than 15MB. Opening a very large file in the management console could crash your browser, so you should always download large log files locally and open them in a text editor.
View Logs from the Management CLI
You can read the contents of log files from the management CLI using the read-log-file
command. By default, this displays the last 10
lines of the specified log file.
/subsystem=logging/log-file=LOG_FILE_NAME:read-log-file
In a managed domain, precede this command with /host=HOST_NAME/server=SERVER_NAME
.
You can use the following parameters to customize the log output.
- encoding
- The character encoding used to read the file.
- lines
-
The number of lines to read from the file. A value of
-1
will read all log lines. The default is10
. - skip
-
The number of lines to skip before reading. The default is
0
. - tail
-
Whether to read from the end of the file. Defaults to
true
.
For example, the following management CLI command reads the first 5
lines from the top of the server.log
log file.
/subsystem=logging/log-file=server.log:read-log-file(lines=5,tail=false)
This produces the following output.
{ "outcome" => "success", "result" => [ "2016-03-24 08:49:26,612 INFO [org.jboss.modules] (main) JBoss Modules version 1.5.1.Final-redhat-1", "2016-03-24 08:49:26,788 INFO [org.jboss.msc] (main) JBoss MSC version 1.2.6.Final-redhat-1", "2016-03-24 08:49:26,863 INFO [org.jboss.as] (MSC service thread 1-7) WFLYSRV0049: JBoss EAP 7.0.0.GA (WildFly Core 2.0.13.Final-redhat-1) starting", "2016-03-24 08:49:27,973 INFO [org.jboss.as.server] (Controller Boot Thread) WFLYSRV0039: Creating http management service using socket-binding (management-http)", "2016-03-24 08:49:27,994 INFO [org.xnio] (MSC service thread 1-1) XNIO version 3.3.4.Final-redhat-1" ] }
11.3. About the Logging Subsystem
The JBoss EAP logging
subsystem is configured using a system of log categories and log handlers. Log categories define what messages to capture. Log handlers define how to deal with those messages, for example, writing to a disk or sending to the console.
Logging profiles allow uniquely-named sets of logging configuration to be created and assigned to applications independent of any other logging configuration. The configuration of logging profiles is almost identical to the main logging
subsystem.
11.3.1. Root Logger
The JBoss EAP root logger captures all log messages, of the specified log level or higher, sent to the server that are not captured by a log category.
By default, the root logger is configured to use a console and a periodic log handler. The periodic log handler is configured to write to the server.log
file. This file is often referred to as the server log.
See Configuring the Root Logger for more information.
11.3.2. Log Categories
A log category defines a set of log messages to capture and one or more log handlers that will process the messages.
The log messages to capture are defined by the specified Java package of origin and log level. Messages from classes in that package and of that log level or higher are captured by the log category and sent to the specified log handlers.
Although the log category is typically the Java package and class name, it can be any name specified by the Logger.getLogger(LOGGER_NAME)
method.
Log categories can optionally use the log handlers of the root logger instead of their own handlers.
See Configuring Log Categories for more information.
11.3.3. Log Handlers
Log handlers define how captured log messages are recorded. The available log handler types are console, file, periodic, size, periodic size, syslog, custom, and async.
A log handler must be added to at least one logger in order to be active.
Log Handler Types
- Console
-
A console log handler writes log messages to either the host operating system’s standard out,
stdout
, or standard error,stderr
, stream. These messages are displayed when JBoss EAP is run from a command line prompt. The messages from a console log handler are not saved unless the operating system is configured to capture the standard out or standard error stream. - File
- A file log handler writes log messages to a specified file.
- Periodic
- A periodic log handler writes log messages to a named file until a specified period of time has elapsed. Once the time period has passed, the file is renamed by appending the specified timestamp and the handler continues to write into a newly created log file with the original name.
- Size
- A size log handler writes log messages to a named file until the file reaches a specified size. When the file reaches a specified size, it is renamed with a numeric suffix and the handler continues to write into a newly created log file with the original name. Each size log handler must specify the maximum number of files to be kept in this fashion.
- Periodic Size
A periodic size log handler writes log messages to a named file until the file reaches the specified size or the specified time period has passed. Then, the file is renamed and the handler continues to write to a newly created log file with the original name.
This is a combination of the periodic and size log handlers and supports their combined attributes.
- Syslog
- A syslog handler can be used to send messages to a remote logging server. This allows multiple applications to send their log messages to the same server, where they can all be parsed together.
- Socket
- A socket log handler can be used to send log messages over a socket to a remote logging server. This can be a TCP or UDP socket.
- Custom
-
A custom log handler enables you to configure new types of log handlers that have been implemented. A custom handler must be implemented as a Java class that extends
java.util.logging.Handler
and be contained in a module. You can also use a Log4J appender as a custom log handler. - Async
- An async log handler is a wrapper log handler that provides asynchronous behavior for one or more other log handlers. This is useful for log handlers that may have high latency or other performance problems such as writing a log file to a network file system.
For details on configuring each of these log handlers, see the Configuring Log Handlers section.
11.3.4. Log Levels
A log level is an enumerated value that indicates the nature and severity of a log message. As a developer, you can specify the level of a given log message using the appropriate method of your chosen logging framework to send the message.
JBoss EAP supports all the log levels used by the supported application logging frameworks. The most commonly used log levels from lowest to highest are TRACE
, DEBUG
, INFO
, WARN
, ERROR
, and FATAL
.
Log levels are used by log categories and handlers to limit the messages they are responsible for. Each log level has an assigned numeric value that indicates its order relative to other log levels. Log categories and handlers are assigned a log level, and they only process log messages of that level or higher. For example a log handler with the level of WARN
will only record messages of the levels WARN
, ERROR
, and FATAL
.
Supported Log Levels
Log Level | Value | Description |
---|---|---|
ALL | Integer.MIN_VALUE | Provides all log messages. |
FINEST | 300 | - |
FINER | 400 | - |
TRACE | 400 |
|
DEBUG | 500 |
|
FINE | 500 | - |
CONFIG | 700 | - |
INFO | 800 |
|
WARN | 900 |
|
WARNING | 900 | - |
ERROR | 1000 |
|
SEVERE | 1000 | - |
FATAL | 1100 |
|
OFF | Integer.MAX_VALUE | Does not display any log message. |
ALL
is the lowest log level and includes messages of all log levels. This provides the most amount of logging.
FATAL
is the highest log level and only includes messages of that level. This provides the least amount of logging.
11.3.5. Log Formatters
Formatters are used to format a log message. A formatter can be assigned to a logging handler using the named-formatter
attribute. For more information on logging handler configuration, see Configuring Log Handlers.
The logging subsystem includes four types of formatters:
Pattern Formatter
A pattern formatter is used to format log messages in plain text. In addition to using the formatter as the named-formatter
attribute of log handlers, it can also be used as a formatter
attribute, without the need to create the formatter resource first. See Format Characters for Pattern Formatter for more information on the pattern syntax.
See Configure a Pattern Formatter for information on how to configure a pattern formatter.
JSON Formatter
A JSON formatter is used to format log messages in JSON.
See Configure a JSON Log Formatter for information on how to configure a JSON formatter.
XML Formatter
The XML log formatter is used to format log messages in XML.
See Configure an XML Log Formatter for information on how to configure an XML log formatter.
Custom Formatter
A custom formatter to be used with handlers. Note that most log records are formatted in the printf format. Formatters may require invocation of the org.jboss.logmanager.ExtLogRecord#getFormattedMessage()
for the message to be properly formatted.
See Configure a Custom Log Formatter for information on how to configure a custom log formatter.
11.3.6. Filter Expressions
Filter expressions, configured using the filter-spec
attribute, are used to record log messages based on various criteria. Filter checking is always done on a raw unformatted message. You can include a filter for a logger or handler, but the logger filter takes precedence over the filter put on a handler.
A filter-spec
specified for the root logger is not inherited by other loggers. Instead a filter-spec
must be specified per handler.
Filter Expression | Description |
---|---|
accept | Accept all log messages. |
deny | Deny all log messages. |
not[filter expression] | Returns the inverted value of a single filter expression. For example:
|
all[filter expression] | Returns concatenated value from a comma-separated list of filter expressions. For example:
|
any[filter expression] | Returns one value from a comma-separated list of filter expressions. For example:
|
levelChange[level] | Updates the log record with the specified level. For example:
|
levels[levels] | Filters log messages with a level listed in the comma-separated list of levels. For example:
|
levelRange[minLevel,maxLevel] |
Filters log messages within the specified level range. The
|
match["pattern"] | Filters log messages using the provided regular expression. For example:
|
substitute["pattern","replacement value"] | A filter that replaces the first match to the pattern (first argument) with the replacement text (second argument). For example:
|
substituteAll["pattern","replacement value"] | A filter which replaces all matches of the pattern (first argument) with the replacement text (second argument). For example:
|
When configuring the filter expression using the management CLI, be sure to escape commas and quotation marks in the filter text so that the value is correctly processed as a string. You must precede commas and quotation marks with a backslash (\
) and wrap the entire expression in quotation marks. Below is an example that properly escapes substituteAll("WFLY","YLFW")
.
/subsystem=logging/console-handler=CONSOLE:write-attribute(name=filter-spec, value="substituteAll(\"WFLY\"\,\"YLFW\")")
11.3.7. Implicit Logging Dependencies
By default, the JBoss EAP logging
subsystem adds implicit logging API dependencies to deployments. You can control whether these implicit dependencies are added to deployments by using the add-logging-api-dependencies
attribute, which is true
by default.
Using the management CLI, you can set the add-logging-api-dependencies
attribute to false
so that the implicit logging API dependencies will not be added to deployments.
/subsystem=logging:write-attribute(name=add-logging-api-dependencies, value=false)
For information on the implicit dependencies for the logging
subsystem, see the Implicit Module Dependencies section in the JBoss EAP Development Guide.
11.4. Configuring Log Categories
This section shows you how to configure log categories using the management CLI. You can also configure log categories using the management console by navigating to Configuration → Subsystems → Logging → Configuration, clicking View, and selecting Categories.
The main tasks you will perform to configure a log category are:
If you are configuring this log category for a logging profile, the start of the command would be /subsystem=logging/logging-profile=LOGGING_PROFILE_NAME/
instead of /subsystem=logging/
.
Additionally, if you are running in a managed domain, precede the commands with /profile=PROFILE_NAME
.
Add a Log Category
The log category name is defined by the Java package of origin. Messages from classes in that package will be captured as long as they adhere to the other settings, for example, the log level.
/subsystem=logging/logger=LOG_CATEGORY:add
Configure Log Category Settings
Depending on your needs, you may need to set one or more of the following log category attributes. For a full list of available log category attributes and their descriptions, see Log Category Attributes.
Set the log level.
Set the appropriate log level for the log category. The default is
ALL
. See Log Levels for all available options./subsystem=logging/logger=LOG_CATEGORY:write-attribute(name=level,value=LEVEL)
Set whether this category should use the log handlers of the root logger.
By default, log categories will use the handlers of the root logger in addition to its own. Set the
use-parent-handlers
attribute tofalse
if the log category should use only its assigned handlers./subsystem=logging/logger=LOG_CATEGORY:write-attribute(name=use-parent-handlers,value=USE_PARENT_HANDLERS)
Set the filter expression.
Set the expression for filtering log messages for the log category. Be sure to escape any commas and quotation marks and surround with quotation marks. For example, the
FILTER_EXPRESSION
replaceable variable below would need to be replaced with"not(match(\"WFLY\"))"
for a filter expression ofnot(match("WFLY"))
./subsystem=logging/logger=LOG_CATEGORY:write-attribute(name=filter-spec, value=FILTER_EXPRESSION)
See the Filter Expressions section for more information on available filter expressions.
Assign a Handler
Assign a log handler to the log category.
/subsystem=logging/logger=LOG_CATEGORY:add-handler(name=LOG_HANDLER_NAME)
Remove a Log Category
A log category can be removed with the remove
operation.
/subsystem=logging/logger=LOG_CATEGORY:remove
11.5. Configuring Log Handlers
Log handlers define how captured log messages are recorded. See the appropriate section for configuring the type of log handler that you need.
11.5.1. Configure a Console Log Handler
This section shows you how to configure a console log handler using the management CLI. You can also configure console log handlers using the management console by navigating to Configuration → Subsystems → Logging → Configuration, clicking View, and selecting Handler → Console Handler.
The main tasks you will perform to configure a console log handler are:
If you are configuring this log handler for a logging profile, the start of the command would be /subsystem=logging/logging-profile=LOGGING_PROFILE_NAME/
instead of /subsystem=logging/
.
Additionally, if you are running in a managed domain, precede the commands with /profile=PROFILE_NAME
.
Add a Console Log Handler
/subsystem=logging/console-handler=CONSOLE_HANDLER_NAME:add
Configure Console Log Handler Settings
Depending on your needs, you may need to set one or more of the following console log handler attributes. For a full list of available console log handler attributes and their descriptions, see Console Log Handler Attributes.
Set the log level.
Set the appropriate log level for the handler. The default is
ALL
. See Log Levels for all available options./subsystem=logging/console-handler=CONSOLE_HANDLER_NAME:write-attribute(name=level,value=LEVEL)
Set the target.
Set the target for the handler, which can be one of
System.out
,System.err
, orconsole
. The default isSystem.out
./subsystem=logging/console-handler=CONSOLE_HANDLER_NAME:write-attribute(name=target,value=TARGET)
Set the encoding.
Set the encoding for the handler, for example,
utf-8
./subsystem=logging/console-handler=CONSOLE_HANDLER_NAME:write-attribute(name=encoding,value=ENCODING)
Set the log formatter.
Set the formatter string for the handler. For example, the default format string is
%d{HH:mm:ss,SSS} %-5p [%c] (%t) %s%e%n
. Be sure to enclose theFORMAT
value in quotation marks./subsystem=logging/console-handler=CONSOLE_HANDLER_NAME:write-attribute(name=formatter,value=FORMAT)
NoteUse the
named-formatter
attribute if you want to reference a saved formatter.Set auto flush.
Set whether to automatically flush after each write. The default value is
true
./subsystem=logging/console-handler=CONSOLE_HANDLER_NAME:write-attribute(name=autoflush,value=AUTO_FLUSH)
Set the filter expression.
Set the expression for filtering log messages for the handler. Be sure to escape any commas and quotation marks and surround with quotation marks. For example, the
FILTER_EXPRESSION
replaceable variable below would need to be replaced with"not(match(\"WFLY\"))"
for a filter expression ofnot(match("WFLY"))
./subsystem=logging/console-handler=CONSOLE_HANDLER_NAME:write-attribute(name=filter-spec, value=FILTER_EXPRESSION)
See the Filter Expressions section for more information on available filter expressions.
Assign the Console Log Handler to a Logger
In order for a log handler to be active, you must assign it to a logger.
The following management CLI command assigns the console log handler to the root logger.
/subsystem=logging/root-logger=ROOT:add-handler(name=CONSOLE_HANDLER_NAME)
The following management CLI command assigns the console log handler to a logger whose name is specified by CATEGORY
.
/subsystem=logging/logger=CATEGORY:add-handler(name=CONSOLE_HANDLER_NAME)
Remove a Console Log Handler
A log handler can be removed with the remove
operation. A log handler cannot be removed if it is currently assigned to a logger or async log handler.
/subsystem=logging/console-handler=CONSOLE_HANDLER_NAME:remove
11.5.2. Configure a File Log Handler
This section shows you how to configure a file log handler using the management CLI. You can also configure file log handlers using the management console by navigating to Configuration → Subsystems → Logging → Configuration, clicking View, and selecting Handler → File Handler.
The main tasks you will perform to configure a file log handler are:
If you are configuring this log handler for a logging profile, the start of the command would be /subsystem=logging/logging-profile=LOGGING_PROFILE_NAME/
instead of /subsystem=logging/
.
Additionally, if you are running in a managed domain, precede the commands with /profile=PROFILE_NAME
.
Add a File Log Handler
When adding a file log handler, you must specify the file path using the file
attribute, which is comprised of the path
and relative-to
attributes. Use the path
attribute to set the file path for the log, including the name, for example my-log.log
. Optionally, use the relative-to
attribute to set that the path
is relative to a named path, for example jboss.server.log.dir
.
/subsystem=logging/file-handler=FILE_HANDLER_NAME:add(file={path=FILE_PATH,relative-to=RELATIVE_TO_PATH})
Configure File Log Handler Settings
Depending on your needs, you may need to set one or more of the following file log handler attributes. For a full list of available file log handler attributes and their descriptions, see File Log Handler Attributes.
Set the log level.
Set the appropriate log level for the handler. The default is
ALL
. See Log Levels for all available options./subsystem=logging/file-handler=FILE_HANDLER_NAME:write-attribute(name=level,value=LEVEL)
Set the append behavior.
By default, JBoss EAP will append log messages to the same file when the server is restarted. You can set the
append
attribute tofalse
to have the file overwritten upon server restart./subsystem=logging/file-handler=FILE_HANDLER_NAME:write-attribute(name=append,value=APPEND)
Set the encoding.
Set the encoding for the handler, for example,
utf-8
./subsystem=logging/file-handler=FILE_HANDLER_NAME:write-attribute(name=encoding,value=ENCODING)
Set the log formatter.
Set the formatter string for the handler. For example, the default format string is
%d{HH:mm:ss,SSS} %-5p [%c] (%t) %s%e%n
. Be sure to enclose theFORMAT
value in quotation marks./subsystem=logging/file-handler=FILE_HANDLER_NAME:write-attribute(name=formatter,value=FORMAT)
NoteUse the
named-formatter
attribute if you want to reference a saved formatter.Set auto flush.
Set whether to automatically flush after each write. The default value is
true
./subsystem=logging/file-handler=FILE_HANDLER_NAME:write-attribute(name=autoflush,value=AUTO_FLUSH)
Set the filter expression.
Set the expression for filtering log messages for the handler. Be sure to escape any commas and quotation marks and surround with quotation marks. For example, the
FILTER_EXPRESSION
replaceable variable below would need to be replaced with"not(match(\"WFLY\"))"
for a filter expression ofnot(match("WFLY"))
./subsystem=logging/file-handler=FILE_HANDLER_NAME:write-attribute(name=filter-spec, value=FILTER_EXPRESSION)
See the Filter Expressions section for more information on available filter expressions.
Assign the File Log Handler to a Logger
In order for a log handler to be active, you must assign it to a logger.
The following management CLI command assigns the file log handler to the root logger.
/subsystem=logging/root-logger=ROOT:add-handler(name=FILE_HANDLER_NAME)
The following management CLI command assigns the file log handler to a logger whose name is specified by CATEGORY
.
/subsystem=logging/logger=CATEGORY:add-handler(name=FILE_HANDLER_NAME)
Remove a File Log Handler
A log handler can be removed with the remove
operation. A log handler cannot be removed if it is currently assigned to a logger or async log handler.
/subsystem=logging/file-handler=FILE_HANDLER_NAME:remove
11.5.3. Configure a Periodic Rotating Log Handler
This section shows you how to configure a periodic rotating log handler using the management CLI. You can also configure periodic log handlers using the management console by navigating to Configuration → Subsystems → Logging → Configuration, clicking View, and selecting Handler → Periodic Handler.
The main tasks you will perform to configure a periodic log handler are:
If you are configuring this log handler for a logging profile, the start of the command would be /subsystem=logging/logging-profile=LOGGING_PROFILE_NAME/
instead of /subsystem=logging/
.
Additionally, if you are running in a managed domain, precede the commands with /profile=PROFILE_NAME
.
Add a Periodic Log Handler
When adding a periodic log handler, you must specify the file path using the file
attribute, which is comprised of the path
and relative-to
attributes. Use the path
attribute to set the file path for the log, including the name, for example my-log.log
. Optionally, use the relative-to
attribute to set that the path
is relative to a named path, for example jboss.server.log.dir
.
You must also set the suffix for rotated logs using the suffix
attribute. This must be in a format that can be understood by java.text.SimpleDateFormat
, for example .yyyy-MM-dd-HH
. The period of the rotation is automatically calculated based on this suffix.
/subsystem=logging/periodic-rotating-file-handler=PERIODIC_HANDLER_NAME:add(file={path=FILE_PATH,relative-to=RELATIVE_TO_PATH},suffix=SUFFIX)
Configure Periodic Log Handler Settings
Depending on your needs, you may need to set one or more of the following periodic log handler attributes. For a full list of available periodic log handler attributes and their descriptions, see Periodic Log Handler Attributes.
Set the log level.
Set the appropriate log level for the handler. The default is
ALL
. See Log Levels for all available options./subsystem=logging/periodic-rotating-file-handler=PERIODIC_HANDLER_NAME:write-attribute(name=level,value=LEVEL)
Set the append behavior.
By default, JBoss EAP will append log messages to the same file when the server is restarted. You can set the
append
attribute tofalse
to have the file overwritten upon server restart./subsystem=logging/periodic-rotating-file-handler=PERIODIC_HANDLER_NAME:write-attribute(name=append,value=APPEND)
Set the encoding.
Set the encoding for the handler, for example,
utf-8
./subsystem=logging/periodic-rotating-file-handler=PERIODIC_HANDLER_NAME:write-attribute(name=encoding,value=ENCODING)
Set the log formatter.
Set the formatter string for the handler. For example, the default format string is
%d{HH:mm:ss,SSS} %-5p [%c] (%t) %s%e%n
. Be sure to enclose theFORMAT
value in quotation marks./subsystem=logging/periodic-rotating-file-handler=PERIODIC_HANDLER_NAME:write-attribute(name=formatter,value=FORMAT)
NoteUse the
named-formatter
attribute if you want to reference a saved formatter.Set auto flush.
Set whether to automatically flush after each write. The default value is
true
./subsystem=logging/periodic-rotating-file-handler=PERIODIC_HANDLER_NAME:write-attribute(name=autoflush,value=AUTO_FLUSH)
Set the filter expression.
Set the expression for filtering log messages for the handler. Be sure to escape any commas and quotation marks and surround with quotation marks. For example, the
FILTER_EXPRESSION
replaceable variable below would need to be replaced with"not(match(\"WFLY\"))"
for a filter expression ofnot(match("WFLY"))
./subsystem=logging/periodic-rotating-file-handler=PERIODIC_HANDLER_NAME:write-attribute(name=filter-spec, value=FILTER_EXPRESSION)
See the Filter Expressions section for more information on available filter expressions.
Assign the Periodic Log Handler to a Logger
In order for a log handler to be active, you must assign it to a logger.
The following management CLI command assigns the periodic log handler to the root logger.
/subsystem=logging/root-logger=ROOT:add-handler(name=PERIODIC_HANDLER_NAME)
The following management CLI command assigns the periodic log handler to a logger whose name is specified by CATEGORY
.
/subsystem=logging/logger=CATEGORY:add-handler(name=PERIODIC_HANDLER_NAME)
Remove a Periodic Log Handler
A log handler can be removed with the remove
operation. A log handler cannot be removed if it is currently assigned to a logger or async log handler.
/subsystem=logging/periodic-rotating-file-handler=PERIODIC_HANDLER_NAME:remove
11.5.4. Configure a Size Rotating Log Handler
This section shows you how to configure a size rotating log handler using the management CLI. You can also configure size log handlers using the management console by navigating to Configuration → Subsystems → Logging → Configuration, clicking View, and selecting Handler → Size Handler.
The main tasks you will perform to configure a size log handler are:
If you are configuring this log handler for a logging profile, the start of the command would be /subsystem=logging/logging-profile=LOGGING_PROFILE_NAME/
instead of /subsystem=logging/
.
Additionally, if you are running in a managed domain, precede the commands with /profile=PROFILE_NAME
.
Add a Size Log Handler
When adding a size log handler, you must specify the file path using the file
attribute, which is comprised of the path
and relative-to
attributes. Use the path
attribute to set the file path for the log, including the name, for example my-log.log
. Optionally, use the relative-to
attribute to set that the path
is relative to a named path, for example jboss.server.log.dir
.
/subsystem=logging/size-rotating-file-handler=SIZE_HANDLER_NAME:add(file={path=FILE_PATH,relative-to=RELATIVE_TO_PATH})
Configure Size Log Handler Settings
Depending on your needs, you may need to set one or more of the following size log handler attributes. For a full list of available size log handler attributes and their descriptions, see Size Log Handler Attributes.
Set the log level.
Set the appropriate log level for the handler. The default is
ALL
. See Log Levels for all available options./subsystem=logging/size-rotating-file-handler=SIZE_HANDLER_NAME:write-attribute(name=level,value=LEVEL)
Set the suffix for rotated logs.
Set the suffix string, which is in a format which can be understood by
java.text.SimpleDateFormat
, for example.yyyy-MM-dd-HH
. The period of the rotation is automatically calculated based on this suffix./subsystem=logging/size-rotating-file-handler=SIZE_HANDLER_NAME:write-attribute(name=suffix, value=SUFFIX)
Set the rotation size.
Set the maximum size that the file can reach before being rotated. The default is
2m
for 2 megabytes./subsystem=logging/size-rotating-file-handler=SIZE_HANDLER_NAME:write-attribute(name=rotate-size, value=ROTATE_SIZE)
Set the maximum number of backup logs to keep.
Set the number of backups to keep. The default is
1
./subsystem=logging/size-rotating-file-handler=SIZE_HANDLER_NAME:write-attribute(name=max-backup-index, value=MAX_BACKUPS)
Set whether to rotate the log on boot.
By default, a new log file is not created on server restart. You can set this to
true
to rotate the log on server restart./subsystem=logging/size-rotating-file-handler=SIZE_HANDLER_NAME:write-attribute(name=rotate-on-boot, value=ROTATE_ON_BOOT)
Set the append behavior.
By default, JBoss EAP will append log messages to the same file when the server is restarted. You can set the
append
attribute tofalse
to have the file overwritten upon server restart./subsystem=logging/size-rotating-file-handler=SIZE_HANDLER_NAME:write-attribute(name=append,value=APPEND)
Set the encoding.
Set the encoding for the handler, for example,
utf-8
./subsystem=logging/size-rotating-file-handler=SIZE_HANDLER_NAME:write-attribute(name=encoding,value=ENCODING)
Set the log formatter.
Set the formatter string for the handler. For example, the default format string is
%d{HH:mm:ss,SSS} %-5p [%c] (%t) %s%e%n
. Be sure to enclose theFORMAT
value in quotation marks./subsystem=logging/size-rotating-file-handler=SIZE_HANDLER_NAME:write-attribute(name=formatter,value=FORMAT)
NoteUse the
named-formatter
attribute if you want to reference a saved formatter.Set auto flush.
Set whether to automatically flush after each write. The default value is
true
./subsystem=logging/size-rotating-file-handler=SIZE_HANDLER_NAME:write-attribute(name=autoflush,value=AUTO_FLUSH)
Set the filter expression.
Set the expression for filtering log messages for the handler. Be sure to escape any commas and quotation marks and surround with quotation marks. For example, the
FILTER_EXPRESSION
replaceable variable below would need to be replaced with"not(match(\"WFLY\"))"
for a filter expression ofnot(match("WFLY"))
./subsystem=logging/size-rotating-file-handler=SIZE_HANDLER_NAME:write-attribute(name=filter-spec, value=FILTER_EXPRESSION)
See the Filter Expressions section for more information on available filter expressions.
Assign the Size Log Handler to a Logger
In order for a log handler to be active, you must assign it to a logger.
The following management CLI command assigns the size log handler to the root logger.
/subsystem=logging/root-logger=ROOT:add-handler(name=SIZE_HANDLER_NAME)
The following management CLI command assigns the size log handler to a logger whose name is specified by CATEGORY
.
/subsystem=logging/logger=CATEGORY:add-handler(name=SIZE_HANDLER_NAME)
Remove a Size Log Handler
A log handler can be removed with the remove
operation. A log handler cannot be removed if it is currently assigned to a logger or async log handler.
/subsystem=logging/size-rotating-file-handler=SIZE_HANDLER_NAME:remove
11.5.5. Configure a Periodic Size Rotating Log Handler
This section shows you how to configure a periodic size rotating log handler using the management CLI. You can also configure periodic size log handlers using the management console by navigating to Configuration → Subsystems → Logging → Configuration, clicking View, and selecting Handler → Periodic Size Handler.
The main tasks you will perform to configure a periodic size log handler are:
If you are configuring this log handler for a logging profile, the start of the command would be /subsystem=logging/logging-profile=LOGGING_PROFILE_NAME/
instead of /subsystem=logging/
.
Additionally, if you are running in a managed domain, precede the commands with /profile=PROFILE_NAME
.
Add a Periodic Size Log Handler
When adding a periodic size log handler, you must specify the file path using the file
attribute, which is comprised of the path
and relative-to
attributes. Use the path
attribute to set the file path for the log, including the name, for example my-log.log
. Optionally, use the relative-to
attribute to set that the path
is relative to a named path, for example jboss.server.log.dir
.
You must also set the suffix for rotated logs using the suffix
attribute. This must be in a format that can be understood by java.text.SimpleDateFormat
, for example .yyyy-MM-dd-HH
. The period of the rotation is automatically calculated based on this suffix.
/subsystem=logging/periodic-size-rotating-file-handler=PERIODIC_SIZE_HANDLER_NAME:add(file={path=FILE_PATH,relative-to=RELATIVE_TO_PATH},suffix=SUFFIX)
Configure Periodic Size Log Handler Settings
Depending on your needs, you may need to set one or more of the following periodic size log handler attributes. For a full list of available periodic size log handler attributes and their descriptions, see Periodic Size Log Handler Attributes.
Set the log level.
Set the appropriate log level for the handler. The default is
ALL
. See Log Levels for all available options./subsystem=logging/periodic-size-rotating-file-handler=PERIODIC_SIZE_HANDLER_NAME:write-attribute(name=level,value=LEVEL)
Set the rotation size.
Set the maximum size that the file can reach before being rotated. The default is
2m
for 2 megabytes./subsystem=logging/periodic-size-rotating-file-handler=PERIODIC_SIZE_HANDLER_NAME:write-attribute(name=rotate-size, value=ROTATE_SIZE)
Set the maximum number of backup logs to keep.
Set the number of backups to keep. The default is
1
./subsystem=logging/periodic-size-rotating-file-handler=PERIODIC_SIZE_HANDLER_NAME:write-attribute(name=max-backup-index, value=MAX_BACKUPS)
Set whether to rotate the log on boot.
By default, a new log file is not created on server restart. You can set this to
true
to rotate the log on server restart./subsystem=logging/periodic-size-rotating-file-handler=PERIODIC_SIZE_HANDLER_NAME:write-attribute(name=rotate-on-boot, value=ROTATE_ON_BOOT)
Set the append behavior.
By default, JBoss EAP will append log messages to the same file when the server is restarted. You can set the
append
attribute tofalse
to have the file overwritten upon server restart./subsystem=logging/periodic-size-rotating-file-handler=PERIODIC_SIZE_HANDLER_NAME:write-attribute(name=append,value=APPEND)
Set the encoding.
Set the encoding for the handler, for example,
utf-8
./subsystem=logging/periodic-size-rotating-file-handler=PERIODIC_SIZE_HANDLER_NAME:write-attribute(name=encoding,value=ENCODING)
Set the log formatter.
Set the formatter string for the handler. For example, the default format string is
%d{HH:mm:ss,SSS} %-5p [%c] (%t) %s%e%n
. Be sure to enclose theFORMAT
value in quotation marks./subsystem=logging/periodic-size-rotating-file-handler=PERIODIC_SIZE_HANDLER_NAME:write-attribute(name=formatter,value=FORMAT)
NoteUse the
named-formatter
attribute if you want to reference a saved formatter.Set auto flush.
Set whether to automatically flush after each write. The default value is
true
./subsystem=logging/periodic-size-rotating-file-handler=PERIODIC_SIZE_HANDLER_NAME:write-attribute(name=autoflush,value=AUTO_FLUSH)
Set the filter expression.
Set the expression for filtering log messages for the handler. Be sure to escape any commas and quotation marks and surround with quotation marks. For example, the
FILTER_EXPRESSION
replaceable variable below would need to be replaced with"not(match(\"WFLY\"))"
for a filter expression ofnot(match("WFLY"))
./subsystem=logging/periodic-size-rotating-file-handler=PERIODIC_SIZE_HANDLER_NAME:write-attribute(name=filter-spec, value=FILTER_EXPRESSION)
See the Filter Expressions section for more information on available filter expressions.
Assign the Periodic Size Log Handler to a Logger
In order for a log handler to be active, you must assign it to a logger.
The following management CLI command assigns the periodic size log handler to the root logger.
/subsystem=logging/root-logger=ROOT:add-handler(name=PERIODIC_SIZE_HANDLER_NAME)
The following management CLI command assigns the periodic size log handler to a logger whose name is specified by CATEGORY
.
/subsystem=logging/logger=CATEGORY:add-handler(name=PERIODIC_SIZE_HANDLER_NAME)
Remove a Periodic Size Log Handler
A log handler can be removed with the remove
operation. A log handler cannot be removed if it is currently assigned to a logger or async log handler.
/subsystem=logging/periodic-size-rotating-file-handler=PERIODIC_SIZE_HANDLER_NAME:remove
11.5.6. Configure a Syslog Handler
This section shows you how to configure a syslog handler using the management CLI, which can be used to send messages to a remote logging server that supports the Syslog protocol, either RFC-3164 or RFC-5424. You can also configure syslog handlers using the management console by navigating to Configuration → Subsystems → Logging → Configuration, clicking View, and selecting Handler → Syslog Handler.
The main tasks you will perform to configure a syslog handler are:
If you are configuring this log handler for a logging profile, the start of the command would be /subsystem=logging/logging-profile=LOGGING_PROFILE_NAME/
instead of /subsystem=logging/
.
Additionally, if you are running in a managed domain, precede the commands with /profile=PROFILE_NAME
.
Add a Syslog Handler
/subsystem=logging/syslog-handler=SYSLOG_HANDLER_NAME:add
Configure Syslog Handler Settings
Depending on your needs, you may need to set one or more of the following syslog handler attributes. For a full list of available syslog handler attributes and their descriptions, see Syslog Handler Attributes.
Set the log level for the handler. The default level is
ALL
. See Log Levels for all available options./subsystem=logging/syslog-handler=SYSLOG_HANDLER_NAME:write-attribute(name=level,value=LEVEL)
Set the name of the application that is logging. The default name is
java
./subsystem=logging/syslog-handler=SYSLOG_HANDLER_NAME:write-attribute(name=app-name,value=APP_NAME)
Set the address of the syslog server. The default address is
localhost
./subsystem=logging/syslog-handler=SYSLOG_HANDLER_NAME:write-attribute(name=server-address,value=SERVER_ADDRESS)
Set the port of the syslog server. The default port is
514
./subsystem=logging/syslog-handler=SYSLOG_HANDLER_NAME:write-attribute(name=port,value=PORT)
Set the syslog format, as defined by an RFC specification. The default format is
RFC5424
./subsystem=logging/syslog-handler=SYSLOG_HANDLER_NAME:write-attribute(name=syslog-format,value=SYSLOG_FORMAT)
Specify the
named-formatter
attribute to format the message of the syslog payload./subsystem=logging/syslog-handler=SYSLOG_HANDLER_NAME:write-attribute(name=named-formatter, value=FORMATTER_NAME)
Assign the Syslog Handler to a Logger
In order for a log handler to be active, you must assign it to a logger.
The following management CLI command assigns the syslog handler to the root logger.
/subsystem=logging/root-logger=ROOT:add-handler(name=SYSLOG_HANDLER_NAME)
The following management CLI command assigns the syslog handler to a logger whose name is specified by CATEGORY
.
/subsystem=logging/logger=CATEGORY:add-handler(name=SYSLOG_HANDLER_NAME)
Remove a Syslog Handler
A log handler can be removed with the remove
operation. A log handler cannot be removed if it is currently assigned to a logger or async log handler.
/subsystem=logging/syslog-handler=SYSLOG_HANDLER_NAME:remove
11.5.7. Configure a Socket Log Handler
This section shows you how to configure a socket log handler using the management CLI, which can be used to send messages over a socket. This can be a TCP or UDP socket. You can also configure socket log handlers using the management console by navigating to Configuration → Subsystems → Logging → Configuration, clicking View, and selecting Handler → Socket Handler.
If the server is started in admin-only mode, log messages are discarded.
The main tasks you will perform to configure a socket log handler are:
If you are configuring this log handler for a logging profile, the start of the command would be /subsystem=logging/logging-profile=LOGGING_PROFILE_NAME/
instead of /subsystem=logging/
.
Additionally, if you are running in a managed domain, precede the commands with /profile=PROFILE_NAME
.
Add the Socket Binding
Define either a remote-destination-outbound-socket-binding
or local-destination-outbound-socket-binding
as the socket binding to use.
/socket-binding-group=SOCKET_BINDING_GROUP/remote-destination-outbound-socket-binding=SOCKET_BINDING_NAME:add(host=HOST, port=PORT)
Add the Log Formatter
Define a log formatter to use, such as a JSON formatter.
/subsystem=logging/json-formatter=FORMATTER:add
Add the Socket Log Handler
When adding the socket log handler, you must specify the socket binding and formatter to use.
/subsystem=logging/socket-handler=SOCKET_HANDLER_NAME:add(outbound-socket-binding-ref=SOCKET_BINDING_NAME,named-formatter=FORMATTER)
Configure Socket Log Handler Settings
Depending on your needs, you may need to set one or more of the following socket log handler attributes. For a full list of available socket log handler attributes and their descriptions, see Socket Log Handler Attributes.
Set the protocol.
Set the protocol to use. The default is
TCP
./subsystem=logging/socket-handler=SOCKET_HANDLER_NAME:write-attribute(name=protocol,value=PROTOCOL)
Set the log level.
Set the appropriate log level for the handler. The default is
ALL
. See Log Levels for all available options./subsystem=logging/socket-handler=SOCKET_HANDLER_NAME:write-attribute(name=level,value=LEVEL)
NoteDuring server startup, log messages handled by a socket log handler are queued until the socket binding is configured and the
logging
subsystem is initialized. If the log level is set to a low level, such asTRACE
orDEBUG
, this can result in large memory consumption during startup.Set the encoding.
Set the encoding for the handler, for example,
utf-8
./subsystem=logging/socket-handler=SOCKET_HANDLER_NAME:write-attribute(name=encoding,value=ENCODING)
Set auto flush.
Set whether to automatically flush after each write. The default value is
true
./subsystem=logging/socket-handler=SOCKET_HANDLER_NAME:write-attribute(name=autoflush,value=AUTO_FLUSH)
Set the filter expression.
Set the expression for filtering log messages for the handler. Be sure to escape any commas and quotation marks and surround with quotation marks. For example, the
FILTER_EXPRESSION
replaceable variable below would need to be replaced with"not(match(\"WFLY\"))"
for a filter expression ofnot(match("WFLY"))
./subsystem=logging/socket-handler=SOCKET_HANDLER_NAME:write-attribute(name=filter-spec, value=FILTER_EXPRESSION)
See the Filter Expressions section for more information on available filter expressions.
Assign the Socket Log Handler to a Logger
In order for a log handler to be active, you must assign it to a logger.
The following management CLI command assigns the socket log handler to the root logger.
/subsystem=logging/root-logger=ROOT:add-handler(name=SOCKET_HANDLER_NAME)
The following management CLI command assigns the socket log handler to a logger whose name is specified by CATEGORY
.
/subsystem=logging/logger=CATEGORY:add-handler(name=SOCKET_HANDLER_NAME)
Remove a Socket Log Handler
A log handler can be removed with the remove
operation. A log handler cannot be removed if it is currently assigned to a logger or async log handler.
/subsystem=logging/socket-handler=SOCKET_HANDLER_NAME:remove
Send Log Messages Over a Socket Using SSL/TLS
The following steps show an example of how to set up a socket log handler to send log messages over a socket using the SSL_TCP
protocol. This example configures a keystore, trust manager, and client SSL context in the elytron
subsystem to be used by the socket log handler. Log messages from the root logger are sent over the specified socket, formatted by a JSON formatter.
For more information on configuring Elytron components, see Elytron Subsystem in How to Configure Server Security for JBoss EAP.
Configure the Elytron settings.
Add the keystore.
/subsystem=elytron/key-store=log-server-ks:add(path=/path/to/keystore.jks, type=JKS, credential-reference={clear-text=mypassword})
Add the trust manager.
/subsystem=elytron/trust-manager=log-server-tm:add(key-store=log-server-ks)
Add the client SSL context.
/subsystem=elytron/client-ssl-context=log-server-context:add(trust-manager=log-server-tm, protocols=["TLSv1.2"])
Add the socket binding.
/socket-binding-group=standard-sockets/remote-destination-outbound-socket-binding=log-server:add(host=localhost, port=4560)
Add a JSON formatter.
/subsystem=logging/json-formatter=json:add
Add the socket log handler.
/subsystem=logging/socket-handler=log-server-handler:add(named-formatter=json, level=INFO, outbound-socket-binding-ref=log-server, protocol=SSL_TCP, ssl-context=log-server-context)
Assign the log handler to the root logger.
/subsystem=logging/root-logger=ROOT:add-handler(name=log-server-handler)
11.5.8. Configure a Custom Log Handler
This section shows you how to configure a custom log handler using the management CLI. You can also configure custom log handlers using the management console by navigating to Configuration → Subsystems → Logging → Configuration, clicking View, and selecting Handler → Custom Handler.
The main tasks you will perform to configure a custom log handler are:
If you are configuring this log handler for a logging profile, the start of the command would be /subsystem=logging/logging-profile=LOGGING_PROFILE_NAME/
instead of /subsystem=logging/
.
Additionally, if you are running in a managed domain, precede the commands with /profile=PROFILE_NAME
.
Add a Custom Log Handler
When adding a custom log handler, you must specify the Java class of the handler and the JBoss EAP module in which it is contained. The class must extend java.util.logging.Handler
.
You must have already created a module containing the custom logger or this command will fail.
/subsystem=logging/custom-handler=CUSTOM_HANDLER_NAME:add(class=CLASS_NAME,module=MODULE_NAME)
Configure Custom Log Handler Settings
Depending on your needs, you may need to set one or more of the following custom log handler attributes. For a full list of available custom log handler attributes and their descriptions, see Custom Log Handler Attributes.
Set the log level.
Set the appropriate log level for the handler. The default is
ALL
. See Log Levels for all available options./subsystem=logging/custom-handler=CUSTOM_HANDLER_NAME:write-attribute(name=level,value=LEVEL)
Set the properties.
Set the necessary properties for the log handler. The properties must be accessible using a setter method.
/subsystem=logging/custom-handler=CUSTOM_HANDLER_NAME:write-attribute(name=properties.PROPERTY_NAME,value=PROPERTY_VALUE)
Set the encoding.
Set the encoding for the handler, for example,
utf-8
./subsystem=logging/custom-handler=CUSTOM_HANDLER_NAME:write-attribute(name=encoding,value=ENCODING)
Set the log formatter.
Set the formatter string for the handler. For example, the default format string is
%d{HH:mm:ss,SSS} %-5p [%c] (%t) %s%e%n
. Be sure to enclose theFORMAT
value in quotation marks./subsystem=logging/custom-handler=CUSTOM_HANDLER_NAME:write-attribute(name=formatter,value=FORMAT)
NoteUse the
named-formatter
attribute if you want to reference a saved formatter.Set the filter expression.
Set the expression for filtering log messages for the handler. Be sure to escape any commas and quotation marks and surround with quotation marks. For example, the
FILTER_EXPRESSION
replaceable variable below would need to be replaced with"not(match(\"WFLY\"))"
for a filter expression ofnot(match("WFLY"))
./subsystem=logging/custom-handler=CUSTOM_HANDLER_NAME:write-attribute(name=filter-spec, value=FILTER_EXPRESSION)
See the Filter Expressions section for more information on available filter expressions.
Assign the Custom Log Handler to a Logger
In order for a log handler to be active, you must assign it to a logger.
The following management CLI command assigns the custom log handler to the root logger.
/subsystem=logging/root-logger=ROOT:add-handler(name=CUSTOM_HANDLER_NAME)
The following management CLI command assigns the custom log handler to a logger whose name is specified by CATEGORY
.
/subsystem=logging/logger=CATEGORY:add-handler(name=CUSTOM_HANDLER_NAME)
Remove a Custom Log Handler
A log handler can be removed with the remove
operation. A log handler cannot be removed if it is currently assigned to a logger or async log handler.
/subsystem=logging/custom-handler=CUSTOM_HANDLER_NAME:remove
11.5.9. Configure an Async Log Handler
This section shows you how to configure an async log handler using the management CLI. You can also configure async log handlers using the management console by navigating to Configuration → Subsystems → Logging → Configuration, clicking View, and selecting Handler → Async Handler.
The main tasks you will perform to configure an async log handler are:
If you are configuring this log handler for a logging profile, the start of the command would be /subsystem=logging/logging-profile=LOGGING_PROFILE_NAME/
instead of /subsystem=logging/
.
Additionally, if you are running in a managed domain, precede the commands with /profile=PROFILE_NAME
.
Add an Async Log Handler
When adding an async log handler, you must specify the queue length. This is the maximum number of log requests that can be held in queue.
/subsystem=logging/async-handler=ASYNC_HANDLER_NAME:add(queue-length=QUEUE_LENGTH)
Add a Sub-handler
You can add one or more handlers as sub-handlers for this async log handler. Note that the handlers must already exist in the configuration or this command will fail.
/subsystem=logging/async-handler=ASYNC_HANDLER_NAME:add-handler(name=HANDLER_NAME)
Configure Async Log Handler Settings
Depending on your needs, you may need to set one or more of the following async log handler attributes. For a full list of available async log handler attributes and their descriptions, see Async Log Handler Attributes.
Set the log level.
Set the appropriate log level for the handler. The default is
ALL
. See Log Levels for all available options./subsystem=logging/async-handler=ASYNC_HANDLER_NAME:write-attribute(name=level,value=LEVEL)
Set the overflow action.
Set the action to take when overflowing. The default value is
BLOCK
, which means that threads will block in the event of a full queue. You can change this value toDISCARD
, which means that log messages will be discarded in the event of a full queue./subsystem=logging/async-handler=ASYNC_HANDLER_NAME:write-attribute(name=overflow-action,value=OVERFLOW_ACTION)
Set the filter expression.
Set the expression for filtering log messages for the handler. Be sure to escape any commas and quotation marks and surround with quotation marks. For example, the
FILTER_EXPRESSION
replaceable variable below would need to be replaced with"not(match(\"WFLY\"))"
for a filter expression ofnot(match("WFLY"))
./subsystem=logging/async-handler=ASYNC_HANDLER_NAME:write-attribute(name=filter-spec, value=FILTER_EXPRESSION)
See the Filter Expressions section for more information on available filter expressions.
Assign the Async Log Handler to a Logger
In order for a log handler to be active, you must assign it to a logger.
The following management CLI command assigns the async log handler to the root logger.
/subsystem=logging/root-logger=ROOT:add-handler(name=ASYNC_HANDLER_NAME)
The following management CLI command assigns the async log handler to a logger whose name is specified by CATEGORY
.
/subsystem=logging/logger=CATEGORY:add-handler(name=ASYNC_HANDLER_NAME)
Remove an Async Log Handler
A log handler can be removed with the remove
operation. A log handler cannot be removed if it is currently assigned to a logger.
/subsystem=logging/async-handler=ASYNC_HANDLER_NAME:remove
11.6. Configuring the Root Logger
The root logger captures all log messages, of the specified log level or higher, sent to the server that are not captured by a log category.
This section shows you how to configure the root logger using the management CLI. You can also configure the root logger using the management console by navigating to Configuration → Subsystems → Logging → Configuration, clicking View, and selecting Root Logger.
Configure the Root Logger
If you are configuring this log handler for a logging profile, the start of the command would be /subsystem=logging/logging-profile=LOGGING_PROFILE_NAME/
instead of /subsystem=logging/
.
Additionally, if you are running in a managed domain, precede the commands with /profile=PROFILE_NAME
.
Assign log handlers to the root logger.
Add a log handler.
/subsystem=logging/root-logger=ROOT:add-handler(name=LOG_HANDLER_NAME)
Remove a log handler.
/subsystem=logging/root-logger=ROOT:remove-handler(name=LOG_HANDLER_NAME)
Set the log level.
/subsystem=logging/root-logger=ROOT:write-attribute(name=level,value=LEVEL)
For a full list of available root logger attributes and their descriptions, see Root Logger Attributes.
11.7. Configuring Log Formatters
A log formatter defines the appearance of log messages from that handler. The logging
subsystem allows you to configure the following types of log formatters:
11.7.1. Configure a Pattern Formatter
You can create a named pattern formatter that can be used across log handlers to format log messages.
If you are configuring this log formatter for a logging profile, the start of the command would be /subsystem=logging/logging-profile=LOGGING_PROFILE_NAME/
instead of /subsystem=logging/
.
Additionally, if you are running in a managed domain, precede the commands with /profile=PROFILE_NAME
.
Create a Pattern Formatter
When defining a pattern formatter, you provide a pattern string to use to format log messages. For more information on the pattern syntax, see Format Characters for Pattern Formatter.
/subsystem=logging/pattern-formatter=PATTERN_FORMATTER_NAME:add(pattern=PATTERN)
For example, the default configuration uses the following log formatter string for logging messages to the server log: %d{yyyy-MM-dd HH:mm:ss,SSS} %-5p [%c] (%t) %s%e%n
. This creates log messages formatted like the one below.
2016-03-18 15:49:32,075 INFO [org.jboss.as] (Controller Boot Thread) WFLYSRV0051: Admin console listening on http://127.0.0.1:9990
You can also define a color map to assign a color to different log levels. The format is a comma-separated list of LEVEL:COLOR
.
-
Valid levels:
finest
,finer
,fine
,config
,trace
,debug
,info
,warning
,warn
,error
,fatal
,severe
-
Valid colors:
black
,green
,red
,yellow
,blue
,magenta
,cyan
,white
,brightblack
,brightred
,brightgreen
,brightblue
,brightyellow
,brightmagenta
,brightcyan
,brightwhite
/subsystem=logging/pattern-formatter=PATTERN_FORMATTER_NAME:write-attribute(name=color-map,value="LEVEL:COLOR,LEVEL:COLOR")
You can also configure pattern log formatters using the management console:
- Open the management console in a browser.
- Choose Configuration → Subsystems → Logging.
- Select Configuration and then click View.
- Select Formatter and then choose the Pattern Formatter option.
11.7.2. Configure a JSON Log Formatter
You can create a JSON log formatter to format log messages in JSON.
If you are configuring this log formatter for a logging profile, the start of the command would be /subsystem=logging/logging-profile=LOGGING_PROFILE_NAME/
instead of /subsystem=logging/
.
Additionally, if you are running in a managed domain, precede the commands with /profile=PROFILE_NAME
.
Add a JSON Log Formatter
/subsystem=logging/json-formatter=JSON_FORMATTER_NAME:add(pretty-print=true, exception-output-type=formatted)
This creates log messages formatted like the one below.
{ "timestamp": "2018-10-18T13:53:43.031-04:00", "sequence": 62, "loggerClassName": "org.jboss.as.server.logging.ServerLogger_$logger", "loggerName": "org.jboss.as", "level": "INFO", "message": "WFLYSRV0025: JBoss EAP 7.3.0.GA (WildFly Core 10.0.0.Final-redhat-20190924) started in 5672ms - Started 495 of 679 services (331 services are lazy, passive or on-demand)", "threadName": "Controller Boot Thread", "threadId": 22, "mdc": { }, "ndc": "", "hostName": "localhost.localdomain", "processName": "jboss-modules.jar", "processId": 7461 }
Add a Logstash JSON log formatter
You can modify the JSON log formatter output keys and add static metadata. The primary purpose of the JSON log formatter is to format log messages in JSON. Logstash consumes this JSON output and searches for the fields, @timestamp
and @version
. The following example creates a JSON log formatter that formats messages for Logstash.
/subsystem=logging/json-formatter=logstash:add(exception-output-type=formatted, key-overrides=[timestamp="@timestamp"], meta-data=[@version=1])
You can use the JSON formatter attributes as explained below:
-
The
key-overrides
attribute can be used to override the names of the keys defined. -
The exceptions can be formatted as objects by setting the
exception-output-type
attribute toformatted
. -
The exception stack trace can be included by setting the
exception-output-type
attribute todetailed
. -
The exceptions can be formatted as objects and stack traces can be included by setting the
exception-output-type
todetailed-and-formatted
. -
The metadata can be added to log records using the
meta-data
attribute.
For more information on the JSON formatter attributes, see JSON Log Formatter Attributes.
You can also configure JSON log formatters using the management console:
- Open the management console in a browser.
- Choose Configuration → Subsystems → Logging.
- Select Configuration and then click View.
- Select Formatter and then choose the JSON Formatter option.
11.7.3. Configure an XML Log Formatter
You can create an XML log formatter to format log messages in XML.
If you are configuring this log formatter for a logging profile, the start of the command would be /subsystem=logging/logging-profile=LOGGING_PROFILE_NAME/
instead of /subsystem=logging/
.
Additionally, if you are running in a managed domain, precede the commands with /profile=PROFILE_NAME
.
Add an XML Log Formatter
/subsystem=logging/xml-formatter=XML_FORMATTER_NAME:add(pretty-print=true, exception-output-type=detailed-and-formatted)
This creates log message formatted like the one below.
<record> <timestamp>2018-10-18T13:55:53.419-04:00</timestamp> <sequence>62</sequence> <loggerClassName>org.jboss.as.server.logging.ServerLogger_$logger</loggerClassName> <loggerName>org.jboss.as</loggerName> <level>INFO</level> <message>WFLYSRV0025: JBoss EAP 7.3.0.GA (WildFly Core 10.0.0.Final-redhat-20190924) started in 6271ms - Started 495 of 679 services (331 services are lazy, passive or on-demand)</message> <threadName>Controller Boot Thread</threadName> <threadId>22</threadId> <mdc> </mdc> <ndc></ndc> <hostName>localhost.localdomain</hostName> <processName>jboss-modules.jar</processName> <processId>7790</processId> </record>
Add a Key Override XML Log Formatter
/subsystem=logging/xml-formatter=XML_FORMATTER_NAME:add(pretty-print=true, print-namespace=true, namespace-uri="urn:custom:1.0", key-overrides={message=msg, record=logRecord, timestamp=date}, print-details=true)
You can use the XML formatter attributes as explained below:
-
The
key-overrides
attribute can be used to override the names of the keys defined. -
The exceptions can be formatted as objects by setting the
exception-output-type
attribute toformatted
. -
The exception stack trace can be included by setting the
exception-output-type
attribute todetailed
. -
The exceptions can be formatted as objects and stack traces can be included by setting the
exception-output-type
todetailed-and-formatted
. -
The metadata can be added to log records using the
meta-data
attribute.
For more information on the XML formatter attributes, see XML Log Formatter Attributes.
You can also configure XML log formatters using the management console:
- Open the management console in a browser.
- Choose Configuration → Subsystems → Logging.
- Select Configuration and then click View.
- Select Formatter and then choose the XML Formatter option.
11.7.4. Configure a Custom Log Formatter
You can create a custom log formatter that can be used across log handlers to format log messages.
This section shows you how to configure a custom log formatter using the management CLI.
Configure a Custom Log Formatter
If you are configuring this log formatter for a logging profile, the start of the command would be /subsystem=logging/logging-profile=LOGGING_PROFILE_NAME/
instead of /subsystem=logging/
.
Additionally, if you are running in a managed domain, precede the commands with /profile=PROFILE_NAME
.
Add the custom log formatter.
When adding a custom log formatter, you must specify the Java class of the formatter and the JBoss EAP module in which it is contained. The class must extend
java.util.logging.Formatter
.NoteYou must have already created a module containing the custom formatter or this command will fail.
/subsystem=logging/custom-formatter=CUSTOM_FORMATTER_NAME:add(class=CLASS_NAME, module=MODULE_NAME)
Set the necessary properties for the log formatter.
The properties must be accessible using a setter method.
/subsystem=logging/custom-formatter=CUSTOM_FORMATTER_NAME:write-attribute(name=properties.PROPERTY_NAME,value=PROPERTY_VALUE)
Assign the custom formatter to a log handler.
The following management CLI command assigns a custom formatter to be used by a periodic rotating file handler.
/subsystem=logging/periodic-rotating-file-handler=FILE_HANDLER_NAME:write-attribute(name=named-formatter, value=CUSTOM_FORMATTER_NAME)
Example Custom XML Formatter
The following example configures a custom XML formatter. It uses the java.util.logging.XMLFormatter
class provided in the org.jboss.logmanager
module and assigns it to the console log handler.
/subsystem=logging/custom-formatter=custom-xml-formatter:add(class=java.util.logging.XMLFormatter, module=org.jboss.logmanager) /subsystem=logging/console-handler=CONSOLE:write-attribute(name=named-formatter, value=custom-xml-formatter)
A log message using this formatter would be formatted as below.
<record> <date>2016-03-23T12:58:13</date> <millis>1458752293091</millis> <sequence>93963</sequence> <logger>org.jboss.as</logger> <level>INFO</level> <class>org.jboss.as.server.BootstrapListener</class> <method>logAdminConsole</method> <thread>22</thread> <message>WFLYSRV0051: Admin console listening on http://%s:%d</message> <param>127.0.0.1</param> <param>9990</param> </record>
Configure a Custom Log Formatter Using the Management Console
You can also configure log formatters using the management console.
- Open the management console in a browser.
- Choose Configuration → Subsystems → Logging.
- Select Configuration and then click View.
- Select Formatter and then choose the Custom Formatter option.
11.8. About Application Logging
Logging for applications can be configured using the JBoss EAP logging
subsystem or on a per-deployment basis.
See About the Logging Subsystem for using JBoss EAP log categories and handlers for capturing log messages.
For more information on application logging, such as supported application logging frameworks and configuring per-deployment logging, see the Logging chapter in the JBoss EAP Development Guide.
11.8.1. Per-deployment Logging
Per-deployment logging allows a developer to configure the logging configuration for their application in advance. When the application is deployed, logging begins according to the defined configuration. The log files created through this configuration contain information only about the behavior of the application.
If the per-deployment logging configuration is not done, the configuration from logging
subsystem is used for all the applications as well as the server.
This approach has advantages and disadvantages over using system-wide logging. An advantage is that the administrator of the JBoss EAP instance does not need to configure any other logging than the server logging. A disadvantage is that the per-deployment logging configuration is read only on server startup, and so cannot be changed at runtime.
For instructions on using per-deployment logging in your applications, see Add Per-deployment Logging to an Application in the JBoss EAP Development Guide.
11.8.1.1. Disable Per-deployment Logging
You can disable per-deployment logging in one of the following ways:
Set the
use-deployment-logging-config
attribute tofalse
.The
use-deployment-logging-config
attribute controls whether or not your deployment is scanned for per-deployment logging. This defaults totrue
by default. You can set this attribute tofalse
to disable per-deployment logging./subsystem=logging:write-attribute(name=use-deployment-logging-config,value=false)
Exclude the
logging
subsystem using ajboss-deployment-structure.xml
file.For instructions, see Exclude a Subsystem from a Deployment in the JBoss EAP Development Guide.
11.8.2. Logging Profiles
Logging profiles are independent sets of logging configurations that can be assigned to deployed applications. As with the regular logging
subsystem, a logging profile can define handlers, categories, and a root logger, but it cannot refer to configurations in other profiles or the main logging
subsystem. The design of logging profiles mimics the logging
subsystem for ease of configuration.
Logging profiles allow administrators to create logging configurations that are specific to one or more applications without affecting any other logging configurations. Because each profile is defined in the server configuration, the logging configuration can be changed without requiring that the affected applications be redeployed.
Each logging profile can have:
- A unique name. This value is required.
- Any number of log handlers.
- Any number of log categories.
- Up to one root logger.
An application can specify a logging profile to use in its MANIFEST.MF
file, using the Logging-Profile
attribute.
11.8.2.1. Configure a Logging Profile
A logging profile can be configured with log handlers, categories, and a root logger. Configuring a logging profile uses the same syntax as configuring the logging
subsystem, except for the following differences:
-
The root configuration path is
/subsystem=logging/logging-profile=NAME
. - A logging profile cannot contain other logging profiles.
The
logging
subsystem has the following attributes that are not available for a logging profile:-
add-logging-api-dependencies
-
use-deployment-logging-config
-
Creating and Configuring a Logging Profile
The following procedure uses the management CLI to create a logging profile and set a file handler and logger category. Logging profiles can also be configured using the management console by navigating to Configuration → Subsystems → Logging → Logging Profiles.
Create the logging profile.
/subsystem=logging/logging-profile=PROFILE_NAME:add
Create the file handler.
/subsystem=logging/logging-profile=PROFILE_NAME/file-handler=FILE_HANDLER_NAME:add(file={path=>"LOG_NAME.log", "relative-to"=>"jboss.server.log.dir"})
/subsystem=logging/logging-profile=PROFILE_NAME/file-handler=FILE_HANDLER_NAME:write-attribute(name="level", value="DEBUG")
See File Log Handler Attributes for the list of file handler attributes.
Create the logger category.
/subsystem=logging/logging-profile=PROFILE_NAME/logger=CATEGORY_NAME:add(level=TRACE)
See Log Category Attributes for the list of log category attributes.
Assign the file handler to the category.
/subsystem=logging/logging-profile=PROFILE_NAME/logger=CATEGORY_NAME:add-handler(name="FILE_HANDLER_NAME")
You can then set the logging profile to use by an application in its MANIFEST.MF
file. For more information, see Specify a Logging Profile in an Application in the JBoss EAP Development Guide.
11.8.2.2. Example Logging Profile Configuration
This example shows the configuration of a logging profile and the application that uses it. It shows the management CLI commands, the resulting XML, and the application’s MANIFEST.MF
file.
The example logging profile has the following characteristics:
-
The name is
accounts-app-profile
. -
The log category is
com.company.accounts.ejbs
. -
The log level
TRACE
. -
The log handler is a file handler using the file
ejb-trace.log
.
Management CLI Session
/subsystem=logging/logging-profile=accounts-app-profile:add /subsystem=logging/logging-profile=accounts-app-profile/file-handler=ejb-trace-file:add(file={path=>"ejb-trace.log", "relative-to"=>"jboss.server.log.dir"}) /subsystem=logging/logging-profile=accounts-app-profile/file-handler=ejb-trace-file:write-attribute(name="level", value="DEBUG") /subsystem=logging/logging-profile=accounts-app-profile/logger=com.company.accounts.ejbs:add(level=TRACE) /subsystem=logging/logging-profile=accounts-app-profile/logger=com.company.accounts.ejbs:add-handler(name="ejb-trace-file")
XML Configuration
<logging-profiles> <logging-profile name="accounts-app-profile"> <file-handler name="ejb-trace-file"> <level name="DEBUG"/> <file relative-to="jboss.server.log.dir" path="ejb-trace.log"/> </file-handler> <logger category="com.company.accounts.ejbs"> <level name="TRACE"/> <handlers> <handler name="ejb-trace-file"/> </handlers> </logger> </logging-profile> </logging-profiles>
Application MANIFEST.MF file
Manifest-Version: 1.0 Logging-Profile: accounts-app-profile
11.8.3. Viewing Deployment Logging Configuration
You can obtain information about the logging configuration for a particular deployment using the following management CLI command.
/deployment=DEPLOYMENT_NAME/subsystem=logging/configuration=CONFIG:read-resource
The logging configuration value, CONFIG
, for a deployment can be one of three values:
-
default
, if the deployment is using thelogging
subsystem. This will output thelogging
subsystem configuration. -
profile-PROFILE_NAME
, if the deployment is using a logging profile defined in thelogging
subsystem. This will output the logging profile configuration. -
The path to the configuration file being used, for example,
myear.ear/META-INF/logging.properties
.
For example, the below management CLI command displays the configuration for the MYPROFILE
logging profile, which is used by the specified deployment.
/deployment=mydeployment.war/subsystem=logging/configuration=profile-MYPROFILE:read-resource(recursive=true,include-runtime=true)
This will output the following information.
{
"outcome" => "success",
"result" => {
"error-manager" => undefined,
"filter" => undefined,
"formatter" => {
"MYFORMATTER" => {
"class-name" => "org.jboss.logmanager.formatters.PatternFormatter",
"module" => undefined,
"properties" => {"pattern" => "%d{HH:mm:ss,SSS} %-5p [%c] (%t) %s%e%n"}
}
},
"handler" => {
"MYPERIODIC" => {
"class-name" => "org.jboss.logmanager.handlers.PeriodicRotatingFileHandler",
"encoding" => undefined,
"error-manager" => undefined,
"filter" => undefined,
"formatter" => "MYFORMATTER",
"handlers" => [],
"level" => "ALL",
"module" => undefined,
"properties" => {
"append" => "true",
"autoFlush" => "true",
"enabled" => "true",
"suffix" => ".yyyy-MM-dd",
"fileName" => "EAP_HOME/standalone/log/deployment.log"
}
}
},
"logger" => {"MYCATEGORY" => {
"filter" => undefined,
"handlers" => [],
"level" => "DEBUG",
"use-parent-handlers" => true
}},
"pojo" => undefined
}
}
You could also use a recursive read-resource
operation to read the logging configuration and other information about a deployment.
/deployment=DEPLOYMENT_NAME/subsystem=logging:read-resource(include-runtime=true, recursive=true)
11.9. Tuning the Logging Subsystem
For tips on monitoring and optimizing performance for the logging
subsystem, see the Logging Subsystem Tuning section of the Performance Tuning Guide.
Chapter 12. Datasource Management
12.1. About JBoss EAP Datasources
About JDBC
The JDBC API is the standard that defines how databases are accessed by Java applications. An application configures a datasource that references a JDBC driver. Application code can then be written against the driver, rather than the database. The driver converts the code to the database language. This means that if the correct driver is installed, an application can be used with any supported database.
For more information, see the JDBC 4.0 specification.
Supported Databases
See JBoss EAP supported configurations for the list of JDBC-compliant databases supported by JBoss EAP 7.
Datasource Types
The two general types of resources are referred to as datasources and XA datasources.
- Non-XA datasources
- Used for applications that do not use transactions, or applications that use transactions with a single database.
- XA datasources
- Used by applications that use multiple databases or other XA resources as part of one XA transaction. XA datasources introduce additional overhead.
You specify which type of datasource to use when creating the datasource using the JBoss EAP management interfaces.
The ExampleDS datasource
JBoss EAP ships with an example datasource configuration, ExampleDS, which is provided to demonstrate how datasources are defined. This datasource uses an H2 database, which is a lightweight, relational database management system that provides developers with the ability to quickly build applications.
The ExampleDS datasource and the H2 database should not be used in a production environment. This is a very small, self-contained datasource that supports all of the standards needed for testing and building applications, but is not robust or scalable enough for production use.
12.2. JDBC Drivers
Before defining datasources in JBoss EAP for your applications to use, you must first install the appropriate JDBC driver.
12.2.1. Installing a JDBC Driver as a Core Module
To install a JDBC driver as a core module, you must first add the JDBC driver as a core module and then register the JDBC driver in the datasources
subsystem.
12.2.1.1. Add the JDBC Driver as a Core Module
JDBC drivers can be installed as a core module using the management CLI using the following steps.
Download the JDBC driver.
Download the appropriate JDBC driver from your database vendor. See JDBC Driver Download Locations for standard download locations for JDBC drivers of common databases.
Make sure to extract the archive if the JDBC driver JAR file is contained within a ZIP or TAR archive.
- Start the JBoss EAP server.
Launch the management CLI.
$ EAP_HOME/bin/jboss-cli.sh
Use the
module add
management CLI command to add the new core module.module add --name=MODULE_NAME --resources=PATH_TO_JDBC_JAR --dependencies=DEPENDENCIES
For example, the following command adds a MySQL JDBC driver module.
module add --name=com.mysql --resources=/path/to/mysql-connector-java-8.0.12.jar --dependencies=javaee.api,sun.jdk,ibm.jdk,javax.api,javax.transaction.api
ImportantUsing the
module
management CLI command to add and remove modules is provided as Technology Preview only. This command is not appropriate for use in a managed domain or when connecting to the management CLI remotely. Modules should be added and removed manually in a production environment.Technology Preview features are not supported with Red Hat production service level agreements (SLAs), might not be functionally complete, and Red Hat does not recommend to use them for production. These features provide early access to upcoming product features, enabling customers to test functionality and provide feedback during the development process.
See Technology Preview Features Support Scope on the Red Hat Customer Portal for information about the support scope for Technology Preview features.
Execute
module --help
for more details on using this command to add and remove modules.
You must next register it as a JDBC driver for it to be referenced by application datasources.
12.2.1.2. Register the JDBC Driver
After the driver has been installed as a core module, you must register it as a JDBC driver using the following management CLI command. When running in a managed domain, be sure to precede this command with /profile=PROFILE_NAME
.
/subsystem=datasources/jdbc-driver=DRIVER_NAME:add(driver-name=DRIVER_NAME,driver-module-name=MODULE_NAME,driver-xa-datasource-class-name=XA_DATASOURCE_CLASS_NAME, driver-class-name=DRIVER_CLASS_NAME)
The driver-class-name
parameter is only required if the JDBC driver jar defines more than one class in its /META-INF/services/java.sql.Driver
file.
For example, the /META-INF/services/java.sql.Driver
file in the MySQL 5.1.36 JDBC driver JAR defines two classes:
- com.mysql.cj.jdbc.Driver
- com.mysql.fabric.jdbc.FabricMySQLDriver
For this case, you would pass in driver-class-name=com.mysql.cj.jdbc.Driver
.
For example, the following command registers a MySQL JDBC driver.
/subsystem=datasources/jdbc-driver=mysql:add(driver-name=mysql,driver-module-name=com.mysql,driver-xa-datasource-class-name=com.mysql.cj.jdbc.MysqlXADataSource, driver-class-name=com.mysql.cj.jdbc.Driver)
The JDBC driver is now available to be referenced by application datasources.
12.2.2. Installing a JDBC Driver as a JAR Deployment
JDBC drivers can be installed as a JAR deployment using either the management CLI or the management console. As long as the driver is JDBC 4-compliant, it will automatically be recognized and installed as a JDBC driver upon deployment.
The following steps describe how to install a JDBC driver using the management CLI.
The recommended installation method for JDBC drivers is to install them as a core module.
Download the JDBC driver.
Download the appropriate JDBC driver from your database vendor. See JDBC Driver Download Locations for standard download locations for JDBC drivers of common databases.
Make sure to extract the archive if the JDBC driver JAR file is contained within a ZIP or TAR archive.
- If the JDBC driver is not JDBC 4-compliant, see the steps to Update a JDBC Driver JAR to be JDBC 4-Compliant.
Deploy the JAR to JBoss EAP.
deploy PATH_TO_JDBC_JAR
NoteIn a managed domain, specify the appropriate server groups.
For example, the following command deploys a MySQL JDBC driver.
deploy /path/to/mysql-connector-java-8.0.12.jar
A message will be displayed in the JBoss EAP server log that displays the deployed driver name, which will be used when defining datasources.
WFLYJCA0018: Started Driver service with driver-name = mysql-connector-java-8.0.12.jar
The JDBC driver is now available to be referenced by application datasources.
Update a JDBC Driver JAR to be JDBC 4-Compliant
If the JDBC driver JAR is not JDBC 4-compliant, it can be made deployable using the following steps.
- Create an empty temporary directory.
-
Create a
META-INF
subdirectory. -
Create a
META-INF/services
subdirectory. Create a
META-INF/services/java.sql.Driver
file and add one line to indicate the fully-qualified class name of the JDBC driver.For example, the below line would be added for a MySQL JDBC driver.
com.mysql.cj.jdbc.Driver
Use the JAR command-line tool to add this new file to the JAR.
jar \-uf jdbc-driver.jar META-INF/services/java.sql.Driver
12.2.3. JDBC Driver Download Locations
The following table gives the standard download locations for JDBC drivers of common databases used with JBoss EAP.
These links point to third-party websites which are not controlled or actively monitored by Red Hat. For the most up-to-date drivers for your database, check your database vendor’s documentation and website.
Vendor | Download Location |
---|---|
MySQL | |
PostgreSQL | |
Oracle | http://www.oracle.com/technetwork/database/features/jdbc/index-091264.html |
IBM | |
Sybase | The jConnect JDBC driver is part of the SDK for SAP ASE installation. Currently there is not a separate download site for this driver by itself. |
Microsoft |
12.2.4. Access Vendor-Specific Classes
In some cases, it is necessary for an application to use vendor-specific functionality that is not part of the JDBC API. In these cases, you can access vendor-specific APIs by declaring a dependency in that application.
This is advanced usage. Only applications that need functionality not found in the JDBC API should implement this procedure.
This process is required when using the reauthentication mechanism, and accessing vendor-specific classes.
You can define a dependency for an application using either the MANIFEST.MF
file or a jboss-deployment-structure.xml
file.
If you have not yet done so, install a JDBC driver as a core module.
Using the MANIFEST.MF
File
-
Edit the application’s
META-INF/MANIFEST.MF
file. Add the
Dependencies
line and specify the module name.For example, the below line declares the
com.mysql
module as a dependency.Dependencies: com.mysql
Using a jboss-deployment-structure.xml
File
-
Create a file called
jboss-deployment-structure.xml
in theMETA-INF/
orWEB-INF/
folder of the application. Specify the module using the
dependencies
element.For example, the following example
jboss-deployment-structure.xml
file declares thecom.mysql
module as a dependency.<jboss-deployment-structure> <deployment> <dependencies> <module name="com.mysql"/> </dependencies> </deployment> </jboss-deployment-structure>
The example code below accesses the MySQL API.
import java.sql.Connection; ... Connection c = ds.getConnection(); if (c.isWrapperFor(com.mysql.jdbc.Connection.class)) { com.mysql.jdbc.Connection mc = c.unwrap(com.mysql.jdbc.Connection.class); }
Follow the vendor-specific API guidelines closely, as the connection is being controlled by the IronJacamar container.
12.3. Creating Datasources
Datasources can be created using the management console or the management CLI.
JBoss EAP 7 allows you to use expressions in datasource attribute values, such as the enabled
attribute. See the Property Replacement section for details on using expressions in the configuration.
12.3.1. Create a Non-XA Datasource
You can create non-XA datasources using either the management CLI or the management console.
Defining a Non-XA Datasource Using the Management Console
- Navigate to Configuration → Subsystems → Datasources & Drivers → Datasources.
- Click the Add (+) button and choose Add Datasource.
- It opens the Add Datasource wizard where you can choose the datasource type and click Next. This creates a template for your database. The following pages of the wizard are prefilled with values specific for the selected datasource. This makes the datasource creation process easy.
- You can test your connection on the Test Connection page before finishing the datasource creation process.
- Review the details and click Finish to create the datasource.
Defining a Non-XA Datasource Using the Management CLI
Non-XA datasources can be defined using the data-source add
management CLI command.
- If you have not yet done so, install and register the appropriate JDBC Driver as a Core Module.
Define the datasource using the
data-source add
command, specifying the appropriate argument values.data-source add --name=DATASOURCE_NAME --jndi-name=JNDI_NAME --driver-name=DRIVER_NAME --connection-url=CONNECTION_URL
NoteIn a managed domain, you must specify the
--profile=PROFILE_NAME
argument.See the Datasource Parameters section below for tips on these parameter values.
For detailed examples, see the Example Datasource Configurations for the supported databases.
Datasource Parameters
- jndi-name
-
The JNDI name for the datasource must start with
java:/
orjava:jboss/
. For example,java:jboss/datasources/ExampleDS
. - driver-name
The driver name value depends on whether the JDBC driver was installed as a core module or a JAR deployment.
- For a core module, the driver name value will be the name given to the JDBC driver when it was registered.
For a JAR deployment, the driver name is the name of the JAR if there is only one class listed in its
/META-INF/services/java.sql.Driver
file. If there are multiple classes listed, then the value isJAR_NAME
+ "_" +DRIVER_CLASS_NAME
+ "_" +MAJOR_VERSION
+ "_" +MINOR_VERSION
(for examplemysql-connector-java-5.1.36-bin.jar_com.mysql.cj.jdbc.Driver_5_1
).You can also see the driver name listed in the JBoss EAP server log when the JDBC JAR is deployed.
WFLYJCA0018: Started Driver service with driver-name = mysql-connector-java-5.1.36-bin.jar_com.mysql.cj.jdbc.Driver_5_1
- connection-url
- For details on the connection URL formats for the supported databases, see the list of Datasource Connection URLs.
For a complete listing of all available datasource attributes, see the Datasource Attributes section.
12.3.2. Create an XA Datasource
You can create XA datasources using either the management CLI or the management console.
Defining an XA Datasource Using the Management Console
- Navigate to Configuration → Subsystems → Datasources & Drivers → Datasources.
- Click the Add (+) button and choose Add XA Datasource.
- It opens the Add XA Datasource wizard where you can choose the datasource type and click Next. This creates a template for your database. The following pages of the wizard are prefilled with values specific for the selected datasource. This makes the datasource creation process easy.
- You can test your connection on the Test Connection page before finishing the datasource creation process.
- Review the details and click Finish to create the datasource.
Defining an XA Datasource Using the Management CLI
XA datasources can be defined using the xa-data-source add
management CLI command.
In a managed domain, you will need to specify the profile to use. Depending on the format of the management CLI command, you will either precede the command with /profile=PROFILE_NAME
or pass in the --profile=PROFILE_NAME
argument.
- If you have not yet done so, install and register the appropriate JDBC Driver as a Core Module.
Define the datasource using the
xa-data-source add
command, specifying the appropriate argument values.xa-data-source add --name=XA_DATASOURCE_NAME --jndi-name=JNDI_NAME --driver-name=DRIVER_NAME --xa-datasource-class=XA_DATASOURCE_CLASS --xa-datasource-properties={"ServerName"=>"HOST_NAME","DatabaseName"=>"DATABASE_NAME"}
See the Datasource Parameters section below for tips on these parameter values.
Set XA datasource properties.
At least one XA datasource property is required when defining an XA datasource or you will receive an error when adding the datasource in the previous step. Any properties that were not set when defining the XA datasource can be set individually afterward.
Set the server name.
/subsystem=datasources/xa-data-source=XA_DATASOURCE_NAME/xa-datasource-properties=ServerName:add(value=HOST_NAME)
Set the database name.
/subsystem=datasources/xa-data-source=XA_DATASOURCE_NAME/xa-datasource-properties=DatabaseName:add(value=DATABASE_NAME)
For detailed examples, see the Example Datasource Configurations for the supported databases.
Datasource Parameters
- jndi-name
-
The JNDI name for the datasource must start with
java:/
orjava:jboss/
. For example,java:jboss/datasources/ExampleDS
. - driver-name
The driver name value depends on whether the JDBC driver was installed as a core module or a JAR deployment.
- For a core module, the driver name value will be the name given to the JDBC driver when it was registered.
For a JAR deployment, the driver name is the name of the JAR if there is only one class listed in its
/META-INF/services/java.sql.Driver
file. If there are multiple classes listed, then the value isJAR_NAME
+ "_" +DRIVER_CLASS_NAME
+ "_" +MAJOR_VERSION
+ "_" +MINOR_VERSION
, for example,mysql-connector-java-5.1.36-bin.jar_com.mysql.cj.jdbc.Driver_5_1
.You can also see the driver name listed in the JBoss EAP server log when the JDBC JAR is deployed.
WFLYJCA0018: Started Driver service with driver-name = mysql-connector-java-5.1.36-bin.jar_com.mysql.cj.jdbc.Driver_5_1
- xa-datasource-class
-
Specify the XA datasource class for the JDBC driver’s implementation of the
javax.sql.XADataSource
class. - xa-datasource-properties
- At least one XA datasource property is required when defining an XA datasource or you will receive an error when attempting to add it. Additional properties can also be added to the XA datasource after it has been defined.
For a complete listing of all available datasource attributes, see the Datasource Attributes section.
12.4. Modifying Datasources
Datasources settings can be configured using the management console or the management CLI.
JBoss EAP 7 allows you to use expressions in datasource attribute values, such as the enabled
attribute. See the Property Replacement section for details on using expressions in the configuration.
12.4.1. Modify a Non-XA Datasource
Non-XA datasource settings can be updated using the data-source
management CLI command. You can also update datasource attributes from the management console by navigating to Configuration → Subsystems → Datasources & Drivers → Datasources.
Non-XA datasources can be integrated with JTA transactions. To integrate the datasource with JTA, ensure that the jta
parameter is set to true
.
Settings for a datasource can be updated by using the following management CLI command.
data-source --name=DATASOURCE_NAME --ATTRIBUTE_NAME=ATTRIBUTE_VALUE
In a managed domain, you must specify the --profile=PROFILE_NAME
argument.
A server reload may be required for the changes to take effect.
12.4.2. Modify an XA Datasource
XA datasource settings can be updated using the xa-data-source
management CLI command. You can also update datasource attributes from the management console by navigating to Configuration → Subsystems → Datasources & Drivers → Datasources.
Settings for an XA datasource can be updated by using the following management CLI command.
xa-data-source --name=XA_DATASOURCE_NAME --ATTRIBUTE_NAME=ATTRIBUTE_VALUE
NoteIn a managed domain, you must specify the
--profile=PROFILE_NAME
argument.An XA datasource property can be added using the following management CLI command.
/subsystem=datasources/xa-data-source=XA_DATASOURCE_NAME/xa-datasource-properties=PROPERTY:add(value=VALUE)
NoteIn a managed domain, you must precede this command with
/profile=PROFILE_NAME
.
A server reload may be required for the changes to take effect.
12.5. Removing Datasources
Datasources can be removed using the management console or the management CLI.
12.5.1. Remove a Non-XA Datasource
Non-XA datasources can be removed using the data-source remove
management CLI command. You can also use the management console to remove datasources by navigating to Configuration → Subsystems → Datasources & Drivers → Datasources.
data-source remove --name=DATASOURCE_NAME
In a managed domain, you must specify the --profile=PROFILE_NAME
argument.
The server will require a reload after the datasource is removed.
12.5.2. Remove an XA Datasource
XA datasources can be removed using the xa-data-source remove
management CLI command. You can also use the management console to remove datasources by navigating to Configuration → Subsystems → Datasources & Drivers → Datasources.
xa-data-source remove --name=XA_DATASOURCE_NAME
In a managed domain, you must specify the --profile=PROFILE_NAME
argument.
The server will require a reload after the XA datasource is removed.
12.6. Testing Datasource Connections
You can use the management CLI or management console to test a datasource connection to verify that its settings are correct.
Test a Datasource Connection Using the Management CLI
The following management CLI command can be used to test a datasource’s connection.
/subsystem=datasources/data-source=DATASOURCE_NAME:test-connection-in-pool
In a managed domain, you must precede this command with /host=HOST_NAME/server=SERVER_NAME
. If you are testing an XA datasource, replace data-source=DATASOURCE_NAME
with xa-data-source=XA_DATASOURCE_NAME
.
Test a Datasource Connection Using the Management Console
When using the Add Datasource wizard in the management console, you have the opportunity to test the connection before creating the datasource. On the Test Connection screen of the wizard, click the Test Connection button.
Once a datasource has been added, you can test the connection by navigating to Configuration → Subsystems → Datasources & Drivers → Datasources, selecting the datasource, and choosing Test Connection from the drop down.
12.7. Flushing Datasource Connections
You can flush datasource connections using the following management CLI commands.
In a managed domain, you must precede these commands with /host=HOST_NAME/server=SERVER_NAME
.
Flush all connections in the pool.
/subsystem=datasources/data-source=DATASOURCE_NAME:flush-all-connection-in-pool
Gracefully flush all connections in the pool.
/subsystem=datasources/data-source=DATASOURCE_NAME:flush-gracefully-connection-in-pool
The server will wait until connections become idle before flushing them.
Flush all idle connections in the pool.
/subsystem=datasources/data-source=DATASOURCE_NAME:flush-idle-connection-in-pool
Flush all invalid connections in the pool.
/subsystem=datasources/data-source=DATASOURCE_NAME:flush-invalid-connection-in-pool
The server will flush all connections that it determines to be invalid, for example, by the
valid-connection-checker-class-name
orcheck-valid-connection-sql
validation mechanism discussed in Database Connection Validation.
You can also flush connections using the management console. From the Runtime tab, select the server, select Datasources, choose a datasource, and use the drop down to select the appropriate action.
12.8. XA Datasource Recovery
An XA datasource is a datasource that can participate in an XA global transaction, which is coordinated by the transaction manager and can span multiple resources in a single transaction. If one of the participants fails to commit its changes, the other participants abort the transaction and restore their state as it was before the transaction occurred. This is to maintain consistency and avoid potential data loss or corruption.
XA recovery is the process of ensuring that all resources affected by a transaction are updated or rolled back, even if any of the resources or transaction participants crash or become unavailable. XA recovery happens without user intervention.
Each XA resource needs to have a recovery module associated with its configuration. The recovery module is the code that is executed when recovery is being performed. JBoss EAP automatically registers recovery modules for JDBC XA resources. You can register a custom module with your XA datasource if you wish to implement custom recovery code. The recovery module must extend class com.arjuna.ats.jta.recovery.XAResourceRecovery
.
12.8.1. Configuring XA Recovery
For most JDBC resources, the recovery module is automatically associated with the resource. In these cases, you only need to configure the options that allow the recovery module to connect to your resource to perform recovery.
The following table describes the XA datasource parameters specific to XA recovery. Each of these configuration attributes can be set during datasource creation or afterward. You can set them using either the management console or the management CLI. See Modify an XA Datasource for information on configuring XA datasources.
Attribute | Description |
---|---|
recovery-username | The user name to use to connect to the resource for recovery. Note that if this is not specified, the datasource security settings will be used. |
recovery-password | The password to use to connect to the resource for recovery. Note that if this is not specified, the datasource security settings will be used. |
recovery-security-domain | The security domain to use to connect to the resource for recovery. |
recovery-plugin-class-name |
If you need to use a custom recovery module, set this attribute to the fully-qualified class name of the module. The module should extend class |
recovery-plugin-properties |
If you use a custom recovery module which requires properties to be set, set this attribute to the list of comma-separated |
Disable XA Recovery
If multiple XA datasources connect to the same physical database, then XA recovery typically needs to be configured for only one of them.
Use the following management CLI command to disable recovery for an XA datasource:
/subsystem=datasources/xa-data-source=XA_DATASOURCE_NAME:write-attribute(name=no-recovery,value=true)
12.8.2. Vendor-Specific XA Recovery
Vendor-Specific Configuration
Some databases require specific configurations in order to cooperate in XA transactions managed by the JBoss EAP transaction manager. For detailed and up-to-date information, see your database vendor’s documentation.
- MySQL
- No special configuration is required. For more information, see the MySQL documentation.
- PostgreSQL and Postgres Plus Advanced Server
-
For PostgreSQL to be able to handle XA transactions, change the configuration parameter
max_prepared_transactions
to a value greater than0
and equal to or greater thanmax_connections
. - Oracle
Ensure that the Oracle user,
USER
, has access to the tables needed for recovery.GRANT SELECT ON sys.dba_pending_transactions TO USER; GRANT SELECT ON sys.pending_trans$ TO USER; GRANT SELECT ON sys.dba_2pc_pending TO USER; GRANT EXECUTE ON sys.dbms_xa TO USER;
If the Oracle user does not have the proper permissions, you may see an error such as the following:
WARN [com.arjuna.ats.jta.logging.loggerI18N] [com.arjuna.ats.internal.jta.recovery.xarecovery1] Local XARecoveryModule.xaRecovery got XA exception javax.transaction.xa.XAException, XAException.XAER_RMERR
- Microsoft SQL Server
- For more information, see the Microsoft SQL Server documentation, including http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/aa342335.aspx.
- IBM DB2
- No special configuration is required. For more information, see the IBM DB2 documentation.
- Sybase
Sybase expects XA transactions to be enabled on the database. Without correct database configuration, XA transactions will not work. The
enable xact coordination
parameter enables or disables Adaptive Server transaction coordination services. When this parameter is enabled, Adaptive Server ensures that updates to remote Adaptive Server data commit or roll back with the original transaction.To enable transaction coordination, use:
sp_configure 'enable xact coordination', 1
- MariaDB
- No special configuration is required. For more information, see the MariaDB documentation.
Known Issues
These known issues with handling XA transactions are for the specific database and JDBC driver versions supported with JBoss EAP 7. For up-to-date information on the supported databases, see JBoss EAP supported configurations.
- MySQL
- MySQL is not fully capable of handling XA transactions. If a client is disconnected from MySQL, then all the information about such transactions is lost. See this MySQL bug for more information. Note that this issue was fixed in MySQL 5.7.
- PostgreSQL and Postgres Plus Advanced Server
The JDBC driver returns the
XAER_RMERR
XAException error code when a network failure occurs during the commit phase of two-phase commit (2PC). This error signals an unrecoverable catastrophic event to the transaction manager, but the transaction is left in thein-doubt
state on the database side and could be easily corrected after network connection is established again. The correct return code should beXAER_RMFAIL
orXAER_RETRY
. The incorrect error code causes the transaction to be left in theHeuristic
state on the JBoss EAP side and holding locks in the database which requires manual intervention. See this PostgreSQL bug for more information.If a connection failure happens when the one-phase commit optimization is used, the JDBC driver returns
XAER_RMERR
, but theXAER_RMFAIL
error code should be returned. This could lead to data inconsistency if the database commits data during one-phase commit and the connection goes down at that moment, then the client is informed that transaction was rolled back.The Postgres Plus JDBC driver returns XIDs for all prepared transactions that exist in the Postgres Plus Server, so there is no way to determine the database to which the XID belongs. If you define more than one data source for the same database in JBoss EAP, an in-doubt transaction recovery attempt could be run under wrong account, which causes the recovery to fail.
- Oracle
The JDBC driver returns XIDs belonging to all users on the database instance, when the Recovery Manager calls recovery using datasource configured with some user credentials. The JDBC driver throws the exception
ORA-24774: cannot switch to specified transaction
because it tries to recover XIDs belonging to other users.The workaround for this issue is to grant
FORCE ANY TRANSACTION
privilege to the user whose credentials are used in recovery datasource configuration. More information about configuring the privilege can be found here: http://docs.oracle.com/database/121/ADMIN/ds_txnman.htm#ADMIN12259.- Microsoft SQL Server
The JDBC driver returns the
XAER_RMERR
XAException error code when a network failure occurs during the commit phase of two-phase commit (2PC). This error signals an unrecoverable catastrophic event to the transaction manager, but the transaction is left in thein-doubt
state on the database side and could be easily corrected after network connection is established again. The correct return code should beXAER_RMFAIL
orXAER_RETRY
. The incorrect error code causes the transaction to be left in theHeuristic
state on the JBoss EAP side and holding locks in the database which requires manual intervention. See this Microsoft SQL Server issue report for more information.If a connection failure happens when the one-phase commit optimization is used, the JDBC driver returns
XAER_RMERR
, but theXAER_RMFAIL
error code should be returned. This could lead to data inconsistency if the database commits data during one-phase commit and the connection goes down at that moment, then the client is informed that transaction was rolled back.- IBM DB2
-
If a connection failure happens during a one-phase commit, the JDBC driver returns
XAER_RETRY
, but theXAER_RMFAIL
error code should be returned. This could lead to data inconsistency if the database commits data during one-phase commit and the connection goes down at that moment, then the client is informed that transaction was rolled back. - Sybase
The JDBC driver returns the
XAER_RMERR
XAException error code when a network failure occurs during the commit phase of two-phase commit (2PC). This error signals an unrecoverable catastrophic event to the transaction manager, but the transaction is left in thein-doubt
state on the database side and could be easily corrected after network connection is established again. The correct return code should beXAER_RMFAIL
orXAER_RETRY
. The incorrect error code causes the transaction to be left in theHeuristic
state on the JBoss EAP side and holding locks in the database which requires manual intervention.If a connection failure happens when the one-phase commit optimization is used, the JDBC driver returns
XAER_RMERR
, but theXAER_RMFAIL
error code should be returned. This could lead to data inconsistency if the database commits data during one-phase commit and the connection goes down at that moment, then the client is informed that transaction was rolled back.If an XA transaction that includes an insert to a Sybase 15.7 or 16 database fails before the Sybase transaction branch is in a prepared state, then repeating the XA transaction and inserting the same record with the same primary key will fail with an error of
com.sybase.jdbc4.jdbc.SybSQLException: Attempt to insert duplicate key row
. This exception will be thrown until the original unfinished Sybase transaction branch is rolled back.- MariaDB
- MariaDB is not fully capable of handling XA transactions. If a client is disconnected from MariaDB, then all the information about such transactions is lost.
- MariaDB Galera Cluster
- XA transactions are not supported in MariaDB Galera Cluster.
12.9. Database Connection Validation
Database maintenance, network problems, or other outage events may cause JBoss EAP to lose the connection to the database. In order to recover from these situations, you can enable database connection validation for your datasources.
To configure database connection validation, you specify the validation timing method to define when the validation occurs, the validation mechanism to determine how the validation is performed, and the exception sorter to define how exceptions are handled.
Choose one of the validation timing methods.
- validate-on-match
When the
validate-on-match
option is set totrue
, the database connection is validated every time it is checked out from the connection pool using the validation mechanism specified in the next step.If a connection is not valid, a warning is written to the log and the next connection in the pool is retrieved. This process continues until a valid connection is found. If you prefer not to cycle through every connection in the pool, you can use the
use-fast-fail
option. If a valid connection is not found in the pool, a new connection is created. If the connection creation fails, an exception is returned to the requesting application.This setting results in the quickest recovery but creates the highest load on the database. However, this is the safest selection if the minimal performance hit is not a concern.
- background-validation
When the
background-validation
option is set totrue
, connections are validated periodically in a background thread prior to use. The frequency of the validation is specified by thebackground-validation-millis
property. The default value ofbackground-validation-millis
is0
, meaning that it is disabled.When determining the value of the
background-validation-millis
property, consider the following:-
This value should not be set to the same value as your
idle-timeout-minutes
setting. - The lower the value, the more frequently the pool is validated and the sooner invalid connections are removed from the pool.
- Lower values take more database resources. Higher values result in less frequent connection validation checks and use less database resources, but dead connections are undetected for longer periods of time.
-
This value should not be set to the same value as your
NoteThese options are mutually exclusive. If
validate-on-match
is set totrue
, thenbackground-validation
must be set tofalse
. Ifbackground-validation
is set to true, thenvalidate-on-match
must be set tofalse
.Choose one of the validation mechanisms.
- valid-connection-checker-class-name
Using
valid-connection-checker-class-name
is the preferred validation mechanism. This specifies a connection checker class that is used to validate connections for the particular database in use. JBoss EAP provides the following connection checkers:-
org.jboss.jca.adapters.jdbc.extensions.db2.DB2ValidConnectionChecker
-
org.jboss.jca.adapters.jdbc.extensions.mssql.MSSQLValidConnectionChecker
-
org.jboss.jca.adapters.jdbc.extensions.mysql.MySQLReplicationValidConnectionChecker
-
org.jboss.jca.adapters.jdbc.extensions.mysql.MySQLValidConnectionChecker
-
org.jboss.jca.adapters.jdbc.extensions.novendor.JDBC4ValidConnectionChecker
-
org.jboss.jca.adapters.jdbc.extensions.novendor.NullValidConnectionChecker
-
org.jboss.jca.adapters.jdbc.extensions.oracle.OracleValidConnectionChecker
-
org.jboss.jca.adapters.jdbc.extensions.postgres.PostgreSQLValidConnectionChecker
-
org.jboss.jca.adapters.jdbc.extensions.sybase.SybaseValidConnectionChecker
-
- check-valid-connection-sql
Using
check-valid-connection-sql
, you provide the SQL statement that will be used to validate the connection.The following is an example SQL statement that you might use to validate Oracle connections.
select 1 from dual
The following is an example SQL statement that you might use to validate MySQL or PostgreSQL connections.
select 1
Set the exception sorter class name.
When an exception is marked as fatal, the connection is closed immediately, even if the connection is participating in a transaction. Use the exception sorter class option to properly detect and clean up after fatal connection exceptions. Choose the appropriate JBoss EAP exception sorter for your datasource type.
-
org.jboss.jca.adapters.jdbc.extensions.db2.DB2ExceptionSorter
-
org.jboss.jca.adapters.jdbc.extensions.informix.InformixExceptionSorter
-
org.jboss.jca.adapters.jdbc.extensions.mssql.MSSQLExceptionSorter
-
org.jboss.jca.adapters.jdbc.extensions.mysql.MySQLExceptionSorter
-
org.jboss.jca.adapters.jdbc.extensions.novendor.NullExceptionSorter
-
org.jboss.jca.adapters.jdbc.extensions.oracle.OracleExceptionSorter
-
org.jboss.jca.adapters.jdbc.extensions.postgres.PostgreSQLExceptionSorter
-
org.jboss.jca.adapters.jdbc.extensions.sybase.SybaseExceptionSorter
-
12.10. Datasource Security
Datasource security refers to encrypting or obscuring passwords for datasource connections. These passwords can be stored in plain text in configuration files, but this represents a security risk.
There are several methods you can use for datasource security. Examples of each are included below.
Secure a Datasource Using a Security Domain
Use the following steps to secure a datasource using a security domain:
Create the new security domain.
/subsystem=security/security-domain=DsRealm:add(cache-type=default) /subsystem=security/security-domain=DsRealm/authentication=classic:add(login-modules=[{code=ConfiguredIdentity,flag=required,module-options={userName=sa, principal=sa, password=sa}}])
A security domain for the datasource is defined. The following XML extract is the result of calling CLI commands.
<security-domain name="DsRealm" cache-type="default"> <authentication> <login-module code="ConfiguredIdentity" flag="required"> <module-option name="userName" value="sa"/> <module-option name="principal" value="sa"/> <module-option name="password" value="sa"/> </login-module> </authentication> </security-domain>
Add a new datasource.
data-source add --name=securityDs --jndi-name=java:jboss/datasources/securityDs --connection-url=jdbc:h2:mem:test;DB_CLOSE_DELAY=-1 --driver-name=h2 --new-connection-sql="select current_user()"
Set the security domain on the datasource.
data-source --name=securityDs --security-domain=DsRealm
Reload the server for the changes to be effective.
reload
If you are using a security domain with multiple datasources, disable caching on the security domain. This can be accomplished by setting the value of the cache-type
attribute to none
or by removing the attribute altogether; however, if caching is desired, use a separate security domain for each datasource.
The following XML extract shows the datasource secured with the DsRealm
.
<datasources> <datasource jndi-name="java:jboss/datasources/securityDs" pool-name="securityDs"> <connection-url>jdbc:h2:mem:test;DB_CLOSE_DELAY=-1</connection-url> <driver>h2</driver> <new-connection-sql>select current_user()</new-connection-sql> <security> <security-domain>DsRealm</security-domain> </security> </datasource> </datasources>
For more information on using Security Domains, see How to Configure Identity Management.
Secure a Datasource Using a Password Vault
Use the following steps to secure a datasource using a password vault:
Set the password vault for the ExampleDS datasource.
data-source --name=ExampleDS --password=${VAULT::ds_ExampleDS::password::N2NhZDYzOTMtNWE0OS00ZGQ0LWE4MmEtMWNlMDMyNDdmNmI2TElORV9CUkVBS3ZhdWx0}
Reload the server to implement the changes.
reload
The following XML security element is added to the ExampleDS datasource secured with password vault.
<security> <user-name>admin</user-name> <password>${VAULT::ds_ExampleDS::password::N2NhZDYzOTMtNWE0OS00ZGQ0LWE4MmEtMWNlMDMyNDdmNmI2TElORV9CUkVBS3ZhdWx0}</password> </security>
For more information on using the Password Vault, see the Password Vault section in the JBoss EAP How to Configure Server Security guide.
Secure a Datasource Using a Credential Store
You can also use a credential store to provide passwords. The elytron
subsystem provides the ability to create credential stores to securely house and use your passwords throughout JBoss EAP. You can find more details on creating and using credential stores in the Credential Store section in the JBoss EAP How to Configure Server Security guide.
Adding a Credential Store Reference to ExampleDS
/subsystem=datasources/data-source=ExampleDS:write-attribute(name=credential-reference,value={store=exampleCS, alias=example-ds-pw})
Secure a Datasource Using an Authentication Context
You can also use an Elytron authentication context to provide usernames and passwords.
Use the following steps to configure and use an authentication context for datasource security.
Remove
password
anduser-name
./subsystem=datasources/data-source=ExampleDS:undefine-attribute(name=password) /subsystem=datasources/data-source=ExampleDS:undefine-attribute(name=user-name)
Enable Elytron security for the datasource.
/subsystem=datasources/data-source=ExampleDS:write-attribute(name=elytron-enabled,value=true) reload
Create an
authentication-configuration
for your credentials.The authentication configuration contains the credentials you want your datasource to use when making a connection. The below example uses a reference to a credential store, but you could also use an Elytron security domain.
/subsystem=elytron/authentication-configuration=exampleAuthConfig:add(authentication-name=sa,credential-reference={clear-text=sa})
Create an
authentication-context
./subsystem=elytron/authentication-context=exampleAuthContext:add(match-rules=[{authentication-configuration=exampleAuthConfig}])
Update the datasource to use the authentication context.
The below example updates
ExampleDS
to use an authentication context./subsystem=datasources/data-source=ExampleDS:write-attribute(name=authentication-context,value=exampleAuthContext) reload
NoteIf
authentication-context
attribute is not set andelytron-enabled
attribute is set totrue
, JBoss EAP will use the current context for authentication.
Secure a Datasource using Kerberos
To secure a datasource using kerberos authentication, the following configuration is required:
- Kerberos is configured on the database server.
- JBoss EAP host server has a keytab entry for the database server.
To secure a datasource using kerberos:
Configure JBoss EAP to use kerberos.
/system-property=java.security.krb5.conf:add(value="/path/to/krb5.conf") /system-property=sun.security.krb5.debug:add(value="false") /system-property=sun.security.spnego.debug:add(value="false")
For debugging, change the values of
sun.security.krb5.debug
andsun.security.spnego.debug
totrue
. In a production environment, it is recommended to set the values tofalse
.Configure security.
You can use legacy security or Elytron security to secure a datasource.
To use kerberos with legacy security:
Configure infinispan cache to periodically remove expired tickets from cache.
batch /subsystem=infinispan/cache-container=security:add(default-cache=auth-cache) /subsystem=infinispan/cache-container=security/local-cache=auth-cache:add() /subsystem=infinispan/cache-container=security/local-cache=auth-cache/expiration=EXPIRATION:add(lifespan=3540000,max-idle=3540000) /subsystem=infinispan/cache-container=security/local-cache=auth-cache/memory=object:add(size=1000) run-batch
The following attributes define ticket expiration:
-
lifespan
: Interval, in milliseconds, at which new certificates are requested from the KDC. Set the value of thelifespan
attribute to be just smaller than the lifespan defined by the KDC. -
max-idle
: Interval, in milliseconds, at which a valid ticket should be removed from the cache, if it unused. -
max-entries
: The maximum number copies of the kerberos tickets to keep in cache. The value corresponds to the number of configured connections in your datasource.
-
Create a security domain.
batch /subsystem=security/security-domain=KerberosDatabase:add(cache-type=infinispan) /subsystem=security/security-domain=KerberosDatabase/authentication=classic:add /subsystem=security/security-domain=KerberosDatabase/authentication=classic/login-module="KerberosDatabase-Module":add(code="org.jboss.security.negotiation.KerberosLoginModule",module="org.jboss.security.negotiation",flag=required, module-options={ "debug" => "false", "storeKey" => "false", "useKeyTab" => "true", "keyTab" => "/path/to/eap.keytab", "principal" => "PRINCIPAL@SERVER.COM", "doNotPrompt" => "true", "refreshKrb5Config" => "true", "isInitiator" => "true", "addGSSCredential" => "true", "credentialLifetime" => "-1"}) run-batch
-
When using Microsoft JDBC driver for SQL server, add attribute and value
"wrapGSSCredential" ⇒ "true"
inmodule-options
. -
For debugging, change the value of the
debug
attribute inmodule-options
totrue
.
-
When using Microsoft JDBC driver for SQL server, add attribute and value
To use kerberos with Elytron:
Set up a kerberos factory in Elytron.
/subsystem=elytron/kerberos-security-factory=krbsf:add(debug=false, principal=PRINCIPAL@SERVER.COM, path=/path/to/keytab, request-lifetime=-1, obtain-kerberos-ticket=true, server=false)
For debugging, add attribute and value
debug = true
.For a list of supported attributes, see the Kerberos Security Factory Attributes section in the How to Configure Server Security guide.
Create an authentication configuration to use the kerberos factory.
/subsystem=elytron/authentication-configuration=kerberos-conf:add(kerberos-security-factory=krbsf)
Create an authentication context.
/subsystem=elytron/authentication-context=ds-context:add(match-rules=[{authentication-configuration=kerberos-conf}])
Secure the datasource with kerberos.
If you use legacy security:
Configure the datasource to use a security domain.
/subsystem=datasources/data-source=KerberosDS:add(connection-url="URL", min-pool-size=0, max-pool-size=10, jndi-name="java:jboss/datasource/KerberosDS", driver-name=<jdbc-driver>.jar, security-domain=KerberosDatabase, allow-multiple-users=false, pool-prefill=false, pool-use-strict-min=false, idle-timeout-minutes=2)
Configure vendor-specific connection properties.
/subsystem=datasources/data-source=KerberosDS/connection-properties=<connection-property-name>:add(value="(<kerberos-value>)")
Example: connection properties for Oracle database.
/subsystem=datasources/data-source=KerberosDS/connection-properties=oracle.net.authentication_services:add(value="(KERBEROS5)")
If you use Elytron:
Configure the datasource to use an authentication context.
/subsystem=datasources/data-source=KerberosDS:add(connection-url="URL", min-pool-size=0, max-pool-size=10, jndi-name="java:jboss/datasource/KerberosDS", driver-name=<jdbc-driver>.jar, elytron-enabled=true, authentication-context=ds-context, allow-multiple-users=false, pool-prefill=false, pool-use-strict-min=false, idle-timeout-minutes=2)
Configure vendor-specific connection properties.
/subsystem=datasources/data-source=KerberosDS/connection-properties=<connection-property-name>:add(value="(<kerberos-value>)")
Example: connection properties for Oracle database
/subsystem=datasources/data-source=KerberosDS/connection-properties=oracle.net.authentication_services:add(value="(KERBEROS5)")
When using kerberos authentication, it is recommended to use the following attributes and values for the datasource:
-
pool-prefill=false
-
pool-use-strict-min=false
-
idle-timeout-minutes
For a list of supported attributes, see Datasource Attributes.
12.11. Datasource Statistics
When statistics collection is enabled for a datasource, you can view runtime statistics for the datasource.
12.11.1. Enabling Datasource Statistics
By default, datasource statistics are not enabled. You can enable datasource statistics collection using the management CLI or the management console.
Enable Datasource Statistics Using the Management CLI
The following management CLI command enables the collection of statistics for the ExampleDS
datasource.
In a managed domain, precede this command with /profile=PROFILE_NAME
.
/subsystem=datasources/data-source=ExampleDS:write-attribute(name=statistics-enabled,value=true)
Reload the server for the changes to take effect.
Enable Datasource Statistics Using the Management Console
Use the following steps to enable statistics collection for a datasource using the management console.
- Navigate to Configuration → Subsystems → Datasources & Drivers → Datasources.
- Select the datasource and click View.
- Click Edit under the Attributes tab.
- Set the Statistics Enabled field to ON and click Save. A popup appears indicating that the changes require a reload in order to take effect.
Reload the server.
- For a standalone server, click the Reload link from the popup to reload the server.
- For a managed domain, click the Topology link from the popup. From the Topology tab, select the appropriate server and select the Reload drop down option to reload the server.
12.11.2. Viewing Datasource Statistics
You can view runtime statistics for a datasource using the management CLI or management console.
View Datasource Statistics Using the Management CLI
The following management CLI command retrieves the core pool statistics for the ExampleDS
datasource.
In a managed domain, precede these commands with /host=HOST_NAME/server=SERVER_NAME
.
/subsystem=datasources/data-source=ExampleDS/statistics=pool:read-resource(include-runtime=true) { "outcome" => "success", "result" => { "ActiveCount" => 1, "AvailableCount" => 20, "AverageBlockingTime" => 0L, "AverageCreationTime" => 122L, "AverageGetTime" => 128L, "AveragePoolTime" => 0L, "AverageUsageTime" => 0L, "BlockingFailureCount" => 0, "CreatedCount" => 1, "DestroyedCount" => 0, "IdleCount" => 1, ... }
The following management CLI command retrieves the JDBC statistics for the ExampleDS
datasource.
/subsystem=datasources/data-source=ExampleDS/statistics=jdbc:read-resource(include-runtime=true) { "outcome" => "success", "result" => { "PreparedStatementCacheAccessCount" => 0L, "PreparedStatementCacheAddCount" => 0L, "PreparedStatementCacheCurrentSize" => 0, "PreparedStatementCacheDeleteCount" => 0L, "PreparedStatementCacheHitCount" => 0L, "PreparedStatementCacheMissCount" => 0L, "statistics-enabled" => true } }
Since statistics are runtime information, be sure to specify the include-runtime=true
argument.
See Datasource Statistics for a detailed list of all available statistics.
View Datasource Statistics Using the Management Console
To view datasource statistics from the management console, navigate to the Datasources subsystem from the Runtime tab, select a datasource, and click View.
See Datasource Statistics for a detailed list of all available statistics.
12.12. Datasource Tuning
For tips on monitoring and optimizing performance for the datasources
subsystem, see the Datasource and Resource Adapter Tuning section of the Performance Tuning Guide.
12.13. Capacity Policies
JBoss EAP supports defining capacity polices for Jakarta Connectors deployments, including datasources. Capacity policies define how physical connections for a pool are created, referred to as capacity incrementing, and destroyed, referred to as capacity decrementing. The default policies are set to create one connection per request for capacity incrementing, and destroy all connections when they time out when the idle timeout is scheduled for capacity decrementing.
To configure capacity polices, you need to specify a capacity incrementer class, a capacity decrementer class, or both.
Example: Defining Capacity Policies
/subsystem=datasources/data-source=ExampleDS:write-attribute(name=capacity-incrementer-class, value="org.jboss.jca.core.connectionmanager.pool.capacity.SizeIncrementer") /subsystem=datasources/data-source=ExampleDS:write-attribute(name=capacity-decrementer-class, value="org.jboss.jca.core.connectionmanager.pool.capacity.SizeDecrementer")
You can also configure properties on the specified capacity incrementer or decrementer class.
Example: Configuring Properties for Capacity Policies
/subsystem=datasources/data-source=ExampleDS:write-attribute(name=capacity-incrementer-properties.size, value=2) /subsystem=datasources/data-source=ExampleDS:write-attribute(name=capacity-decrementer-properties.size, value=2)
MaxPoolSize Incrementer Policy
Class name: org.jboss.jca.core.connectionmanager.pool.capacity.MaxPoolSizeIncrementer
The MaxPoolSize incrementer policy will fill the pool to its max size for each request. This policy is useful when you want to keep the maximum number of connections available all the time.
Size Incrementer Policy
Class name: org.jboss.jca.core.connectionmanager.pool.capacity.SizeIncrementer
The Size incrementer policy will fill the pool by the specified number of connections for each request. This policy is useful when you want to increment with an additional number of connections per request in anticipation that the next request will also need a connection.
Name | Description |
---|---|
Size | The number of connections that should be created |
This is the default increment policy, and has a size value of 1.
Watermark Incrementer Policy
Class name: org.jboss.jca.core.connectionmanager.pool.capacity.WatermarkIncrementer
The Watermark incrementer policy will fill the pool to the specified number of connections for each request. This policy is useful when you want to keep a specified number of connections in the pool at all time.
Name | Description |
---|---|
Watermark | The watermark level for the number of connections |
MinPoolSize Decrementer Policy
Class name: org.jboss.jca.core.connectionmanager.pool.capacity.MinPoolSizeDecrementer
The MinPoolSize decrementer policy will decrement the pool to its min size for each request. This policy is useful when you want to limit the number of connections after each idle timeout request. The pool will operate in a First In First Out (FIFO) manner.
Size Decrementer Policy
Class name: org.jboss.jca.core.connectionmanager.pool.capacity.SizeDecrementer
The Size decrementer policy will decrement the pool by the specified number of connections for each idle timeout request.
Name | Description |
---|---|
Size | The number of connections that should be destroyed |
This policy is useful when you want to decrement an additional number of connections per idle timeout request in anticipation that the pool usage will lower over time.
The pool will operate in a First In First Out (FIFO) manner.
TimedOut Decrementer Policy
Class name: org.jboss.jca.core.connectionmanager.pool.capacity.TimedOutDecrementer
The TimedOut decrementer policy will removed all connections that have timed out from the pool for each idle timeout request. The pool will operate in a First In Last Out (FILO) manner.
This policy is the default decrement policy.
TimedOut/FIFO Decrementer Policy
Class name: org.jboss.jca.core.connectionmanager.pool.capacity.TimedOutFIFODecrementer
The TimedOutFIFO decrementer policy will removed all connections that have timed out from the pool for each idle timeout request. The pool will operate in a First In First Out (FIFO) manner.
Watermark Decrementer Policy
Class name: org.jboss.jca.core.connectionmanager.pool.capacity.WatermarkDecrementer
The Watermark decrementer policy will decrement the pool to the specified number of connections for each idle timeout request. This policy is useful when you want to keep a specified number of connections in the pool at all time. The pool will operate in a First In First Out (FIFO) manner.
Name | Description |
---|---|
Watermark | The watermark level for the number of connections |
12.14. Enlistment Tracing
Enlistment traces can be recorded in order to help locate error situations that happen during enlistment of XAResource
instances. When enlistment tracing is enabled, the jca
subsystem creates an exception object for every pool operation, so that an accurate stack trace can be produced if necessary; however, this does come with performance overhead.
As of JBoss EAP 7.1, enlistment tracing is disabled by default. You can enable the recording of enlistment traces for a datasource using the management CLI by setting the enlistment-trace
attribute to true
.
Enable enlistment tracing for a non-XA datasource.
data-source --name=DATASOURCE_NAME --enlistment-trace=true
Enable enlistment tracing for an XA datasource.
xa-data-source --name=XA_DATASOURCE_NAME --enlistment-trace=true
Enabling enlistment tracing can cause a performance impact.
12.15. Example Datasource Configurations
12.15.1. Example MySQL Datasource
This is an example of a MySQL datasource configuration with connection information, basic security, and validation options.
Example: MySQL Datasource Configuration
<datasources> <datasource jndi-name="java:jboss/MySqlDS" pool-name="MySqlDS"> <connection-url>jdbc:mysql://localhost:3306/jbossdb</connection-url> <driver>mysql</driver> <security> <user-name>admin</user-name> <password>admin</password> </security> <validation> <valid-connection-checker class-name="org.jboss.jca.adapters.jdbc.extensions.mysql.MySQLValidConnectionChecker"/> <validate-on-match>true</validate-on-match> <background-validation>false</background-validation> <exception-sorter class-name="org.jboss.jca.adapters.jdbc.extensions.mysql.MySQLExceptionSorter"/> </validation> </datasource> <drivers> <driver name="mysql" module="com.mysql"> <driver-class>com.mysql.cj.jdbc.Driver</driver-class> <xa-datasource-class>com.mysql.cj.jdbc.MysqlXADataSource</xa-datasource-class> </driver> </drivers> </datasources>
Example: MySQL JDBC Driver module.xml
File
<?xml version="1.0" ?> <module xmlns="urn:jboss:module:1.1" name="com.mysql"> <resources> <resource-root path="mysql-connector-java-8.0.12.jar"/> </resources> <dependencies> <module name="javaee.api"/> <module name="sun.jdk"/> <module name="ibm.jdk"/> <module name="javax.api"/> <module name="javax.transaction.api"/> </dependencies> </module>
Example Management CLI Commands
This example configuration can be achieved by using the following management CLI commands.
Add the MySQL JDBC driver as a core module.
module add --name=com.mysql --resources=/path/to/mysql-connector-java-8.0.12.jar --dependencies=javaee.api,sun.jdk,ibm.jdk,javax.api,javax.transaction.api
ImportantUsing the
module
management CLI command to add and remove modules is provided as Technology Preview only. This command is not appropriate for use in a managed domain or when connecting to the management CLI remotely. Modules should be added and removed manually in a production environment.Technology Preview features are not supported with Red Hat production service level agreements (SLAs), might not be functionally complete, and Red Hat does not recommend to use them for production. These features provide early access to upcoming product features, enabling customers to test functionality and provide feedback during the development process.
See Technology Preview Features Support Scope on the Red Hat Customer Portal for information about the support scope for Technology Preview features.
Register the MySQL JDBC driver.
/subsystem=datasources/jdbc-driver=mysql:add(driver-name=mysql,driver-module-name=com.mysql,driver-xa-datasource-class-name=com.mysql.cj.jdbc.MysqlXADataSource, driver-class-name=com.mysql.cj.jdbc.Driver)
Add the MySQL datasource.
data-source add --name=MySqlDS --jndi-name=java:jboss/MySqlDS --driver-name=mysql --connection-url=jdbc:mysql://localhost:3306/jbossdb --user-name=admin --password=admin --validate-on-match=true --background-validation=false --valid-connection-checker-class-name=org.jboss.jca.adapters.jdbc.extensions.mysql.MySQLValidConnectionChecker --exception-sorter-class-name=org.jboss.jca.adapters.jdbc.extensions.mysql.MySQLExceptionSorter
12.15.2. Example MySQL XA Datasource
This is an example of a MySQL XA datasource configuration with XA datasource properties, basic security, and validation options.
Example: MySQL XA Datasource Configuration
<datasources> <xa-datasource jndi-name="java:jboss/MySqlXADS" pool-name="MySqlXADS"> <xa-datasource-property name="ServerName"> localhost </xa-datasource-property> <xa-datasource-property name="DatabaseName"> mysqldb </xa-datasource-property> <driver>mysql</driver> <security> <user-name>admin</user-name> <password>admin</password> </security> <validation> <valid-connection-checker class-name="org.jboss.jca.adapters.jdbc.extensions.mysql.MySQLValidConnectionChecker"/> <validate-on-match>true</validate-on-match> <background-validation>false</background-validation> <exception-sorter class-name="org.jboss.jca.adapters.jdbc.extensions.mysql.MySQLExceptionSorter"/> </validation> </xa-datasource> <drivers> <driver name="mysql" module="com.mysql"> <driver-class>com.mysql.cj.jdbc.Driver</driver-class> <xa-datasource-class>com.mysql.cj.jdbc.MysqlXADataSource</xa-datasource-class> </driver> </drivers> </datasources>
Example: MySQL JDBC Driver module.xml
File
<?xml version="1.0" ?> <module xmlns="urn:jboss:module:1.1" name="com.mysql"> <resources> <resource-root path="mysql-connector-java-8.0.12.jar"/> </resources> <dependencies> <module name="javaee.api"/> <module name="sun.jdk"/> <module name="ibm.jdk"/> <module name="javax.api"/> <module name="javax.transaction.api"/> </dependencies> </module>
Example Management CLI Commands
This example configuration can be achieved by using the following management CLI commands.
Add the MySQL JDBC driver as a core module.
module add --name=com.mysql --resources=/path/to/mysql-connector-java-8.0.12.jar --dependencies=javaee.api,sun.jdk,ibm.jdk,javax.api,javax.transaction.api
ImportantUsing the
module
management CLI command to add and remove modules is provided as Technology Preview only. This command is not appropriate for use in a managed domain or when connecting to the management CLI remotely. Modules should be added and removed manually in a production environment.Technology Preview features are not supported with Red Hat production service level agreements (SLAs), might not be functionally complete, and Red Hat does not recommend to use them for production. These features provide early access to upcoming product features, enabling customers to test functionality and provide feedback during the development process.
See Technology Preview Features Support Scope on the Red Hat Customer Portal for information about the support scope for Technology Preview features.
Register the MySQL JDBC driver.
/subsystem=datasources/jdbc-driver=mysql:add(driver-name=mysql,driver-module-name=com.mysql,driver-xa-datasource-class-name=com.mysql.cj.jdbc.MysqlXADataSource, driver-class-name=com.mysql.cj.jdbc.Driver)
Add the MySQL XA datasource.
xa-data-source add --name=MySqlXADS --jndi-name=java:jboss/MySqlXADS --driver-name=mysql --user-name=admin --password=admin --validate-on-match=true --background-validation=false --valid-connection-checker-class-name=org.jboss.jca.adapters.jdbc.extensions.mysql.MySQLValidConnectionChecker --exception-sorter-class-name=org.jboss.jca.adapters.jdbc.extensions.mysql.MySQLExceptionSorter --xa-datasource-properties={"ServerName"=>"localhost","DatabaseName"=>"mysqldb"}
12.15.3. Example PostgreSQL Datasource
This is an example of a PostgreSQL datasource configuration with connection information, basic security, and validation options.
Example: PostgreSQL Datasource Configuration
<datasources> <datasource jndi-name="java:jboss/PostgresDS" pool-name="PostgresDS"> <connection-url>jdbc:postgresql://localhost:5432/postgresdb</connection-url> <driver>postgresql</driver> <security> <user-name>admin</user-name> <password>admin</password> </security> <validation> <valid-connection-checker class-name="org.jboss.jca.adapters.jdbc.extensions.postgres.PostgreSQLValidConnectionChecker"/> <validate-on-match>true</validate-on-match> <background-validation>false</background-validation> <exception-sorter class-name="org.jboss.jca.adapters.jdbc.extensions.postgres.PostgreSQLExceptionSorter"/> </validation> </datasource> <drivers> <driver name="postgresql" module="com.postgresql"> <xa-datasource-class>org.postgresql.xa.PGXADataSource</xa-datasource-class> </driver> </drivers> </datasources>
Example: PostgreSQL JDBC Driver module.xml
File
<?xml version="1.0" ?> <module xmlns="urn:jboss:module:1.1" name="com.postgresql"> <resources> <resource-root path="postgresql-42.x.y.jar"/> </resources> <dependencies> <module name="javaee.api"/> <module name="sun.jdk"/> <module name="ibm.jdk"/> <module name="javax.api"/> <module name="javax.transaction.api"/> </dependencies> </module>
In the example above, make sure you replace 42.x.y with your driver version number.
Additional resources
- For information about JDBC drivers and how to install them, see JDBC Drivers.
- For information about JDBC drivers that have been tested as part of the JBoss EAP 7.3, see JBoss EAP 7.3 Supported Configurations.
Example Management CLI Commands
You can add the PostgreSQL JDBC driver and the PostgreSQL datasource to your JDBC API with the following CLI commands.
Add the PostgreSQL JDBC driver as a core module.
module add --name=com.postgresql --resources=/path/to/postgresql-42.x.y.jar --dependencies=javaee.api,sun.jdk,ibm.jdk,javax.api,javax.transaction.api
In the example above, make sure you replace 42.x.y with your driver version number.
ImportantUsing the
module
management CLI command to add and remove modules is provided as Technology Preview only. This command is not appropriate for use in a managed domain or when connecting to the management CLI remotely. Modules should be added and removed manually in a production environment.Technology Preview features are not supported with Red Hat production service level agreements (SLAs), might not be functionally complete, and Red Hat does not recommend to use them for production. These features provide early access to upcoming product features, enabling customers to test functionality and provide feedback during the development process.
See Technology Preview Features Support Scope on the Red Hat Customer Portal for information about the support scope for Technology Preview features.
Register the PostgreSQL JDBC driver.
/subsystem=datasources/jdbc-driver=postgresql:add(driver-name=postgresql,driver-module-name=com.postgresql,driver-xa-datasource-class-name=org.postgresql.xa.PGXADataSource)
Add the PostgreSQL datasource.
data-source add --name=PostgresDS --jndi-name=java:jboss/PostgresDS --driver-name=postgresql --connection-url=jdbc:postgresql://localhost:5432/postgresdb --user-name=admin --password=admin --validate-on-match=true --background-validation=false --valid-connection-checker-class-name=org.jboss.jca.adapters.jdbc.extensions.postgres.PostgreSQLValidConnectionChecker --exception-sorter-class-name=org.jboss.jca.adapters.jdbc.extensions.postgres.PostgreSQLExceptionSorter
12.15.4. Example PostgreSQL XA Datasource
This is an example of a PostgreSQL XA datasource configuration with XA datasource properties, basic security, and validation options.
Example: PostgreSQL XA Datasource Configuration
<datasources> <xa-datasource jndi-name="java:jboss/PostgresXADS" pool-name="PostgresXADS"> <xa-datasource-property name="ServerName"> localhost </xa-datasource-property> <xa-datasource-property name="PortNumber"> 5432 </xa-datasource-property> <xa-datasource-property name="DatabaseName"> postgresdb </xa-datasource-property> <driver>postgresql</driver> <security> <user-name>admin</user-name> <password>admin</password> </security> <validation> <valid-connection-checker class-name="org.jboss.jca.adapters.jdbc.extensions.postgres.PostgreSQLValidConnectionChecker"/> <validate-on-match>true</validate-on-match> <background-validation>false</background-validation> <exception-sorter class-name="org.jboss.jca.adapters.jdbc.extensions.postgres.PostgreSQLExceptionSorter"/> </validation> </xa-datasource> <drivers> <driver name="postgresql" module="com.postgresql"> <xa-datasource-class>org.postgresql.xa.PGXADataSource</xa-datasource-class> </driver> </drivers> </datasources>
Example: PostgreSQL JDBC Driver module.xml
File
<?xml version="1.0" ?> <module xmlns="urn:jboss:module:1.1" name="com.postgresql"> <resources> <resource-root path="postgresql-42.x.y.jar"/> </resources> <dependencies> <module name="javaee.api"/> <module name="sun.jdk"/> <module name="ibm.jdk"/> <module name="javax.api"/> <module name="javax.transaction.api"/> </dependencies> </module>
In the example above, make sure you replace 42.x.y with your driver version number.
Additional resources
- For information about JDBC drivers and how to install them, see JDBC Drivers.
- For information about JDBC drivers that have been tested as part of the JBoss EAP 7.3, see JBoss EAP 7.3 Supported Configurations.
Example Management CLI Commands
You can add the PostgreSQL JDBC driver and the PostgreSQL datasource to your JDBC API with the following CLI commands.
Add the PostgreSQL JDBC driver as a core module.
module add --name=com.postgresql --resources=/path/to/postgresql-42.x.y.jar --dependencies=javaee.api,sun.jdk,ibm.jdk,javax.api,javax.transaction.api
In the example above, make sure you replace 42.x.y with your driver version number.
ImportantUsing the
module
management CLI command to add and remove modules is provided as Technology Preview only. This command is not appropriate for use in a managed domain or when connecting to the management CLI remotely. Modules should be added and removed manually in a production environment.Technology Preview features are not supported with Red Hat production service level agreements (SLAs), might not be functionally complete, and Red Hat does not recommend to use them for production. These features provide early access to upcoming product features, enabling customers to test functionality and provide feedback during the development process.
See Technology Preview Features Support Scope on the Red Hat Customer Portal for information about the support scope for Technology Preview features.
Register the PostgreSQL JDBC driver.
/subsystem=datasources/jdbc-driver=postgresql:add(driver-name=postgresql,driver-module-name=com.postgresql,driver-xa-datasource-class-name=org.postgresql.xa.PGXADataSource)
Add the PostgreSQL XA datasource.
xa-data-source add --name=PostgresXADS --jndi-name=java:jboss/PostgresXADS --driver-name=postgresql --user-name=admin --password=admin --validate-on-match=true --background-validation=false --valid-connection-checker-class-name=org.jboss.jca.adapters.jdbc.extensions.postgres.PostgreSQLValidConnectionChecker --exception-sorter-class-name=org.jboss.jca.adapters.jdbc.extensions.postgres.PostgreSQLExceptionSorter --xa-datasource-properties={"ServerName"=>"localhost","PortNumber"=>"5432","DatabaseName"=>"postgresdb"}
12.15.5. Example Oracle Datasource
This is an example of an Oracle datasource configuration with connection information, basic security, and validation options.
Example: Oracle Datasource Configuration
<datasources> <datasource jndi-name="java:jboss/OracleDS" pool-name="OracleDS"> <connection-url>jdbc:oracle:thin:@localhost:1521:XE</connection-url> <driver>oracle</driver> <security> <user-name>admin</user-name> <password>admin</password> </security> <validation> <valid-connection-checker class-name="org.jboss.jca.adapters.jdbc.extensions.oracle.OracleValidConnectionChecker"/> <validate-on-match>true</validate-on-match> <background-validation>false</background-validation> <exception-sorter class-name="org.jboss.jca.adapters.jdbc.extensions.oracle.OracleExceptionSorter"/> </validation> </datasource> <drivers> <driver name="oracle" module="com.oracle"> <xa-datasource-class>oracle.jdbc.xa.client.OracleXADataSource</xa-datasource-class> </driver> </drivers> </datasources>
Example: Oracle JDBC Driver module.xml
File
<?xml version="1.0" ?> <module xmlns="urn:jboss:module:1.1" name="com.oracle"> <resources> <resource-root path="ojdbc7.jar"/> </resources> <dependencies> <module name="javaee.api"/> <module name="sun.jdk"/> <module name="ibm.jdk"/> <module name="javax.api"/> <module name="javax.transaction.api"/> </dependencies> </module>
Example Management CLI Commands
This example configuration can be achieved by using the following management CLI commands.
Add the Oracle JDBC driver as a core module.
module add --name=com.oracle --resources=/path/to/ojdbc7.jar --dependencies=javaee.api,sun.jdk,ibm.jdk,javax.api,javax.transaction.api
ImportantUsing the
module
management CLI command to add and remove modules is provided as Technology Preview only. This command is not appropriate for use in a managed domain or when connecting to the management CLI remotely. Modules should be added and removed manually in a production environment.Technology Preview features are not supported with Red Hat production service level agreements (SLAs), might not be functionally complete, and Red Hat does not recommend to use them for production. These features provide early access to upcoming product features, enabling customers to test functionality and provide feedback during the development process.
See Technology Preview Features Support Scope on the Red Hat Customer Portal for information about the support scope for Technology Preview features.
Register the Oracle JDBC driver.
/subsystem=datasources/jdbc-driver=oracle:add(driver-name=oracle,driver-module-name=com.oracle,driver-xa-datasource-class-name=oracle.jdbc.xa.client.OracleXADataSource)
Add the Oracle datasource.
data-source add --name=OracleDS --jndi-name=java:jboss/OracleDS --driver-name=oracle --connection-url=jdbc:oracle:thin:@localhost:1521:XE --user-name=admin --password=admin --validate-on-match=true --background-validation=false --valid-connection-checker-class-name=org.jboss.jca.adapters.jdbc.extensions.oracle.OracleValidConnectionChecker --exception-sorter-class-name=org.jboss.jca.adapters.jdbc.extensions.oracle.OracleExceptionSorter
12.15.6. Example Oracle XA Datasource
The following settings must be applied for the user accessing an Oracle XA datasource in order for XA recovery to operate correctly. The value user
is the user defined to connect from JBoss EAP to Oracle:
-
GRANT SELECT ON sys.dba_pending_transactions TO user;
-
GRANT SELECT ON sys.pending_trans$ TO user;
-
GRANT SELECT ON sys.dba_2pc_pending TO user;
-
GRANT EXECUTE ON sys.dbms_xa TO user;
This is an example of an Oracle XA datasource configuration with XA datasource properties, basic security, and validation options.
Example: Oracle XA Datasource Configuration
<datasources> <xa-datasource jndi-name="java:jboss/OracleXADS" pool-name="OracleXADS"> <xa-datasource-property name="URL"> jdbc:oracle:thin:@oracleHostName:1521:orcl </xa-datasource-property> <driver>oracle</driver> <xa-pool> <is-same-rm-override>false</is-same-rm-override> </xa-pool> <security> <user-name>admin</user-name> <password>admin</password> </security> <validation> <valid-connection-checker class-name="org.jboss.jca.adapters.jdbc.extensions.oracle.OracleValidConnectionChecker"/> <validate-on-match>true</validate-on-match> <background-validation>false</background-validation> <exception-sorter class-name="org.jboss.jca.adapters.jdbc.extensions.oracle.OracleExceptionSorter"/> </validation> </xa-datasource> <drivers> <driver name="oracle" module="com.oracle"> <xa-datasource-class>oracle.jdbc.xa.client.OracleXADataSource</xa-datasource-class> </driver> </drivers> </datasources>
Example: Oracle JDBC Driver module.xml
File
<?xml version="1.0" ?> <module xmlns="urn:jboss:module:1.1" name="com.oracle"> <resources> <resource-root path="ojdbc7.jar"/> </resources> <dependencies> <module name="javaee.api"/> <module name="sun.jdk"/> <module name="ibm.jdk"/> <module name="javax.api"/> <module name="javax.transaction.api"/> </dependencies> </module>
Example Management CLI Commands
This example configuration can be achieved by using the following management CLI commands.
Add the Oracle JDBC driver as a core module.
module add --name=com.oracle --resources=/path/to/ojdbc7.jar --dependencies=javaee.api,sun.jdk,ibm.jdk,javax.api,javax.transaction.api
ImportantUsing the
module
management CLI command to add and remove modules is provided as Technology Preview only. This command is not appropriate for use in a managed domain or when connecting to the management CLI remotely. Modules should be added and removed manually in a production environment.Technology Preview features are not supported with Red Hat production service level agreements (SLAs), might not be functionally complete, and Red Hat does not recommend to use them for production. These features provide early access to upcoming product features, enabling customers to test functionality and provide feedback during the development process.
See Technology Preview Features Support Scope on the Red Hat Customer Portal for information about the support scope for Technology Preview features.
Register the Oracle JDBC driver.
/subsystem=datasources/jdbc-driver=oracle:add(driver-name=oracle,driver-module-name=com.oracle,driver-xa-datasource-class-name=oracle.jdbc.xa.client.OracleXADataSource)
Add the Oracle XA datasource.
xa-data-source add --name=OracleXADS --jndi-name=java:jboss/OracleXADS --driver-name=oracle --user-name=admin --password=admin --validate-on-match=true --background-validation=false --valid-connection-checker-class-name=org.jboss.jca.adapters.jdbc.extensions.oracle.OracleValidConnectionChecker --exception-sorter-class-name=org.jboss.jca.adapters.jdbc.extensions.oracle.OracleExceptionSorter --same-rm-override=false --xa-datasource-properties={"URL"=>"jdbc:oracle:thin:@oracleHostName:1521:orcl"}
12.15.7. Example Microsoft SQL Server Datasource
This is an example of a Microsoft SQL Server datasource configuration with connection information, basic security, and validation options.
Example: Microsoft SQL Server Datasource Configuration
<datasources> <datasource jndi-name="java:jboss/MSSQLDS" pool-name="MSSQLDS"> <connection-url>jdbc:sqlserver://localhost:1433;DatabaseName=MyDatabase</connection-url> <driver>sqlserver</driver> <security> <user-name>admin</user-name> <password>admin</password> </security> <validation> <valid-connection-checker class-name="org.jboss.jca.adapters.jdbc.extensions.mssql.MSSQLValidConnectionChecker"/> <validate-on-match>true</validate-on-match> <background-validation>false</background-validation> <exception-sorter class-name="org.jboss.jca.adapters.jdbc.extensions.mssql.MSSQLExceptionSorter"/> </validation> </datasource> <drivers> <driver name="sqlserver" module="com.microsoft"> <xa-datasource-class>com.microsoft.sqlserver.jdbc.SQLServerXADataSource</xa-datasource-class> </driver> </drivers> </datasources>
Example: Microsoft SQL Server JDBC Driver module.xml
File
<?xml version="1.0" ?> <module xmlns="urn:jboss:module:1.1" name="com.microsoft"> <resources> <resource-root path="sqljdbc42.jar"/> </resources> <dependencies> <module name="javaee.api"/> <module name="sun.jdk"/> <module name="ibm.jdk"/> <module name="javax.api"/> <module name="javax.transaction.api"/> <module name="javax.xml.bind.api"/> </dependencies> </module>
Example Management CLI Commands
This example configuration can be achieved by using the following management CLI commands.
Add the Microsoft SQL Server JDBC driver as a core module.
module add --name=com.microsoft --resources=/path/to/sqljdbc42.jar --dependencies=javax.api,javax.transaction.api,javax.xml.bind.api,javaee.api,sun.jdk,ibm.jdk
ImportantUsing the
module
management CLI command to add and remove modules is provided as Technology Preview only. This command is not appropriate for use in a managed domain or when connecting to the management CLI remotely. Modules should be added and removed manually in a production environment.Technology Preview features are not supported with Red Hat production service level agreements (SLAs), might not be functionally complete, and Red Hat does not recommend to use them for production. These features provide early access to upcoming product features, enabling customers to test functionality and provide feedback during the development process.
See Technology Preview Features Support Scope on the Red Hat Customer Portal for information about the support scope for Technology Preview features.
Register the Microsoft SQL Server JDBC driver.
/subsystem=datasources/jdbc-driver=sqlserver:add(driver-name=sqlserver,driver-module-name=com.microsoft,driver-xa-datasource-class-name=com.microsoft.sqlserver.jdbc.SQLServerXADataSource)
Add the Microsoft SQL Server datasource.
data-source add --name=MSSQLDS --jndi-name=java:jboss/MSSQLDS --driver-name=sqlserver --connection-url=jdbc:sqlserver://localhost:1433;DatabaseName=MyDatabase --user-name=admin --password=admin --validate-on-match=true --background-validation=false --valid-connection-checker-class-name=org.jboss.jca.adapters.jdbc.extensions.mssql.MSSQLValidConnectionChecker --exception-sorter-class-name=org.jboss.jca.adapters.jdbc.extensions.mssql.MSSQLExceptionSorter
12.15.8. Example Microsoft SQL Server XA Datasource
This is an example of a Microsoft SQL Server XA datasource configuration with XA datasource properties, basic security, and validation options.
Example: Microsoft SQL Server XA Datasource Configuration
<datasources> <xa-datasource jndi-name="java:jboss/MSSQLXADS" pool-name="MSSQLXADS"> <xa-datasource-property name="ServerName"> localhost </xa-datasource-property> <xa-datasource-property name="DatabaseName"> mssqldb </xa-datasource-property> <xa-datasource-property name="SelectMethod"> cursor </xa-datasource-property> <driver>sqlserver</driver> <xa-pool> <is-same-rm-override>false</is-same-rm-override> </xa-pool> <security> <user-name>admin</user-name> <password>admin</password> </security> <validation> <valid-connection-checker class-name="org.jboss.jca.adapters.jdbc.extensions.mssql.MSSQLValidConnectionChecker"/> <validate-on-match>true</validate-on-match> <background-validation>false</background-validation> <exception-sorter class-name="org.jboss.jca.adapters.jdbc.extensions.mssql.MSSQLExceptionSorter"/> </validation> </xa-datasource> <drivers> <driver name="sqlserver" module="com.microsoft"> <xa-datasource-class>com.microsoft.sqlserver.jdbc.SQLServerXADataSource</xa-datasource-class> </driver> </drivers> </datasources>
Example: Microsoft SQL Server JDBC Driver module.xml
File
<?xml version="1.0" ?> <module xmlns="urn:jboss:module:1.1" name="com.microsoft"> <resources> <resource-root path="sqljdbc42.jar"/> </resources> <dependencies> <module name="javaee.api"/> <module name="sun.jdk"/> <module name="ibm.jdk"/> <module name="javax.api"/> <module name="javax.transaction.api"/> <module name="javax.xml.bind.api"/> </dependencies> </module>
Example Management CLI Commands
This example configuration can be achieved by using the following management CLI commands.
Add the Microsoft SQL Server JDBC driver as a core module.
module add --name=com.microsoft --resources=/path/to/sqljdbc42.jar --dependencies=javax.api,javax.transaction.api,javax.xml.bind.api,javaee.api,sun.jdk,ibm.jdk
ImportantUsing the
module
management CLI command to add and remove modules is provided as Technology Preview only. This command is not appropriate for use in a managed domain or when connecting to the management CLI remotely. Modules should be added and removed manually in a production environment.Technology Preview features are not supported with Red Hat production service level agreements (SLAs), might not be functionally complete, and Red Hat does not recommend to use them for production. These features provide early access to upcoming product features, enabling customers to test functionality and provide feedback during the development process.
See Technology Preview Features Support Scope on the Red Hat Customer Portal for information about the support scope for Technology Preview features.
Register the Microsoft SQL Server JDBC driver.
/subsystem=datasources/jdbc-driver=sqlserver:add(driver-name=sqlserver,driver-module-name=com.microsoft,driver-xa-datasource-class-name=com.microsoft.sqlserver.jdbc.SQLServerXADataSource)
Add the Microsoft SQL Server XA datasource.
xa-data-source add --name=MSSQLXADS --jndi-name=java:jboss/MSSQLXADS --driver-name=sqlserver --user-name=admin --password=admin --validate-on-match=true --background-validation=false --background-validation=false --valid-connection-checker-class-name=org.jboss.jca.adapters.jdbc.extensions.mssql.MSSQLValidConnectionChecker --exception-sorter-class-name=org.jboss.jca.adapters.jdbc.extensions.mssql.MSSQLExceptionSorter --same-rm-override=false --xa-datasource-properties={"ServerName"=>"localhost","DatabaseName"=>"mssqldb","SelectMethod"=>"cursor"}
12.15.9. Example IBM DB2 Datasource
This is an example of an IBM DB2 datasource configuration with connection information, basic security, and validation options.
Example: IBM DB2 Datasource Configuration
<datasources> <datasource jndi-name="java:jboss/DB2DS" pool-name="DB2DS"> <connection-url>jdbc:db2://localhost:50000/ibmdb2db</connection-url> <driver>ibmdb2</driver> <pool> <min-pool-size>0</min-pool-size> <max-pool-size>50</max-pool-size> </pool> <security> <user-name>admin</user-name> <password>admin</password> </security> <validation> <valid-connection-checker class-name="org.jboss.jca.adapters.jdbc.extensions.db2.DB2ValidConnectionChecker"/> <validate-on-match>true</validate-on-match> <background-validation>false</background-validation> <exception-sorter class-name="org.jboss.jca.adapters.jdbc.extensions.db2.DB2ExceptionSorter"/> </validation> </datasource> <drivers> <driver name="ibmdb2" module="com.ibm"> <xa-datasource-class>com.ibm.db2.jcc.DB2XADataSource</xa-datasource-class> </driver> </drivers> </datasources>
Example: IBM DB2 JDBC Driver module.xml
File
<?xml version="1.0" ?> <module xmlns="urn:jboss:module:1.1" name="com.ibm"> <resources> <resource-root path="db2jcc4.jar"/> </resources> <dependencies> <module name="javaee.api"/> <module name="sun.jdk"/> <module name="ibm.jdk"/> <module name="javax.api"/> <module name="javax.transaction.api"/> </dependencies> </module>
Example Management CLI Commands
This example configuration can be achieved by using the following management CLI commands.
Add the IBM DB2 JDBC driver as a core module.
module add --name=com.ibm --resources=/path/to/db2jcc4.jar --dependencies=javaee.api,sun.jdk,ibm.jdk,javax.api,javax.transaction.api
ImportantUsing the
module
management CLI command to add and remove modules is provided as Technology Preview only. This command is not appropriate for use in a managed domain or when connecting to the management CLI remotely. Modules should be added and removed manually in a production environment.Technology Preview features are not supported with Red Hat production service level agreements (SLAs), might not be functionally complete, and Red Hat does not recommend to use them for production. These features provide early access to upcoming product features, enabling customers to test functionality and provide feedback during the development process.
See Technology Preview Features Support Scope on the Red Hat Customer Portal for information about the support scope for Technology Preview features.
Register the IBM DB2 JDBC driver.
/subsystem=datasources/jdbc-driver=ibmdb2:add(driver-name=ibmdb2,driver-module-name=com.ibm,driver-xa-datasource-class-name=com.ibm.db2.jcc.DB2XADataSource)
Add the IBM DB2 datasource.
data-source add --name=DB2DS --jndi-name=java:jboss/DB2DS --driver-name=ibmdb2 --connection-url=jdbc:db2://localhost:50000/ibmdb2db --user-name=admin --password=admin --validate-on-match=true --background-validation=false --valid-connection-checker-class-name=org.jboss.jca.adapters.jdbc.extensions.db2.DB2ValidConnectionChecker --exception-sorter-class-name=org.jboss.jca.adapters.jdbc.extensions.db2.DB2ExceptionSorter --min-pool-size=0 --max-pool-size=50
12.15.10. Example IBM DB2 XA Datasource
This is an example of an IBM DB2 XA datasource configuration with XA datasource properties, basic security, and validation options.
Example: IBM DB2 XA Datasource Configuration
<datasources> <xa-datasource jndi-name="java:jboss/DB2XADS" pool-name="DB2XADS"> <xa-datasource-property name="ServerName"> localhost </xa-datasource-property> <xa-datasource-property name="DatabaseName"> ibmdb2db </xa-datasource-property> <xa-datasource-property name="PortNumber"> 50000 </xa-datasource-property> <xa-datasource-property name="DriverType"> 4 </xa-datasource-property> <driver>ibmdb2</driver> <xa-pool> <is-same-rm-override>false</is-same-rm-override> </xa-pool> <security> <user-name>admin</user-name> <password>admin</password> </security> <recovery> <recover-plugin class-name="org.jboss.jca.core.recovery.ConfigurableRecoveryPlugin"> <config-property name="EnableIsValid"> false </config-property> <config-property name="IsValidOverride"> false </config-property> <config-property name="EnableClose"> false </config-property> </recover-plugin> </recovery> <validation> <valid-connection-checker class-name="org.jboss.jca.adapters.jdbc.extensions.db2.DB2ValidConnectionChecker"/> <validate-on-match>true</validate-on-match> <background-validation>false</background-validation> <exception-sorter class-name="org.jboss.jca.adapters.jdbc.extensions.db2.DB2ExceptionSorter"/> </validation> </xa-datasource> <drivers> <driver name="ibmdb2" module="com.ibm"> <xa-datasource-class>com.ibm.db2.jcc.DB2XADataSource</xa-datasource-class> </driver> </drivers> </datasources>
Example: IBM DB2 JDBC Driver module.xml
File
<?xml version="1.0" ?> <module xmlns="urn:jboss:module:1.1" name="com.ibm"> <resources> <resource-root path="db2jcc4.jar"/> </resources> <dependencies> <module name="javaee.api"/> <module name="sun.jdk"/> <module name="ibm.jdk"/> <module name="javax.api"/> <module name="javax.transaction.api"/> </dependencies> </module>
Example Management CLI Commands
This example configuration can be achieved by using the following management CLI commands.
Add the IBM DB2 JDBC driver as a core module.
module add --name=com.ibm --resources=/path/to/db2jcc4.jar --dependencies=javaee.api,sun.jdk,ibm.jdk,javax.api,javax.transaction.api
ImportantUsing the
module
management CLI command to add and remove modules is provided as Technology Preview only. This command is not appropriate for use in a managed domain or when connecting to the management CLI remotely. Modules should be added and removed manually in a production environment.Technology Preview features are not supported with Red Hat production service level agreements (SLAs), might not be functionally complete, and Red Hat does not recommend to use them for production. These features provide early access to upcoming product features, enabling customers to test functionality and provide feedback during the development process.
See Technology Preview Features Support Scope on the Red Hat Customer Portal for information about the support scope for Technology Preview features.
Register the IBM DB2 JDBC driver.
/subsystem=datasources/jdbc-driver=ibmdb2:add(driver-name=ibmdb2,driver-module-name=com.ibm,driver-xa-datasource-class-name=com.ibm.db2.jcc.DB2XADataSource)
Add the IBM DB2 XA datasource.
xa-data-source add --name=DB2XADS --jndi-name=java:jboss/DB2XADS --driver-name=ibmdb2 --user-name=admin --password=admin --validate-on-match=true --background-validation=false --background-validation=false --valid-connection-checker-class-name=org.jboss.jca.adapters.jdbc.extensions.db2.DB2ValidConnectionChecker --exception-sorter-class-name=org.jboss.jca.adapters.jdbc.extensions.db2.DB2ExceptionSorter --same-rm-override=false --recovery-plugin-class-name=org.jboss.jca.core.recovery.ConfigurableRecoveryPlugin --recovery-plugin-properties={"EnableIsValid"=>"false","IsValidOverride"=>"false","EnableClose"=>"false"} --xa-datasource-properties={"ServerName"=>"localhost","DatabaseName"=>"ibmdb2db","PortNumber"=>"50000","DriverType"=>"4"}
12.15.11. Example Sybase Datasource
This is an example of a Sybase datasource configuration with connection information, basic security, and validation options.
Example: Sybase Datasource Configuration
<datasources> <datasource jndi-name="java:jboss/SybaseDB" pool-name="SybaseDB"> <connection-url>jdbc:sybase:Tds:localhost:5000/DATABASE?JCONNECT_VERSION=6</connection-url> <driver>sybase</driver> <security> <user-name>admin</user-name> <password>admin</password> </security> <validation> <valid-connection-checker class-name="org.jboss.jca.adapters.jdbc.extensions.sybase.SybaseValidConnectionChecker"/> <validate-on-match>true</validate-on-match> <background-validation>false</background-validation> <exception-sorter class-name="org.jboss.jca.adapters.jdbc.extensions.sybase.SybaseExceptionSorter"/> </validation> </datasource> <drivers> <driver name="sybase" module="com.sybase"> <xa-datasource-class>com.sybase.jdbc4.jdbc.SybXADataSource</xa-datasource-class> </driver> </drivers> </datasources>
Example: Sybase JDBC Driver module.xml
File
<?xml version="1.0" ?> <module xmlns="urn:jboss:module:1.1" name="com.sybase"> <resources> <resource-root path="jconn4.jar"/> </resources> <dependencies> <module name="javaee.api"/> <module name="sun.jdk"/> <module name="ibm.jdk"/> <module name="javax.api"/> <module name="javax.transaction.api"/> </dependencies> </module>
Example Management CLI Commands
This example configuration can be achieved by using the following management CLI commands.
Add the Sybase JDBC driver as a core module.
module add --name=com.sybase --resources=/path/to/jconn4.jar --dependencies=javaee.api,sun.jdk,ibm.jdk,javax.api,javax.transaction.api
ImportantUsing the
module
management CLI command to add and remove modules is provided as Technology Preview only. This command is not appropriate for use in a managed domain or when connecting to the management CLI remotely. Modules should be added and removed manually in a production environment.Technology Preview features are not supported with Red Hat production service level agreements (SLAs), might not be functionally complete, and Red Hat does not recommend to use them for production. These features provide early access to upcoming product features, enabling customers to test functionality and provide feedback during the development process.
See Technology Preview Features Support Scope on the Red Hat Customer Portal for information about the support scope for Technology Preview features.
Register the Sybase JDBC driver.
/subsystem=datasources/jdbc-driver=sybase:add(driver-name=sybase,driver-module-name=com.sybase,driver-xa-datasource-class-name=com.sybase.jdbc4.jdbc.SybXADataSource)
Add the Sybase datasource.
data-source add --name=SybaseDB --jndi-name=java:jboss/SybaseDB --driver-name=sybase --connection-url=jdbc:sybase:Tds:localhost:5000/DATABASE?JCONNECT_VERSION=6 --user-name=admin --password=admin --validate-on-match=true --background-validation=false --valid-connection-checker-class-name=org.jboss.jca.adapters.jdbc.extensions.sybase.SybaseValidConnectionChecker --exception-sorter-class-name=org.jboss.jca.adapters.jdbc.extensions.sybase.SybaseExceptionSorter
12.15.12. Example Sybase XA Datasource
This is an example of a Sybase XA datasource configuration with XA datasource properties, basic security, and validation options.
Example: Sybase XA Datasource Configuration
<datasources> <xa-datasource jndi-name="java:jboss/SybaseXADS" pool-name="SybaseXADS"> <xa-datasource-property name="ServerName"> localhost </xa-datasource-property> <xa-datasource-property name="DatabaseName"> mydatabase </xa-datasource-property> <xa-datasource-property name="PortNumber"> 4100 </xa-datasource-property> <xa-datasource-property name="NetworkProtocol"> Tds </xa-datasource-property> <driver>sybase</driver> <xa-pool> <is-same-rm-override>false</is-same-rm-override> </xa-pool> <security> <user-name>admin</user-name> <password>admin</password> </security> <validation> <valid-connection-checker class-name="org.jboss.jca.adapters.jdbc.extensions.sybase.SybaseValidConnectionChecker"/> <validate-on-match>true</validate-on-match> <background-validation>false</background-validation> <exception-sorter class-name="org.jboss.jca.adapters.jdbc.extensions.sybase.SybaseExceptionSorter"/> </validation> </xa-datasource> <drivers> <driver name="sybase" module="com.sybase"> <xa-datasource-class>com.sybase.jdbc4.jdbc.SybXADataSource</xa-datasource-class> </driver> </drivers> </datasources>
Example: Sybase JDBC Driver module.xml
File
<?xml version="1.0" ?> <module xmlns="urn:jboss:module:1.1" name="com.sybase"> <resources> <resource-root path="jconn4.jar"/> </resources> <dependencies> <module name="javaee.api"/> <module name="sun.jdk"/> <module name="ibm.jdk"/> <module name="javax.api"/> <module name="javax.transaction.api"/> </dependencies> </module>
Example Management CLI Commands
This example configuration can be achieved by using the following management CLI commands.
Add the Sybase JDBC driver as a core module.
module add --name=com.sybase --resources=/path/to/jconn4.jar --dependencies=javaee.api,sun.jdk,ibm.jdk,javax.api,javax.transaction.api
ImportantUsing the
module
management CLI command to add and remove modules is provided as Technology Preview only. This command is not appropriate for use in a managed domain or when connecting to the management CLI remotely. Modules should be added and removed manually in a production environment.Technology Preview features are not supported with Red Hat production service level agreements (SLAs), might not be functionally complete, and Red Hat does not recommend to use them for production. These features provide early access to upcoming product features, enabling customers to test functionality and provide feedback during the development process.
See Technology Preview Features Support Scope on the Red Hat Customer Portal for information about the support scope for Technology Preview features.
Register the Sybase JDBC driver.
/subsystem=datasources/jdbc-driver=sybase:add(driver-name=sybase,driver-module-name=com.sybase,driver-xa-datasource-class-name=com.sybase.jdbc4.jdbc.SybXADataSource)
Add the Sybase XA datasource.
xa-data-source add --name=SybaseXADS --jndi-name=java:jboss/SybaseXADS --driver-name=sybase --user-name=admin --password=admin --validate-on-match=true --background-validation=false --background-validation=false --valid-connection-checker-class-name=org.jboss.jca.adapters.jdbc.extensions.sybase.SybaseValidConnectionChecker --exception-sorter-class-name=org.jboss.jca.adapters.jdbc.extensions.sybase.SybaseExceptionSorter --same-rm-override=false --xa-datasource-properties={"ServerName"=>"localhost","DatabaseName"=>"mydatabase","PortNumber"=>"4100","NetworkProtocol"=>"Tds"}
12.15.13. Example MariaDB Datasource
This is an example of a MariaDB datasource configuration with connection information, basic security, and validation options.
Example: MariaDB Datasource Configuration
<datasources> <datasource jndi-name="java:jboss/MariaDBDS" pool-name="MariaDBDS"> <connection-url>jdbc:mariadb://localhost:3306/jbossdb</connection-url> <driver>mariadb</driver> <security> <user-name>admin</user-name> <password>admin</password> </security> <validation> <valid-connection-checker class-name="org.jboss.jca.adapters.jdbc.extensions.mysql.MySQLValidConnectionChecker"/> <validate-on-match>true</validate-on-match> <background-validation>false</background-validation> <exception-sorter class-name="org.jboss.jca.adapters.jdbc.extensions.mysql.MySQLExceptionSorter"/> </validation> </datasource> <drivers> <driver name="mariadb" module="org.mariadb"> <driver-class>org.mariadb.jdbc.Driver</driver-class> <xa-datasource-class>org.mariadb.jdbc.MySQLDataSource</xa-datasource-class> </driver> </drivers> </datasources>
Example: MariaDB JDBC Driver module.xml
File
<?xml version="1.0" ?> <module xmlns="urn:jboss:module:1.1" name="org.mariadb"> <resources> <resource-root path="mariadb-java-client-1.2.3.jar"/> </resources> <dependencies> <module name="javaee.api"/> <module name="sun.jdk"/> <module name="ibm.jdk"/> <module name="javax.api"/> <module name="javax.transaction.api"/> </dependencies> </module>
Example Management CLI Commands
This example configuration can be achieved by using the following management CLI commands.
Add the MariaDB JDBC driver as a core module.
module add --name=org.mariadb --resources=/path/to/mariadb-java-client-1.2.3.jar --dependencies=javaee.api,sun.jdk,ibm.jdk,javax.api,javax.transaction.api
ImportantUsing the
module
management CLI command to add and remove modules is provided as Technology Preview only. This command is not appropriate for use in a managed domain or when connecting to the management CLI remotely. Modules should be added and removed manually in a production environment.Technology Preview features are not supported with Red Hat production service level agreements (SLAs), might not be functionally complete, and Red Hat does not recommend to use them for production. These features provide early access to upcoming product features, enabling customers to test functionality and provide feedback during the development process.
See Technology Preview Features Support Scope on the Red Hat Customer Portal for information about the support scope for Technology Preview features.
Register the MariaDB JDBC driver.
/subsystem=datasources/jdbc-driver=mariadb:add(driver-name=mariadb,driver-module-name=org.mariadb,driver-xa-datasource-class-name=org.mariadb.jdbc.MySQLDataSource, driver-class-name=org.mariadb.jdbc.Driver)
Add the MariaDB datasource.
data-source add --name=MariaDBDS --jndi-name=java:jboss/MariaDBDS --driver-name=mariadb --connection-url=jdbc:mariadb://localhost:3306/jbossdb --user-name=admin --password=admin --validate-on-match=true --background-validation=false --valid-connection-checker-class-name=org.jboss.jca.adapters.jdbc.extensions.mysql.MySQLValidConnectionChecker --exception-sorter-class-name=org.jboss.jca.adapters.jdbc.extensions.mysql.MySQLExceptionSorter
12.15.14. Example MariaDB XA Datasource
This is an example of a MariaDB XA datasource configuration with XA datasource properties, basic security, and validation options.
Example: MariaDB XA Datasource Configuration
<datasources> <xa-datasource jndi-name="java:jboss/MariaDBXADS" pool-name="MariaDBXADS"> <xa-datasource-property name="ServerName"> localhost </xa-datasource-property> <xa-datasource-property name="DatabaseName"> mariadbdb </xa-datasource-property> <driver>mariadb</driver> <security> <user-name>admin</user-name> <password>admin</password> </security> <validation> <valid-connection-checker class-name="org.jboss.jca.adapters.jdbc.extensions.mysql.MySQLValidConnectionChecker"/> <validate-on-match>true</validate-on-match> <background-validation>false</background-validation> <exception-sorter class-name="org.jboss.jca.adapters.jdbc.extensions.mysql.MySQLExceptionSorter"/> </validation> </xa-datasource> <drivers> <driver name="mariadb" module="org.mariadb"> <driver-class>org.mariadb.jdbc.Driver</driver-class> <xa-datasource-class>org.mariadb.jdbc.MySQLDataSource</xa-datasource-class> </driver> </drivers> </datasources>
Example: MariaDB JDBC Driver module.xml
File
<?xml version="1.0" ?> <module xmlns="urn:jboss:module:1.1" name="org.mariadb"> <resources> <resource-root path="mariadb-java-client-1.2.3.jar"/> </resources> <dependencies> <module name="javaee.api"/> <module name="sun.jdk"/> <module name="ibm.jdk"/> <module name="javax.api"/> <module name="javax.transaction.api"/> </dependencies> </module>
Example Management CLI Commands
This example configuration can be achieved by using the following management CLI commands.
Add the MariaDB JDBC driver as a core module.
module add --name=org.mariadb --resources=/path/to/mariadb-java-client-1.2.3.jar --dependencies=javaee.api,sun.jdk,ibm.jdk,javax.api,javax.transaction.api
ImportantUsing the
module
management CLI command to add and remove modules is provided as Technology Preview only. This command is not appropriate for use in a managed domain or when connecting to the management CLI remotely. Modules should be added and removed manually in a production environment.Technology Preview features are not supported with Red Hat production service level agreements (SLAs), might not be functionally complete, and Red Hat does not recommend to use them for production. These features provide early access to upcoming product features, enabling customers to test functionality and provide feedback during the development process.
See Technology Preview Features Support Scope on the Red Hat Customer Portal for information about the support scope for Technology Preview features.
Register the MariaDB JDBC driver.
/subsystem=datasources/jdbc-driver=mariadb:add(driver-name=mariadb,driver-module-name=org.mariadb,driver-xa-datasource-class-name=org.mariadb.jdbc.MySQLDataSource, driver-class-name=org.mariadb.jdbc.Driver)
Add the MariaDB XA datasource.
xa-data-source add --name=MariaDBXADS --jndi-name=java:jboss/MariaDBXADS --driver-name=mariadb --user-name=admin --password=admin --validate-on-match=true --background-validation=false --valid-connection-checker-class-name=org.jboss.jca.adapters.jdbc.extensions.mysql.MySQLValidConnectionChecker --exception-sorter-class-name=org.jboss.jca.adapters.jdbc.extensions.mysql.MySQLExceptionSorter --xa-datasource-properties={"ServerName"=>"localhost","DatabaseName"=>"mariadbdb"}
12.15.15. Example MariaDB Galera Cluster Datasource
This is an example of a MariaDB Galera Cluster datasource configuration with connection information, basic security, and validation options.
MariaDB Galera Cluster does not support XA transactions.
Example: MariaDB Galera Cluster Datasource Configuration
<datasources> <datasource jndi-name="java:jboss/MariaDBGaleraClusterDS" pool-name="MariaDBGaleraClusterDS"> <connection-url>jdbc:mariadb://192.168.1.1:3306,192.168.1.2:3306/jbossdb</connection-url> <driver>mariadb</driver> <security> <user-name>admin</user-name> <password>admin</password> </security> <validation> <valid-connection-checker class-name="org.jboss.jca.adapters.jdbc.extensions.mysql.MySQLValidConnectionChecker"/> <validate-on-match>true</validate-on-match> <background-validation>false</background-validation> <exception-sorter class-name="org.jboss.jca.adapters.jdbc.extensions.mysql.MySQLExceptionSorter"/> </validation> </datasource> <drivers> <driver name="mariadb" module="org.mariadb"> <driver-class>org.mariadb.jdbc.Driver</driver-class> <xa-datasource-class>org.mariadb.jdbc.MySQLDataSource</xa-datasource-class> </driver> </drivers> </datasources>
Example: MariaDB JDBC Driver module.xml
File
<?xml version='1.0' encoding='UTF-8'?> <module xmlns="urn:jboss:module:1.1" name="org.mariadb"> <resources> <resource-root path="mariadb-java-client-1.5.4.jar"/> </resources> <dependencies> <module name="javaee.api"/> <module name="sun.jdk"/> <module name="ibm.jdk"/> <module name="javax.api"/> <module name="javax.transaction.api"/> </dependencies> </module>
Example Management CLI Commands
This example configuration can be achieved by using the following management CLI commands.
Add the MariaDB JDBC driver as a core module.
module add --name=org.mariadb --resources=/path/to/mariadb-java-client-1.5.4.jar --dependencies=javaee.api,sun.jdk,ibm.jdk,javax.api,javax.transaction.api
ImportantUsing the
module
management CLI command to add and remove modules is provided as Technology Preview only. This command is not appropriate for use in a managed domain or when connecting to the management CLI remotely. Modules should be added and removed manually in a production environment.Technology Preview features are not supported with Red Hat production service level agreements (SLAs), might not be functionally complete, and Red Hat does not recommend to use them for production. These features provide early access to upcoming product features, enabling customers to test functionality and provide feedback during the development process.
See Technology Preview Features Support Scope on the Red Hat Customer Portal for information about the support scope for Technology Preview features.
Register the MariaDB JDBC driver.
/subsystem=datasources/jdbc-driver=mariadb:add(driver-name=mariadb,driver-module-name=org.mariadb,driver-xa-datasource-class-name=org.mariadb.jdbc.MySQLDataSource, driver-class-name=org.mariadb.jdbc.Driver)
Add the MariaDB Galera Cluster datasource.
data-source add --name=MariaDBGaleraClusterDS --jndi-name=java:jboss/MariaDBGaleraClusterDS --driver-name=mariadb --connection-url=jdbc:mariadb://192.168.1.1:3306,192.168.1.2:3306/jbossdb --user-name=admin --password=admin --validate-on-match=true --background-validation=false --valid-connection-checker-class-name=org.jboss.jca.adapters.jdbc.extensions.mysql.MySQLValidConnectionChecker --exception-sorter-class-name=org.jboss.jca.adapters.jdbc.extensions.mysql.MySQLExceptionSorter
Chapter 13. Datasource Management With Agroal
13.1. About the Agroal Datasources Subsystem
A new datasources-agroal
subsystem was introduced in JBoss EAP 7.2. This is a new high performance direct connection pool backed by the Agroal project. This can be used as an alternative to the current JCA-based datasources
subsystem.
The datasources-agroal
subsystem is not available by default and you must enable it in order to use this new implementation.
The datasources-agroal
subsystem is provided as Technology Preview only. Technology Preview features are not supported with Red Hat production service level agreements (SLAs), might not be functionally complete, and Red Hat does not recommend to use them for production. These features provide early access to upcoming product features, enabling customers to test functionality and provide feedback during the development process.
See Technology Preview Features Support Scope on the Red Hat Customer Portal for information about the support scope for Technology Preview features.
13.2. Enabling the Agroal Datasources Subsystem
The datasources-agroal
subsystem is not enabled in the default JBoss EAP configuration. Use the following management CLI commands to enable it.
Add the extension.
/extension=org.wildfly.extension.datasources-agroal:add
Add the subsystem.
/subsystem=datasources-agroal:add
Reload the server for the changes to take effect.
reload
This adds the following XML in the server configuration file.
<server xmlns="urn:jboss:domain:8.0"> <extensions> ... <extension module="org.wildfly.extension.datasources-agroal"/> ... </extensions> ... <subsystem xmlns="urn:jboss:domain:datasources-agroal:1.0"/> ... </server>
13.3. Installing a JDBC Driver as a Core Module for Agroal Datasources
Before defining Agroal datasources in JBoss EAP for your applications to use, you must first install the appropriate JDBC driver.
To install a JDBC driver as a core module for Agroal datasources, you must first add the JDBC driver as a core module and then register the JDBC driver in the datasources-agroal
subsystem.
13.3.1. Add the JDBC Driver as a Core Module
JDBC drivers can be installed as a core module using the management CLI using the following steps.
Download the JDBC driver.
Download the appropriate JDBC driver from your database vendor. See JDBC Driver Download Locations for standard download locations for JDBC drivers of common databases.
Make sure to extract the archive if the JDBC driver JAR file is contained within a ZIP or TAR archive.
- Start the JBoss EAP server.
Launch the management CLI.
$ EAP_HOME/bin/jboss-cli.sh
Use the
module add
management CLI command to add the new core module.module add --name=MODULE_NAME --resources=PATH_TO_JDBC_JAR --dependencies=DEPENDENCIES
For example, the following command adds a MySQL JDBC driver module.
module add --name=com.mysql --resources=/path/to/mysql-connector-java-8.0.12.jar --dependencies=javaee.api,sun.jdk,ibm.jdk,javax.api,javax.transaction.api
ImportantUsing the
module
management CLI command to add and remove modules is provided as Technology Preview only. This command is not appropriate for use in a managed domain or when connecting to the management CLI remotely. Modules should be added and removed manually in a production environment.Technology Preview features are not supported with Red Hat production service level agreements (SLAs), might not be functionally complete, and Red Hat does not recommend to use them for production. These features provide early access to upcoming product features, enabling customers to test functionality and provide feedback during the development process.
See Technology Preview Features Support Scope on the Red Hat Customer Portal for information about the support scope for Technology Preview features.
Execute
module --help
for more details on using this command to add and remove modules.
You must next register it as a JDBC driver for it to be referenced by application datasources.
13.3.2. Register the JDBC Driver for Agroal Datasources
After the driver has been installed as a core module, you must register it as a JDBC driver using the following management CLI command. When running in a managed domain, be sure to precede this command with /profile=PROFILE_NAME
.
/subsystem=datasources-agroal/driver=DRIVER_NAME:add(module=MODULE_NAME,class=CLASS_NAME)
The CLASS_NAME
must be a fully qualified class name that implements either java.sql.Driver
or javax.sql.DataSource
for non-XA datasources, or javax.sql.XADataSource
for XA datasources.
13.4. Configuring Agroal Non-XA Datasources
The use of Agroal datasources is provided as Technology Preview only. Technology Preview features are not supported with Red Hat production service level agreements (SLAs), might not be functionally complete, and Red Hat does not recommend to use them for production. These features provide early access to upcoming product features, enabling customers to test functionality and provide feedback during the development process.
See Technology Preview Features Support Scope on the Red Hat Customer Portal for information about the support scope for Technology Preview features.
13.4.1. Create an Agroal Datasource
The following management CLI command creates an Agroal datasource. When running in a managed domain, be sure to precede this command with /profile=PROFILE_NAME
.
/subsystem=datasources-agroal/datasource=DATASOURCE_NAME:add(jndi-name=JNDI_NAME,connection-factory={driver=DRIVER_NAME,url=URL},connection-pool={max-size=MAX_POOL_SIZE})
For a complete listing of all available Agroal datasource attributes, see the Agroal Datasource Attributes section.
See Example MySQL Agroal Datasource for an example Agroal datasource configuration.
13.4.2. Remove an Agroal Datasource
The following management CLI command removes an Agroal datasource. When running in a managed domain, be sure to precede this command with /profile=PROFILE_NAME
.
/subsystem=datasources-agroal/datasource=DATASOURCE_NAME:remove
13.5. Configuring Agroal XA Datasources
The use of Agroal datasources is provided as Technology Preview only. Technology Preview features are not supported with Red Hat production service level agreements (SLAs), might not be functionally complete, and Red Hat does not recommend to use them for production. These features provide early access to upcoming product features, enabling customers to test functionality and provide feedback during the development process.
See Technology Preview Features Support Scope on the Red Hat Customer Portal for information about the support scope for Technology Preview features.
13.5.1. Create an Agroal XA Datasource
The following management CLI command creates an Agroal XA datasource. When running in a managed domain, be sure to precede this command with /profile=PROFILE_NAME
.
/subsystem=datasources-agroal/xa-datasource=XA_DATASOURCE_NAME:add(jndi-name=JNDI_NAME,connection-factory={driver=DRIVER_NAME,connection-properties={ServerName=HOST_NAME,PortNumber=PORT,DatabaseName=DATABASE_NAME}},connection-pool={max-size=MAX_POOL_SIZE})
For a complete listing of all available Agroal datasource attributes, see the Agroal Datasource Attributes section.
See Example MySQL Agroal XA Datasource for an example Agroal XA datasource configuration.
13.5.2. Remove an Agroal XA Datasource
The following management CLI command removes an Agroal XA datasource. When running in a managed domain, be sure to precede this command with /profile=PROFILE_NAME
.
/subsystem=datasources-agroal/xa-datasource=DATASOURCE_NAME:remove
13.6. Example Agroal Datasource Configurations
13.6.1. Example MySQL Agroal Datasource
This is an example of a MySQL Agroal datasource configuration with connection and basic security settings.
Example: MySQL Agroal Datasource Configuration
<subsystem xmlns="urn:jboss:domain:datasources-agroal:1.0"> <datasource name="ExampleAgroalDS" jndi-name="java:jboss/datasources/ExampleAgroalDS"> <connection-factory driver="mysql" url="jdbc:mysql://localhost:3306/jbossdb" username="admin" password="admin"/> <connection-pool max-size="30"/> </datasource> <drivers> <driver name="mysql" module="com.mysql" class="com.mysql.cj.jdbc.Driver"/> </drivers> </subsystem>
Example: MySQL JDBC Driver module.xml
File
<?xml version='1.0' encoding='UTF-8'?> <module xmlns="urn:jboss:module:1.1" name="com.mysql"> <resources> <resource-root path="mysql-connector-java-8.0.12.jar"/> </resources> <dependencies> <module name="javaee.api"/> <module name="sun.jdk"/> <module name="ibm.jdk"/> <module name="javax.api"/> <module name="javax.transaction.api"/> </dependencies> </module>
Example Management CLI Commands
This example configuration can be achieved by using the following management CLI commands.
Add the MySQL JDBC driver as a core module.
module add --name=com.mysql --resources=/path/to/mysql-connector-java-8.0.12.jar --dependencies=javaee.api,sun.jdk,ibm.jdk,javax.api,javax.transaction.api
ImportantUsing the
module
management CLI command to add and remove modules is provided as Technology Preview only. This command is not appropriate for use in a managed domain or when connecting to the management CLI remotely. Modules should be added and removed manually in a production environment.Technology Preview features are not supported with Red Hat production service level agreements (SLAs), might not be functionally complete, and Red Hat does not recommend to use them for production. These features provide early access to upcoming product features, enabling customers to test functionality and provide feedback during the development process.
See Technology Preview Features Support Scope on the Red Hat Customer Portal for information about the support scope for Technology Preview features.
Register the MySQL JDBC driver.
/subsystem=datasources-agroal/driver=mysql:add(module=com.mysql,class=com.mysql.cj.jdbc.Driver)
Add the MySQL datasource.
/subsystem=datasources-agroal/datasource=ExampleAgroalDS:add(jndi-name=java:jboss/datasources/ExampleAgroalDS,connection-factory={driver=mysql,url=jdbc:mysql://localhost:3306/jbossdb,username=admin,password=admin},connection-pool={max-size=30})
13.6.2. Example MySQL Agroal XA Datasource
This is an example of a MySQL Agroal XA datasource configuration with XA datasource properties and basic security settings.
Example: MySQL Agroal XA Datasource Configuration
<subsystem xmlns="urn:jboss:domain:datasources-agroal:1.0"> <xa-datasource name="ExampleAgroalXADS" jndi-name="java:jboss/datasources/ExampleAgroalXADS"> <connection-factory driver="mysqlXA" username="admin" password="admin"> <connection-properties> <property name="ServerName" value="localhost"/> <property name="PortNumber" value="3306"/> <property name="DatabaseName" value="jbossdb"/> </connection-properties> </connection-factory> <connection-pool max-size="30"/> </xa-datasource> <drivers> <driver name="mysqlXA" module="com.mysql" class="com.mysql.cj.jdbc.MysqlXADataSource"/> </drivers> </subsystem>
Example: MySQL JDBC Driver module.xml
File
<?xml version='1.0' encoding='UTF-8'?> <module xmlns="urn:jboss:module:1.1" name="com.mysql"> <resources> <resource-root path="mysql-connector-java-8.0.12.jar"/> </resources> <dependencies> <module name="javaee.api"/> <module name="sun.jdk"/> <module name="ibm.jdk"/> <module name="javax.api"/> <module name="javax.transaction.api"/> </dependencies> </module>
Example Management CLI Commands
This example configuration can be achieved by using the following management CLI commands.
Add the MySQL JDBC driver as a core module.
module add --name=com.mysql --resources=/path/to/mysql-connector-java-8.0.12.jar --dependencies=javaee.api,sun.jdk,ibm.jdk,javax.api,javax.transaction.api
ImportantUsing the
module
management CLI command to add and remove modules is provided as Technology Preview only. This command is not appropriate for use in a managed domain or when connecting to the management CLI remotely. Modules should be added and removed manually in a production environment.Technology Preview features are not supported with Red Hat production service level agreements (SLAs), might not be functionally complete, and Red Hat does not recommend to use them for production. These features provide early access to upcoming product features, enabling customers to test functionality and provide feedback during the development process.
See Technology Preview Features Support Scope on the Red Hat Customer Portal for information about the support scope for Technology Preview features.
Register the MySQL XA JDBC driver.
/subsystem=datasources-agroal/driver=mysqlXA:add(module=com.mysql,class=com.mysql.cj.jdbc.MysqlXADataSource)
Add the MySQL XA datasource.
/subsystem=datasources-agroal/xa-datasource=ExampleAgroalXADS:add(jndi-name=java:jboss/datasources/ExampleAgroalXADS,connection-factory={driver=mysqlXA,connection-properties={ServerName=localhost,PortNumber=3306,DatabaseName=jbossdb},username=admin,password=admin},connection-pool={max-size=30})
Chapter 14. Configuring the Transactions Subsystem
The transactions
subsystem allows you to configure the Transaction Manager (TM) options, such as timeout values, transaction logging, statistics collection, and whether to use JTS. JBoss EAP provides transactional services using the Narayana framework. This framework leverages support for a broad range of transaction protocols based on standards, such as Jakarta Transactions, JTS, and Web Service transactions.
For more information, see Managing Transactions on JBoss EAP.
Chapter 15. ORB Configuration
15.1. About Common Object Request Broker Architecture (CORBA)
Common Object Request Broker Architecture (CORBA) is a standard that enables applications and services to work together even when they are written in multiple, otherwise-incompatible, languages or hosted on separate platforms. CORBA requests are brokered by a server-side component called an Object Request Broker (ORB). JBoss EAP provides an ORB instance, by means of the Open JDK ORB component.
The ORB is used internally for JTS transactions, and is also available for use by your own applications.
The Object Transaction Service (OTS) is a cross-platform service that forms part of CORBA. The OTS specification is maintained by the Object Management Group. JTS is a specification for building a transaction manager, and JTS was designed based on the OTS specification.
For information about CORBA and its components, see Common Object Request Broker Architecture.
15.2. Configuring the ORB for JTS
In a default installation of JBoss EAP, the Object Request Broker (ORB) support for transactions is disabled. You can configure ORB settings in the iiop-openjdk
subsystem using the management CLI or the management console.
The iiop-openjdk
subsystem is available when using the full or full-ha profile in a managed domain, or the standalone-full.xml
or standalone-full-ha.xml
configuration file for a standalone server.
For a listing of the available configuration options for the iiop-openjdk
subsystem, see IIOP Subsystem Attributes.
Configure the ORB Using the Management CLI
You can configure each aspect of the ORB using the management CLI. This is the minimum configuration for the ORB to be used with JTS.
You can configure the following management CLI commands for a managed domain using the full
profile. If necessary, change the profile to suit the one you need to configure. If you are using a standalone server, omit the /profile=full
portion of the commands.
Enable the Security Interceptors
Enable the security
attribute by setting the value to identity
.
/profile=full/subsystem=iiop-openjdk:write-attribute(name=security,value=identity)
Enable Transactions in the IIOP Subsystem
To enable the ORB for JTS, set the value of transactions
attribute to full
, rather than the default spec
.
/profile=full/subsystem=iiop-openjdk:write-attribute(name=transactions, value=full)
Enable JTS in the Transactions Subsystem
/profile=full/subsystem=transactions:write-attribute(name=jts,value=true)
For JTS activation, the server must be restarted as reload is not enough.
Configure the ORB Using the Management Console
- Select the Configuration tab from the top of the management console. In a managed domain, you must select the appropriate profile to modify.
- Select Subsystems → IIOP (OpenJDK) and click View.
- Click Edit and modify the attributes as needed.
- Click Save to save the changes.
15.3. Configure IIOP to Use SSL/TLS with the Elytron Subsystem
You can configure the iiop-openjdk
subsystem to use SSL/TLS to secure communication between clients and servers. The elytron
subsystem, as well as the legacy security
subsystem, provide the necessary components for configuring SSL/TLS for the iiop-openjdk
subsystem as well as other subsystems within JBoss EAP. Use the following steps to configure the iiop-openjdk
subsystem to use the elytron
subsystem for SSL/TLS.
Use the following management CLI command to display the current legacy SSL/TLS configuration in the
iiop-openjdk
subsystem./subsystem=iiop-openjdk:read-attribute(name=security-domain) { "outcome" => "success", "result" => "iiopSSLSecurityDomain" }
The
iiop-openjdk
subsystem must use either the legacysecurity
subsystem or theelytron
subsystem for SSL/TLS. You cannot use both at the same time. The above command shows theiiop-openjdk
subsystem is using a legacy security domain for handling SSL/TLS. Before you can configure theiiop-openjdk
subsystem to use theelytron
subsystem for SSL/TLS, you need to remove this reference:/subsystem=iiop-openjdk:undefine-attribute(name=security-realm)
If the
security-domain
attribute in theiiop-openjdk
is not defined, you can proceed to the next step.Create a
server-ssl-context
.To use SSL/TLS with the
iiop-openjdk
subsystem, you need to define aserver-ssl-context
. JBoss EAP uses the configuration provided by theserver-ssl-context
when making an SSL/TLS connection as a server. You can find more details on creating aserver-ssl-context
in Enable One-way SSL/TLS for Applications using the Elytron Subsystem in How to Configure Server Security guide.Create a
client-ssl-context
.To use SSL/TLS with the
iiop-openjdk
subsystem, you need to define aclient-ssl-context
. JBoss EAP uses the configuration provided by theclient-ssl-context
when making an SSL/TLS connection as a client. You can find more details on creating aclient-ssl-context
in Using a client-ssl-context in the How to Configure Server Security guide.Configure the
iiop-openjdk
subsystem to use theclient-ssl-context
andserver-ssl-context
.Example: Setting
client-ssl-context
andserver-ssl-context
batch /subsystem=iiop-openjdk:write-attribute(name=client-ssl-context,value=iiopClientSSC) /subsystem=iiop-openjdk:write-attribute(name=server-ssl-context,value=iiopServerSSC) run-batch reload
Configure the connection to and from the
iiop-openjdk
subsystem.You can indicate whether or not SSL/TLS connections are required when connecting to and from the
iiop-openjdk
subsystem by adjusting the following attributes:-
To enable support for SSL in the
iiop-openjdk
subsystem, setsupport-ssl
totrue
. Defaults tofalse
. -
To require SSL/TLS connections from the
iiop-openjdk
subsystem, setclient-requires-ssl
totrue
. Defaults tofalse
. -
To require SSL/TLS connections to the
iiop-openjdk
subsystem, setserver-requires-ssl
totrue
. Defaults tofalse
. Note that setting this totrue
will block attempts to connect to the non-SSL IIOP socket. -
To adjust the
socket-binding
, setssl-socket-binding
to the desired binding. Defaults toiiop-ssl
.
Example: Setting SSL/TLS Connections to and from IIOP as Required
/subsystem=iiop-openjdk:write-attribute(name=support-ssl,value=true) /subsystem=iiop-openjdk:write-attribute(name=client-requires-ssl,value=true) /subsystem=iiop-openjdk:write-attribute(name=server-requires-ssl,value=true) /subsystem=iiop-openjdk:write-attribute(name=ssl-socket-binding,value=iiop-ssl) reload
-
To enable support for SSL in the
Chapter 16. Jakarta Connectors Management
16.1. About Jakarta Connectors
Jakarta Connectors define a standard architecture for Jakarta EE systems to external heterogeneous Enterprise Information Systems (EIS). Examples of EISs include Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP) systems, mainframe transaction processing (TP), databases, and messaging systems. A resource adapter is a component that implements the Jakarta Connectors architecture.
Jakarta Connectors 1.7 provides features for managing:
- connections
- transactions
- security
- life-cycle
- work instances
- transaction inflow
- message inflow
16.2. About Resource Adapters
A resource adapter is a deployable Jakarta EE component that provides communication between a Jakarta EE application and an Enterprise Information System (EIS) using the Jakarta Connectors specification. A resource adapter is often provided by EIS vendors to allow easy integration of their products with Jakarta EE applications.
An Enterprise Information System can be any other software system within an organization. Examples include Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP) systems, database systems, e-mail servers and proprietary messaging systems.
A resource adapter is packaged in a Resource Adapter Archive (RAR) file which can be deployed to JBoss EAP. A RAR file may also be included in an Enterprise Archive (EAR) deployment.
The resource adapter itself is defined within the resource-adapters
subsystem, which is provided by the IronJacamar project.
16.3. Configuring the jca
subsystem
The jca
subsystem controls the general settings for the Jakarta Connectors container and resource adapter deployments. You can configure the jca
subsystem using the management console or the management CLI.
The main jca
subsystem elements to configure are:
- Configure
jca
subsystem settings from the management console The
jca
subsystem can be configured from the management console by navigating to Configuration → Subsystems → JCA and clicking View. Then, select the appropriate tab:- Configuration - Contains settings for the cached connection manager, archive validation, and bean validation. Each of these is contained in their own tab as well. Modify these settings by opening the appropriate tab and clicking the Edit link.
- Bootstrap Context - Contains the list of configured bootstrap contexts. New bootstrap context objects can be added, removed, and configured. Each bootstrap context must be assigned a work manager.
Workmanager - Contains the list of configured work managers. New work managers can be added, removed, and their thread pools configured here. Each work manager can have one short-running thread pool and an optional long-running thread pool.
The thread pool attributes can be configured by clicking Thread Pools on the selected work manager.
- Configure
jca
subsystem settings from the management CLI -
The
jca
subsystem can be configured from the management CLI from the/subsystem=jca
address. In a managed domain, you must precede the command with/profile=PROFILE_NAME
.
Attribute names in the tables in the following sections are listed as they appear in the management model, for example, when using the management CLI. See the schema definition file located at EAP_HOME/docs/schema/wildfly-jca_5_0.xsd
to view the elements as they appear in the XML, as there may be differences from the management model.
Archive Validation
This determines whether archive validation will be performed on the deployment units. The following table describes the attributes you can set for archive validation.
Attribute | Default Value | Description |
---|---|---|
enabled | true | Specifies whether archive validation is enabled. |
fail-on-error | true | Specifies whether an archive validation error report fails the deployment. |
fail-on-warn | false | Specifies whether an archive validation warning report fails the deployment. |
If an archive does not implement the Jakarta Connectors specification correctly and archive validation is enabled, an error message will display during deployment describing the problem. For example:
Severity: ERROR Section: 19.4.2 Description: A ResourceAdapter must implement a "public int hashCode()" method. Code: com.mycompany.myproject.ResourceAdapterImpl Severity: ERROR Section: 19.4.2 Description: A ResourceAdapter must implement a "public boolean equals(Object)" method. Code: com.mycompany.myproject.ResourceAdapterImpl
If archive validation is not specified, it is considered present and the enabled
attribute defaults to true
.
Bean Validation
This setting determines whether bean validation, defined in JSR-303, will be performed on the deployment units. The following table describes the attributes you can set for bean validation. The Jakarta equivalent for bean validation is Jakarta Bean Validation.
Attribute | Default Value | Description |
---|---|---|
enabled | true | Specifies whether bean validation is enabled. |
If bean validation is not specified, it is considered present and the enabled
attribute defaults to true
.
Work Managers
There are two types of work managers:
- Default work manager
- The default work manager and its thread pools.
- Custom work manager
- A custom work manager definition and its thread pools.
The following table describes the attributes you can set for work managers.
Attribute | Description |
---|---|
name | Specifies the name of the work manager. |
elytron-enabled |
This attribute enables Elytron security for the |
A work manager also has the following child elements.
Child Element | Description |
---|---|
short-running-threads | Thread pool for standard Work instances. Each work manager has one short-running thread pool. |
long-running-threads |
Thread pool for Jakarta Connectors 1.7 Work instances that set the |
The following table describes the attributes you can set for work manager thread pools.
Attribute | Description |
---|---|
allow-core-timeout |
Boolean setting that determines whether core threads may time out. The default value is |
core-threads | The core thread pool size. This must be equal to or smaller than the maximum thread pool size. |
handoff-executor | An executor to delegate tasks to in the event that a task cannot be accepted. If not specified, tasks that cannot be accepted will be silently discarded. |
keepalive-time | Specifies the amount of time that pool threads should be kept after doing work. |
max-threads | The maximum thread pool size. |
name | Specifies the name of the thread pool. |
queue-length | The maximum queue length. |
thread-factory | Reference to the thread factory. |
Distributed Work Managers
A distributed work manager is a work manager instance that is able to reschedule work execution on another work manager instance.
The following example management CLI commands configure a distributed work manager. Note that you must use a configuration that provides high availability capabilities, such as the standalone-ha.xml
or standalone-full-ha.xml
configuration file for a standalone server.
Example: Configure a Distributed Work Manager
batch /subsystem=jca/distributed-workmanager=myDistWorkMgr:add(name=myDistWorkMgr) /subsystem=jca/distributed-workmanager=myDistWorkMgr/short-running-threads=myDistWorkMgr:add(queue-length=10,max-threads=10) /subsystem=jca/bootstrap-context=myCustomContext:add(name=myCustomContext,workmanager=myDistWorkMgr) run-batch
The name of the short-running-threads
element must be the same as the name of the distributed-workmanager
element.
The following table describes the attributes you can configure for distributed work managers.
Attribute | Description |
---|---|
elytron-enabled | Enables Elytron security for the work manager. |
name | The name of the distributed work manager. |
policy | The policy decides when to redistribute a work instance. Allowed values are:
|
policy-options |
List of the policy’s key/value pair options. If you use the /subsystem=jca/distributed-workmanager=myDistWorkMgr:write-attribute(name=policy-options,value={watermark=3}) |
selector | The selector decides to which nodes in the network to redistribute the work instance. Allowed values are:
|
selector-options | List of the selector’s key/value pair options. |
A distributed work manager also has the following child elements.
Child Element | Description |
---|---|
long-running-threads |
The thread pool for work instances that set the |
short-running-threads | The thread pool for standard work instances. Each distributed work manager must have a short-running thread pool. |
Bootstrap Contexts
This is used to define custom bootstrap contexts. The following table describes the attributes you can set for bootstrap contexts.
Attribute | Description |
---|---|
name | Specifies the name of the bootstrap context. |
workmanager | Specifies the name of the work manager to use for this context. |
Cached Connection Manager
This is used for debugging connections and supporting lazy enlistment of a connection in a transaction, tracking whether they are used and released properly by the application. The following table describes the attributes you can set for the cached connection manager.
Attribute | Default Value | Description |
---|---|---|
debug | false | Outputs warning on failure to explicitly close connections. |
error | false | Throws exception on failure to explicitly close connections. |
ignore-unknown-connections | false | Specifies that unknown connections will not be cached. |
install | false | Enable or disable the cached connection manager valve and interceptor. |
16.4. Configuring Resource Adapters
16.4.1. Deploy a Resource Adapter
Resource adapters can be deployed just like other deployments using the management CLI or the management console. When running a standalone server, you can also copy the archive to the deployments directory to be picked up by the deployment scanner.
Deploy a Resource Adapter using the Management CLI
To deploy the resource adapter to a standalone server, enter the following management CLI command.
deploy /path/to/resource-adapter.rar
To deploy the resource adapter to all server groups in a managed domain, enter the following management CLI command.
deploy /path/to/resource-adapter.rar --all-server-groups
Deploy a Resource Adapter using the Management Console
- Log in to the management console and click on the Deployments tab.
- Click the Add (+) button. In a managed domain, you will first need to select Content Repository.
- Choose the Upload Deployment option.
- Browse to the resource adapter archive and click Next.
- Verify the upload, then click Finish.
- In a managed domain, deploy the deployment to the appropriate server groups and enable the deployment.
Deploy a Resource Adapter Using the Deployment Scanner
To deploy a resource adapter manually to a standalone server, copy the resource adapter archive to the server deployments directory, for example, EAP_HOME/standalone/deployments/
. This will be picked up and deployed by the deployment scanner.
This option is not available for managed domains. You must use either the management console or the management CLI to deploy the resource adapter to server groups.
16.4.2. Configure a Resource Adapter
You can configure resource adapters using the management interfaces. The below example shows how to configure a resource adapter using the management CLI. See your resource adapter vendor’s documentation for supported properties and other important information.
Add the Resource Adapter Configuration
Add the resource adapter configuration.
/subsystem=resource-adapters/resource-adapter=eis.rar:add(archive=eis.rar, transaction-support=XATransaction)
Configure the Resource Adapter Settings
Configure any of the following settings as necessary.
Configure
config-properties
.Add the
server
configuration property./subsystem=resource-adapters/resource-adapter=eis.rar/config-properties=server:add(value=localhost)
Add the
port
configuration property./subsystem=resource-adapters/resource-adapter=eis.rar/config-properties=port:add(value=9000)
Configure
admin-objects
.Add an admin object.
/subsystem=resource-adapters/resource-adapter=eis.rar/admin-objects=aoName:add(class-name=com.acme.eis.ra.EISAdminObjectImpl, jndi-name=java:/eis/AcmeAdminObject)
Configure an admin object configuration property.
/subsystem=resource-adapters/resource-adapter=eis.rar/admin-objects=aoName/config-properties=threshold:add(value=10)
Configure
connection-definitions
.Add a connection definition for a managed connection factory.
/subsystem=resource-adapters/resource-adapter=eis.rar/connection-definitions=cfName:add(class-name=com.acme.eis.ra.EISManagedConnectionFactory, jndi-name=java:/eis/AcmeConnectionFactory)
Configure a managed connection factory configuration property.
/subsystem=resource-adapters/resource-adapter=eis.rar/connection-definitions=cfName/config-properties=name:add(value=Acme Inc)
Configure whether to record the enlistment trace. You can enable the recording of enlistment traces by setting the
enlistment-trace
attribute totrue
./subsystem=resource-adapters/resource-adapter=eis.rar/connection-definitions=cfName:write-attribute(name=enlistment-trace,value=true)
WarningEnabling enlistment tracing makes tracking down errors during transaction enlistment easier, but comes with a performance impact.
See Resource Adapter Attributes for all available configuration options for resource adapters.
Activate the Resource Adapter
Activate the resource adapter.
/subsystem=resource-adapters/resource-adapter=eis.rar:activate
You can also define capacity policies for resource adapters. For more details, see the Capacity Policies section.
16.4.3. Configure Resource Adapters to Use the Elytron Subsystem
Two types of communications occur between the server and the resource adapter in IronJacamar.
One of them is when the server opens a resource adapter connection. As defined by the specifications, this can be secured by container-managed sign-on, which requires propagation of a JAAS subject with principal and credentials to the resource adapter when opening the connection. This sign-on can be delegated to Elytron.
IronJacamar supports security inflow. This mechanism enables a resource adapter to establish security information when submitting a work to the work manager, and when delivering messages to endpoints residing in the same JBoss EAP instance.
Container-managed Sign-On
In order to achieve container-managed sign-on with Elytron, the elytron-enabled
attribute needs to be set to true
. This will result in all connections to the resource adapter to be secured by Elytron.
/subsystem=resource-adapters/resource-adapter=RAR_NAME/connection-definitions=FACTORY_NAME:write-attribute(name=elytron-enabled,value=true)
The elytron-enabled
attribute can be configured using the management CLI by setting the elytron-enabled
attribute, in the resource-adapters
subsystems, to true
. By default this attribute is set to false
.
The authentication-context
attribute defines the name of the Elytron authentication context that will be used for performing sign-on.
An Elytron authentication-context
attribute can contain one or more authentication-configuration
elements, which in turn contains the credentials you want to use.
If the authentication-context
attribute is not set, JBoss EAP will use the current authentication-context
, which is the authentication-context
used by the caller code that is opening the connection.
Example: Creating an authentication-configuration
/subsystem=elytron/authentication-configuration=exampleAuthConfig:add(authentication-name=sa,credential-reference={clear-text=sa})
Example: Creating the authentication-context
Using the above Configuration
/subsystem=elytron/authentication-context=exampleAuthContext:add(match-rules=[{authentication-configuration=exampleAuthConfig}])
Security Inflow
It is also possible for the resource manager to inflow security credentials when submitting the work which is to be executed by the work manager. Security inflow allows the work to authenticate itself before execution. If authentication succeeds, the submitted work will be executed under the resulting authentication context. If it fails, the work execution will be rejected.
To enable Elytron security inflow, set the wm-elytron-security-domain
attribute when configuring the resource adapter work manager. Elytron will perform the authentication based on the specified domain.
When the resource adapter work manager is configured to use the Elytron security domain, wm-elytron-security-domain
, the referenced work manager should have the elytron-enabled
attribute set to true
.
/subsystem=jca/workmanager=customWM:add(name=customWM, elytron-enabled=true)
If instead of wm-elytron-security-domain
the wm-security-domain
attribute is used, the security inflow will be performed by the legacy security
subsystem.
In the example configuration of jca
subsystem below, we can see the configuration of a resource adapter called ra-with-elytron-security-domain
. This resource adapter configures work manager security to use the Elytron security domain’s wm-realm
.
<subsystem xmlns="urn:jboss:domain:jca:5.0"> <archive-validation enabled="true" fail-on-error="true" fail-on-warn="false"/> <bean-validation enabled="true"/> <default-workmanager> <short-running-threads> <core-threads count="50"/> <queue-length count="50"/> <max-threads count="50"/> <keepalive-time time="10" unit="seconds"/> </short-running-threads> <long-running-threads> <core-threads count="50"/> <queue-length count="50"/> <max-threads count="50"/> <keepalive-time time="10" unit="seconds"/> </long-running-threads> </default-workmanager> <workmanager name="customWM"> <elytron-enabled>true</elytron-enabled> <short-running-threads> <core-threads count="20"/> <queue-length count="20"/> <max-threads count="20"/> </short-running-threads> </workmanager> <bootstrap-contexts> <bootstrap-context name="customContext" workmanager="customWM"/> </bootstrap-contexts> <cached-connection-manager/> </subsystem>
The work manager is then referenced using the boostrap context from the resource-adapter
subsystem.
<subsystem xmlns="urn:jboss:domain:resource-adapters:5.0"> <resource-adapters> <resource-adapter id="ra-with-elytron-security-domain"> <archive> ra-with-elytron-security-domain.rar </archive> <bootstrap-context>customContext</bootstrap-context> <transaction-support>NoTransaction</transaction-support> <workmanager> <security> <elytron-security-domain>wm-realm</elytron-security-domain> <default-principal>wm-default-principal</default-principal> <default-groups> <group> wm-default-group </group> </default-groups> </security> </workmanager> </resource-adapter> </resource-adapters> </subsystem>
Example: Configuration of the Security Domain
/subsystem=elytron/properties-realm=wm-properties-realm:add(users-properties={path=/security-dir/users.properties, plain-text=true}, groups-properties={path=/security-dir/groups.properties}) /subsystem=elytron/simple-role-decoder=wm-role-decoder:add(attribute=groups) /subsystem=elytron/constant-permission-mapper=wm-permission-mapper:add(permissions=[{class-name="org.wildfly.security.auth.permission.LoginPermission"}]) /subsystem=elytron/security-domain=wm-realm:add(default-realm=wm-properties-realm, permission-mapper=wm-permission-mapper, realms=[{role-decoder=wm-role-decoder, realm=wm-properties-realm}])
The Work
class is responsible for providing the credentials for Elytron’s authentication under the specified domain. For that, it must implement javax.resource.spi.work.WorkContextProvider
.
public interface WorkContextProvider { /** * Gets an instance of <code>WorkContexts</code> that needs to be used * by the <code>WorkManager</code> to set up the execution context while * executing a <code>Work</code> instance. * * @return an <code>List</code> of <code>WorkContext</code> instances. */ List<WorkContext> getWorkContexts(); }
This interface allows the Work
class to use the WorkContext
to configure some aspects of the context in which the work will be executed. One of those aspects is the security inflow. For that, the List<WorkContext> getWorkContexts
method must provide a javax.resource.spi.work.SecurityContext
. This context will use javax.security.auth.callback.Callback
objects as defined in the JSR-196 specification to provide the credentials. The Jakarta equivalent for the authentication of the service provider interface for containers is Jakarta Authentication.
Example: Creation of Callbacks Using Context
public class ExampleWork implements Work, WorkContextProvider { private final String username; private final String role; public MyWork(TestBean bean, String username, String role) { this.principals = null; this.roles = null; this.bean = bean; this.username = username; this.role = role; } public List<WorkContext> getWorkContexts() { List<WorkContext> l = new ArrayList<>(1); l.add(new MySecurityContext(username, role)); return l; } public void run() { ... } public void release() { ... } public class ExampleSecurityContext extends SecurityContext { public void setupSecurityContext(CallbackHandler handler, Subject executionSubject, Subject serviceSubject) { try { List<javax.security.auth.callback.Callback> cbs = new ArrayList<>(); cbs.add(new CallerPrincipalCallback(executionSubject, new SimplePrincipal(username))); cbs.add(new GroupPrincipalCallback(executionSubject, new String[]{role})); handler.handle(cbs.toArray(new javax.security.auth.callback.Callback[cbs.size()])); } catch (Throwable t) { throw new RuntimeException(t); } } }
In the above example, ExampleWork
implements the WorkContextProvider
interface to provide ExampleSecurityContext
. That context will create the callbacks necessary to provide the security information that will be authenticated by Elytron upon work execution.
16.4.4. Deploy and Configure the IBM MQ Resource Adapter
You can find the instructions for deploying the IBM MQ resource adapter in Configuring Messaging for JBoss EAP.
16.4.5. Deploy and Configure the Generic JMS Resource Adapter
You can find the instructions for configuring the generic JMS resource adapter in Configuring Messaging for JBoss EAP.
16.5. Configure Managed Connection Pools
JBoss EAP provides three implementations of the ManagedConnectionPool
interface.
org.jboss.jca.core.connectionmanager.pool.mcp.SemaphoreConcurrentLinkedQueueManagedConnectionPool
- This is the default connection pool in JBoss EAP 7 and provides the best out-of-the-box performance.
org.jboss.jca.core.connectionmanager.pool.mcp.SemaphoreArrayListManagedConnectionPool
- This was the default connection pool in previous JBoss EAP versions.
org.jboss.jca.core.connectionmanager.pool.mcp.LeakDumperManagedConnectionPool
- This connection pool is used for debugging purposes only and will report any leaks upon shutdown or when the pool is flushed.
You can set the managed connection pool implementation for a datasource using the following management CLI command.
/subsystem=datasources/data-source=DATA_SOURCE:write-attribute(name=mcp,value=MCP_CLASS)
You can set the managed connection pool implementation for a resource adapter using the following management CLI command.
/subsystem=resource-adapters/resource-adapter=RESOURCE_ADAPTER/connection-definitions=CONNECTION_DEFINITION:write-attribute(name=mcp,value=MCP_CLASS)
You can set the managed connection pool implementation for a messaging server using the following management CLI command.
/subsystem=messaging-activemq/server=SERVER/pooled-connection-factory=CONNECTION_FACTORY:write-attribute(name=managed-connection-pool,value=MCP_CLASS)
16.6. View Connection Statistics
You can read statistics for a defined connection from the /deployment=NAME.rar
subtree. This is so that you can access statistics for any RAR, even if it not defined in a standalone.xml
or domain.xml
configuration.
/deployment=NAME.rar/subsystem=resource-adapters/statistics=statistics/connection-definitions=java\:\/testMe:read-resource(include-runtime=true)
Be sure to specify the include-runtime=true
argument, as all statistics are runtime-only information.
See Resource Adapter Statistics for information on the available statistics.
16.7. Flushing Resource Adapter Connections
You can flush resource adapter connections using the following management CLI commands.
In a managed domain, you must precede these commands with /host=HOST_NAME/server=SERVER_NAME
.
Flush all connections in the pool.
/subsystem=resource-adapters/resource-adapter=RESOURCE_ADAPTER/connection-definitions=CONNECTION_DEFINITION:flush-all-connection-in-pool
Gracefully flush all connections in the pool.
/subsystem=resource-adapters/resource-adapter=RESOURCE_ADAPTER/connection-definitions=CONNECTION_DEFINITION:flush-gracefully-connection-in-pool
The server will wait until connections become idle before flushing them.
Flush all idle connections in the pool.
/subsystem=resource-adapters/resource-adapter=RESOURCE_ADAPTER/connection-definitions=CONNECTION_DEFINITION:flush-idle-connection-in-pool
Flush all invalid connections in the pool.
/subsystem=resource-adapters/resource-adapter=RESOURCE_ADAPTER/connection-definitions=CONNECTION_DEFINITION:flush-invalid-connection-in-pool
The server will flush all connections that it determines to be invalid.
16.8. Tuning the Resource Adapters Subsystem
For tips on monitoring and optimizing performance for the resource-adapters
subsystem, see the Datasource and Resource Adapter Tuning section of the Performance Tuning Guide.
Chapter 17. Configuring the Web Server (Undertow)
17.1. Undertow Subsystem Overview
In JBoss EAP 7, the undertow
subsystem takes the place of the web
subsystem from JBoss EAP 6.
The undertow
subsystem allows you to configure the web server and servlet container settings. It implements the Jakarta Servlet 4.0 Specification as well as websockets. It also supports HTTP upgrade and using high performance non-blocking handlers in servlet deployments. The undertow
subsystem also has the ability to act as a high performance reverse proxy which supports mod_cluster.
Within the undertow
subsystem, there are five main components to configure:
While JBoss EAP does offer the ability to update the configuration for each of these components, the default configuration is suitable for most use cases and provides reasonable performance settings.
Default Undertow Subsystem Configuration
<subsystem xmlns="urn:jboss:domain:undertow:10.0" default-server="default-server" default-virtual-host="default-host" default-servlet-container="default" default-security-domain="other"> <buffer-cache name="default"/> <server name="default-server"> <http-listener name="default" socket-binding="http" redirect-socket="https" enable-http2="true"/> <https-listener name="https" socket-binding="https" security-realm="ApplicationRealm" enable-http2="true"/> <host name="default-host" alias="localhost"> <location name="/" handler="welcome-content"/> <http-invoker security-realm="ApplicationRealm"/> </host> </server> <servlet-container name="default"> <jsp-config/> <websockets/> </servlet-container> <handlers> <file name="welcome-content" path="${jboss.home.dir}/welcome-content"/> </handlers> </subsystem>
The undertow
subsystem also relies on the io
subsystem to provide XNIO workers and buffer pools. The io
subsystem is configured separately and provides a default configuration which should give optimal performance in most cases.
Compared to the web
subsystem in JBoss EAP 6, the undertow
subsystem in JBoss EAP 7 has different default behaviors of HTTP methods.
Using Elytron with Undertow Subsystem
As a web application is deployed, the name of the security domain required by that application will be identified. This will either be from within the deployment or if the deployment does not have a security domain, the default-security-domain
as defined on the undertow
subsystem will be assumed. By default it is assumed that the security domain maps to a PicketBox
defined in the legacy security subsystem. However, an application-security-domain
resource can be added to the undertow
subsystem which maps from the name of the security domain required by the application to the appropriate Elytron configuration.
Example: Adding a Mapping.
/subsystem=undertow/application-security-domain=ApplicationDomain:add(security-domain=ApplicationDomain)
The addition of mapping is successful if the result is:
<subsystem xmlns="urn:jboss:domain:undertow:10.0" ... default-security-domain="other"> ... <application-security-domains> <application-security-domain name="ApplicationDomain" security-domain="ApplicationDomain"/> </application-security-domains> ... </subsystem>
- If the deployment was already deployed at this point, the application server should be reloaded for the application security domain mapping to take effect.
- In current web service-Elytron integration, the name of the security domain specified to secure a web service endpoint and the Elytron security domain name must be the same.
This simple form is suitable where a deployment is using the standard HTTP mechanism as defined within the Servlet specification like BASIC
, CLIENT_CERT
, DIGEST
, FORM
. Here, the authentication will be performed against the ApplicationDomain
security domain. This form is also suitable where an application is not using any authentication mechanism and instead is using programmatic authentication or is trying to obtain the SecurityDomain
associated with the deployment and use it directly.
Example: Advanced Form of the Mapping:
/subsystem=undertow/application-security-domain=MyAppSecurity:add(http-authentication-factory=application-http-authentication)
The advanced mapping is successful if the result is:
<subsystem xmlns="urn:jboss:domain:undertow:10.0" ... default-security-domain="other"> ... <application-security-domains> <application-security-domain name="MyAppSecurity" http-authentication-factory="application-http-authentication"/> </application-security-domains> ... </subsystem>
In this form of the configuration, instead of referencing a security domain, an http-authentication-factory
is referenced. This is the factory that will be used to obtain the instances of the authentication mechanisms and is in turn associated with the security domain.
You should reference an http-authentication-factory
attribute when using custom HTTP authentication mechanisms or where additional configuration must be defined for mechanisms such as principal transformers, credential factories, and mechanism realms. It is also better to reference an http-authentication-factory
attribute when using mechanisms other than the four described in the Servlet
specification.
When the advanced form of mapping is used, another configuration option is available, override-deployment-config
. The referenced http-authentication-factory
can return a complete set of authentication mechanisms. By default, these are filtered to just match the mechanisms requested by the application. If this option is set to true
, then the mechanisms offered by the factory will override the mechanisms requested by the application.
The application-security-domain
resource also has one additional option enable-jacc
. If this is set to true
, JACC will be enabled for any deployments matching this mapping.
Runtime Information
Where an application-security-domain
mapping is in use, it can be useful to double check that deployments did match against it as expected. If the resource is read with include-runtime=true
, the deployments that are associated with the mapping will also be shown as:
/subsystem=undertow/application-security-domain=MyAppSecurity:read-resource(include-runtime=true) { "outcome" => "success", "result" => { "enable-jacc" => false, "http-authentication-factory" => undefined, "override-deployment-config" => false, "referencing-deployments" => ["simple-webapp.war"], "security-domain" => "ApplicationDomain", "setting" => undefined } }
In this output, the referencing-deployments
attribute shows that the deployment simple-webapp.war
has been deployed using the mapping.
17.2. Configuring Buffer Caches
The buffer cache is used to cache static resources. JBoss EAP enables multiple caches to be configured and referenced by deployments, allowing different deployments to use different cache sizes. Buffers are allocated in regions and are a fixed size. The total amount of space used can be calculated by multiplying the buffer size by the number of buffers per region by the maximum number of regions. The default size of a buffer cache is 10MB.
JBoss EAP provides a single cache by default:
Default Undertow Subsystem Configuration
<subsystem xmlns="urn:jboss:domain:undertow:10.0" default-server="default-server" default-virtual-host="default-host" default-servlet-container="default" default-security-domain="other"> <buffer-cache name="default"/> ... </subsystem>
Updating an Existing Buffer Cache
To update an existing buffer cache:
/subsystem=undertow/buffer-cache=default/:write-attribute(name=buffer-size,value=2048)
reload
Creating a New Buffer Cache
To create a new buffer cache:
/subsystem=undertow/buffer-cache=new-buffer:add
Deleting a Buffer Cache
To delete a buffer cache:
/subsystem=undertow/buffer-cache=new-buffer:remove
reload
For a full list of the attributes available for configuring buffer caches, please see the Undertow Subsystem Attributes section.
17.3. Configuring Byte Buffer Pools
Undertow byte buffer pools are used to allocate pooled NIO ByteBuffer
instances. All listeners have a byte buffer pool and you can use different buffer pools and workers for each listener. Byte buffer pools can be shared between different server instances.
These buffers are used for IO operations, and the buffer size has a big impact on application performance. For most servers, the ideal size is usually 16k.
Updating an Existing Byte Buffer Pool
To update an existing byte buffer pool:
/subsystem=undertow/byte-buffer-pool=myByteBufferPool:write-attribute(name=buffer-size,value=1024)
reload
Creating a Byte Buffer Pool
To create a new byte buffer pool:
/subsystem=undertow/byte-buffer-pool=newByteBufferPool:add
Deleting a Byte Buffer Pool
To delete a byte buffer pool:
/subsystem=undertow/byte-buffer-pool=newByteBufferPool:remove
reload
For a full list of the attributes available for configuring byte buffer pools, see the Byte Buffer Pool Attributes reference.
17.4. Configuring a Server
A server represents an instance of Undertow and consists of several elements:
- host
- http-listener
- https-listener
- ajp-listener
The host element provides a virtual host configuration, while the three listeners provide connections of that type to the Undertow instance.
The default behavior of the server is to queue requests while the server is starting. You can change the default behavior using the queue-requests-on-start
attribute on the host. If this attribute is set to true
, which is the default, then requests that arrive when the server is starting will be held until the server is ready. If this attribute is set to false
, then requests that arrive before the server has completely started will be rejected with the default response code.
Regardless of the attribute value, request processing does not start until the server is completely started.
You can configure the queue-requests-on-start
attribute using the management console by navigating to Configuration → Subsystems → Web (Undertow) → Server, selecting the server and clicking View, and selecting the Hosts tab. For a managed domain, you must specify which profile to configure.
Multiple servers can be configured, allowing deployments and servers to be completely isolated. This can be useful in certain scenarios such as multi-tenant environments.
JBoss EAP provides a server by default:
Default Undertow Subsystem Configuration
<subsystem xmlns="urn:jboss:domain:undertow:10.0" default-server="default-server" default-virtual-host="default-host" default-servlet-container="default" default-security-domain="other"> <buffer-cache name="default"/> <server name="default-server"> <http-listener name="default" socket-binding="http" redirect-socket="https" enable-http2="true"/> <https-listener name="https" socket-binding="https" security-realm="ApplicationRealm" enable-http2="true"/> <host name="default-host" alias="localhost"> <location name="/" handler="welcome-content"/> <http-invoker security-realm="ApplicationRealm"/> </host> </server> ... </subsystem>
The following examples show how to configure a server using the management CLI. You can also configure a server using the management console by navigating to Configuration → Subsystems → Web (Undertow) → Server.
Updating an Existing Server
To update an existing server:
/subsystem=undertow/server=default-server:write-attribute(name=default-host,value=default-host)
reload
Creating a New Server
To create a new server:
/subsystem=undertow/server=new-server:add
reload
Deleting a Server
To delete a server:
/subsystem=undertow/server=new-server:remove
reload
For a full list of the attributes available for configuring servers, see the Undertow Subsystem Attributes section.
17.4.1. Access Logging
You can configure access logging on each host you define.
Two access logging options are available: standard access logging and console access logging.
Note that the additional processing required for access logging can affect system performance.
17.4.1.1. Standard Access Logging
Standard access logging writes log entries to a log file.
By default, the log file is stored in the directory standalone/log/access_log.log.
To enable standard access logging, add the access-log setting to the host for which you want to capture access log data. The following CLI command illustrates the configuration on the default host in the default JBoss EAP server:
/subsystem=undertow/server=default-server/host=default-host/setting=access-log:add
You must reload the server after enabling standard access logging.
By default, the access log record includes the following data:
- Remote host name
- Remote logical user name (always -)
- Remote user that was authenticated
- The date and time of the request, in Common Log Format
- The first line of the request
- The HTTP status code of the response
- The number of bytes sent, excluding HTTP headers
This set of data is defined as the common pattern. Another pattern, combined, is also available. In addition to the data logged in the common pattern, the combined pattern includes the referer and user agent from the incoming header.
You can change the data logged using the pattern
attribute. The following CLI command illustrates updating the pattern
attribute to use the combined pattern:
/subsystem=undertow/server=default-server/host=default-host/setting=access-log:write-attribute(name=pattern,value="combined"
You must reload the server after updating the pattern attribute.
Pattern | Description |
---|---|
%a | Remote IP address |
%A | Local IP address |
%b |
Bytes sent, excluding HTTP headers or |
%B | Bytes sent, excluding HTTP headers |
%h | Remote host name |
%H | Request protocol |
%l |
Remote logical username from |
%m | Request method |
%p | Local port |
%q |
Query string (excluding the |
%r | First line of the request |
%s | HTTP status code of the response |
%t | Date and time, in Common Log Format format |
%u | Remote user that was authenticated |
%U | Requested URL path |
%v | Local server name |
%D | Time taken to process the request, in milliseconds |
%T | Time taken to process the request, in seconds |
%I | Current Request thread name (can compare later with stack traces) |
common |
|
combined |
|
You can also write information from the cookie, the incoming header and response header, or the session. The syntax is modeled after the Apache syntax:
-
%{i,xxx}
for incoming headers -
%{o,xxx}
for outgoing response headers -
%{c,xxx}
for a specific cookie -
%{r,xxx}
wherexxx
is an attribute in theServletRequest
-
%{s,xxx}
wherexxx
is an attribute in theHttpSession
Additional configuration options are available for this log. For more information see "access-log Attributes" in the appendix.
17.4.1.2. Console Access Logging
Console access logging writes data to stdout as structured as JSON data.
Each access log record is a single line of data. You can capture this data for processing by log aggregation systems.
To configure console access logging, add the console-access-log setting to the host for which you want to capture access log data. The following CLI command illustrates the configuration on the default host in the default JBoss EAP server:
/subsystem=undertow/server=default-server/host=default-host/setting=console-access-log:add
By default, the console access log record includes the following data:
Log data field name | Description |
---|---|
eventSource | The source of the event in the request |
hostName | The JBoss EAP host that processed the request |
bytesSent | The number of bytes the JBoss EAP server sent in response to the request |
dateTime | The date and time that the request was processed by the JBoss EAP server |
remoteHost | The IP address of the machine where the request originated |
remoteUser | The user name associated with the remote request |
requestLine | The request submitted |
responseCode | The HTTP response code returned by the JBoss EAP server |
Default properties are always included in the log output. You can use the attributes
attribute to change the labels of the default log data, and in some cases to change the data configuration. You can also use the attributes
attribute to add additional log data to the output.
Log data field name | Description | Format |
---|---|---|
authentication-type | The authentication type used to authenticate the user associated with the request. Default label: authenticationType Use the key option to change the label for this property. | authentication-type{} authentication-type={key="authType"} |
bytes-sent | The number of bytes returned for the request, excluding HTTP headers. Default label: bytesSent Use the key option to change the label for this property. | bytes-sent={} bytes-sent={key="sent-bytes"} |
date-time | The date and time that the request was received and processed. Default label: dateTime Use the key option to change the label for this property. Use the date-format to define the pattern used to format the date-time record. The pattern must be a Java SimpleDateFormatter pattern. Use the time-zone option to specify the time zone used to format the date and/or time data if the date-format option is defined. This value must be a valid java.util.TimeZone. | date-time={key="<keyname>", date-format="<date-time format>"} date-time={key="@timestamp", date-format="yyyy-MM-dd’T’HH:mm:ssSSS"} |
host-and-port | The host and port queried by the request. Default label: hostAndPort Use the key option to change the label for this property. | host-and-port{} host-and-port={key="port-host"} |
local-ip | The IP address of the local connection. Use the key option to change the label for this property. Default label: localIp Use the key option to change the label for this property. | local-ip{} local-ip{key=”localIP”} |
local-port | The port of the local connection. Default label: localPort Use the key option to change the label for this property. | local-port{} local-port{key=”LocalPort”} |
local-server-name | The name of the local server that processed the request. Default label: localServerName Use the key option to change the label for this property. | local-server-name {} local-server-name {key=LocalServerName} |
path-parameter | One or more path or URI parameters included in the request. The names property is a comma-separated list of names used to resolve the exchange values. Use the key-prefix property to make the keys unique. If the key-prefix is specified, the prefix is prepended to the name of each path parameter in the output. | path-parameter{names={store,section}} path-parameter{names={store,section}, key-prefix=”my-”} |
predicate | The name of the predicate context. The names property is a comma-separated list of names used to resolve the exchange values. Use the key-prefix property to make the keys unique. If the key-prefix is specified, the prefix is prepended to the name of each path parameter in the output. | predicate{names={store,section}} predicate{names={store,section}, key-prefix=”my-”} |
query-parameter | One or query parameters included in the request. The names property is a comma-separated list of names used to resolve the exchange values. Use the key-prefix property to make the keys unique. If the key-prefix is specified, the prefix is prepended to the name of each path parameter in the output. | query-parameter{names={store,section}} query-parameter{names={store,section}, key-prefix=”my-”} |
query-string | The query string of the request. Default label: queryString Use the key option to change the label for this property. Use the include-question-mark property to specify whether the query string should include the question mark. By default, the question mark is not included. | query-string{} query-string{key=”QueryString”, include-question-mark=”true”} |
relative-path | The relative path of the request. Default label: relativePath Use the key option to change the label for this property. | relative-path{} relative-path{key=”RelativePath”} |
remote-host | The remote host name. Default label: remoteHost Use the key option to change the label for this property. | remote-host{} remote-host{key=”RemoteHost”} |
remote-ip | The remote IP address. Default label: remoteIp Use the key options to change the label for this property. Use the obfuscated property to obfuscate the IP address in the output log record. The default value is false. | remote-ip{} remote-ip{key=”RemoteIP”, obfuscated=”true”} |
remote-user | Remote user that was authenticated. Default label: remoteUser Use the key options to change the label for this property. | remote-user{} remote-user{key=”RemoteUser”} |
request-header | The name of a request header. The key for the structured data is the name of the header; the value is the value of the named header. The names property is a comma-separated list of names used to resolve the exchange values. Use the key-prefix property to make the keys unique. If the key-prefix is specified, the prefix is prepended to the name of the request headers in the log output. | request-header{names={store,section}} request-header{names={store,section}, key-prefix=”my-”} |
request-line | The request line. Default label: requestLine Use the key option to change the label for this property. | request-line{} request-line{key=”Request-Line”} |
request-method | The request method. Default label: requestMethod Use the key option to change the label for this property. | request-method{} request-method{key=”RequestMethod”} |
request-path | The relative path for the request. Default label: requestPath Use the key option to change the label for this property. | request-path{} request-path{key=”RequestPath”} |
request-protocol | The protocol for the request. Default label: requestProtocol Use the key option to change the label for this property. | request-protocol{} request-protocol{key=”RequestProtocol”} |
request-scheme | The URI scheme of the request. Default label: requestScheme Use the key option to change the label for this property. | request-scheme{} request-scheme{key=”RequestScheme”} |
request-url | The original request URI. Includes host name, protocol, and so forth, if specified by the client. Default label: requestUrl Use the key option to change the label for this property. | request-url{} request-url{key=”RequestURL”} |
resolved-path | The resolved path. Default Label: resolvedPath Use the key option to change the label for this property. | resolved-path{} resolved-path{key=”ResolvedPath”} |
response-code | The response code. Default label: responseCode Use the key option to change the label for this property. | response-code{} response-code{key=”ResponseCode”} |
response-header | The name of a response header. The key for the structured data is the name of the header; the value is the value of the named header. The names property is a comma-separated list of names used to resolve the exchange values. Use the key-prefix property to make the keys unique. If the key-prefix is specified, the prefix is prepended to the name of the request headers in the log output. | response-header{names={store,section}} response-header{names={store,section}, key-prefix=”my-”} |
response-reason-phrase | The text reason for the response code. Default label: responseReasonPhrase Use the key option to change the label for this property. | response-reason-phrase{} response-reason-phrase{key=”ResponseReasonPhrase”} |
response-time | The time used to process the request. Default label: responseTime Use the key option to change the label for this property. The default time unit is MILLISECONDS. Available time units include: * NANOSECONDS * MICROSECONDS * MILLISECONDS * SECONDS | response-time{} response-time{key=”ResponseTime”, time-unit=SECONDS} |
secure-exchange | Indicates whether the exchange was secure. Default label: secureExchange Use the key option to change the label for this property. | secure-exchange{} secure-exchange{key=”SecureExchange”} |
ssl-cipher | The SSL cipher for the request. Default label: sslCipher Use the key option to change the label for this property. | ssl-cipher{} ssl-cipher{key=”SSLCipher”} |
ssl-client-cert | The SSL client certificate for the request. Default label: sslClientCert Use the key option to change the label for this property. | ssl-client-cert{} ssl-client-cert{key=”SSLClientCert”} |
ssl-session-id | The SSL session id of the request. Default label: sslSessionId Use the key option to change the label for this property. | ssl-session-id{} stored-response |
The stored response to the request. Default label: storedResponse Use the key option to change the label for this property. | stored-response{} stored-response{key=”StoredResponse”} | thread-name |
The thread name of the current thread. Default label: threadName Use the key option to change the label for this property. | thread-name{} thread-name{key=”ThreadName”} | transport-protocol |
You can use the metadata
attribute to configure additional arbitrary data to include in the access log record. The value of the metadata
attribute is a set of key:value pairs that defines the data to include in the access log record. The value in a pair can be a management model expression. Management model expressions are resolved when the server is started or reloaded. Key-value pairs are comma-separated.
The following CLI command demonstrates an example of a complex console log configuration, including additional log data, customization of log data, and additional metadata:
/subsystem=undertow/server=default-server/host=default-host/setting=console-access-log:add(metadata={"@version"="1", "qualifiedHostName"=${jboss.qualified.host.name:unknown}}, attributes={bytes-sent={}, date-time={key="@timestamp", date-format="yyyy-MM-dd'T'HH:mm:ssSSS"}, remote-host={}, request-line={}, response-header={key-prefix="responseHeader", names=["Content-Type"]}, response-code={}, remote-user={}})
The resulting access log record would resemble the following additional JSON data (Note: the example output below is formatted for readability; in an actual record, all data would be output as a single line):
{ "eventSource":"web-access", "hostName":"default-host", "@version":"1", "qualifiedHostName":"localhost.localdomain", "bytesSent":1504, "@timestamp":"2019-05-02T11:57:37123", "remoteHost":"127.0.0.1", "remoteUser":null, "requestLine":"GET / HTTP/2.0", "responseCode":200, "responseHeaderContent-Type":"text/html" }
The following command illustrates updates to the log data after activating the console access log:
/subsystem=undertow/server=default-server/host=default-host/setting=console-access-log:write-attribute(name=attributes,value={bytes-sent={}, date-time={key="@timestamp", date-format="yyyy-MM-dd'T'HH:mm:ssSSS"}, remote-host={}, request-line={}, response-header={key-prefix="responseHeader", names=["Content-Type"]}, response-code={}, remote-user={}})
The following command illustrates updates to the custom metadata after activating the console access log:
/subsystem=undertow/server=default-server/host=default-host/setting=console-access-log:write-attribute(name=metadata,value={"@version"="1", "qualifiedHostName"=${jboss.qualified.host.name:unknown}}
17.5. Configuring a Servlet Container
A servlet container provides all servlet, JSP and websocket-related configuration, including session-related configuration. While most servers will only need a single servlet container, it is possible to configure multiple servlet containers by adding an additional servlet-container
element. Having multiple servlet containers enables behavior such as allowing multiple deployments to be deployed to the same context path on different virtual hosts.
Much of the configuration provided in by servlet container can be individually overridden by deployed applications using their web.xml
file.
JBoss EAP provides a servlet container by default:
Default Undertow Subsystem Configuration
<subsystem xmlns="urn:jboss:domain:undertow:10.0"> <buffer-cache name="default"/> <server name="default-server"> ... </server> <servlet-container name="default"> <jsp-config/> <websockets/> </servlet-container> ... </subsystem>
The following examples show how to configure a servlet container using the management CLI. You can also configure a servlet container using the management console by navigating to Configuration → Subsystems → Web (Undertow) → Servlet Container.
Updating an Existing Servlet Container
To update an existing servlet container:
/subsystem=undertow/servlet-container=default:write-attribute(name=ignore-flush,value=true)
reload
Creating a New Servlet Container
To create a new servlet container:
/subsystem=undertow/servlet-container=new-servlet-container:add
reload
Deleting a Servlet Container
To delete a servlet container:
/subsystem=undertow/servlet-container=new-servlet-container:remove
reload
For a full list of the attributes available for configuring servlet containers, see the Undertow Subsystem Attributes section.
17.6. Configuring a Servlet Extension
Servlet extensions allow you to hook into the servlet deployment process and modify aspects of a servlet deployment. This can be useful in cases where you need to add additional authentication mechanisms to a deployment or use native Undertow handlers as part of a servlet deployment.
To create a custom servlet extension, it is necessary to implement the io.undertow.servlet.ServletExtension
interface and then add the name of your implementation class to the META-INF/services/io.undertow.servlet.ServletExtension
file in the deployment. You also need to include the compiled class file of the ServletExtension
implementation. When Undertow deploys the servlet, it loads all the services from the deployments
class loader and then invokes their handleDeployment
methods.
An Undertow DeploymentInfo
structure, which contains a complete and mutable description of the deployment, is passed to this method. You can modify this structure to change any aspect of the deployment.
The DeploymentInfo
structure is the same structure that is used by the embedded API, so in effect a ServletExtension
has the same amount of flexibility that you have when using Undertow in embedded mode.
17.7. Configuring Handlers
JBoss EAP allows for two types of handlers to be configured:
- file handlers
- reverse-proxy handlers
File handlers serve static files. Each file handler must be attached to a location in a virtual host. Reverse-proxy handlers allow JBoss EAP to serve as a high performance reverse-proxy.
JBoss EAP provides a file handler by default:
Default Undertow Subsystem Configuration
<subsystem xmlns="urn:jboss:domain:undertow:10.0" default-server="default-server" default-virtual-host="default-host" default-servlet-container="default" default-security-domain="other"> <buffer-cache name="default"/> <server name="default-server"> ... </server> <servlet-container name="default"> ... </servlet-container> <handlers> <file name="welcome-content" path="${jboss.home.dir}/welcome-content"/> </handlers> </subsystem>
Using WebDAV for Static Resources
Previous versions of JBoss EAP allowed for using WebDAV with the web
subsystem, by way of the WebdavServlet
, to host static resources and enable additional HTTP methods for accessing and manipulating those files. In JBoss EAP 7, the undertow
subsystem does provide a mechanism for serving static files using a file handler, but the undertow
subsystem does not support WebDAV. If you want to use WebDAV with JBoss EAP 7, you can write a custom WebDAV servlet.
Updating an Existing File Handler
To update an existing file handler:
/subsystem=undertow/configuration=handler/file=welcome-content:write-attribute(name=case-sensitive,value=true)
reload
Creating a New File Handler
To create a new file handler:
/subsystem=undertow/configuration=handler/file=new-file-handler:add(path="${jboss.home.dir}/welcome-content")
If you set a file handler’s path
directly to a file instead of a directory, any location
elements that reference that file handler must not end with a forward slash (/
). Otherwise, the server will return a 404 - Not Found
response.
Deleting a File Handler
To delete a file handler
/subsystem=undertow/configuration=handler/file=new-file-handler:remove
reload
For a full list of the attributes available for configuring handlers, see the Undertow Subsystem Attributes section.
17.8. Configuring Filters
A filter enables some aspect of a request to be modified and can use predicates to control when a filter executes. Some common use cases for filters include setting headers or doing GZIP compression.
A filter is functionally equivalent to a global valve used in JBoss EAP 6.
The following types of filters can be defined:
- custom-filter
- error-page
- expression-filter
- gzip
- mod-cluster
- request-limit
- response-header
- rewrite
The following examples show how to configure a filter using the management CLI. You can also configure a filter using the management console by navigating to Configuration → Subsystems → Web (Undertow) → Filters.
Updating an Existing Filter
To update an existing filter:
/subsystem=undertow/configuration=filter/response-header=myHeader:write-attribute(name=header-value,value="JBoss-EAP")
reload
Creating a New Filter
To create a new filter:
/subsystem=undertow/configuration=filter/response-header=new-response-header:add(header-name=new-response-header,header-value="My Value")
Deleting a Filter
To delete a filter:
/subsystem=undertow/configuration=filter/response-header=new-response-header:remove
reload
For a full list of the attributes available for configuring filters, see the Undertow Subsystem Attributes section.
17.8.1. Configuring the buffer-request Handler
A request from the client or the browser consists of two parts: the header and the body. In a typical situation, the header and the body are sent to JBoss EAP without any delays in between. However, if the header is sent first and then after few seconds, the body is sent, there is a delay sending the complete request. This scenario creates a thread in JBoss EAP to show as waiting
to execute the complete request.
The delay caused in sending the header and the body of the request can be corrected using the buffer-request
handler. The buffer-request
handler attempts to consume the request from a non-blocking IO thread before allocating it to a worker thread. When no buffer-request
handler is added, the thread allocation to the worker thread happens directly. However, when the buffer-request
handler is added, the handler attempts to read the amount of data that it can buffer in a non-blocking manner using the IO thread before allocating it to the worker thread.
You can use the following management CLI commands to configure the buffer-request
handler:
/subsystem=undertow/configuration=filter/expression-filter=buf:add(expression="buffer-request(buffers=1)") /subsystem=undertow/server=default-server/host=default-host/filter-ref=buf:add
There is a limit to the size of the buffer requests that can be processed. This limit is determined by a combination of the buffer size and the total number of buffers, as shown in the equation below.
Total_size = num_buffers × buffer_size
In the equation above:
-
Total_size
is the size of data that will be buffered before the request is dispatched to a worker thread. -
num_buffers
is the number of buffers. The number of buffers is set by thebuffers
parameter on the handler. -
buffer_size
is the size of each buffer. The buffer size is set in theio
subsystem, and is 16KB by default per request.
Avoid configuring very large buffer requests, or else you might run out of memory.
17.9. Configure the Default Welcome Web Application
JBoss EAP includes a default Welcome
application, which displays at the root context on port 8080
by default.
There is a default server preconfigured in Undertow that serves up the welcome content.
Default Undertow Subsystem Configuration
<subsystem xmlns="urn:jboss:domain:undertow:10.0" default-server="default-server" default-virtual-host="default-host" default-servlet-container="default" default-security-domain="other"> ... <server name="default-server"> <http-listener name="default" socket-binding="http" redirect-socket="https" enable-http2="true"/> <https-listener name="https" socket-binding="https" security-realm="ApplicationRealm" enable-http2="true"/> <host name="default-host" alias="localhost"> <location name="/" handler="welcome-content"/> <http-invoker security-realm="ApplicationRealm"/> </host> </server> ... <handlers> <file name="welcome-content" path="${jboss.home.dir}/welcome-content"/> </handlers> </subsystem>
The default server, default-server
, has a default host, default-host
, configured. The default host is configured to handle requests to the server’s root, using the <location>
element, with the welcome-content
file handler. The welcome-content
handler serves up the content in the location specified in the path
property.
This default Welcome
application can be replaced with your own web application. This can be configured in one of two ways:
You can also disable the welcome content.
Change the welcome-content File Handler
Modify the existing
welcome-content
file handler’s path to point to the new deployment./subsystem=undertow/configuration=handler/file=welcome-content:write-attribute(name=path,value="/path/to/content")
NoteAlternatively, you could create a different file handler to be used by the server’s root.
/subsystem=undertow/configuration=handler/file=NEW_FILE_HANDLER:add(path="/path/to/content") /subsystem=undertow/server=default-server/host=default-host/location=\/:write-attribute(name=handler,value=NEW_FILE_HANDLER)
Reload the server for the changes to take effect.
reload
Change the default-web-module
Map a deployed web application to the server’s root.
/subsystem=undertow/server=default-server/host=default-host:write-attribute(name=default-web-module,value=hello.war)
Reload the server for the changes to take effect.
reload
Disable the Default Welcome Web Application
Disable the welcome application by removing the
location
entry/
for thedefault-host
./subsystem=undertow/server=default-server/host=default-host/location=\/:remove
Reload the server for the changes to take effect.
reload
17.10. Configuring HTTPS
For information on configuring HTTPS for web applications, see Configure One-way and Two-way SSL/TLS for Applications in How to Configure Server Security.
For information on configuring HTTPS for use with the JBoss EAP management interfaces, see How to Secure the Management Interfaces in How to Configure Server Security.
17.11. Configuring HTTP Session Timeout
The HTTP session timeout defines the period of inactive time needed to declare an HTTP session invalid. For example, a user accesses an application deployed to JBoss EAP which creates an HTTP session. If that user then attempts to access that application again after the HTTP session timeout, the original HTTP session will be invalidated and the user will be forced to create a new HTTP session. This may result in the loss of unpersisted data or the user having to reauthenticate.
The HTTP session timeout is configured in an application’s web.xml
file, but a default HTTP session timeout can be specified within JBoss EAP. The server’s timeout value will apply to all deployed applications, but an application’s web.xml
will override the server’s value.
The server value is specified in the default-session-timeout
property which is found in the servlet-container
section of the undertow
subsystem. The value of default-session-timeout
is specified in minutes and the default is 30
.
Configuring the Default Session Timeout
To configure the default-session-timeout
:
/subsystem=undertow/servlet-container=default:write-attribute(name=default-session-timeout, value=60)
reload
17.12. Configuring HTTP-Only Session Management Cookies
Session management cookies can be accessed by both HTTP APIs and non-HTTP APIs such as JavaScript. JBoss EAP offers the ability to send the HttpOnly
header as part of the Set-Cookie
response header to the client, usually a browser. In supported browsers, enabling this header tells the browser that it should prevent accessing session management cookies through non-HTTP APIs. Restricting session management cookies to only HTTP APIs can help to mitigate the threat of session cookie theft via cross-site scripting attacks. To enable this behavior, the http-only
attribute should be set to true
.
Using the HttpOnly
header does not actually prevent cross-site scripting attacks by itself, it merely notifies the browser. The browser must also support HttpOnly
for this behavior to take affect.
Using the http-only
attribute only applies the restriction to session management cookies and not other browser cookies.
The http-only
attribute is set in two places in the undertow
subsystem:
- In the servlet container as a session cookie setting
- In the host section of the server as a single sign-on property
Configuring host-only
for the Servlet Container Session Cookie
To configure the host-only
property for the servlet container session cookie:
/subsystem=undertow/servlet-container=default/setting=session-cookie:add
/subsystem=undertow/servlet-container=default/setting=session-cookie:write-attribute(name=http-only,value=true)
reload
Configuring host-only
for the Host Single Sign-On
To configure the host-only
property for the host single sign-on:
/subsystem=undertow/server=default-server/host=default-host/setting=single-sign-on:add
/subsystem=undertow/server=default-server/host=default-host/setting=single-sign-on:write-attribute(name=http-only,value=true)
reload
17.13. Configuring HTTP/2
Undertow allows for the use of the HTTP/2 standard, which reduces latency by compressing headers and multiplexing many streams over the same TCP connection. It also provides the ability for a server to push resources to the client before it has requested them, leading to faster page loads.
Be aware that HTTP/2 only works with clients and browsers that also support the HTTP/2 standard.
Most modern browsers enforce HTTP/2 over a secured TLS connection, known as h2
and may not support HTTP/2 over plain HTTP, known as h2c
. It is still possible to configure JBoss EAP to use HTTP/2 with h2c
, in other words, without using HTTPS and only using plain HTTP with HTTP upgrade. In that case, you can simply enable HTTP/2 in the HTTP listener Undertow:
/subsystem=undertow/server=default-server/http-listener=default:write-attribute(name=enable-http2,value=true)
To configure Undertow to use HTTP/2, enable the HTTPS listener in Undertow to use HTTP/2 by setting the enable-http2
attribute to true
:
/subsystem=undertow/server=default-server/https-listener=https:write-attribute(name=enable-http2,value=true)
For more information on the HTTPS listener and configuring Undertow to use HTTPS for web applications, see Configure One-way and Two-way SSL/TLS for Applications in How to Configure Server Security.
In order to utilize HTTP/2 with the elytron
subsystem, you will need to ensure that the configured ssl-context
in the https-listener
of the Undertow is configured as modifiable. This can be achieved by setting the wrap
attribute of the appropriate server-ssl-context
to false
. By default, the wrap
attribute is set to false
. This is required by Undertow to make modifications in the ssl-context
about the ALPN. If the provided ssl-context
is not writable, ALPN cannot be used and the connection falls back to HTTP/1.1.
ALPN support when using HTTP/2
When using HTTP/2 over a secured TLS connection, a TLS stack that supports ALPN TLS protocol extension is required. Obtaining this stack varies based on the installed JDK.
- When using Java 8, the ALPN implementation is introduced directly into JBoss EAP with dependencies on Java internals. Therefore, this ALPN implementation only works with Oracle and OpenJDK. It does not work with IBM Java. Red Hat strongly recommends that you utilize ALPN TLS protocol extension support from the OpenSSL provider in JBoss EAP, with OpenSSL libraries that implement ALPN capability. Using the ALPN TLS protocol extension support from the OpenSSL provider should result in better performance.
- As of Java 9, the JDK supports ALPN natively; however, using the ALPN TLS protocol extension support from the OpenSSL provider should also result in better performance when using Java 9 or later.
Instructions for installing OpenSSL, to obtain the ALPN TLS protocol extension support, are available in Install OpenSSL from JBoss Core Services. The standard system OpenSSL is supported on Red Hat Enterprise Linux 8 and no additional JBoss Core Services OpenSSL is required.
Once OpenSSL has been installed, follow the instructions in Configure JBoss EAP to Use OpenSSL.
Verify HTTP/2 is Being Used
To verify that Undertow is using HTTP/2, you will need to inspect the headers coming from Undertow. Navigate to your JBoss EAP instance using https, for example https://localhost:8443, and use your browser’s developer tools to inspect the headers. Some browsers, for example Google Chrome, will show HTTP/2 pseudo headers, such as :path
, :authority
, :method
and :scheme
, when using HTTP/2. Other browsers, for example Firefox and Safari, will report the status or version of the header as HTTP/2.0
.
17.14. Configuring a RequestDumping Handler
The RequestDumping
handler, io.undertow.server.handlers.RequestDumpingHandler
, logs the details of a request and corresponding response objects handled by Undertow within JBoss EAP.
While this handler can be useful for debugging, it may also log sensitive information. Please keep this in mind when enabling this handler.
The RequestDumping
handler replaces the RequestDumperValve
from JBoss EAP 6.
You can configure a RequestDumping
handler at either at the server level directly in JBoss EAP or within an individual application.
17.14.1. Configuring a RequestDumping Handler on the Server
A RequestDumping
handler should be configured as an expression filter. To configure a RequestDumping
handler as an expression filter, you need to do the following:
Create a new Expression Filter with the RequestDumping
Handler
/subsystem=undertow/configuration=filter/expression-filter=requestDumperExpression:add(expression="dump-request")
Enable the Expression Filter in the Undertow Web Server
/subsystem=undertow/server=default-server/host=default-host/filter-ref=requestDumperExpression:add
All requests and corresponding responses handled by the Undertow web server will be logged when enabling the RequestDumping
handler as a expression filter in this manner.
Configuring a RequestDumping Handler for Specific URLs
In addition to logging all requests, you can also use an expression filter to only log requests and corresponding responses for specific URLs. This can be accomplished using a predicate in your expression such as path
, path-prefix
, or path-suffix
. For example, if you want to log all requests and corresponding responses to /myApplication/test
, you can use the expression "path(/myApplication/test) -> dump-request"
instead of the expression "dump-request"
when creating your expression filter. This will only direct requests with a path exactly matching /myApplication/test
to the RequestDumping
handler.
17.14.2. Configuring a RequestDumping Handler within an Application
In addition to configuring a RequestDumping
handler at the server, you can also configure it within individual applications. This will limit the scope of the handler to only that specific application. A RequestDumping
handler should be configured in WEB-INF/undertow-handlers.conf
.
To configure the RequestDumping
handler in WEB-INF/undertow-handlers.conf
to log all requests and corresponding responses for this application, add the following expression to WEB-INF/undertow-handlers.conf
:
Example: WEB-INF/undertow-handlers.conf
dump-request
To configure the RequestDumping
handler in WEB-INF/undertow-handlers.conf
to only log requests and corresponding responses to specific URLs within this application, you can use a predicate in your expression such as path
, path-prefix
, or path-suffix
. For example, to log all requests and corresponding responses to test
in your application, the following expression with the path
predicate could be used:
Example: WEB-INF/undertow-handlers.conf
path(/test) -> dump-request
When using the predicates such as path
, path-prefix
, or path-suffix
in expressions defined in the application’s WEB-INF/undertow-handlers.conf
, the value used will be relative to the context root of the application. For example, if the application’s context root is myApplication
with an expression path(/test) -> dump-request
configured in WEB-INF/undertow-handlers.conf
, it will only log requests and corresponding responses to /myApplication/test
.
17.15. Configuring Cookie Security
You can use the secure-cookie
handler to enhance the security of cookies that are created over a connection between a server and a client. In this case, if the connection over which the cookie is set is marked as secure, the cookie will have its secure
attribute set to true
.
You can secure the connection by configuring a listener or by using HTTPS. You configure the secure-cookie
handler by defining an expression-filter
in the undertow
subsystem. For more information, see Configuring Filters.
When the secure-cookie
handler is in use, cookies that are set over a secure connection will be implicitly set as secure and will never be sent over an unsecure connection.
17.16. Tuning the Undertow Subsystem
For tips on optimizing performance for the undertow
subsystem, see the Undertow Subsystem Tuning section of the Performance Tuning Guide.
Chapter 18. Configuring Remoting
18.1. About the Remoting Subsystem
The remoting
subsystem allows you to configure inbound and outbound connections for local and remote services as well as the settings for those connections.
JBoss Remoting includes the following configurable elements: the endpoint, connectors, and a series of local and remote connection URIs. Most people will not need to configure the remoting
subsystem at all, unless they use custom connectors for their own applications. Applications that act as remoting clients, such as EJBs, need separate configuration to connect to a specific connector.
Default Remoting Subsystem Configuration
<subsystem xmlns="urn:jboss:domain:remoting:4.0"> <endpoint/> <http-connector name="http-remoting-connector" connector-ref="default" security-realm="ApplicationRealm"/> </subsystem>
See Remoting Subsystem Attributes for a full list of the attributes available for the remoting
subsystem.
The Remoting Endpoint
The remoting endpoint uses the XNIO worker declared and configured by the io
subsystem.
See Configuring the Endpoint for details on how to configure the remoting endpoint.
Connector
The connector is the main remoting configuration element. Multiple connectors are allowed. Each connector consists of a <connector>
element with several sub-elements, and few other attributes. The default connector is used by several JBoss EAP subsystems. Specific settings for the elements and attributes of your custom connectors depend on your applications. Contact Red Hat Global Support Services for more information.
See Configuring a Connector for details on how to configure connectors.
Outbound Connections
You can specify three different types of outbound connections:
- An outbound connection, specified by a URI
- A local outbound connection, which connects to a local resource such as a socket
- A remote outbound connection, which connects to a remote resource and authenticates using a security realm
Additional Configuration
Remoting depends on several elements that are configured outside of the remoting
subsystem, such as the network interface and IO worker.
For more information, see Additional Remoting Configuration.
18.2. Configuring the Endpoint
In JBoss EAP 6, the worker thread pool was configured directly in the remoting
subsystem. In JBoss EAP 7, the remoting endpoint
configuration references a worker from the io
subsystem.
JBoss EAP provides the following endpoint
configuration by default.
<subsystem xmlns="urn:jboss:domain:remoting:4.0"> <endpoint/> ... </subsystem>
Updating the Existing Endpoint Configuration
/subsystem=remoting/configuration=endpoint:write-attribute(name=authentication-retries,value=2)
reload
Creating a New Endpoint Configuration
/subsystem=remoting/configuration=endpoint:add
Deleting an Endpoint Configuration
/subsystem=remoting/configuration=endpoint:remove
reload
See Endpoint Attributes for a full list of the attributes available for the endpoint configuration.
18.3. Configuring a Connector
The connector is the main configuration element relating to remoting and contains several sub-elements for additional configuration.
Updating the Existing Connector Configuration
/subsystem=remoting/connector=new-connector:write-attribute(name=socket-binding,value=my-socket-binding)
reload
Creating a New Connector
/subsystem=remoting/connector=new-connector:add(socket-binding=my-socket-binding)
Deleting a Connector
/subsystem=remoting/connector=new-connector:remove
reload
For a full list of the attributes available for configuring a connector, please see the Remoting Subsystem Attributes section.
18.4. Configuring an HTTP Connector
The HTTP connector provides the configuration for the HTTP upgrade-based remoting connector. JBoss EAP provides the following http-connector
configuration by default.
<subsystem xmlns="urn:jboss:domain:remoting:4.0"> ... <http-connector name="http-remoting-connector" connector-ref="default" security-realm="ApplicationRealm"/> </subsystem>
By default, this HTTP connector connects to an HTTP listener named default
that is configured in the undertow
subsystem. For more information, see Configuring the Web Server (Undertow).
Updating the Existing HTTP Connector Configuration
/subsystem=remoting/http-connector=new-connector:write-attribute(name=connector-ref,value=new-connector-ref)
reload
Creating a New HTTP Connector
/subsystem=remoting/http-connector=new-connector:add(connector-ref=default)
Deleting an HTTP Connector
/subsystem=remoting/http-connector=new-connector:remove
See Connector Attributes for a full list of the attributes available for configuring an HTTP connector.
18.5. Configuring an Outbound Connection
An outbound connection is a generic remoting outbound connection that is fully specified by a URI.
Updating an Existing Outbound Connection
/subsystem=remoting/outbound-connection=new-outbound-connection:write-attribute(name=uri,value=http://example.com)
Creating a New Outbound Connection
/subsystem=remoting/outbound-connection=new-outbound-connection:add(uri=http://example.com)
Deleting an Outbound Connection
/subsystem=remoting/outbound-connection=new-outbound-connection:remove
See Outbound Connection Attributes for a full list of the attributes available for configuring an outbound connection.
18.6. Configuring a Remote Outbound Connection
A remote outbound connection is specified by a protocol, an outbound socket binding, a username and a security realm. The protocol can be either remote
, http-remoting
or https-remoting
.
Updating an Existing Remote Outbound Connection
/subsystem=remoting/remote-outbound-connection=new-remote-outbound-connection:write-attribute(name=outbound-socket-binding-ref,value=outbound-socket-binding)
Creating a New Remote Outbound Connection
/subsystem=remoting/remote-outbound-connection=new-remote-outbound-connection:add(outbound-socket-binding-ref=outbound-socket-binding)
Deleting a Remote Outbound Connection
/subsystem=remoting/remote-outbound-connection=new-remote-outbound-connection:remove
See Remote Outbound Connection Attributes for a full list of the attributes available for configuring a remote outbound connection.
18.7. Configuring a Local Outbound Connection
A local outbound connection is a remoting outbound connection with a protocol of local
, specified only by an outbound socket binding.
Updating an Existing Local Outbound Connection
/subsystem=remoting/local-outbound-connection=new-local-outbound-connection:write-attribute(name=outbound-socket-binding-ref,value=outbound-socket-binding)
Creating a New Local Outbound Connection
/subsystem=remoting/local-outbound-connection=new-local-outbound-connection:add(outbound-socket-binding-ref=outbound-socket-binding)
Deleting a Local Outbound Connection
/subsystem=remoting/local-outbound-connection=new-local-outbound-connection:remove
See Local Outbound Connection Attributes for a full list of the attributes available for configuring a local outbound connection.
18.8. Additional Remoting Configuration
There are several remoting elements that are configured outside of the remoting
subsystem.
- IO worker
Use the following command to set the IO worker for remoting:
/subsystem=remoting/configuration=endpoint:write-attribute(name=worker, value=WORKER_NAME)
See Configuring a Worker for details on how to configure an IO worker.
- Network interface
The network interface used by the
remoting
subsystem is thepublic
interface. This interface is also used by several other subsystems, so exercise caution when modifying it.<interfaces> <interface name="management"> <inet-address value="${jboss.bind.address.management:127.0.0.1}"/> </interface> <interface name="public"> <inet-address value="${jboss.bind.address:127.0.0.1}"/> </interface> <interface name="unsecure"> <inet-address value="${jboss.bind.address.unsecure:127.0.0.1}"/> </interface> </interfaces>
In a managed domain, the
public
interface is defined per host in itshost.xml
file.- Socket binding
The default socket binding used by the
remoting
subsystem binds to port8080
.For more information about socket binding and socket binding groups, see Socket Bindings.
- Remoting connector reference for EJB
The
ejb3
subsystem contains a reference to the remoting connector for remote method invocations. The following is the default configuration:<remote connector-ref="remoting-connector" thread-pool-name="default"/>
- Secure transport configuration
Remoting transports use STARTTLS to use a secure connection, such as HTTPS, Secure Servlet, if the client requests it. The same socket binding, or network port, is used for secured and unsecured connections, so no additional server-side configuration is necessary. The client requests the secure or unsecured transport, as its needs dictate. JBoss EAP components that use remoting, such as EJBs, ORB, and the JMS provider, request secured interfaces by default.
WarningSTARTTLS works by activating a secure connection if the client requests it, and otherwise defaults to an unsecured connection. It is inherently susceptible to a man-in-the-middle exploit, where an attacker intercepts the request of the client and modifies it to request an unsecured connection. Clients must be written to fail appropriately if they do not receive a secure connection, unless an unsecured connection is an appropriate fall-back.
Chapter 19. Configuring the IO Subsystem
19.1. IO Subsystem Overview
The io
subsystem defines the XNIO workers and buffer pools used by other subsystems, such as Undertow and Remoting. These workers and buffer pools are defined within the following components in the io
subsystem:
Default IO Subsystem Configuration
<subsystem xmlns="urn:jboss:domain:io:3.0"> <worker name="default"/> <buffer-pool name="default"/> </subsystem>
19.2. Configuring a Worker
Workers are XNIO worker instances. An XNIO worker instance is an abstraction layer for the Java NIO APIs, which provide functionality such as management of IO and worker threads as well as SSL support. By default, JBoss EAP provides single worker called default
, but more can be defined.
Updating an Existing Worker
To update an existing worker:
/subsystem=io/worker=default:write-attribute(name=io-threads,value=10)
reload
Creating a New Worker
To create a new worker:
/subsystem=io/worker=newWorker:add
Deleting a Worker
To delete a worker:
/subsystem=io/worker=newWorker:remove
reload
For a full list of the attributes available for configuring workers, please see the IO Subsystem Attributes section.
19.3. Configuring a Buffer Pool
IO buffer pools are deprecated, but they are still set as the default in the current release. Buffer pools are pooled NIO buffer instances. Changing the buffer size has a big impact on application performance. For most servers, the ideal buffer size is usually 16k. For more information about configuring Undertow byte buffer pools, see the Configuring Byte Buffer Pools section of the Configuration Guide for JBoss EAP.
Updating an Existing Buffer Pool
To update an existing buffer pool:
/subsystem=io/buffer-pool=default:write-attribute(name=direct-buffers,value=true)
reload
Creating a Buffer Pool
To create a new buffer pool:
/subsystem=io/buffer-pool=newBuffer:add
Deleting a Buffer Pool
To delete a buffer pool:
/subsystem=io/buffer-pool=newBuffer:remove
reload
For a full list of the attributes available for configuring buffer pools, please see the IO Subsystem Attributes section.
19.4. Tuning the IO Subsystem
For tips on monitoring and optimizing performance for the io
subsystem, see the IO Subsystem Tuning section of the Performance Tuning Guide.
Chapter 20. Configuring Web Services
JBoss EAP offers the ability to configure the behavior of deployed web services through the webservices
subsystem using the management console or the management CLI. You can configure published endpoint addresses and handler chains. You can also enable the collection of runtime statistics for web services.
For more information, see Configuring the Web Services Subsystem in Developing Web Services Applications for JBoss EAP.
Chapter 21. Jakarta Server Faces Configuration
21.1. Multiiple Jakarta Server Faces implementation of Jakarta Server Faces
The jsf
subsystem allows you to install multiple Jakarta Server Faces implementations on the same JBoss EAP server instance. You can install a version of Sun Mojarra or Apache MyFaces that implements Jakarta Server Faces specification 2.3, or later.
21.1.1. Installing a Jakarta Server Faces Implementation
The following procedure describes how to manually install a new Jakarta Server Faces implementation and make it the default implementation.
Add the Jakarta Server Faces Implementation JAR File
Create the appropriate directory structure in the
EAP_HOME/modules/
directory for the Jakarta Server Faces implementation:$ cd EAP_HOME/modules/ $ mkdir -p com/sun/jsf-impl/IMPL_NAME-VERSION
NoteFor example, replace
IMPL_NAME-VERSION
with a version of Mojarra that supports the Jakarta Server Faces specification 2.3, or later.-
Copy the Jakarta Server Faces implementation JAR file to the
IMPL_NAME-VERSION/
subdirectory. -
In the
IMPL_NAME-VERSION/
subdirectory, create amodule.xml
file similar to this Mojarra template or this MyFaces template. If you use a template, be sure to use appropriate values for the replaceable variables noted.
Add the Jakarta Server Faces API JAR File
Create the appropriate directory structure in the
EAP_HOME/modules/
directory for the Jakarta Server Faces implementation:$ cd EAP_HOME/modules/ $ mkdir -p javax/faces/api/IMPL_NAME-VERSION
-
Copy the Jakarta Server Faces API JAR file to the
IMPL_NAME-VERSION/
subdirectory. -
In the
IMPL_NAME-VERSION/
subdirectory, create amodule.xml
file similar to this Mojarra template or this MyFaces template. If you use a template, be sure to use appropriate values for the replaceable variables noted.
Add the Jakarta Server Faces Injection JAR File
Create the appropriate directory structure in the
EAP_HOME/modules/
directory for the Jakarta Server Faces implementation:$ cd EAP_HOME/modules/ $ mkdir -p org/jboss/as/jsf-injection/IMPL_NAME-VERSION
Follow the instructions outlined in the Patching and Upgrading guide to download the latest cumulative patch for your JBoss EAP instance. Next, complete either of the following steps:
-
If you have not applied the patch updates to the server, then copy the
wildfly-jsf-injection
andweld-core-jsf
JAR files fromEAP_HOME/modules/system/layers/base/org/jboss/as/jsf-injection/main/
to theIMPL_NAME-VERSION/
subdirectory. -
If you have applied the patch updates to the server, then copy the
wildfly-jsf-injection
andweld-core-jsf
JAR files from the latest patch updates directory to theIMPL_NAME-VERSION/
subdirectory. For example,EAP_HOME/modules/system/layers/base/.overlays/layer-base-jboss-eap-7.3.z.CP/org/jboss/as/jsf-injection
, where z is the latest version number.
-
If you have not applied the patch updates to the server, then copy the
-
In the
IMPL_NAME-VERSION/
subdirectory, create amodule.xml
file similar to this Mojarra template or this MyFaces template. If you use a template, be sure to use appropriate values for the replaceable variables noted.
Add the commons-digester JAR File for MyFaces
Create the appropriate directory structure in the
EAP_HOME/modules/
directory for thecommons-digester
JAR:$ cd EAP_HOME/modules/ $ mkdir -p org/apache/commons/digester/main
-
Download the
commons-digester
JAR file and copy it to themain/
subdirectory. -
In the
main/
subdirectory, create amodule.xml
file similar to this template. If you use the template, be sure to use appropriate values for the replaceable variables noted.
Set the Default Jakarta Server Faces Implementation
Run the following management CLI command to set the new Jakarta Server Faces implementation as the default implementation:
/subsystem=jsf:write-attribute(name=default-jsf-impl-slot,value=IMPL_NAME-VERSION)
- Restart the JBoss EAP server for the changes to take effect.
21.1.2. Multi-Jakarta Server Faces Implementation Support
JBoss EAP 7.3 ships with a single Jakarta Server Faces implementation, Jakarta Server Faces 2.3 implementation based on Mojarra.
Multi-Jakarta Server Faces allows the installation of multiple Jakarta Server Faces implementations and versions on the same JBoss EAP server. The goal is to allow the use of any of the Jakarta Server Faces implementations, MyFaces or Mojarra, and any version of those implementations from Java EE JSF 2.1 and beyond, and Jakarta Server Faces 2.3 and beyond. Multi-Jakarta Server Faces provides an implementation that is fully integrated with the container, which allows more efficient annotation processing, lifecycle handling, and other integration advantages.
21.1.2.1. Working of the Multi-Jakarta Server Faces Implementation
The way multi-Jakarta Server Faces works is that for each Jakarta Server Faces version, a new slot is created in the modules path under com.sun.jsf-impl
, javax.faces.api
, and org.jboss.as.jsf-injection
. When the jsf
subsystem is started, it scans the module path to find all the installed Jakarta Server Faces implementations. When the jsf
subsystem deploys a web application containing the specified context parameter, it adds the slotted modules to the deployment.
For example, to indicate that the Jakarta Server Faces application should use MyFaces 2.2.12, assuming MyFaces 2.2.12 has been installed on the server, the following context parameter must be added:
<context-param>
<param-name>org.jboss.jbossfaces.JSF_CONFIG_NAME</param-name>
<param-value>myfaces-2.2.12</param-value>
</context-param>
21.1.2.2. Changing the Default Jakarta Server Faces Implementation
The multi-Jakarta Server Faces feature includes the default-jsf-impl-slot
attribute in the jsf
subsystem. This attribute allows you to change the default Jakarta Server Faces implementation, as described in the following procedure:
Use the
write-attribute
command to set the value of thedefault-jsf-impl-slot
attribute to one of the active Jakarta Server Faces implementations:/subsystem=jsf:write-attribute(name=default-jsf-impl-slot,value=JSF_IMPLEMENTATION)
Restart the JBoss EAP server for the change to take effect.
reload
To see which Jakarta Server Faces implementations are installed, you can execute the list-active-jsf-impls
operation.
/subsystem=jsf:list-active-jsf-impls { "outcome" => "success", "result" => [ "myfaces-2.1.12", "mojarra-2.2.0-m05", "main" ] }
21.2. Disallowing DOCTYPE Declarations
You can use the following management CLI commands to disallow DOCTYPE
declarations in Jakarta Server Faces deployments:
/subsystem=jsf:write-attribute(name=disallow-doctype-decl,value=true) reload
You can override this setting for a particular Jakarta Server Faces deployment by adding the com.sun.faces.disallowDoctypeDecl
context parameter to the deployment’s web.xml
file:
<context-param> <param-name>com.sun.faces.disallowDoctypeDecl</param-name> <param-value>false</param-value> </context-param>
Chapter 22. Configuring Batch Applications
JBoss EAP 7 introduced support for Java batch applications as defined by JSR-352. The Jakarta equivalent for batch applications is Jakarta Batch. You can configure an environment for running batch applications and manage batch jobs using the batch-jberet
subsystem.
For information on developing batch applications, see Jakarta Batch Application Development in the JBoss EAP Development Guide.
22.1. Configuring Batch Jobs
You can configure settings for batch jobs using the batch-jberet
subsystem, which is based on the JBeret implementation.
The default batch-jberet
subsystem configuration defines an in-memory job repository and default thread pool settings.
<subsystem xmlns="urn:jboss:domain:batch-jberet:2.0"> <default-job-repository name="in-memory"/> <default-thread-pool name="batch"/> <job-repository name="in-memory"> <in-memory/> </job-repository> <thread-pool name="batch"> <max-threads count="10"/> <keepalive-time time="30" unit="seconds"/> </thread-pool> </subsystem>
By default, any batch jobs stopped during a server suspend will be restarted upon server resume. You can set the restart-jobs-on-resume
property to false
to leave jobs in the STOPPED
state instead.
/subsystem=batch-jberet:write-attribute(name=restart-jobs-on-resume,value=false)
You can also configure the settings for batch job repositories and thread pools.
22.1.1. Configure Batch Job Repositories
This section shows you how to configure in-memory and JDBC job repositories for storing batch job information using the management CLI. You can also configure job repositories using the management console by navigating to Configuration → Subsystems → Batch (JBeret), clicking View, and selecting either In Memory or JDBC from the left-hand menu.
Add an In-memory Job Repository
You can add a job repository that stores batch job information in memory.
/subsystem=batch-jberet/in-memory-job-repository=REPOSITORY_NAME:add
Add a JDBC Job Repository
You can add a job repository that stores batch job information in a database. You must specify the name of the datasource for connecting to the database.
/subsystem=batch-jberet/jdbc-job-repository=REPOSITORY_NAME:add(data-source=DATASOURCE)
Set a Default Job Repository
You can set an in-memory or JDBC job repository as the default job repository for batch applications.
/subsystem=batch-jberet:write-attribute(name=default-job-repository,value=REPOSITORY_NAME)
This will require a server reload.
reload
22.1.2. Configure Batch Thread Pools
This section shows you how to configure thread pools and thread factories to be used for batch jobs using the management CLI. You can also configure thread pools and thread factories using the management console by navigating to Configuration → Subsystems → Batch (JBeret), clicking View, and selecting either Thread Factory or Thread Pool from the left-hand menu.
Configure a Thread Pool
When adding a thread pool, you must specify the max-threads
, which should always be greater than 3
as two threads are reserved to ensure partition jobs can execute as expected.
Add a thread pool.
/subsystem=batch-jberet/thread-pool=THREAD_POOL_NAME:add(max-threads=10)
If desired, set a
keepalive-time
value./subsystem=batch-jberet/thread-pool=THREAD_POOL_NAME:write-attribute(name=keepalive-time,value={time=60,unit=SECONDS})
Use a Thread Factory
Add a thread factory.
/subsystem=batch-jberet/thread-factory=THREAD_FACTORY_NAME:add
Configure the desired attributes for the thread factory.
-
group-name
- The name of a thread group to create for this thread factory. -
priority
- The thread priority of created threads. thread-name-pattern
- The template used to create names for threads. The following patterns may be used:-
%%
- A percent sign -
%t
- The per-factory thread sequence number -
%g
- The global thread sequence number -
%f
- The factory sequence number -
%i
- The thread ID
-
-
Assign the thread factory to a thread pool.
/subsystem=batch-jberet/thread-pool=THREAD_POOL_NAME:write-attribute(name=thread-factory,value=THREAD_FACTORY_NAME)
This will require a server reload.
reload
Set a Default Thread Pool
You can set a different thread pool as the default thread pool.
/subsystem=batch-jberet:write-attribute(name=default-thread-pool,value=THREAD_POOL_NAME)
This will require a server reload.
reload
View Thread Pool Statistics
You can view runtime information about a batch thread pool using the read-resource
management CLI operation. You must use the include-runtime=true
parameter in order to see this runtime information.
/subsystem=batch-jberet/thread-pool=THREAD_POOL_NAME:read-resource(include-runtime=true) { "outcome" => "success", "result" => { "active-count" => 0, "completed-task-count" => 0L, "current-thread-count" => 0, "keepalive-time" => undefined, "largest-thread-count" => 0, "max-threads" => 15, "name" => "THREAD_POOL_NAME", "queue-size" => 0, "rejected-count" => 0, "task-count" => 0L, "thread-factory" => "THREAD_FACTORY_NAME" } }
You can also view runtime information for batch thread pools using the management console by navigating to the Batch subsystem from the Runtime tab.
22.2. Managing Batch Jobs
The batch-jberet
subsystem resource for deployments allows you to start, stop, restart, and view execution details for batch jobs. Batch jobs can be managed from the management CLI or the management console.
Manage Batch Jobs from the Management CLI
Restart a Batch Job
You can restart a job that is in a STOPPED
or FAILED
state by providing its execution ID and optionally any properties to use when restarting the batch job.
/deployment=DEPLOYMENT_NAME/subsystem=batch-jberet:restart-job(execution-id=EXECUTION_ID,properties={PROPERTY=VALUE})
The execution ID must be the most recent execution of the job instance.
Start a Batch Job
You can start a batch job by providing the job XML file and optionally any properties to use when starting the batch job.
/deployment=DEPLOYMENT_NAME/subsystem=batch-jberet:start-job(job-xml-name=JOB_XML_NAME,properties={PROPERTY=VALUE})
Stop a Batch Job
You can stop a running batch job by providing its execution ID.
/deployment=DEPLOYMENT_NAME/subsystem=batch-jberet:stop-job(execution-id=EXECUTION_ID)
View Batch Job Execution Details
You can view the details of batch job executions. You must use the include-runtime=true
parameter on the read-resource
operation in order to see this runtime information.
/deployment=DEPLOYMENT_NAME/subsystem=batch-jberet:read-resource(recursive=true,include-runtime=true)
{
"outcome" => "success",
"result" => {"job" => {"import-file" => {
"instance-count" => 2,
"running-executions" => 0,
"execution" => {
"2" => {
"batch-status" => "COMPLETED",
"create-time" => "2016-04-11T22:03:12.708-0400",
"end-time" => "2016-04-11T22:03:12.718-0400",
"exit-status" => "COMPLETED",
"instance-id" => 58L,
"last-updated-time" => "2016-04-11T22:03:12.719-0400",
"start-time" => "2016-04-11T22:03:12.708-0400"
},
"1" => {
"batch-status" => "FAILED",
"create-time" => "2016-04-11T21:57:17.567-0400",
"end-time" => "2016-04-11T21:57:17.596-0400",
"exit-status" => "Error : org.hibernate.exception.ConstraintViolationException: could not execute statement",
"instance-id" => 15L,
"last-updated-time" => "2016-04-11T21:57:17.597-0400",
"start-time" => "2016-04-11T21:57:17.567-0400"
}
}
}}}
}
Manage Batch Jobs from the Management Console
To manage batch jobs from the management console, navigate to the Runtime tab, select the server, select Batch (JBeret), and choose the job from the list.
Restart a Batch Job
Restart a STOPPED
job by selecting the execution and clicking Restart.
Start a Batch Job
Start a new execution of a batch job by selecting the job and choosing Start from the drop down.
Stop a Batch Job
Stop a running batch job by selecting the execution and clicking Stop.
View Batch Job Execution Details
Job execution details are shown for each execution listed in the table.
22.3. Configure Security for Batch Jobs
You can configure the batch-jberet
subsystem to run batch jobs with an Elytron security domain. This allows batch jobs to be securely suspended and resumed by the same secured identity. For example, a secured RESTful endpoint is created to initiate batch jobs using the batch-jberet
subsystem. If both the RESTful endpoint and batch-jberet
subsystem were secured using the same security domain, or the batch-jberet
security domain trusted the RESTful endpoint’s security domain, batch jobs initiated in this manner could be securely paused and resumed by the same secured identity.
Use the following management CLI command to update the security-domain
attribute to configure security for batch jobs.
/subsystem=batch-jberet:write-attribute(name=security-domain, value=ExampleDomain) reload
Batch jobs require the org.wildfly.extension.batch.jberet.deployment.BatchPermission
permission. It provides start
, stop
, restart
, abandon
, and read
permissions that align with javax.batch.operations.JobOperator
. The default-permission-mapper
mapper provides the org.wildfly.extension.batch.jberet.deployment.BatchPermission
permission.
Chapter 23. Configuring the Naming Subsystem
23.1. About the Naming Subsystem
The naming
subsystem provides the JNDI implementation for JBoss EAP. You can configure this subsystem to bind entries in global JNDI namespaces. You can also configure it to activate or deactivate the remote JNDI interface.
The following is an example of the naming
subsystem XML configuration example with all of the elements and attributes specified.
<subsystem xmlns="urn:jboss:domain:naming:2.0"> <bindings> <simple name="java:global/simple-integer-binding" value="100" type="int" /> <simple name="java:global/jboss.org/docs/url" value="https://docs.jboss.org" type="java.net.URL" /> <object-factory name="java:global/foo/bar/factory" module="org.foo.bar" class="org.foo.bar.ObjectFactory" /> <external-context name="java:global/federation/ldap/example" class="javax.naming.directory.InitialDirContext" cache="true"> <environment> <property name="java.naming.factory.initial" value="com.sun.jndi.ldap.LdapCtxFactory" /> <property name="java.naming.provider.url" value="ldap://ldap.example.com:389" /> <property name="java.naming.security.authentication" value="simple" /> <property name="java.naming.security.principal" value="uid=admin,ou=system" /> <property name="java.naming.security.credentials" value="secret" /> </environment> </external-context> <lookup name="java:global/new-alias-name" lookup="java:global/original-name" /> </bindings> <remote-naming/> </subsystem>
23.2. Configuring Global Bindings
The naming
subsystem allows you to bind entries into the java:global
, java:jboss
, or java
global JNDI namespaces; however, it is recommended that you use the standard portable java:global
namespace.
Global bindings are configured in the <bindings>
element of the naming
subsystem. Four types of bindings are supported:
Configuring Simple Bindings
The simple
XML configuration element binds primitive or java.net.URL
entries.
-
The
name
attribute is mandatory and specifies the target JNDI name for the entry. -
The
value
attribute is mandatory and defines the entry’s value. -
The optional
type
attribute, which defaults tojava.lang.String
, specifies the type of the entry’s value. In addition tojava.lang.String
, you can specify primitive types and their corresponding object wrapper classes, such asint
orjava.lang.Integer
, andjava.net.URL
.
The following is an example of a management CLI command that creates a simple binding.
/subsystem=naming/binding=java\:global\/simple-integer-binding:add(binding-type=simple, type=int, value=100)
Resulting XML Configuration
<subsystem xmlns="urn:jboss:domain:naming:2.0"> <bindings> <simple name="java:global/simple-integer-binding" value="100" type="int"/> </bindings> <remote-naming/> </subsystem>
Use the following command to remove the binding.
/subsystem=naming/binding=java\:global\/simple-integer-binding:remove
Binding Object Factories
The object-factory
XML configuration element binds javax.naming.spi.ObjectFactory
entries.
-
The
name
attribute is mandatory and specifies the target JNDI name for the entry. -
The
class
attribute is mandatory and defines the object factory’s Java type. -
The
module
attribute is mandatory and specifies the JBoss Module ID where the object factory Java class can be loaded from. -
The optional
environment
child element can be used to provide a custom environment to the object factory.
The following is an example of a management CLI command that creates an object factory binding.
/subsystem=naming/binding=java\:global\/foo\/bar\/factory:add(binding-type=object-factory, module=org.foo.bar, class=org.foo.bar.ObjectFactory, environment=[p1=v1, p2=v2])
Resulting XML Configuration
<subsystem xmlns="urn:jboss:domain:naming:2.0"> <bindings> <object-factory name="java:global/foo/bar/factory" module="org.foo.bar" class="org.foo.bar.ObjectFactory"> <environment> <property name="p1" value="v1" /> <property name="p2" value="v2" /> </environment> </object-factory> </bindings> </subsystem>
Use the following command to remove the binding.
/subsystem=naming/binding=java\:global\/foo\/bar\/factory:remove
Binding External Contexts
Federation of external JNDI contexts, such as LDAP context, are achieved using the external-context
XML configuration element.
-
The
name
attribute is mandatory and specifies the target JNDI name for the entry. -
The
class
attribute is mandatory and indicates the Java initial naming context type used to create the federated context. Note that such type must have a constructor with a single environment map argument. -
The optional
module
attribute specifies the JBoss Module ID where any classes required by the external JNDI context can be loaded from. -
The optional
cache
attribute, which defaults tofalse
, indicates whether the external context instance should be cached. -
The optional
environment
child element can be used to provide the custom environment needed to look up the external context.
The following is an example of a management CLI command that creates an external context binding.
/subsystem=naming/binding=java\:global\/federation\/ldap\/example:add(binding-type=external-context, cache=true, class=javax.naming.directory.InitialDirContext, module=org.jboss.as.naming, environment=[java.naming.factory.initial=com.sun.jndi.ldap.LdapCtxFactory, java.naming.provider.url="ldap://ldap.example.com:389", java.naming.security.authentication=simple, java.naming.security.principal="uid=admin,ou=system", java.naming.security.credentials=secret])
Resulting XML Configuration
<subsystem xmlns="urn:jboss:domain:naming:2.0"> <bindings> <external-context name="java:global/federation/ldap/example" module="org.jboss.as.naming" class="javax.naming.directory.InitialDirContext" cache="true"> <environment> <property name="java.naming.factory.initial" value="com.sun.jndi.ldap.LdapCtxFactory"/> <property name="java.naming.provider.url" value="ldap://ldap.example.com:389"/> <property name="java.naming.security.authentication" value="simple"/> <property name="java.naming.security.principal" value="uid=admin,ou=system"/> <property name="java.naming.security.credentials" value="secret"/> </environment> </external-context> </bindings> </subsystem>
Use the following command to remove the binding.
/subsystem=naming/binding=java\:global\/federation\/ldap\/example:remove
Resource look up for JNDI providers that do not properly implement the lookup(Name)
method can result in a "javax.naming.InvalidNameException: Only support CompoundName names" error.
You might be able to work around this issue by specifying that the external context environment use the lookup(String)
method instead by adding the following property; however, this can result in a performance degradation.
<property name="org.jboss.as.naming.lookup.by.string" value="true"/>
Binding Lookup Aliases
The lookup
element allows you to bind existing entries into additional names or aliases.
-
The
name
attribute is mandatory and specifies the target JNDI name for the entry. -
The
lookup
attribute is mandatory and indicates the source JNDI name.
The following is an example of a management CLI command that binds an existing entry to an alias.
/subsystem=naming/binding=java\:global\/new-alias-name:add(binding-type=lookup, lookup=java\:global\/original-name)
Resulting XML Configuration
<lookup name="java:global/new-alias-name" lookup="java:global/original-name" />
Use the following command to remove the binding.
/subsystem=naming/binding=java\:global\/c:remove
23.3. Dynamically Change JNDI Bindings
JBoss EAP 7.1 introduced the ability to dynamically change JNDI bindings without forcing a server reload or restart. This feature can be useful if the network service endpoints are dynamically reconfigured due to version updates, testing requirements, or application feature updates.
To update a JNDI binding, use the rebind
operation. The rebind
operation takes the same arguments as the add
operation. This command works for all binding types except for external-context
binding types. External context bindings require additional dependencies, which affect the Modular Service Container (MSC) state, so they cannot be restarted without restarting services.
The following command dynamically changes the JNDI binding that was defined in the Configuring Simple Bindings example.
/subsystem=naming/binding=java\:global\/simple-integer-binding:rebind(binding-type=simple, type=int, value=200)
For more information about how to configure global bindings in the naming
subsystem, see Configuring Global Bindings.
23.4. Configuring the Remote JNDI Interface
The remote JNDI interface allows clients to look up entries in remote JBoss EAP instances. The naming
subsystem can be configured to deactivate or activate this interface, which is activated by default. The remote JNDI interface is configured using the <remote-naming>
element.
Use the following management CLI command to activate or reactivate the remote JNDI interface.
/subsystem=naming/service=remote-naming:add
Use the following management CLI command to deactivate the remote JNDI interface.
/subsystem=naming/service=remote-naming:remove
Only entries within the java:jboss/exported
context are accessible over remote JNDI.
Chapter 24. Configuring High Availability
24.1. Introduction to High Availability
JBoss EAP provides the following high availability services to guarantee the availability of deployed Jakarta EE applications.
- Load balancing
- This allows a service to handle a large number of requests by spreading the workload across multiple servers. A client can have timely responses from the service even in the event of a high volume of requests.
- Failover
- This allows a client to have uninterrupted access to a service even in the event of hardware or network failures. If the service fails, another cluster member takes over the client’s requests so that it can continue processing.
Clustering is a term that encompasses all of these capabilities. Members of a cluster can be configured to share workloads, referred to as load balancing, and pick up client processing in the event of a failure of another cluster member, referred to as failover.
It is important to keep in mind that the JBoss EAP operating mode chosen, either standalone server or managed domain, pertains to how you want to manage your servers. High availability services can be configured in JBoss EAP regardless of its operating mode.
JBoss EAP supports high availability at several different levels using various components. Some of those components of the runtime and your applications that can be made highly-available are:
- Instances of the application server
- Web applications, when used in conjunction with the internal JBoss Web Server, Apache HTTP Server, Microsoft IIS, or Oracle iPlanet Web Server
- Stateful and stateless session Enterprise JavaBeans (EJBs)
- Single sign-on (SSO) mechanisms
- HTTP sessions
- JMS services and message-driven beans (MDBs)
- Singleton MSC services
- Singleton deployments
Clustering is made available to JBoss EAP by the jgroups
, infinispan
, and modcluster
subsystems. The ha and full-ha profiles have these systems enabled. In JBoss EAP, these services start up and shut down on demand, but they will only start up if an application configured as distributable is deployed on the servers.
See the JBoss EAP Development Guide for how to mark an application as distributable.
24.2. Cluster Communication with JGroups
24.2.1. About JGroups
JGroups is a toolkit for reliable messaging and can be used to create clusters whose nodes can send messages to each other.
The jgroups
subsystem provides group communication support for high availability services in JBoss EAP. It allows you to configure named channels and protocol stacks as well as view runtime statistics for channels. The jgroups
subsystem is available when using a configuration that provides high availability capabilities, such as the ha or full-ha profile in a managed domain, or the standalone-ha.xml
or standalone-full-ha.xml
configuration file for a standalone server.
JBoss EAP is preconfigured with two JGroups stacks:
- udp
- The nodes in the cluster use User Datagram Protocol (UDP) multicasting to communicate with each other. This is the default stack.
- tcp
- The nodes in the cluster use Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) to communicate with each other.
TCP has more overhead and is often considered slower than UDP since it handles error checking, packet ordering, and congestion control itself. JGroups handles these features for UDP, whereas TCP guarantees them itself. TCP is a good choice when using JGroups on unreliable or high congestion networks, or when multicast is not available.
You can use the preconfigured stacks or define your own to suit your system’s specific requirements. For additional information on the available protocols and their attributes, see the following sections.
24.2.2. Switch the default JGroups channel to use TCP
By default, cluster nodes communicate using the udp
protocol stack configured for the ee
JGroups channel.
<channels default="ee"> <channel name="ee" stack="udp"/> </channels> <stacks> <stack name="udp"> <transport type="UDP" socket-binding="jgroups-udp"/> <protocol type="PING"/> ... </stack> <stack name="tcp"> <transport type="TCP" socket-binding="jgroups-tcp"/> <protocol type="MPING" socket-binding="jgroups-mping"/> ... </stack> </stacks>
Configuring TCP with multicast
Some networks only allow TCP to be used. Use the following management CLI command to switch the ee
channel to use the preconfigured tcp
stack.
/subsystem=jgroups/channel=ee:write-attribute(name=stack,value=tcp)
This default tcp
stack uses the MPING
protocol, which uses IP multicast to discover the initial cluster membership.
Configuring TCP without multicast
You can change the default protocol stack to use TCP when multicast is not preferable or allowed by security policies. To configure TCP-based clustering without multicast, perform the following steps:
Run the following command to switch the
ee
channel to use the pre-configuredtcp
stack in the JGroups subsystem:<channel name="ee" stack="tcp" cluster="ejb"/>
Set the name of the cluster node:
In the standalone configuration mode, perform one of the following steps:
Run the following command:
<server xmlns="urn:jboss:domain:8.0" name="node_1">
-
Specify a unique name to the system property
jboss.node.name
when starting the instance.
In the domain mode, the cluster servers are listed in the
host-*.xml
file in the server’s tag. The default configuration specifies the following server names, which you can edit if needed.<servers> <server name="server-one" group="main-server-group"/> <server name="server-two" group="other-server-group"> <socket-bindings port-offset="150"/> </server> </servers>
Choose one of the following protocols for discovering other cluster members:
-
TCPGOSSIP
: This protocol uses an external gossip router service to discover the members of a cluster. This requires configuration and management of additional processes but allows the individual EAP instances to not list each other cluster member. This protocol is advantageous if the cluster members change frequently. For more details, see TCPPING. -
TCPPING
: This protocol defines a static cluster membership list and requires each node to list all the potential cluster members. This protocol is preferred when cluster member addresses are known and do not change frequently. For more details, see TCPGOSSIP.
-
24.2.3. Configure TCPPING
This procedure creates a new JGroups stack that uses the TCPPING
protocol to define a static cluster membership list. A base script is provided that creates a tcpping
stack and sets the default ee
channel to use this new stack. The management CLI commands in this script must be customized for your environment and will be processed as a batch.
Copy the following script into a text editor and save it to the local file system.
# Define the socket bindings /socket-binding-group=standard-sockets/remote-destination-outbound-socket-binding=jgroups-host-a:add(host=HOST_A,port=7600) /socket-binding-group=standard-sockets/remote-destination-outbound-socket-binding=jgroups-host-b:add(host=HOST_B,port=7600) batch # Add the tcpping stack /subsystem=jgroups/stack=tcpping:add /subsystem=jgroups/stack=tcpping/transport=TCP:add(socket-binding=jgroups-tcp) /subsystem=jgroups/stack=tcpping/protocol=TCPPING:add(socket-bindings=[jgroups-host-a,jgroups-host-b]) /subsystem=jgroups/stack=tcpping/protocol=MERGE3:add /subsystem=jgroups/stack=tcpping/protocol=FD_SOCK:add /subsystem=jgroups/stack=tcpping/protocol=FD_ALL:add /subsystem=jgroups/stack=tcpping/protocol=VERIFY_SUSPECT:add /subsystem=jgroups/stack=tcpping/protocol=pbcast.NAKACK2:add /subsystem=jgroups/stack=tcpping/protocol=UNICAST3:add /subsystem=jgroups/stack=tcpping/protocol=pbcast.STABLE:add /subsystem=jgroups/stack=tcpping/protocol=pbcast.GMS:add /subsystem=jgroups/stack=tcpping/protocol=MFC:add /subsystem=jgroups/stack=tcpping/protocol=FRAG2:add # Set tcpping as the stack for the ee channel /subsystem=jgroups/channel=ee:write-attribute(name=stack,value=tcpping) run-batch reload
Note that the order of protocols defined is important. You can also insert a protocol at a particular index by passing an
add-index
value to theadd
command. The index is zero-based, so the following management CLI command adds theUNICAST3
protocol as the seventh protocol./subsystem=jgroups/stack=tcpping/protocol=UNICAST3:add(add-index=6)
Modify the script for your environment.
-
If you are running in a managed domain, you must specify which profile to update by preceding the
/subsystem=jgroups
commands with/profile=PROFILE_NAME
. Adjust the following properties as appropriate for your environment:
-
socket-bindings
: A comma-separated list of the host and port combinations that are considered well-known and will be available to look up the initial membership. See Configuring Socket Bindings for more information on defining socket bindings. -
initial_hosts
: A comma-separated list of the host and port combinations, using the syntaxHOST[PORT]
, that are considered well-known and will be available to look up the initial membership, for example,host1[1000],host2[2000]
. -
port_range
: This property is used to extend theinitial_hosts
port range by the specified value. For example, if you set theinitial_hosts
tohost1[1000],host2[2000]
, and theport_range
to1
, theinitial_hosts
setting expands tohost1[1000],host1[1001],host2[2000],host2[2001]
. This property only works with theinitial_hosts
property.
-
-
If you are running in a managed domain, you must specify which profile to update by preceding the
Run the script by passing the script file to the management CLI.
$ EAP_HOME/bin/jboss-cli.sh --connect --file=/path/to/SCRIPT_NAME
The TCPPING stack is now available and TCP is used for network communication.
24.2.3.1. Configuring TCPPING in standalone mode
This procedure helps you to configure the TCP stack and nodes for a clustered application in the standalone mode.
Procedure
Change the default stack from
udp
totcp
in the JGroups subsystem:<channel name="ee" stack="tcp" cluster="ejb"/>
Configure the TCP stack to use the TCPPING protocol in place of the default MPING protocol. In the following code, the
initial_hosts
property correlates to a listing of all nodes within the cluster and7600
denotes the defaultjgroups-tcp
port that can vary based on your configuration and environment.<stack name="tcp"> <transport type="TCP" socket-binding="jgroups-tcp"/> <protocol type="TCPPING"> <property name="initial_hosts">192.168.1.5[7600],192.168.1.9[7600]</property> <property name="port_range">0</property> </protocol> <protocol type="MERGE3"/> <protocol type="FD_SOCK" socket-binding="jgroups-tcp-fd"/> <protocol type="FD_ALL"/> <protocol type="VERIFY_SUSPECT"/> <protocol type="pbcast.NAKACK2"/> <protocol type="UNICAST3"/> <protocol type="pbcast.STABLE"/> <protocol type="pbcast.GMS"/> <protocol type="MFC"/> <protocol type="FRAG3"/> </stack>
NoteThe port number
7600
set ininitial_hosts
must be same as the port number defined in thejgroups-tcp
socket-binding definition. If you use the port-offset feature for socket-binding, you need to specify the same value after offset ininitial_hosts
.Set the IP address of the private interface, which is used by the JGroups component. The IP address should correlate to one of the IP addresses specified in
initial_hosts
:<interface name="private"> <inet-address value="${jboss.bind.address.private:192.168.1.5}"/> </interface>
- Repeat the above steps for configuring other nodes within the cluster. When the nodes are configured, start each node and deploy a clustered application.
Verification
You can check logs to verify whether the nodes are up and running:
INFO [org.infinispan.remoting.transport.jgroups.JGroupsTransport] (thread-2,ee,node_1) ISPN000094: Received new cluster view for channel server: [node_1|1] (2) [node_1, node_2] INFO [org.infinispan.remoting.transport.jgroups.JGroupsTransport] (thread-2,ee,node_1) ISPN000094: Received new cluster view for channel web: [node_1|1] (2) [node_1, node_2]
24.2.3.2. Configuring TCPPING in domain mode
This procedure helps you to configure the TCP stack and nodes for a clustered application in the domain mode.
Procedure
If the same profile is used for multiple clusters, set the system property value to
initial_hosts
:<protocol type="TCPPING"> <property name="initial_hosts">${jboss.cluster.tcp.initial_hosts}</property> Set the system property at the `server-group` level: <server-groups> <server-group name="a-server-group" profile="ha"> <socket-binding-group ref="ha-sockets"/> <system-properties> <property name="jboss.cluster.tcp.initial_hosts" value="192.168.1.5[7600],192.168.1.9[7600]" /> </system-properties>
Set the IP address of the private interface within the XML configuration of the host controller. The IP address of the private interface should correlate to one of the IP addresses listed in
initial_hosts
.<interfaces> .... <interface name="private"> <inet-address value="${jboss.bind.address.private:192.168.1.5}"/> </interface> </interfaces>
Verification
You can check logs to verify whether the nodes are up and running:
INFO [org.infinispan.remoting.transport.jgroups.JGroupsTransport] (thread-2,ee,node_1) ISPN000094: Received new cluster view for channel server: [node_1|1] (2) [node_1, node_2] INFO [org.infinispan.remoting.transport.jgroups.JGroupsTransport] (thread-2,ee,node_1) ISPN000094: Received new cluster view for channel web: [node_1|1] (2) [node_1, node_2]
24.2.4. Configure TCPGOSSIP
This procedure creates a new JGroups stack that uses the TCPGOSSIP
protocol to use an external gossip router to discover the members of a cluster. A base script is provided that creates a tcpgossip
stack and sets the default ee
channel to use this new stack. The management CLI commands in this script must be customized for your environment and will be processed as a batch.
Copy the following script into a text editor and save it to the local file system.
# Define the socket bindings /socket-binding-group=standard-sockets/remote-destination-outbound-socket-binding=jgroups-host-a:add(host=HOST_A,port=13001) batch # Add the tcpgossip stack /subsystem=jgroups/stack=tcpgossip:add /subsystem=jgroups/stack=tcpgossip/transport=TCP:add(socket-binding=jgroups-tcp) /subsystem=jgroups/stack=tcpgossip/protocol=TCPGOSSIP:add(socket-bindings=[jgroups-host-a]) /subsystem=jgroups/stack=tcpgossip/protocol=MERGE3:add /subsystem=jgroups/stack=tcpgossip/protocol=FD_SOCK:add /subsystem=jgroups/stack=tcpgossip/protocol=FD_ALL:add /subsystem=jgroups/stack=tcpgossip/protocol=VERIFY_SUSPECT:add /subsystem=jgroups/stack=tcpgossip/protocol=pbcast.NAKACK2:add /subsystem=jgroups/stack=tcpgossip/protocol=UNICAST3:add /subsystem=jgroups/stack=tcpgossip/protocol=pbcast.STABLE:add /subsystem=jgroups/stack=tcpgossip/protocol=pbcast.GMS:add /subsystem=jgroups/stack=tcpgossip/protocol=MFC:add /subsystem=jgroups/stack=tcpgossip/protocol=FRAG2:add # Set tcpgossip as the stack for the ee channel /subsystem=jgroups/channel=ee:write-attribute(name=stack,value=tcpgossip) run-batch reload
Note that the order of protocols defined is important. You can also insert a protocol at a particular index by passing an
add-index
value to theadd
command. The index is zero-based, so the following management CLI command adds theUNICAST3
protocol as the seventh protocol./subsystem=jgroups/stack=tcpgossip/protocol=UNICAST3:add(add-index=6)
Modify the script for your environment.
-
If you are running in a managed domain, you must specify which profile to update by preceding the
/subsystem=jgroups
commands with/profile=PROFILE_NAME
. Adjust the following properties as appropriate for your environment:
-
socket-bindings
: A comma-separated list of the host and port combinations that are considered well-known and will be available to look up the initial membership. See Configuring Socket Bindings for more information on defining socket bindings. -
initial_hosts
: A comma-separated list of the host and port combinations, using the syntaxHOST[PORT]
, that are considered well-known and will be available to look up the initial membership, for example,host1[1000],host2[2000]
. -
port_range
: This property is used to extend theinitial_hosts
port range by the specified value. For example, if you set theinitial_hosts
tohost1[1000],host2[2000]
, and theport_range
to1
, theinitial_hosts
setting expands tohost1[1000],host1[1001],host2[2000],host2[2001]
. This property only works with theinitial_hosts
property. -
reconnect_interval
: The interval in milliseconds by which a disconnected stub attempts to reconnect to the gossip router. -
sock_conn_timeout
: The maximum time for socket creation. The default is1000
milliseconds. -
sock_read_timeout
: The maximum time in milliseconds to block on a read. A value of0
will block indefinitely.
-
-
If you are running in a managed domain, you must specify which profile to update by preceding the
Run the script by passing the script file to the management CLI.
$ EAP_HOME/bin/jboss-cli.sh --connect --file=/path/to/SCRIPT_NAME
The TCPGOSSIP stack is now available and TCP is used for network communication. This stack is configured for use with a gossip router so that JGroups cluster members can find other cluster members.
24.2.5. Configure JDBC_PING
You can use the JDBC_PING
protocol to manage and discover membership in a cluster.
JDBC_PING uses a database, specified in a data-source, to list the members of the cluster.
- Create a data-source to connect to the database you want to use to manage cluster membership.
Copy the following script into a text editor and save it to the local file system.
batch # Add the JDBC_PING stack /subsystem=jgroups/stack=JDBC_PING:add /subsystem=jgroups/stack=JDBC_PING/transport=TCP:add(socket-binding=jgroups-tcp) /subsystem=jgroups/stack=JDBC_PING/protocol=JDBC_PING:add(data-source=ExampleDS) /subsystem=jgroups/stack=JDBC_PING/protocol=MERGE3:add /subsystem=jgroups/stack=JDBC_PING/protocol=FD_SOCK:add /subsystem=jgroups/stack=JDBC_PING/protocol=FD_ALL:add /subsystem=jgroups/stack=JDBC_PING/protocol=VERIFY_SUSPECT:add /subsystem=jgroups/stack=JDBC_PING/protocol=pbcast.NAKACK2:add /subsystem=jgroups/stack=JDBC_PING/protocol=UNICAST3:add /subsystem=jgroups/stack=JDBC_PING/protocol=pbcast.STABLE:add /subsystem=jgroups/stack=JDBC_PING/protocol=pbcast.GMS:add /subsystem=jgroups/stack=JDBC_PING/protocol=MFC:add /subsystem=jgroups/stack=JDBC_PING/protocol=FRAG2:add # Set JDBC_PING as the stack for the ee channel /subsystem=jgroups/channel=ee:write-attribute(name=stack,value=JDBC_PING) run-batch reload
Note that the order of protocols defined is important. You can also insert a protocol at a particular index by passing an
add-index
value to theadd
command. The index is zero-based, so the following management CLI command adds theUNICAST3
protocol as the seventh protocol./subsystem=jgroups/stack=JDBC_PING/protocol=UNICAST3:add(add-index=6)
Modify the script for your environment.
-
If you are running in a managed domain, you must specify which profile to update by preceding the
/subsystem=jgroups
commands with/profile=PROFILE_NAME
. - Replace 'ExampleDS' with the name of the data-source you defined in Step 1.
-
If you are running in a managed domain, you must specify which profile to update by preceding the
Run the script by passing the script file to the management CLI.
$ EAP_HOME/bin/jboss-cli.sh --connect --file=/path/to/SCRIPT_NAME
The JDBC_PING stack is now available and TCP is used for network communication.
Related information
JDBC_PING: https://developer.jboss.org/wiki/JDBCPING
Creating a data-source: About JBoss EAP Datasources
24.2.6. Binding JGroups to a Network Interface
By default, JGroups only binds to the private
network interface, which points to localhost in the default configuration. For security reasons, JGroups will not bind to the network interface defined by the -b
argument specified during JBoss EAP startup, as clustering traffic should not be exposed on a public network interface.
See the Network and Port Configuration chapter in this guide for information about how to configure network interfaces.
For security reasons, JGroups should only be bound to a non-public network interface. For performance reasons, we also recommend that the network interface for JGroups traffic should be part of a dedicated Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN).
24.2.7. Securing a Cluster
There are several concerns to address in order to run a cluster securely:
- Preventing unauthorized nodes from joining the cluster. This is addressed by requiring authentication.
- Preventing non-members from communicating with cluster members. This is addressed by encrypting messages.
24.2.7.1. Configuring Authentication
JGroups authentication is performed by the AUTH
protocol. The purpose is to ensure that only authenticated nodes can join a cluster.
In the applicable server configuration file, add the AUTH
protocol with the appropriate property settings. The AUTH
protocol should be configured immediately before the pbcast.GMS
protocol.
The following examples demonstrate using AUTH
with different forms of authorization tokens.
AUTH with a Simple Token
...
<protocol type="pbcast.STABLE"/>
<auth-protocol type="AUTH">
<plain-token>
<shared-secret-reference clear-text="my_password"/>
</plain-token>
</auth-protocol>
<protocol type="pbcast.GMS"/>
...
AUTH with a Digest Algorithm Token
This format can be used with any digest algorithm, for example MD5 or SHA-2. The default digest algorithm in JBoss EAP 7.3 is SHA-256, the strongest digest algorithm required to be supported by the JVM. Many JVMs will additionally implement SHA-512.
...
<protocol type="pbcast.STABLE"/>
<auth-protocol type="AUTH">
<digest-token algorithm="SHA-512">
<shared-secret-reference clear-text="my_password"/>
</digest-token>
</auth-protocol>
<protocol type="pbcast.GMS"/>
...
AUTH with an X509 Token
This example creates a new keystore in the elytron
subsystem, and references it in the JGroups AUTH
configuration.
Create the keystore:
$ keytool -genkeypair -alias jgroups_key -keypass my_password -storepass my_password -storetype jks -keystore jgroups.keystore -keyalg RSA
Add the keystore to the
elytron
subsystem using the management CLI:/subsystem=elytron/key-store=jgroups-token-store:add(type=jks,path=/path/to/jgroups.keystore,credential-reference={clear-text=my_password}, required=true)
In the JGroups stack definition, configure
AUTH
to use the keystore:... <protocol type="pbcast.STABLE"/> <auth-protocol type="AUTH"> <cipher-token algorithm="RSA" key-alias="jgroups_key" key-store="jgroups-token-store"> <shared-secret-reference clear-text="my_password"/> <key-credential-reference clear-text="my_password"/> </cipher-token> </auth-protocol> <protocol type="pbcast.GMS"/> ...
24.2.7.2. Configuring Encryption
To encrypt messages, JGroups uses a secret key that is shared by the members of a cluster. The sender encrypts the message using the shared secret key, and the receiver decrypts the message using the same secret key. With symmetric encryption, which is configured using the SYM_ENCRYPT
protocol, nodes use a shared keystore to retrieve the secret key. With asymmetric encryption, which is configured using the ASYM_ENCRYPT
protocol, nodes retrieve the secret key from the coordinator of the cluster after being authenticated using AUTH
.
Using Symmetric Encryption
In order to use SYM_ENCRYPT
, you must set up a keystore that will be referenced in the JGroups configuration for each node.
Create a keystore.
In the following command, replace
VERSION
with the appropriate JGroups JAR version andPASSWORD
with a keystore password.$ java -cp EAP_HOME/modules/system/layers/base/org/jgroups/main/jgroups-VERSION.jar org.jgroups.demos.KeyStoreGenerator --alg AES --size 128 --storeName defaultStore.keystore --storepass PASSWORD --alias mykey
This will generate a
defaultStore.keystore
file that will be referenced in the JGroups configuration.Once the keystore has been generated it is defined in the
SYM_PROTOCOL
using one of two methods.- Specify the keystore directly in the configuration.
- Reference the keystore using the Elytron subsystem.
Configuring AUTH
is optional when using SYM_ENCRYPT
.
Using Symmetric Encryption by Directly Referencing the Keystore
Configure the
SYM_ENCRYPT
protocol in thejgroups
subsystem.In the applicable server configuration file, add the
SYM_ENCRYPT
protocol with the appropriate property settings. This protocol will reference the previously created keystore. TheSYM_ENCRYPT
protocol should be configured immediately before thepbcast.NAKACK2
protocol.<subsystem xmlns="urn:jboss:domain:jgroups:6.0"> <stacks> <stack name="udp"> <transport type="UDP" socket-binding="jgroups-udp"/> <protocol type="PING"/> <protocol type="MERGE3"/> <protocol type="FD_SOCK"/> <protocol type="FD_ALL"/> <protocol type="VERIFY_SUSPECT"/> <protocol type="SYM_ENCRYPT"> <property name="provider">SunJCE</property> <property name="sym_algorithm">AES</property> <property name="encrypt_entire_message">true</property> <property name="keystore_name">/path/to/defaultStore.keystore</property> <property name="store_password">PASSWORD</property> <property name="alias">mykey</property> </protocol> <protocol type="pbcast.NAKACK2"/> <protocol type="UNICAST3"/> <protocol type="pbcast.STABLE"/> <protocol type="pbcast.GMS"/> <protocol type="UFC"/> <protocol type="MFC"/> <protocol type="FRAG2"/> </stack> </stacks> </subsystem>
Using Symmetric Encryption with Elytron
Using the management CLI, create a keystore in the
elytron
subsystem that references thedefaultStore.keystore
created in using symmetric encryption./subsystem=elytron/key-store=jgroups-keystore:add(path=/path/to/defaultStore.keystore,credential-reference={clear-text=PASSWORD},type=JCEKS)
Add the
SYM_ENCRYPT
protocol in thejgroups
subsystem with the appropriate property settings. TheSYM_ENCRYPT
protocol should be configured immediately before thepbcast.NAKACK2
protocol, as seen in the following configuration.<subsystem xmlns="urn:jboss:domain:jgroups:6.0"> <stacks> <stack name="udp"> <transport type="UDP" socket-binding="jgroups-udp"/> <protocol type="PING"/> <protocol type="MERGE3"/> <protocol type="FD_SOCK"/> <protocol type="FD_ALL"/> <protocol type="VERIFY_SUSPECT"/> <encrypt-protocol type="SYM_ENCRYPT" key-alias="mykey" key-store="jgroups-keystore"> <key-credential-reference clear-text="PASSWORD"/> <property name="provider">SunJCE</property> <property name="encrypt_entire_message">true</property> </encrypt-protocol> <protocol type="pbcast.NAKACK2"/> <protocol type="UNICAST3"/> <protocol type="pbcast.STABLE"/> <protocol type="pbcast.GMS"/> <protocol type="UFC"/> <protocol type="MFC"/> <protocol type="FRAG2"/> </stack> </stacks> </subsystem>
NoteThe above example uses a clear text password; however, a credential store may also be defined to define the password outside of the configuration file. For more information on configuring this store, see the Credential Store section in the How to Configure Server Security guide.
Using Asymmetric Encryption
In order to use ASYM_ENCRYPT
the AUTH
protocol must be defined. See the Configuring Authentication section for instructions on configuring the AUTH
protocol in the jgroups
subsystem.
The ASYM_ENCRYPT
is configured using one of two methods.
- Generate a secret key and reference it directly in the configuration.
- Create a keystore and reference it using the Elytron subsystem.
Using Asymmetric Encryption by Generating a Secret Key
Configure the
ASYM_ENCRYPT
protocol in thejgroups
subsystem.In the applicable server configuration file, add the
ASYM_ENCRYPT
protocol with the appropriate property settings. TheASYM_ENCRYPT
protocol should be configured immediately before thepbcast.NAKACK2
protocol, as seen in the following configuration.<subsystem xmlns="urn:jboss:domain:jgroups:6.0"> <stacks> <stack name="udp"> <transport type="UDP" socket-binding="jgroups-udp"/> <protocol type="PING"/> <protocol type="MERGE3"/> <protocol type="FD_SOCK"/> <protocol type="FD_ALL"/> <protocol type="VERIFY_SUSPECT"/> <protocol type="ASYM_ENCRYPT"> <property name="encrypt_entire_message">true</property> <property name="sym_keylength">128</property> <property name="sym_algorithm">AES/ECB/PKCS5Padding</property> <property name="asym_keylength">512</property> <property name="asym_algorithm">RSA</property> </protocol> <protocol type="pbcast.NAKACK2"/> <protocol type="UNICAST3"/> <protocol type="pbcast.STABLE"/> <!-- Configure AUTH protocol here --> <protocol type="pbcast.GMS"/> <protocol type="UFC"/> <protocol type="MFC"/> <protocol type="FRAG2"/> </stack> </stacks> </subsystem>
Using Asymmetric Encryption with Elytron
Create a keystore to contain the key pair. The following command creates a keystore with the
mykey
entry.$ keytool -genkeypair -alias mykey -keyalg RSA -keysize 1024 -keystore defaultKeystore.keystore -dname "CN=localhost" -keypass secret -storepass secret
Using the management CLI, create a keystore in the
elytron
subsystem that references thedefaultStore.keystore
./subsystem=elytron/key-store=jgroups-keystore:add(path=/path/to/defaultStore.keystore,credential-reference={clear-text=PASSWORD},type=JCEKS)
Add the
ASYM_ENCRYPT
protocol in thejgroups
subsystem with the appropriate property settings. TheASYM_ENCRYPT
protocol should be configured immediately before thepbcast.NAKACK2
protocol, as seen in the following configuration.<subsystem xmlns="urn:jboss:domain:jgroups:6.0"> <stacks> <stack name="udp"> <transport type="UDP" socket-binding="jgroups-udp"/> <protocol type="PING"/> <protocol type="MERGE3"/> <protocol type="FD_SOCK"/> <protocol type="FD_ALL"/> <protocol type="VERIFY_SUSPECT"/> <encrypt-protocol type="ASYM_ENCRYPT" key-alias="mykey" key-store="jgroups-keystore"> <key-credential-reference clear-text="secret" /> <property name="encrypt_entire_message">true</property> </encrypt-protocol> <protocol type="pbcast.NAKACK2"/> <protocol type="UNICAST3"/> <protocol type="pbcast.STABLE"/> <!-- Configure AUTH protocol here --> <protocol type="pbcast.GMS"/> <protocol type="UFC"/> <protocol type="MFC"/> <protocol type="FRAG2"/> </stack> </stacks> </subsystem>
NoteThe above example uses a clear text password; however, a credential store may also be defined to define the password outside of the configuration file. For more information on configuring this store, see the Credential Store section in the How to Configure Server Security guide.
24.2.8. Configure JGroups Thread Pools
The jgroups
subsystem contains the default
, internal
, oob
, and timer
thread pools. These pools can be configured for any JGroups stack and do not affect bean or other pools configured on local nodes. The JGroup thread pools are used to support cluster communication.
The following table lists the attributes you can configure for each thread pool and the default value for each.
Thread pool name | Description | keepalive-time | max-threads | min-threads | queue-length |
---|---|---|---|---|---|
default | This pool is used to handle incoming messages that are not marked as out-of-band. | 60000L | 300 | 20 | 100 |
internal | This pool is used to handle internal processes needed for EAP maintenance. | 60000L | 4 | 2 | 100 |
oob | This pool is used to handle incoming out-of-band messages. | 60000L | 300 | 20 | 0 |
timer | This pool is used to handle time-bound scheduler messages. | 5000L | 4 | 2 | 500 |
Use the following syntax to configure a JGroups thread pool using the management CLI.
/subsystem=jgroups/stack=STACK_TYPE/transport=TRANSPORT_TYPE/thread-pool=THREAD_POOL_NAME:write-attribute(name=ATTRIBUTE_NAME, value=ATTRIBUTE_VALUE)
The following is an example of the management CLI command to set the max-threads
value to 500
in the default
thread pool for the udp
stack.
/subsystem=jgroups/stack=udp/transport=UDP/thread-pool=default:write-attribute(name="max-threads", value="500")
24.2.9. Configure JGroups Send and Receive Buffers
Resolving Buffer Size Warnings
By default, JGroups is configured with certain send and receive buffer values; however, your operating system may limit the available buffer sizes and JBoss EAP may not be able to use its configured buffer values. In this situation you will see warnings in the JBoss EAP logs similar to the following:
WARNING [org.jgroups.protocols.UDP] (ServerService Thread Pool -- 68) JGRP000015: the send buffer of socket DatagramSocket was set to 640KB, but the OS only allocated 212.99KB. This might lead to performance problems. Please set your max send buffer in the OS correctly (e.g. net.core.wmem_max on Linux) WARNING [org.jgroups.protocols.UDP] (ServerService Thread Pool -- 68) JGRP000015: the receive buffer of socket DatagramSocket was set to 20MB, but the OS only allocated 212.99KB. This might lead to performance problems. Please set your max receive buffer in the OS correctly (e.g. net.core.rmem_max on Linux)
To resolve this, consult your operating system documentation for instructions on how to increase the buffer size. For Red Hat Enterprise Linux systems, edit /etc/sysctl.conf
as the root user to configure maximum values for buffer sizes that will survive system restarts. For example:
# Allow a 25MB UDP receive buffer for JGroups net.core.rmem_max = 26214400 # Allow a 1MB UDP send buffer for JGroups net.core.wmem_max = 1048576
After modifying /etc/sysctl.conf
, run sysctl -p
for the changes to take effect.
Configuring JGroups Buffer Sizes
You can configure the JGroups buffer sizes that JBoss EAP uses by setting the following transport properties on the UDP and TCP JGroups stacks.
- UDP Stack
-
ucast_recv_buf_size
-
ucast_send_buf_size
-
mcast_recv_buf_size
-
mcast_send_buf_size
-
- TCP Stack
-
recv_buf_size
-
send_buf_size
-
JGroups buffer sizes can be configured using the management console or the management CLI.
Use the following syntax to set a JGroups buffer size property using the management CLI.
/subsystem=jgroups/stack=STACK_NAME/transport=TRANSPORT/property=PROPERTY_NAME:add(value=BUFFER_SIZE)
The following is an example management CLI command to set the recv_buf_size
property to 20000000
on the tcp
stack.
/subsystem=jgroups/stack=tcp/transport=TRANSPORT/property=recv_buf_size:add(value=20000000)
JGroups buffer sizes can also be configured using the management console by navigating to the JGroups subsystem from the Configuration tab, clicking View, selecting the Stack tab, choosing the appropriate stack, clicking Transport, and editing the Properties field.
24.2.10. Tuning the JGroups Subsystem
For tips on monitoring and optimizing performance for the jgroups
subsystem, see the JGroups Subsystem Tuning section of the Performance Tuning Guide.
24.2.11. JGroups Troubleshooting
24.2.11.1. Nodes Do Not Form a Cluster
Make sure your machine is set up correctly for IP multicast. There are two test programs that ship with JBoss EAP that can be used to test IP multicast: McastReceiverTest
and McastSenderTest
.
In a terminal, start McastReceiverTest
.
$ java -cp EAP_HOME/bin/client/jboss-client.jar org.jgroups.tests.McastReceiverTest -mcast_addr 230.11.11.11 -port 5555
Then in another terminal window, start McastSenderTest
.
$ java -cp EAP_HOME/bin/client/jboss-client.jar org.jgroups.tests.McastSenderTest -mcast_addr 230.11.11.11 -port 5555
If you want to bind to a specific network interface card (NIC), use -bind_addr YOUR_BIND_ADDRESS
, where YOUR_BIND_ADDRESS
is the IP address of the NIC to which you want to bind. Use this parameter in both the sender and the receiver.
When you type in the McastSenderTest
terminal window, you should see the output in the McastReceiverTest
window. If you do not, try the following steps.
-
Increase the time-to-live for multicast packets by adding
-ttl VALUE
to the sender command. The default used by this test program is32
and theVALUE
must be no greater than255
. - If the machines have multiple interfaces, verify that you are using the correct interface.
- Contact a system administrator to make sure that multicast will work on the interface you have chosen.
Once you know multicast is working properly on each machine in your cluster, you can repeat the above test to test the network, putting the sender on one machine and the receiver on another.
24.2.11.2. Causes of Missing Heartbeats in Failure Detection
Sometimes a cluster member is suspected by failure detection (FD) because a heartbeat acknowledgement has not been received for some time T
, which is defined by timeout
and max_tries
.
For an example cluster of nodes A, B, C, and D, where A pings B, B pings C, C pings D, and D pings A, C can be suspected for any of the following reasons:
-
B or C are running at 100% CPU for more than
T
seconds. So even if C sends a heartbeat acknowledgement to B, B may not be able to process it because it is at 100% CPU usage. - B or C are garbage collecting, which results in the same situation as above.
- A combination of the two cases above.
- The network loses packets. This usually happens when there is a lot of traffic on the network, and the switch starts dropping packets, usually broadcasts first, then IP multicasts, and TCP packets last.
-
B or C are processing a callback. For example, if C received a remote method call over its channel that takes
T
+ 1 seconds to process, during this time C will not process any other messages, including heartbeats. Therefore, B will not receive the heartbeat acknowledgement and will suspect C.
24.3. Infinispan
24.3.1. About Infinispan
Infinispan is a Java data grid platform that provides a JSR-107-compatible cache interface for managing cached data. The Jakarta equivalent of managing cached data is the Jakarta Persistence 2.2.
For more information about Infinispan functionality and configuration options see the Infinispan Documentation.
The infinispan
subsystem provides caching support for JBoss EAP. It allows you to configure and view runtime metrics for named cache containers and caches.
When using a configuration that provides high availability capabilities, such as the ha or full-ha profile in a managed domain, or the standalone-ha.xml
or standalone-full-ha.xml
configuration file for a standalone server, the infinispan
subsystem provides caching, state replication, and state distribution support. In non-high-availability configurations, the infinispan
subsystem provides local caching support.
Infinispan is delivered as a private module in JBoss EAP to provide the caching capabilities of JBoss EAP. Infinispan is not supported for direct use by applications.
24.3.2. Cache Containers
A cache container is a repository for the caches used by a subsystem. Each cache container defines a default cache to be used.
JBoss EAP 7 defines the following default Infinispan cache containers:
-
server
for singleton caching -
web
for web session clustering -
ejb
for stateful session bean clustering -
hibernate
for entity caching
Example: Default Infinispan Configuration
<subsystem xmlns="urn:jboss:domain:infinispan:7.0"> <cache-container name="server" aliases="singleton cluster" default-cache="default" module="org.wildfly.clustering.server"> <transport lock-timeout="60000"/> <replicated-cache name="default"> <transaction mode="BATCH"/> </replicated-cache> </cache-container> <cache-container name="web" default-cache="dist" module="org.wildfly.clustering.web.infinispan"> <transport lock-timeout="60000"/> <distributed-cache name="dist"> <locking isolation="REPEATABLE_READ"/> <transaction mode="BATCH"/> <file-store/> </distributed-cache> </cache-container> <cache-container name="ejb" aliases="sfsb" default-cache="dist" module="org.wildfly.clustering.ejb.infinispan"> <transport lock-timeout="60000"/> <distributed-cache name="dist"> <locking isolation="REPEATABLE_READ"/> <transaction mode="BATCH"/> <file-store/> </distributed-cache> </cache-container> <cache-container name="hibernate" default-cache="local-query" module="org.hibernate.infinispan"> <transport lock-timeout="60000"/> <local-cache name="local-query"> <object-memory size="1000"/> <expiration max-idle="100000"/> </local-cache> <invalidation-cache name="entity"> <transaction mode="NON_XA"/> <object-memory size="1000"/> <expiration max-idle="100000"/> </invalidation-cache> <replicated-cache name="timestamps" mode="ASYNC"/> </cache-container> </subsystem>
Note the default cache defined in each cache container. For example, the web
cache container defines the dist
distributed cache as the default. The dist
cache will therefore be used when clustering web sessions.
See Configure Cache Containers for information on changing the default cache and adding additional caches.
You can add additional caches and cache containers, for example, for HTTP sessions, stateful session beans, or singleton services or deployments. It is not supported to use these caches directly by user applications.
24.3.2.1. Configure Cache Containers
Cache containers and cache attributes can be configured using the management console or management CLI.
You should avoid changing cache or cache container names, as other components in the configuration may reference them.
Configure Caches Using the Management Console
Once you navigate to the Infinispan subsystem from the Configuration tab in the management console, you can configure caches and cache containers. In a managed domain, make sure to select the appropriate profile to configure.
Add a cache container.
Click the Add (+) button next to the Cache Container heading, choose Add Cache Container, and enter the settings for the new cache container.
Update cache container settings.
Choose the appropriate cache container and click View. Configure the cache container settings as necessary.
Update cache container transport settings.
Choose the appropriate cache container and click View. Select the Transport tab and configure the cache container transport settings as necessary.
Configure caches.
Choose the appropriate cache container and click View. From the appropriate cache tab, for example, Replicated Cache, you can add, update, and remove caches.
Configure Caches Using the Management CLI
You can configure caches and cache containers using the management CLI. In a managed domain, you must specify the profile to update by preceding these commands with /profile=PROFILE_NAME
.
Add a cache container.
/subsystem=infinispan/cache-container=CACHE_CONTAINER:add
Add a replicated cache.
/subsystem=infinispan/cache-container=CACHE_CONTAINER/replicated-cache=CACHE:add(mode=MODE)
Set the default cache for a cache container.
/subsystem=infinispan/cache-container=CACHE_CONTAINER:write-attribute(name=default-cache,value=CACHE)
Configure batching for a replicated cache.
/subsystem=infinispan/cache-container=CACHE_CONTAINER/replicated-cache=CACHE/component=transaction:write-attribute(name=mode,value=BATCH)
The following example shows how to add a concurrent
distributed cache to the web
cache container. This cache configuration relaxes the locking constraints of the default cache, which allows multiple concurrent requests to access the same web session simultaneously. It achieves this by permitting lock-free reads and obtaining exclusive locks more frequently, but for a shorter duration.
Use the following management CLI commands to add the concurrent
distributed cache to the web
cache container and make it the default cache:
batch /subsystem=infinispan/cache-container=web/distributed-cache=concurrent:add /subsystem=infinispan/cache-container=web:write-attribute(name=default-cache,value=concurrent) /subsystem=infinispan/cache-container=web/distributed-cache=concurrent/store=file:add run-batch
This results in the following server configuration:
<cache-container name="web" default-cache="concurrent" module="org.wildfly.clustering.web.infinispan"> ... <distributed-cache name="concurrent"> <file-store/> </distributed-cache> </cache-container>
Change the Default EJB Cache Container
You can use cache containers in the ejb3
subsystem as described below:
-
To support passivation of EJB session beans, you can use the
ejb
cache container defined in theinfinispan
subsystem to store the sessions. - For remote EJB clients connecting to a clustered deployment on a server, you must provide the cluster topology information to these clients, so that they can fail over to other nodes in the cluster if the node they are interacting with fails.
If you are changing or renaming the default cache container, named ejb
, which supports passivation and the provision of topology information, you must add the cache-container
attribute to the passivation-stores
element and the cluster
attribute to the remote
element, as shown in the example below. If you are just adding a new cache for your own use, you need not make those changes.
<subsystem xmlns="urn:jboss:domain:ejb3:5.0"> <passivation-stores> <passivation-store name="infinispan" cache-container="ejb-cltest" max-size="10000"/> </passivation-stores> <remote cluster="ejb-cltest" connector-ref="http-remoting-connector" thread-pool-name="default"/> </subsystem> <subsystem xmlns="urn:jboss:domain:infinispan:7.0"> ... <cache-container name="ejb-cltest" aliases="sfsb" default-cache="dist" module="org.wildfly.clustering.ejb.infinispan"> </subsystem>
Eviction Feature in Hibernate Cache Container
The eviction feature for the hibernate
cache container removes cache entries from memory. This feature helps reduce the memory load on the subsystem.
The size
attribute sets the maximum number of cache entries that will be stored before eviction of cache entries begins.
Example: Eviction Feature
<cache-container name="hibernate" default-cache="local-query" module="org.hibernate.infinispan"> <transport lock-timeout="60000"/> <local-cache name="local-query"> <object-memory size="1000"/> <expiration max-idle="100000"/>
Note that eviction only occurs within the memory. A cache store holds cache entries that are evicted to prevent permanent loss of information. For more information about the eviction feature, see the Eviction and Data Container section in the Infinispan User Guide.
24.3.3. Clustering Modes
Clustering can be configured in two different ways in JBoss EAP using Infinispan. The best method for your application will depend on your requirements. There is a trade-off between availability, consistency, reliability and scalability with each mode. Before choosing a clustering mode, you must identify what are the most important features of your network for you, and balance those requirements.
Cache Modes
- Replication
- Replication mode automatically detects and adds new instances on the cluster. Changes made to these instances will be replicated to all nodes on the cluster. Replication mode typically works best in small clusters because of the amount of information that has to be replicated over the network. Infinispan can be configured to use UDP multicast, which alleviates network traffic congestion to a degree.
- Distribution
Distribution mode allows Infinispan to scale the cluster linearly. Distribution mode uses a consistent hash algorithm to determine where in a cluster a new node should be placed. The number of copies, or owners, of information to be kept is configurable. There is a trade-off between the number of copies kept, durability of the data, and performance. The more copies that are kept, the more impact on performance, but the less likely you are to lose data in a server failure. The hash algorithm also works to reduce network traffic by locating entries without multicasting or storing metadata.
You should consider using distribution mode as a caching strategy when the cluster size exceeds 6-8 nodes. With distribution mode, data is distributed to only a subset of nodes within the cluster, as opposed to all nodes.
- Scattered
Scattered mode is similar to distribution mode in that it uses a consistent hash algorithm to determine ownership. However, ownership is limited to two members, and the originator, or node receiving the request for a given session, always assumes ownership for coordinating locking and cache entry updates. The cache write algorithm used in scattered mode guarantees that a write operation results in only a single RPC call, where distribution caches with two owners can often use two RPC calls. This can be useful for distributed web sessions because load balancer failover tends to direct traffic to a non-primary owner or even a backup node. This can potentially reduce contention and improve performance following a cluster topology change.
Scattered mode does not support transactions or L1 caching. However, it does support biased reads, which allow the node that originates a cache write for a given entry to continue to service reads for that entry for some duration even though it is not the owner according to the consistent hash. The effect is similar to L1 caching, although the configuration attributes for biased reads versus L1 caching are distinct.
Synchronous and Asynchronous Replication
Replication can be performed either in synchronous or asynchronous mode, and the mode chosen depends on your requirements and your application.
From JBoss EAP 7.1 onwards, you must always use the synchronous (SYNC
) cache mode. SYNC
is also the default cache mode. Using the asynchronous (ASYNC
) mode is not valid and causes locking contention. For more information about session replication and the appropriate cache modes, see How to configure and tune the session replication for EAP.
- Synchronous replication
- With synchronous replication, the replication process runs in the same thread that handles the user request. Session replication is initiated after the completed response is sent back to the client, and the thread is released only after the replication is completed. Synchronous replication has an impact on network traffic because it requires a response from each node in the cluster. It has the advantage, however, of ensuring that all modifications have been made to all nodes in the cluster.
- Asynchronous replication
- With asynchronous replication, Infinispan uses a thread pool to carry out replication in the background. The sender does not wait for replies from other nodes in the cluster. However, cache reads for the same session will block until the previous replication completes so that stale data is not read. Replication is triggered either on a time basis or by queue size. Failed replication attempts are written to a log, not notified in real time.
24.3.3.1. Configure the Cache Mode
You can change the default cache using the management CLI.
This section shows instructions specific to configuring the web session cache, which defaults to distribution mode. The steps and management CLI commands can easily be adjusted to apply to other cache containers.
Change to Replication Cache Mode
The default JBoss EAP 7 configuration for the web session cache does not include a repl
replication cache. This cache must first be added.
The below management CLI commands are for a standalone server. When running in a managed domain, you must specify which profile to update by preceding the /subsystem=infinispan
commands with /profile=PROFILE_NAME
.
Add the
repl
replication cache and set it as the default cache.batch /subsystem=infinispan/cache-container=web/replicated-cache=repl:add(mode=ASYNC) /subsystem=infinispan/cache-container=web/replicated-cache=repl/component=transaction:add(mode=BATCH) /subsystem=infinispan/cache-container=web/replicated-cache=repl/component=locking:add(isolation=REPEATABLE_READ) /subsystem=infinispan/cache-container=web/replicated-cache=repl/store=file:add /subsystem=infinispan/cache-container=web:write-attribute(name=default-cache,value=repl) run-batch
Reload the server.
reload
Change to Distribution Cache Mode
The default JBoss EAP 7 configuration for the web session cache already includes a dist
distribution cache.
The below management CLI commands are for a standalone server. When running in a managed domain, you must specify which profile to update by preceding the /subsystem=infinispan
commands with /profile=PROFILE_NAME
.
Change the default cache to the
dist
distribution cache./subsystem=infinispan/cache-container=web:write-attribute(name=default-cache,value=dist)
Set the number of owners for the distribution cache. The following command sets
5
owners. The default is2
./subsystem=infinispan/cache-container=web/distributed-cache=dist:write-attribute(name=owners,value=5)
Reload the server.
reload
Change to Scattered Cache Mode
The default JBoss EAP configuration for the web session cache does not include a scattered-cache
. The example below shows the management CLI commands to add a scattered cache and set it as the default cache.
The below management CLI commands are for a standalone server using the HA profile. When running in a managed domain, you must specify which profile to update by preceding the /subsystem=infinispan
commands with /profile=PROFILE_NAME
.
Create the scattered cache with a read bias lifespan equal to the default web session timeout value of 30 minutes .
/subsystem=infinispan/cache-container=web/scattered-cache=scattered:add(bias-lifespan=1800000)
Set
scattered
as the default cache./subsystem=infinispan/cache-container=web:write-attribute(name=default-cache,value=scattered)
This results in the following server configuration.
<cache-container name="web" default-cache="scattered" module="org.wildfly.clustering.web.infinispan"> ... <scattered-cache name="scattered" bias-lifespan="1800000"/> ... </cache-container>
24.3.3.2. Cache Strategy Performance
When using a SYNC
caching strategy, the cost of replication is easy to measure and directly seen in response times since the request does not complete until the replication completes.
Although it seems that the ASYNC
caching strategy should result in lower response times than the SYNC
caching strategy, this is only true under the right conditions. The ASYNC
caching strategy is more difficult to measure, but it can provide better performance than the SYNC
strategy when the duration between requests is long enough for the cache operation to complete. This is because the cost of replication is not immediately seen in response times.
If requests for the same session are made too quickly, the cost of replication for the previous request is shifted to the front of the subsequent request since it must wait for the replication from the previous request to complete. For rapidly fired requests where a subsequent request is sent immediately after a response is received, the ASYNC
caching strategy will perform worse than the SYNC
caching strategy. Consequently, there is a threshold for the period of time between requests for the same session where the SYNC
caching strategy will actually perform better than the ASYNC
caching strategy. In real world usage, requests for the same session are not normally received in rapid succession. Instead, there is typically a period of time in the order of a few seconds or more between the requests. In this case, the ASYNC
caching strategy is a sensible default and provides the fastest response times.
24.3.4. State Transfer
State transfer is both a basic data grid and clustered cache function. Without state transfer, data would be lost as nodes are added to or removed from the cluster.
State transfer adjusts the cache’s internal state in response to a change in the cache membership. This change automatically occurs when a node joins or leaves the cluster, when two or more cluster partitions merge, or after any combination of these events. The initial state transfer for a newly started cache is the most expensive, as the new cache must receive the maximum amount of state, based on the cache’s mode as discussed below.
The timeout
attribute can be used to control how long the newly started cache waits to receive its state. If the timeout
attribute is a positive number, then the cache will wait to receive all of its initial state before being made available to service requests. If the state transfer does not complete in the specified time, the default being 240000
milliseconds, then the cache will throw an error and cancel the startup. If timeout
is set to 0
, then the cache is immediately available, and it will receive its initial state during background operations. Until the initial state transfer is complete, any requests for cache entries that the cache has not yet received will need to be fetched from a remote node.
The timeout
attribute can be set to 0
with the following command.
/subsystem=infinispan/cache-container=server/CACHE_TYPE=CACHE/component=state-transfer:write-attribute(name=timeout,value=0)
The state transfer behavior is determined by the cache’s mode.
- In replication mode a new node joining the cache receives the entire cache state from the existing nodes. When a node leaves the cluster there is no state transfer.
-
In distribution mode the new node receives only a part of the state from the existing nodes, and the existing nodes remove some of their state in order to keep
owners
copies of each key in the cache, as determined through consistent hashing. When a node leaves the cluster, a distribution cache needs to make additional copies of the keys that were stored on that node, so that owners of each key continue to exist. - In invalidation mode the initial state transfer is similar to replication mode, the only difference being that the nodes are not guaranteed to have the same state. When a node leaves the cluster there is no state transfer.
A state transfer transfers both in-memory and persistent state by default, but both can be disabled in the configuration. When state transfer is disabled, a ClusterLoader
must be configured, otherwise a node will become the owner or backup owner of a key without the data being loaded into its cache. In addition, if state transfer is disabled in distribution mode then a key will occasionally have less than owners
copies in the cache.
24.3.5. Configure Infinispan Thread Pools
The infinispan
subsystem contains the async-operations
, expiration
, listener
, persistence
, remote-command
, state-transfer
, and transport
thread pools. These pools can be configured for any Infinispan cache container.
The following table lists the attributes you can configure for each thread pool in the infinispan
subsystem and the default value for each.
Thread Pool Name | keepalive-time | max-threads | min-threads | queue-length |
---|---|---|---|---|
async-operations | 60000L | 25 | 25 | 1000 |
expiration | 60000L | 1 | N/A | N/A |
listener | 60000L | 1 | 1 | 100000 |
persistence | 60000L | 4 | 1 | 0 |
remote-command | 60000L | 200 | 1 | 0 |
state-transfer | 60000L | 60 | 1 | 0 |
transport | 60000L | 25 | 25 | 100000 |
Use the following syntax to configure an Infinispan thread pool using the management CLI.
/subsystem=infinispan/cache-container=CACHE_CONTAINER_NAME/thread-pool=THREAD_POOL_NAME:write-attribute(name=ATTRIBUTE_NAME, value=ATTRIBUTE_VALUE)
The following is an example of the management CLI command to set the max-threads
value to 10
in the persistence
thread pool for the server
cache container.
/subsystem=infinispan/cache-container=server/thread-pool=persistence:write-attribute(name="max-threads", value="10")
24.3.6. Infinispan Statistics
Runtime statistics about Infinispan caches and cache containers can be enabled for monitoring purposes. Statistics collection is not enabled by default for performance reasons.
Statistics collection can be enabled for each cache container, cache, or both. The statistics option for each cache overrides the option for the cache container. Enabling or disabling statistics collection for a cache container will cause all caches in that container to inherit the setting, unless they explicitly specify their own.
24.3.6.1. Enable Infinispan Statistics
Enabling Infinispan statistics may have a negative impact on the performance of the infinispan
subsystem. Statistics should be enabled only when required.
You can enable or disable the collection of Infinispan statistics using the management console or the management CLI. From the management console, navigate to the Infinispan subsystem from the Configuration tab, select the appropriate cache or cache container, and edit the Statistics Enabled attribute. Use the below commands to enable statistics using the management CLI.
Enable statistics collection for a cache container. A server reload will be required.
/subsystem=infinispan/cache-container=CACHE_CONTAINER:write-attribute(name=statistics-enabled,value=true)
Enable statistics collection for a cache. A server reload will be required.
/subsystem=infinispan/cache-container=CACHE_CONTAINER/CACHE_TYPE=CACHE:write-attribute(name=statistics-enabled,value=true)
You can use the following command to undefine the statistics-enabled
attribute of a cache so that it will inherit the settings of its cache container’s statistics-enabled
attribute.
/subsystem=infinispan/cache-container=CACHE_CONTAINER/CACHE_TYPE=CACHE:undefine-attribute(name=statistics-enabled)
24.3.7. Infinispan Partition Handling
An Infinispan cluster is built out of several nodes where data is stored. To prevent data loss if multiple nodes fail, Infinispan copies the same data over multiple nodes. This level of data redundancy is configured using the owners
attribute. As long as fewer than the configured number of nodes crash simultaneously, Infinispan will have a copy of the data available.
However, there are potential catastrophic situations that could occur when too many nodes disappear from the cluster:
- Split brain
This splits the cluster in two or more partitions, or sub-clusters, that operate independently. In these circumstances, multiple clients reading and writing from different partitions see different versions of the same cache entry, which for many applications is problematic.
NoteThere are ways to alleviate the possibility for the split brain to happen, such as redundant networks or IP bonding; however, these only reduce the window of time for the problem to occur.
- Multiple nodes crash in sequence
- If multiple nodes, specifically the number of owners, crash in rapid sequence and Infinispan does not have the time to properly rebalance its state between crashes, the result is partial data loss.
The goal is to avoid situations in which incorrect data is returned to the user as a result of either split brain or multiple nodes crashing in rapid sequence.
24.3.7.1. Split Brain
In a split brain situation, each network partition will install its own JGroups view, removing the nodes from the other partitions. We do not have a direct way to determine whether the cluster has been split into two or more partitions, since the partitions are unaware of each other. Instead, we assume the cluster has split when one or more nodes disappear from the JGroups cluster without sending an explicit leave message.
With partition handling disabled, each such partition would continue to function as an independent cluster. Each partition may only see a part of the data, and each partition could write conflicting updates in the cache.
With partition handling enabled, if we detect a split, each partition does not start a rebalance immediately, but first checks whether it should enter degraded mode instead:
- If at least one segment has lost all its owners, meaning that at least the number of owners specified has left since the last rebalance ended, the partition enters degraded mode.
- If the partition does not contain a simple majority of the nodes (floor(numNodes/2) + 1) in the latest stable topology, the partition also enters degraded mode.
- Otherwise, the partition keeps functioning normally and starts a rebalance.
The stable topology is updated every time a rebalance operation ends and the coordinator determines that another rebalance is not necessary. These rules ensure that at most, one partition stays in available mode, and the other partitions enter degraded mode.
When a partition is in degraded mode, it only allows access to the keys that are wholly owned:
- Requests (reads and writes) for entries that have all the copies on nodes within this partition are honored.
-
Requests for entries that are partially or totally owned by nodes that have disappeared are rejected with an
AvailabilityException
.
This guarantees that partitions cannot write different values for the same key (cache is consistent), and also that one partition can not read keys that have been updated in the other partitions (no stale data).
Two partitions could start up isolated, and as long as they do not merge, they can read and write inconsistent data. In the future, we may allow custom availability strategies (e.g. check that a certain node is part of the cluster, or check that an external machine is accessible) that could handle that situation as well.
24.3.7.2. Configuring Partition Handling
Currently the partition handling is disabled by default. Use the following management CLI command to enable partition handling:
/subsystem=infinispan/cache-container=web/distributed-cache=dist/component=partition-handling:write-attribute(name=enabled, value=true)
24.3.8. Configuring Remote Cache Containers
You must configure a remote cache for every server group in a managed domain. You can enable a collection of metrics for a given remote-cache-container
and associated runtime caches with the statistics-enabled
attribute.
24.3.8.1. Creating a Remote Cache Container
Each server group in a managed domain requires a unique remote cache. The caches can belong to the same data grid. Therefore, users must configure a remote cache for every server group by defining a socket binding for the server group and associating the socket binding with a remote cache container.
Procedure
Define a
socket-binding
, repeating the command as necessary for each remote Red Hat Data Grid instance in the cluster./socket-binding-group=standard-sockets/remote-destination-outbound-socket-binding=SOCKET_BINDING:add(host=HOSTNAME,port=PORT)
Define a
remote-cache-container
that references the newly created socket bindings.batch /subsystem=infinispan/remote-cache-container=CACHE_CONTAINER:add(default-remote-cluster=data-grid-cluster) /subsystem=infinispan/remote-cache-container=CACHE_CONTAINER/remote-cluster=data-grid-cluster:add(socket-bindings=[SOCKET_BINDING,SOCKET_BINDING_2,...]) run-batch
24.3.8.2. Enabling Statistics for a Remote Cache Container
The statistics-enabled
attribute enables a collection of metrics for a given remote-cache-container
and associated runtime caches.
-
For a
remote-cache-container
called "foo", enable statistics using the following operation:
/subsystem=infinispan/remote-cache-container=foo:write-attribute(name=statistics-enabled, value=true)
-
For a
remote-cache-container
"foo", the following metrics are visible at runtime:
/subsystem=infinispan/remote-cache-container=foo:read-attribute(name=connections) /subsystem=infinispan/remote-cache-container=foo:read-attribute(name=active-connections) /subsystem=infinispan/remote-cache-container=foo:read-attribute(name=idle-connections)
-
For descriptions of these metrics, execute a read-resource-description operation for the
remote-cache-container
:
/subsystem=infinispan/remote-cache-container=foo:read-resource-description
- The following metrics are specific to the remote cache used by the selected deployment:
/subsystem=infinispan/remote-cache-container=foo/remote-cache=bar.war:read-resource(include-runtime=true, recursive=true) { "average-read-time" : 1, "average-remove-time" : 0, "average-write-time" : 2, "hits" : 9, "misses" : 0, "near-cache-hits" : 7, "near-cache-invalidations" : 8, "near-cache-misses" : 9, "near-cache-size" : 1, "removes" : 0, "time-since-reset" : 82344, "writes" : 8 }
- For descriptions of these metrics, execute a read-resource-description operation for the remote cache:
/subsystem=infinispan/remote-cache-container=foo/remote-cache=bar.war:read-resource-description
- Some of these metrics are computed values (example, average-*), while others are tallied, such as hits and misses. The tallied metrics can be reset by the following operation:
/subsystem=infinispan/remote-cache-container=foo/remote-cache=bar.war:reset-statistics()
24.3.9. Externalize HTTP Sessions to Red Hat Data Grid
You need a Red Hat Data Grid subscription to use this functionality.
Red Hat Data Grid can be used as an external cache container for application-specific data in JBoss EAP, such as HTTP sessions. This allows scaling of the data layer independent of the application, and enables different JBoss EAP clusters, which may reside in various domains, to access data from the same Red Hat Data Grid cluster. Additionally, other applications can interface with the caches presented by Red Hat Data Grid.
The following example shows how to externalize HTTP sessions. It applies to both standalone instances of JBoss EAP as well as managed domains.
-
Create a
remote-cache-container
. For more information, see Configuring Remote Cache Containers. Configure the HotRod store. The HotRod store uses one dedicated remote cache for each cache created by the JBoss EAP server. Typically, one invalidation cache is used on the JBoss EAP server, as shown in the CLI script below.
NoteThe remote caches need to be configured manually on the Red Hat Data Grid servers. The recommended configuration for these caches is a transactional distribution mode cache with pessimistic locking. Cache names must correspond to the deployment file names, such as
test.war
.Once the remote cache container has been configured, a
hotrod
store can be configured to replace any existing store. The following CLI script demonstrates a typical use case for offloading sessions in conjunction with the invalidation cache.batch /subsystem=infinispan/cache-container=web/invalidation-cache=CACHE_NAME:add() /subsystem=infinispan/cache-container=web/invalidation-cache=CACHE_NAME/store=hotrod:add(remote-cache-container=CACHE_CONTAINER,fetch-state=false,purge=false,passivation=false,shared=true) /subsystem=infinispan/cache-container=web/invalidation-cache=CACHE_NAME/component=transaction:add(mode=BATCH) /subsystem=infinispan/cache-container=web/invalidation-cache=CACHE_NAME/component=locking:add(isolation=REPEATABLE_READ) /subsystem=infinispan/cache-container=web:write-attribute(name=default-cache,value=CACHE_NAME) run-batch
The script configures a new invalidation cache. Session data is then maintained in the cache for performance and written to the store for resilience.
A HotRod client can be injected directly into Jakarta EE applications using the
@Resource
annotation. In the example below, the@Resource
annotation looks up the configuration properties in the class path, in thehotrod-client.properties
file.@Resource(lookup = "java:jboss/infinispan/remote-container/web-sessions") private org.infinispan.client.hotrod.RemoteCacheContainer client;
Example:
hotrod-client.properties
Fileinfinispan.client.hotrod.transport_factory = org.infinispan.client.hotrod.impl.transport.tcp.TcpTransportFactory infinispan.client.hotrod.server_list = 127.0.0.1:11222 infinispan.client.hotrod.marshaller = org.infinispan.commons.marshall.jboss.GenericJBossMarshaller infinispan.client.hotrod.async_executor_factory = org.infinispan.client.hotrod.impl.async.DefaultAsyncExecutorFactory infinispan.client.hotrod.default_executor_factory.pool_size = 1 infinispan.client.hotrod.default_executor_factory.queue_size = 10000 infinispan.client.hotrod.hash_function_impl.1 = org.infinispan.client.hotrod.impl.consistenthash.ConsistentHashV1 infinispan.client.hotrod.tcp_no_delay = true infinispan.client.hotrod.ping_on_startup = true infinispan.client.hotrod.request_balancing_strategy = org.infinispan.client.hotrod.impl.transport.tcp.RoundRobinBalancingStrategy infinispan.client.hotrod.key_size_estimate = 64 infinispan.client.hotrod.value_size_estimate = 512 infinispan.client.hotrod.force_return_values = false ## below is connection pooling config maxActive=-1 maxTotal = -1 maxIdle = -1 whenExhaustedAction = 1 timeBetweenEvictionRunsMillis=120000 minEvictableIdleTimeMillis=300000 testWhileIdle = true minIdle = 1
Securing a Remote Cache Container
It is possible to secure the communication to the remote Red Hat Data Grid instance using SSL. This is accomplished by configuring the remote-cache-container
on the JBoss EAP instance and adjusting the hotrod connector on the Red Hat Data Grid instance to use an active security realm.
Create a
client-ssl-context
in JBoss EAP. For additional information on creating aclient-ssl-context
, including generating the other elytron components, see Using a client-ssl-context in How to Configure Server Security for JBoss EAP./subsystem=elytron/client-ssl-context=CLIENT_SSL_CONTEXT:add(key-manager=KEY_MANAGER,trust-manager=TRUST_MANAGER)
Configure the remote cache container to use the client SSL context.
/subsystem=infinispan/remote-cache-container=CACHE_CONTAINER/component=security:write-attribute(name=ssl-context,value=CLIENT_SSL_CONTEXT)
Secure the remote Red Hat Data Grid instance, repeating as necessary for each instance.
-
Copy the keystore used in the
client-ssl-context
to the remote Red Hat Data Grid instance. Configure the
ApplicationRealm
to use this keystore./core-service=management/security-realm=ApplicationRealm/server-identity=ssl:add(keystore-path="KEYSTORE_NAME",keystore-relative-to="jboss.server.config.dir",keystore-password="KEYSTORE_PASSWORD")
Adjust the hotrod connector to point to this security realm.
/subsystem=datagrid-infinispan-endpoint/hotrod-connector=hotrod-connector/encryption=ENCRYPTION:add(require-ssl-client-auth=false,security-realm="ApplicationRealm")
Reload the remote Red Hat Data Grid instance.
reload
-
Copy the keystore used in the
24.3.10. Externalize HTTP Sessions to Red Hat Data Grid Using a Remote Store
You need a Red Hat Data Grid subscription to use this functionality.
The instructions here represent an older way of externalizing sessions. JBoss EAP 7.2 introduced a custom optimized cache store based on the HotRod protocol that integrates with the elytron
subsystem. It is recommended to use the new hotrod
store, as described in Externalize HTTP Sessions to Red Hat Data Grid.
For each distributable application, an entirely new cache must be created. It can be created in an existing cache container, for example, web
.
To externalize HTTP sessions:
Define the location of the remote Red Hat Data Grid server by adding the networking information to the
socket-binding-group
.Example: Adding Remote Socket Bindings
/socket-binding-group=standard-sockets/remote-destination-outbound-socket-binding=remote-rhdg-server1:add(host=RHDGHostName1, port=11222) /socket-binding-group=standard-sockets/remote-destination-outbound-socket-binding=remote-rhdg-server2:add(host=RHDGHostName2, port=11222)
Resulting XML
<socket-binding-group name="standard-sockets" ... > ... <outbound-socket-binding name="remote-rhdg-server1"> <remote-destination host="RHDGHostName1" port="11222"/> </outbound-socket-binding> <outbound-socket-binding name="remote-rhdg-server2"> <remote-destination host="RHDGHostName2" port="11222"/> </outbound-socket-binding> </socket-binding-group>
NoteYou will need a remote socket binding configured for each Red Hat Data Grid server.
Ensure the remote cache containers are defined in JBoss EAP’s
infinispan
subsystem; in the example below thecache
attribute in theremote-store
element defines the cache name on the remote Red Hat Data Grid server.If you are running in a managed domain, precede these commands with
/profile=PROFILE_NAME
.Example: Adding a Remote Cache Container
/subsystem=infinispan/cache-container=web/invalidation-cache=rhdg:add(mode=SYNC) /subsystem=infinispan/cache-container=web/invalidation-cache=rhdg/component=locking:write-attribute(name=isolation,value=REPEATABLE_READ) /subsystem=infinispan/cache-container=web/invalidation-cache=rhdg/component=transaction:write-attribute(name=mode,value=BATCH) /subsystem=infinispan/cache-container=web/invalidation-cache=rhdg/store=remote:add(remote-servers=["remote-rhdg-server1","remote-rhdg-server2"], cache=default, socket-timeout=60000, passivation=false, purge=false, shared=true)
Resulting XML
<subsystem xmlns="urn:jboss:domain:infinispan:7.0"> ... <cache-container name="web" default-cache="dist" module="org.wildfly.clustering.web.infinispan" statistics-enabled="true"> <transport lock-timeout="60000"/> <invalidation-cache name="rhdg" mode="SYNC"> <locking isolation="REPEATABLE_READ"/> <transaction mode="BATCH"/> <remote-store cache="default" socket-timeout="60000" remote-servers="remote-rhdg-server1 remote-rhdg-server2" passivation="false" purge="false" shared="true"/> </invalidation-cache> ... </cache-container> </subsystem>
Add cache information into the application
jboss-web.xml
file. In the following example,web
is the name of the cache container andrhdg
is the name of the appropriate cache located in this container.Example:
jboss-web.xml
file<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> <jboss-web xmlns="http://www.jboss.com/xml/ns/javaee" xmlns:xsi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema-instance" xsi:schemaLocation="http://www.jboss.com/xml/ns/javaee http://www.jboss.org/j2ee/schema/jboss-web_10_0.xsd" version="10.0"> <replication-config> <replication-granularity>SESSION</replication-granularity> <cache-name>web.rhdg</cache-name> </replication-config> </jboss-web>
24.4. Configuring JBoss EAP as a Front-end Load Balancer
You can configure JBoss EAP and the undertow
subsystem to act as a front-end load balancer to proxy requests to back-end JBoss EAP servers. Since Undertow makes use of asynchronous IO, the IO thread that is responsible for the connection is the only thread that is involved in the request. That same thread is also used for the connection made to the back-end server.
You can use the following protocols:
-
HTTP over plain text (
http
), supporting HTTP/1 and HTTP/2 (h2c
) -
HTTP over secured connection (
https
), supporting HTTP/1 and HTTP/2 (h2
) -
AJP (
ajp
)
You can either define a static load balancer and specify the back-end hosts in your configuration, or use the mod_cluster front end to dynamically update the hosts.
See Configuring HTTP/2 for instructions to configure Undertow to use HTTP/2.
24.4.1. Configure Undertow as a Load Balancer Using mod_cluster
You can use the built-in mod_cluster front-end load balancer to load balance other JBoss EAP instances.
This procedure assumes that you are running in a managed domain and already have the following configured:
A JBoss EAP server that will act as the load balancer.
This server uses the
load-balancer
profile, which is bound to theload-balancer-sockets
socket binding group.NoteThe
load-balancer
profile is already preconfigured with the socket binding, mod-cluster Undertow filter, and reference in the default host to the filter in order to use this server as a front-end load balancer.
Two JBoss EAP servers, which will act as the back-end servers.
-
These servers are running in a cluster and use the
ha
profile, which is bound to theha-sockets
socket binding group.
-
These servers are running in a cluster and use the
- The distributable application to be load balanced deployed to the back-end servers.
Configure the mod_cluster Front-end Load Balancer
The below steps load balance servers in a managed domain, but they can be adjusted to apply to a set of standalone servers. Be sure to update the management CLI command values to suit your environment.
Set the mod_cluster advertise security key.
Adding the advertise security key allows the load balancer and servers to authenticate during discovery.
Use the following management CLI command to set the mod_cluster advertise security key.
/profile=ha/subsystem=modcluster/proxy=default:write-attribute(name=advertise-security-key, value=mypassword)
Update the mod_cluster load balancer’s security key.
Use the following management CLI command to set the security key for the mod_cluster filter.
/profile=load-balancer/subsystem=undertow/configuration=filter/mod-cluster=load-balancer:write-attribute(name=security-key,value=mypassword)
It is recommended that the management and advertise socket bindings used by mod_cluster only be exposed to the internal network, not a public IP address.
The load balancer JBoss EAP server can now load balance the two back-end JBoss EAP servers.
Multiple mod_cluster Configurations
The mod_cluster
subsystem supports multiple named proxy configurations which allows to register non-default undertow
servers with the reverse proxies. Moreover, this allows single application server node to register with different groups of proxy servers.
The following example adds an ajp-listener
, a server, and a host to the undertow
server. It also adds a new mod_cluster
configuration that registers the host using the advertise mechanism.
/socket-binding-group=standard-sockets/socket-binding=ajp-other:add(port=8010) /subsystem=undertow/server=other-server:add /subsystem=undertow/server=other-server/ajp-listener=ajp-other:add(socket-binding=ajp-other) /subsystem=undertow/server=other-server/host=other-host:add(default-web-module=root-other.war) /subsystem=undertow/server=other-server/host=other-host /location=other:add(handler=welcome-content) /subsystem=undertow/server=other-server/host=other-host:write-attribute(name=alias,value=[localhost])) /socket-binding-group=standard-sockets/socket-binding=modcluster-other:add(multicast-address=224.0.1.106,multicast-port=23364) /subsystem=modcluster/proxy=other:add(advertise-socket=modcluster-other,balancer=other-balancer,connector=ajp-other) reload
24.4.2. Enabling Ranked Session Affinity in Your Load Balancer
You must enable ranked session affinity in your load balancer to have session affinity with multiple, ordered routes in the distributable-web
subsystem. For more information about the distributable-web
subsystem and the different affinity options, see The distributable-web subsystem for Distributable Web Session Configurations in the Development Guide for JBoss EAP.
The default delimiter that separates the node routes is .
. If you want a different value, you can configure the delimiter
attribute of the affinity
resource.
Procedure
Enable ranked session affinity for a load balancer:
/subsystem=undertow/configuration=filter/mod-cluster=load-balancer/affinity=ranked:add
Optional: Configure the
delimiter
attribute of theaffinity
resource:/subsystem=undertow/configuration=filter/mod-cluster=load-balancer/affinity=ranked:write-attribute(name=delimiter,value=':')
24.4.3. Configure Undertow as a Static Load Balancer
To configure a static load balancer with Undertow, you need to configure a proxy handler in the undertow
subsystem. To configure a proxy handler in Undertow, you need to do the following on your JBoss EAP instance that will serve as your static load balancer:
- Add a reverse proxy handler
- Define the outbound socket bindings for each remote host
- Add each remote host to the reverse proxy handler
- Add the reverse proxy location
The following example shows how to configure a JBoss EAP instance to be a static load balancer. The JBoss EAP instance is located at lb.example.com
and will load balance between two additional servers: server1.example.com
and server2.example.com
. The load balancer will reverse-proxy to the location /app
and will use the AJP protocol.
To add a reverse proxy handler:
/subsystem=undertow/configuration=handler/reverse-proxy=my-handler:add
To define the outbound socket bindings for each remote host:
/socket-binding-group=standard-sockets/remote-destination-outbound-socket-binding=remote-host1/:add(host=server1.example.com, port=8009) /socket-binding-group=standard-sockets/remote-destination-outbound-socket-binding=remote-host2/:add(host=server2.example.com, port=8009)
To add each remote host to the reverse proxy handler:
/subsystem=undertow/configuration=handler/reverse-proxy=my-handler/host=host1:add(outbound-socket-binding=remote-host1, scheme=ajp, instance-id=myroute1, path=/test) /subsystem=undertow/configuration=handler/reverse-proxy=my-handler/host=host2:add(outbound-socket-binding=remote-host2, scheme=ajp, instance-id=myroute2, path=/test)
To add the reverse proxy location:
/subsystem=undertow/server=default-server/host=default-host/location=\/test:add(handler=my-handler)
When accessing lb.example.com:8080/app
, you will now see the content proxied from server1.example.com
and server2.example.com
.
24.5. Using an External Web Server as a Proxy Server
JBoss EAP can accept requests from an external web server using the supported HTTP, HTTPS, or AJP protocol, depending on the external web server configuration.
See Overview of HTTP Connectors for details on the supported HTTP connectors for each web server. Once you have decided which web server and HTTP connector to use, see the appropriate section for information on configuring your connector:
- See the mod_cluster, mod_jk, or mod_proxy section for Apache HTTP Server.
- See the ISAPI connector section for Microsoft IIS.
- See the NSAPI connector section for Oracle iPlanet Web Server.
For the most current information about supported configurations for HTTP connectors, see JBoss EAP supported configurations.
You also will need to make sure that JBoss EAP is configured to accept requests from external web servers.
24.5.1. Overview of HTTP Connectors
JBoss EAP has the ability to use load-balancing and clustering mechanisms built into external web servers, such as Apache HTTP Server, Microsoft IIS, and Oracle iPlanet as well as through Undertow. JBoss EAP communicates with the web servers using a connector. These connectors are configured within the undertow
subsystem of JBoss EAP.
The web servers include software modules which control the way that HTTP requests are routed to JBoss EAP nodes. Each of these modules varies in how it works and how it is configured. The modules are configured to balance work loads across multiple JBoss EAP nodes, to move work loads to alternate servers in case of a failure event, or both.
JBoss EAP supports several different connectors. The one you choose depends on the web server in use and the functionality you need. See the tables below for comparisons of the supported configurations and features of the various HTTP connectors that are compatible with JBoss EAP.
See Configure Undertow as a Load Balancer Using mod_cluster for using JBoss EAP 7 as a multi-platform load balancer.
For the most current information about supported configurations for HTTP connectors, see JBoss EAP supported configurations.
Connector | Web Server | Supported Operating Systems | Supported Protocols |
---|---|---|---|
Red Hat JBoss Core Services Apache HTTP Server, Red Hat JBoss Web Server Apache HTTP Server, JBoss EAP (Undertow) | Red Hat Enterprise Linux, Microsoft Windows Server, Oracle Solaris | HTTP, HTTPS, AJP, WebSocket | |
Red Hat JBoss Core Services Apache HTTP Server, Red Hat JBoss Web Server Apache HTTP Server | Red Hat Enterprise Linux, Microsoft Windows Server, Oracle Solaris | AJP | |
Red Hat JBoss Core Services Apache HTTP Server, Red Hat JBoss Web Server Apache HTTP Server | Red Hat Enterprise Linux, Microsoft Windows Server, Oracle Solaris | HTTP, HTTPS, AJP | |
Microsoft IIS | Microsoft Windows Server | AJP | |
Oracle iPlanet Web Server | Oracle Solaris | AJP |
Connector | Supports Sticky Sessions | Adapts to Deployment Status |
---|---|---|
Yes | Yes. Detects deployment and undeployment of applications and dynamically decides whether to direct client requests to a server based on whether the application is deployed on that server. | |
Yes | No. Directs client requests to the container as long as the container is available, regardless of application status. | |
Yes | No. Directs client requests to the container as long as the container is available, regardless of application status. | |
Yes | No. Directs client requests to the container as long as the container is available, regardless of application status. | |
Yes | No. Directs client requests to the container as long as the container is available, regardless of application status. |
24.5.2. Apache HTTP Server
A standalone Apache HTTP Server bundle is now available as a separate download with Red Hat JBoss Core Services. This simplifies installation and configuration, and allows for a more consistent update experience.
24.5.2.1. Installing Apache HTTP Server
For information on installing Apache HTTP Server, see the JBoss Core Services Apache HTTP Server Installation Guide.
24.5.3. Accepting Requests from External Web Servers
JBoss EAP does not require any special configuration to begin accepting requests from a proxy server as long as the correct protocol handler, for example AJP, HTTP, or HTTPS, is configured.
If the proxy server uses mod_jk, mod_proxy, ISAPI, or NSAPI, it sends requests to JBoss EAP and JBoss EAP simply provides a response. With mod_cluster, you must also configure your network to allow JBoss EAP to send information, such as its current load, application lifecycle events, and health status, to the proxy server to help it determine where to route requests. For more information about configuring a mod_cluster proxy server, see The mod_cluster HTTP Connector.
Update JBoss EAP Configuration
In the following procedure, substitute the protocols and ports in the examples with the ones you need to configure.
Configure the
instance-id
attribute of Undertow.The external web server identifies the JBoss EAP instance in its connector configuration using the
instance-id
. Use the following management CLI command to set theinstance-id
attribute in Undertow./subsystem=undertow:write-attribute(name=instance-id,value=node1)
In the above example, the external web server identifies the current JBoss EAP instance as
node1
.Add the necessary listeners to Undertow.
In order for an external web server to be able to connect to JBoss EAP, Undertow needs a listener. Each protocol needs its own listener, which is tied to a socket binding.
NoteDepending on your desired protocol and port configuration, this step may not be necessary. An HTTP listener is configured in all default JBoss EAP configurations, and an AJP listener is configured if you are using the ha or full-ha profile.
You can check whether the required listeners are already configured by reading the default server configuration:
/subsystem=undertow/server=default-server:read-resource
To add a listener to Undertow, it must have a socket binding. The socket binding is added to the socket binding group used by your server or server group. The following management CLI command adds an
ajp
socket binding, bound to port8009
, to thestandard-sockets
socket binding group/socket-binding-group=standard-sockets/socket-binding=ajp:add(port=8009)
The following management CLI command adds an
ajp
listener to Undertow, using theajp
socket binding./subsystem=undertow/server=default-server/ajp-listener=ajp:add(socket-binding=ajp)
24.6. The mod_cluster HTTP Connector
The mod_cluster connector is an Apache HTTP Server-based load balancer. It uses a communication channel to forward requests from the Apache HTTP Server to one of a set of application server nodes.
The mod_cluster connector has several advantages over other connectors.
- The mod_cluster Management Protocol (MCMP) is an additional connection between the JBoss EAP servers and the Apache HTTP Server with the mod_cluster module enabled. It is used by the JBoss EAP servers to transmit server-side load-balance factors and lifecycle events back to the Apache HTTP Server via a custom set of HTTP methods.
- Dynamic configuration of Apache HTTP Server with mod_cluster allows JBoss EAP servers to join the load-balancing arrangement without manual configuration.
- JBoss EAP performs the load-balancing factor calculations, rather than relying on the Apache HTTP Server with mod_cluster. This makes load-balancing metrics more accurate than other connectors.
- The mod_cluster connector gives fine-grained application lifecycle control. Each JBoss EAP server forwards web application context lifecycle events to the Apache HTTP Server, informing it to start or stop routing requests for a given context. This prevents end users from seeing HTTP errors due to unavailable resources.
- AJP, HTTP or HTTPS transports can be used.
For more details on the specific configuration options of the modcluster
subsystem, see the ModCluster Subsystem Attributes.
24.6.1. Configure mod_cluster in Apache HTTP Server
The mod_cluster modules are already included when installing JBoss Core Services Apache HTTP Server or using JBoss Web Server and are loaded by default.
Apache HTTP Server is no longer distributed with JBoss Web Server as of version 3.1.0.
See the steps below to configure the mod_cluster module to suit your environment.
Red Hat customers can also use the Load Balancer Configuration Tool on the Red Hat Customer Portal to quickly generate optimal configuration templates for mod_cluster and other connectors. Note that you must be logged in to access this tool.
Configure mod_cluster
Apache HTTP Server already contains a mod_cluster configuration file, mod_cluster.conf
, that loads the mod_cluster modules and provides basic configuration. The IP address, port, and other settings in this file, shown below, can be configured to suit your needs.
# mod_proxy_balancer should be disabled when mod_cluster is used LoadModule proxy_cluster_module modules/mod_proxy_cluster.so LoadModule cluster_slotmem_module modules/mod_cluster_slotmem.so LoadModule manager_module modules/mod_manager.so LoadModule advertise_module modules/mod_advertise.so MemManagerFile cache/mod_cluster <IfModule manager_module> Listen 6666 <VirtualHost *:6666> <Directory /> Require ip 127.0.0.1 </Directory> ServerAdvertise on EnableMCPMReceive <Location /mod_cluster_manager> SetHandler mod_cluster-manager Require ip 127.0.0.1 </Location> </VirtualHost> </IfModule>
The Apache HTTP Server server is configured as a load balancer and can work with the modcluster
subsystem running on JBoss EAP. You must configure a mod_cluster worker node to make JBoss EAP aware of mod_cluster.
If you want to disable advertising for mod_cluster and configure a static proxy list instead, see Disable Advertisement for mod_cluster. For more information on the available mod_cluster configuration options in Apache HTTP Server, see the Apache HTTP Server mod_cluster Directives
For more details on configuring mod_cluster, see the Configure Load Balancing Using Apache HTTP Server and mod_cluster section of the JBoss Web Server HTTP Connectors and Load Balancing Guide.
24.6.2. Disable Advertising for mod_cluster
By default, the modcluster
subsystem’s balancer uses multicast UDP to advertise its availability to the background workers. You can disable advertising and to use a proxy list instead using the following procedure.
The management CLI commands in the following procedure assume that you are using the full-ha
profile in a managed domain. If you are using a profile other than full-ha
, use the appropriate profile name in the command. If you are running a standalone server, remove the /profile=full-ha
completely.
Modify the Apache HTTP Server configuration.
Edit the
httpd.conf
Apache HTTP Server configuration file. Make the following updates to the virtual host that listens for MCPM requests, using theEnableMCPMReceive
directive.Add the directive to disable server advertisement.
Set the
ServerAdvertise
directive toOff
to disable server advertisement.ServerAdvertise Off
Disable the advertise frequency.
If your configuration specifies the
AdvertiseFrequency
parameter, comment it out using a#
character.# AdvertiseFrequency 5
Enable the ability to receive MCPM messages.
Ensure that the
EnableMCPMReceive
directive exists, to allow the web server to receive MCPM messages from the worker nodes.EnableMCPMReceive
Disable advertising in the JBoss EAP
modcluster
subsystem.Use the following management CLI command to disable advertising.
/profile=full-ha/subsystem=modcluster/proxy=default:write-attribute(name=advertise,value=false)
ImportantBe sure to continue to the next step to provide the list of proxies. Advertising will not be disabled if the list of proxies is empty.
Provide a list of proxies in the JBoss EAP
modcluster
subsystem.It is necessary to provide a list of proxies because the
modcluster
subsystem will not be able to automatically discover proxies if advertising is disabled.First, define the outbound socket bindings in the appropriate socket binding group.
/socket-binding-group=full-ha-sockets/remote-destination-outbound-socket-binding=proxy1:add(host=10.33.144.3,port=6666) /socket-binding-group=full-ha-sockets/remote-destination-outbound-socket-binding=proxy2:add(host=10.33.144.1,port=6666)
Next, add the proxies to the mod_cluster configuration.
/profile=full-ha/subsystem=modcluster/proxy=default:list-add(name=proxies,value=proxy1) /profile=full-ha/subsystem=modcluster/proxy=default:list-add(name=proxies,value=proxy2)
The Apache HTTP Server balancer no longer advertises its presence to worker nodes and UDP multicast is no longer used.
24.6.3. Configure a mod_cluster Worker Node
A mod_cluster worker node consists of a JBoss EAP server. This server can be a standalone server or part of a server group in a managed domain. A separate process runs within JBoss EAP, which manages all of the worker nodes of the cluster. This is called the master.
Worker nodes in a managed domain share an identical configuration across a server group. Worker nodes running as standalone servers are configured individually. The configuration steps are otherwise identical.
- A standalone server must be started with the standalone-ha or standalone-full-ha profile.
- A server group in a managed domain must use the ha or full-ha profile, and the ha-sockets or full-ha-sockets socket binding group. JBoss EAP ships with a cluster-enabled server group called other-server-group which meets these requirements.
Configure a Worker Node
The management CLI commands in this procedure assume that you are using a managed domain with the full-ha
profile. If you are running a standalone server, remove the /profile=full-ha
portion of the commands.
Configure the network interfaces.
By default, the network interfaces all default to
127.0.0.1
. Every physical host that hosts either a standalone server or one or more servers in a server group needs its interfaces to be configured to use its public IP address, which the other servers can see.Use the following management CLI commands to modify the external IP addresses for the
management
,public
, andunsecure
interfaces as appropriate for your environment. Be sure to replaceEXTERNAL_IP_ADDRESS
in the command with the actual external IP address of the host./interface=management:write-attribute(name=inet-address,value="${jboss.bind.address.management:EXTERNAL_IP_ADDRESS}") /interface=public:write-attribute(name=inet-address,value="${jboss.bind.address.public:EXTERNAL_IP_ADDRESS}") /interface=unsecure:write-attribute(name=inet-address,value="${jboss.bind.address.unsecure:EXTERNAL_IP_ADDRESS}")
Reload the server.
reload
Configure host names.
Set a unique host name for each host that participates in a managed domain. This name must be unique across slaves and will be used for the slave to identify to the cluster, so make a note of the name you use.
Start the JBoss EAP slave host, using the appropriate
host.xml
configuration file.$ EAP_HOME/bin/domain.sh --host-config=host-slave.xml
Use the following management CLI command to set a unique host name. This example uses
slave1
as the new host name./host=EXISTING_HOST_NAME:write-attribute(name=name,value=slave1)
For more information on configuring a host name, see Configure the Name of a Host.
Configure each host to connect to the domain controller.
NoteThis step does not apply for a standalone server.
For newly configured hosts that need to join a managed domain, you must remove the local element and add the remote element host attribute that points to the domain controller.
Start the JBoss EAP slave host, using the appropriate
host.xml
configuration file.$ EAP_HOME/bin/domain.sh --host-config=host-slave.xml
Use the following management CLI command to configure the domain controller settings.
/host=SLAVE_HOST_NAME:write-remote-domain-controller(host=DOMAIN_CONTROLLER_IP_ADDRESS,port=${jboss.domain.master.port:9990},security-realm="ManagementRealm")
This modifies the XML in the host-slave.xml file as follows:
<domain-controller> <remote host="DOMAIN_CONTROLLER_IP_ADDRESS" port="${jboss.domain.master.port:9990}" security-realm="ManagementRealm"/> </domain-controller>
For more information, see Host Controller Configuration.
Configure authentication for each slave host.
Each slave server needs a username and password created in the domain controller’s or standalone master’s ManagementRealm. On the domain controller or standalone master, run the
EAP_HOME/bin/add-user.sh
command for each host. Add a management user for each host with the username that matches the host name of the slave.Be sure to answer
yes
to the last question, that asks "Is this new user going to be used for one AS process to connect to another AS process?", so that you are provided with a secret value.Example:
add-user.sh
Script Output (trimmed)$ EAP_HOME/bin/add-user.sh What type of user do you wish to add? a) Management User (mgmt-users.properties) b) Application User (application-users.properties) (a): a Username : slave1 Password : changeme Re-enter Password : changeme What groups do you want this user to belong to? (Please enter a comma separated list, or leave blank for none)[ ]: About to add user 'slave1' for realm 'ManagementRealm' Is this correct yes/no? yes Is this new user going to be used for one AS process to connect to another AS process? e.g. for a slave host controller connecting to the master or for a Remoting connection for server to server EJB calls. yes/no? yes To represent the user add the following to the server-identities definition <secret value="SECRET_VALUE" />
Copy the Base64-encoded secret value provided from this output,
SECRET_VALUE
, which may be used in the next step.For more information, see the Adding a User to the Master Domain Controller section of the JBoss EAP How To Configure Server Security guide.
Modify the slave host’s security realm to use the new authentication.
You can specify the password by setting the secret value in the server configuration, getting the password from a credential store or vault, or passing the password as a system property.
Specify the Base64-encoded password value in the server configuration file using the Management CLI.
Use the following management CLI command to specify the secret value. Be sure to replace the
SECRET_VALUE
with the secret value returned from the add-user output from the previous step./host=SLAVE_HOST_NAME/core-service=management/security-realm=ManagementRealm/server-identity=secret:add(value="SECRET_VALUE")
You will need to reload the server. The
--host
argument is not applicable for a standalone server.reload --host=HOST_NAME
For more information, see the Configuring the Slave Controllers to Use the Credential section of the JBoss EAP How To Configure Server Security guide.
Configure the host to get the password from a credential store.
If you have stored the secret value in a credential store, you can use the following command to set the server secret to be a value from a credential store:
/host=SLAVE_HOST_NAME/core-service=management/security-realm=ManagementRealm/server-identity=secret:add(credential-reference={store=STORE_NAME,alias=ALIAS}
You will need to reload the server. The
--host
argument is not applicable for a standalone server.reload --host=HOST_NAME
For more information, see the Credential Store section of the JBoss EAP How To Configure Server Security guide.
Configure the host to get the password from a vault.
Use the
EAP_HOME/bin/vault.sh
script to generate a masked password. It will generate a string in the formatVAULT::secret::password::VAULT_SECRET_VALUE
, for example:VAULT::secret::password::ODVmYmJjNGMtZDU2ZC00YmNlLWE4ODMtZjQ1NWNmNDU4ZDc1TElORV9CUkVBS3ZhdWx0.
NoteWhen creating a password in the vault, it must be specified in plain text, not Base64-encoded.
Use the following management CLI command to specify the secret value. Be sure to replace the
VAULT_SECRET_VALUE
with the masked password generated in the previous step./host=master/core-service=management/security-realm=ManagementRealm/server-identity=secret:add(value="${VAULT::secret::password::VAULT_SECRET_VALUE}")
You will need to reload the server. The
--host
argument is not applicable for a standalone server.reload --host=HOST_NAME
For more information, see the Password Vault section of the JBoss EAP How To Configure Server Security guide.
Specify the password as a system property.
The following examples use
server.identity.password
as the system property name for the password.Specify the system property for the password in the server configuration file.
Use the following managemente CLI command to configure the secret identity to use the system property.
/host=SLAVE_HOST_NAME/core-service=management/security-realm=ManagementRealm/server-identity=secret:add(value="${server.identity.password}")
You will need to reload the server. The
--host
argument is not applicable for a standalone server.reload --host=master
Set the password for the system property when starting the server.
You can set the
server.identity.password
system property by passing it as a command line argument or in a properties file.Pass in as a plain text command line argument.
Start the server and pass in the
server.identity.password
property.$ EAP_HOME/bin/domain.sh --host-config=host-slave.xml -Dserver.identity.password=changeme
WarningThe password must be entered in plain text and will be visible to anyone who issues a
ps -ef
command.Set the property in a properties file.
Create a properties file and add the key/value pair to a properties file, for example:
server.identity.password=changeme
WarningThe password is in plain text and will be visible to anyone who has access to this properties file.
Start the server with the command line arguments.
$ EAP_HOME/bin/domain.sh --host-config=host-slave.xml --properties=PATH_TO_PROPERTIES_FILE
Restart the server.
The slave will now authenticate to the master using its host name as the username and the encrypted string as its password.
Your standalone server, or servers within a server group of a managed domain, are now configured as mod_cluster worker nodes. If you deploy a clustered application, its sessions are replicated to all cluster nodes for failover, and it can accept requests from an external web server or load balancer. Each node of the cluster discovers the other nodes using automatic discovery, by default.
24.6.4. Configure the mod_cluster fail_on_status Parameter
The fail_on_status
parameter lists those HTTP status codes which, when returned by a worker node in a cluster, will mark that node as having failed. The load balancer will then send future requests to another worker node in the cluster. The failed worker node will remain in a NOTOK
state until it sends the load balancer a STATUS
message.
The fail_on_status
parameter must be configured in the httpd
configuration file of your load balancer. Multiple HTTP status codes for fail_on_status
can be specified as a comma-separated list. The following example specifies the HTTP status codes 203
and 204
for fail_on_status
.
Example: Configuring fail_on_status
ProxyPass / balancer://MyBalancer stickysession=JSESSIONID|jsessionid nofailover=on failonstatus=203,204 ProxyPassReverse / balancer://MyBalancer ProxyPreserveHost on
24.6.5. Migrate Traffic Between Clusters
After creating a new cluster using JBoss EAP, you can migrate traffic from the previous cluster to the new one as part of an upgrade process. In this task, you will see the strategy that can be used to migrate this traffic with minimal outage or downtime.
- A new cluster setup. We will call this cluster ClusterNEW.
- An old cluster setup that is being made redundant. We will call this cluster ClusterOLD.
Upgrade Process for Clusters - Load-Balancing Groups
- Set up your new cluster using the steps described in the prerequisites.
In both ClusterNEW and ClusterOLD, ensure that the configuration option
sticky-session
is set to the default setting oftrue
. Enabling this option means that all new requests made to a cluster node in any of the clusters will continue to go to the respective cluster node./profile=full-ha/subsystem=modcluster/proxy=default:write-attribute(name=sticky-session,value=true)
Set the
load-balancing-group
toClusterOLD
, assuming that all the cluster nodes in ClusterOLD are members of the ClusterOLD load-balancing group./profile=full-ha/subsystem=modcluster/proxy=default:write-attribute(name=load-balancing-group,value=ClusterOLD)
Add the nodes in ClusterNEW to the mod_cluster configuration individually using the process described in the Configure a mod_cluster Worker Node section. Additionally, use the aforementioned procedure and set their load-balancing group to ClusterNEW.
At this point, you can see an output similar to the undermentioned shortened example on the mod_cluster-manager console:
mod_cluster/<version> LBGroup ClusterOLD: [Enable Nodes] [Disable Nodes] [Stop Nodes] Node node-1-jvmroute (ajp://node1.oldcluster.example:8009): [Enable Contexts] [Disable Contexts] [Stop Contexts] Balancer: qacluster, LBGroup: ClusterOLD, Flushpackets: Off, ..., Load: 100 Virtual Host 1: Contexts: /my-deployed-application-context, Status: ENABLED Request: 0 [Disable] [Stop] Node node-2-jvmroute (ajp://node2.oldcluster.example:8009): [Enable Contexts] [Disable Contexts] [Stop Contexts] Balancer: qacluster, LBGroup: ClusterOLD, Flushpackets: Off, ..., Load: 100 Virtual Host 1: Contexts: /my-deployed-application-context, Status: ENABLED Request: 0 [Disable] [Stop] LBGroup ClusterNEW: [Enable Nodes] [Disable Nodes] [Stop Nodes] Node node-3-jvmroute (ajp://node3.newcluster.example:8009): [Enable Contexts] [Disable Contexts] [Stop Contexts] Balancer: qacluster, LBGroup: ClusterNEW, Flushpackets: Off, ..., Load: 100 Virtual Host 1: Contexts: /my-deployed-application-context, Status: ENABLED Request: 0 [Disable] [Stop] Node node-4-jvmroute (ajp://node4.newcluster.example:8009): [Enable Contexts] [Disable Contexts] [Stop Contexts] Balancer: qacluster, LBGroup: ClusterNEW, Flushpackets: Off, ..., Load: 100 Virtual Host 1: Contexts: /my-deployed-application-context, Status: ENABLED Request: 0 [Disable] [Stop]
Any old active sessions are within the ClusterOLD group, and any new sessions are created either within the ClusterOLD or CLusterNEW group. Next, we want to disable the whole ClusterOLD group, so that its cluster nodes may be removed without causing any error to currently active client’s sessions.
Click on the Disable Nodes link for LBGroup ClusterOLD on the mod_cluster-manager web console.
From this point on, only requests belonging to already established sessions will be routed to members of the ClusterOLD load-balancing group. Any new client’s sessions will be created in the ClusterNEW group only. As soon as there are no active sessions within ClusterOLD group, we can safely remove its members.
NoteUsing Stop Nodes would command the load balancer to stop routing any requests to this domain immediately. This will force a failover to another load-balancing group which will cause session data loss to clients, provided there is no session replication between ClusterNEW and ClusterOLD.
Default Load-Balancing Group
In case the current ClusterOLD setup does not contain any load-balancing group settings, found from LBGroup: on the mod_cluster-manager console, one can still take advantage of disabling the ClusterOLD nodes. In this case, click on Disable Contexts for each of the ClusterOLD nodes. Contexts of these nodes will be disabled, and once there are no active sessions present they will be ready for removal. New clients' sessions will be created only on nodes with enabled contexts, presumably ClusterNEW members in this example.
Using the Management CLI
In addition to using the mod_cluster-manager web console, you can use the JBoss EAP management CLI to stop or disable a particular context.
Stop a Context
/host=master/server=server-one/subsystem=modcluster:stop-context(context=/my-deployed-application-context, virtualhost=default-host, waittime=0)
Stopping a context with waittime
set to 0
, meaning no timeout, instructs the balancer to stop routing any request to it immediately, which forces failover to another available context.
If you set a timeout value using the waittime
argument, no new sessions are created on this context, but existing sessions will continue to be directed to this node until they complete or the specified timeout has elapsed. The waittime
argument defaults to 10
seconds.
Disable a Context
/host=master/server=server-one/subsystem=modcluster:disable-context(context=/my-deployed-application-context, virtualhost=default-host)
Disabling a context tells the balancer that no new sessions should be created on this context.
24.7. Apache mod_jk HTTP Connector
Apache mod_jk is an HTTP connector that is provided for customers who need it for compatibility purposes.
JBoss EAP can accept workloads from an Apache HTTP proxy server. The proxy server accepts client requests from the web front end, and passes the work to participating JBoss EAP servers. If sticky sessions are enabled, the same client request always goes to the same JBoss EAP server, unless the server is unavailable.
mod_jk communicates over the AJP 1.3 protocol. Other protocols can be used with mod_cluster or mod_proxy. See the Overview of HTTP Connectors for more information.
mod_cluster is a more advanced load balancer than mod_jk and is the recommended HTTP connector. mod_cluster provides all of the functionality of mod_jk, plus additional features. Unlike the JBoss EAP mod_cluster HTTP connector, an Apache mod_jk HTTP connector does not know the status of deployments on servers or server groups, and cannot adapt where it sends its work accordingly.
See the Apache mod_jk documentation for more information.
24.7.1. Configure mod_jk in Apache HTTP Server
The mod_jk module, mod_jk.so
, is already included when installing JBoss Core Services Apache HTTP Server or using JBoss Web Server; however, it is not loaded by default.
Apache HTTP Server is no longer distributed with JBoss Web Server as of version 3.1.0.
Use the following steps to load and configure mod_jk in Apache HTTP Server. Note that these steps assume that you have already navigated to the httpd/
directory for Apache HTTP Server, which will vary depending on your platform. For more information, see the installation instructions for your platform in the JBoss Core Services Apache HTTP Server Installation Guide.
Red Hat customers can also use the Load Balancer Configuration Tool on the Red Hat Customer Portal to quickly generate optimal configuration templates for mod_jk and other connectors. Note that you must be logged in to access this tool.
Configure the mod_jk module.
NoteA sample mod_jk configuration file is provided at
conf.d/mod_jk.conf.sample
. You can use this sample instead of creating your own file by removing the.sample
extension and modifying its contents as needed.Create a new file called
conf.d/mod_jk.conf
. Add the following configuration to the file, making sure to modify the contents to suite your needs.# Load mod_jk module # Specify the filename of the mod_jk lib LoadModule jk_module modules/mod_jk.so # Where to find workers.properties JkWorkersFile conf.d/workers.properties # Where to put jk logs JkLogFile logs/mod_jk.log # Set the jk log level [debug/error/info] JkLogLevel info # Select the log format JkLogStampFormat "[%a %b %d %H:%M:%S %Y]" # JkOptions indicates to send SSK KEY SIZE JkOptions +ForwardKeySize +ForwardURICompat -ForwardDirectories # JkRequestLogFormat JkRequestLogFormat "%w %V %T" # Mount your applications JkMount /application/* loadbalancer # Add shared memory. # This directive is present with 1.2.10 and # later versions of mod_jk, and is needed for # for load balancing to work properly JkShmFile logs/jk.shm # Add jkstatus for managing runtime data <Location /jkstatus/> JkMount status Require ip 127.0.0.1 </Location>
NoteThe JkMount directive specifies which URLs Apache HTTP Server must forward to the mod_jk module. Based on the directive’s configuration, mod_jk sends the received URL to the correct workers. To serve static content directly and only use the load balancer for Java applications, the URL path must be
/application/*
. To use mod_jk as a load balancer, use the value/*
, to forward all URLs to mod_jk.Aside from general mod_jk configuration, this file specifies to load the
mod_jk.so
module, and defines where to find theworkers.properties
file.Configure the mod_jk worker nodes.
NoteA sample workers configuration file is provided at
conf.d/workers.properties.sample
. You can use this sample instead of creating your own file by removing the.sample
extension and modifying its contents as needed.Create a new file called
conf.d/workers.properties
. Add the following configuration to the file, making sure to modify the contents to suite your needs.# Define list of workers that will be used # for mapping requests worker.list=loadbalancer,status # Define Node1 # modify the host as your host IP or DNS name. worker.node1.port=8009 worker.node1.host=node1.mydomain.com worker.node1.type=ajp13 worker.node1.ping_mode=A worker.node1.lbfactor=1 # Define Node2 # modify the host as your host IP or DNS name. worker.node2.port=8009 worker.node2.host=node2.mydomain.com worker.node2.type=ajp13 worker.node2.ping_mode=A worker.node2.lbfactor=1 # Load-balancing behavior worker.loadbalancer.type=lb worker.loadbalancer.balance_workers=node1,node2 worker.loadbalancer.sticky_session=1 # Status worker for managing load balancer worker.status.type=status
For details on the syntax of the mod_jk
workers.properties
file and other advanced configuration options, see mod_jk Worker Properties.Optionally, specify a JKMountFile directive.
In addition to the JKMount directive in the
mod-jk.conf
, you can specify a file which contains multiple URL patterns to be forwarded to mod_jk.Create a
uriworkermap.properties
file.NoteA sample URI worker map configuration file is provided at
conf.d/uriworkermap.properties.sample
. You can use this sample instead of creating your own file by removing the.sample
extension and modifying its contents as needed.Create a new file called
conf.d/uriworkermap.properties
. Add a line for each URL pattern to be matched, for example:# Simple worker configuration file /*=loadbalancer
Update the configuration to point to
uriworkermap.properties
file.Append the following to
conf.d/mod_jk.conf
.# Use external file for mount points. # It will be checked for updates each 60 seconds. # The format of the file is: /url=worker # /examples/*=loadbalancer JkMountFile conf.d/uriworkermap.properties
For more details on configuring mod_jk, see the Configuring Apache HTTP Server to Load mod_jk section of the JBoss Web Server HTTP Connectors and Load Balancing Guide.
24.7.2. Configure JBoss EAP to Communicate with mod_jk
The JBoss EAP undertow
subsystem needs to specify a listener in order to accept requests from and send replies back to an external web server. Since mod_jk uses the AJP protocol, an AJP listener must be configured.
If you are using one of the default high availability configurations, ha or full-ha, an AJP listener is already configured.
For instructions, see Accepting Requests From External Web Servers.
24.8. Apache mod_proxy HTTP Connector
Apache mod_proxy is an HTTP connector that supports connections over AJP, HTTP, and HTTPS protocols. mod_proxy can be configured in load-balanced or non-load-balanced configurations, and it supports the notion of sticky sessions.
The mod_proxy module requires JBoss EAP to have the HTTP, HTTPS or AJP listener configured in the undertow
subsystem, depending on which protocol you plan to use.
mod_cluster is a more advanced load balancer than mod_proxy and is the recommended HTTP connector. mod_cluster provides all of the functionality of mod_proxy, plus additional features. Unlike the JBoss EAP mod_cluster HTTP connector, an Apache mod_proxy HTTP connector does not know the status of deployments on servers or server groups, and cannot adapt where it sends its work accordingly.
See the Apache mod_proxy documentation for more information.
24.8.1. Configure mod_proxy in Apache HTTP Server
The mod_proxy modules are already included when installing JBoss Core Services Apache HTTP Server or using JBoss Web Server and are loaded by default.
Apache HTTP Server is no longer distributed with JBoss Web Server as of version 3.1.0.
See the appropriate section below to configure a basic load-balancing or non-load-balancing proxy. These steps assume that you have already navigated to the httpd/
directory for Apache HTTP Server, which will vary depending on your platform. For more information, see the installation instructions for your platform in the JBoss Core Services Apache HTTP Server Installation Guide. These steps also assume that the necessary HTTP listener has already been configured in the JBoss EAP undertow
subsystem.
Red Hat customers can also use the Load Balancer Configuration Tool on the Red Hat Customer Portal to quickly generate optimal configuration templates for mod_proxy and other connectors. Note that you must be logged in to access this tool.
Add a Non-load-balancing Proxy
Add the following configuration to your conf/httpd.conf
file, directly beneath any other <VirtualHost>
directives you may have. Replace the values with ones appropriate to your setup.
<VirtualHost *:80>
# Your domain name
ServerName YOUR_DOMAIN_NAME
ProxyPreserveHost On
# The IP and port of JBoss
# These represent the default values, if your httpd is on the same host
# as your JBoss managed domain or server
ProxyPass / http://localhost:8080/
ProxyPassReverse / http://localhost:8080/
# The location of the HTML files, and access control information
DocumentRoot /var/www
<Directory /var/www>
Options -Indexes
Order allow,deny
Allow from all
</Directory>
</VirtualHost>
Add a Load-balancing Proxy
The default Apache HTTP Server configuration has the mod_proxy_balancer.so
module disabled, as it is incompatible with mod_cluster. In order to complete this task, you will need to load this module and disable the mod_cluster modules.
To use mod_proxy as a load balancer, and send work to multiple JBoss EAP instances, add the following configuration to your conf/httpd.conf
file. The example IP addresses are fictional. Replace them with the appropriate values for your environment.
<Proxy balancer://mycluster>
Order deny,allow
Allow from all
# Add each JBoss Enterprise Application Server by IP address and port.
# If the route values are unique like this, one node will not fail over to the other.
BalancerMember http://192.168.1.1:8080 route=node1
BalancerMember http://192.168.1.2:8180 route=node2
</Proxy>
<VirtualHost *:80>
# Your domain name
ServerName YOUR_DOMAIN_NAME
ProxyPreserveHost On
ProxyPass / balancer://mycluster/
# The location of the HTML files, and access control information DocumentRoot /var/www
<Directory /var/www>
Options -Indexes
Order allow,deny
Allow from all
</Directory>
</VirtualHost>
The examples above all communicate using the HTTP protocol. You can use AJP or HTTPS protocols instead, if you load the appropriate mod_proxy modules. See the Apache mod_proxy documentation for more details.
Enable Sticky Sessions
A sticky session means that if a client request originally goes to a specific JBoss EAP worker, all future requests will be sent to the same worker, unless it becomes unavailable. This is almost always the recommended behavior.
To enable sticky sessions for mod_proxy, add the stickysession
parameter to the ProxyPass
statement.
ProxyPass / balancer://mycluster stickysession=JSESSIONID
You can specify additional parameters to the ProxyPass
statement, such as lbmethod
and nofailover
. See the Apache mod_proxy documentation for more information on the available parameters.
24.8.2. Configure JBoss EAP to Communicate with mod_proxy
The JBoss EAP undertow
subsystem needs to specify a listener in order to accept requests from and send replies back to an external web server. Depending on the protocol that you will be using, you may need to configure a listener.
An HTTP listener is configured in the JBoss EAP default configuration. If you are using one of the default high availability configurations, ha or full-ha, an AJP listener is also preconfigured.
For instructions, see Accepting Requests From External Web Servers.
24.9. Microsoft ISAPI Connector
The Internet Server API (ISAPI) is a set of APIs used to write OLE Server extensions and filters for web servers such as Microsoft’s Internet Information Services (IIS). isapi_redirect.dll
is an extension of mod_jk adjusted to IIS. isapi_redirect.dll
enables you to configure JBoss EAP instances as worker nodes with IIS as a load balancer.
See JBoss EAP supported configurations for information on the supported configurations of Windows Server and IIS.
24.9.1. Configure Microsoft IIS to Use the ISAPI Connector
Download the ISAPI connector from the Red Hat Customer Portal:
- Open a browser and log in to the Red Hat Customer Portal JBoss Software Downloads page.
- Select Web Connectors in the Product drop-down menu.
- Select the latest JBoss Core Services version from the Version drop-down menu.
- Find the Red Hat JBoss Core Services ISAPI Connector in the list, and click the Download link.
-
Extract the archive and copy the contents of the
sbin
directory to a location on your server. The instructions below assume that the contents were copied toC:\connectors\
.
To configure the IIS Redirector Using the IIS Manager (IIS 7):
-
Open the IIS manager by clicking Start → Run, and typing
inetmgr
. - In the tree view pane at the left, expand IIS 7.
- Double-click ISAPI and CGI Registrations to open it in a new window.
- In the Actions pane, click Add. The Add ISAPI or CGI Restriction window opens.
Specify the following values:
-
ISAPI or CGI Path:
C:\connectors\isapi_redirect.dll
-
Description:
jboss
- Allow extension path to execute: select the check box.
-
ISAPI or CGI Path:
- Click OK to close the Add ISAPI or CGI Restriction window.
Define a JBoss Native virtual directory
- Right-click Default Web Site, and click Add Virtual Directory. The Add Virtual Directory window opens.
Specify the following values to add a virtual directory:
-
Alias:
jboss
-
Physical Path:
C:\connectors\
-
Alias:
- Click OK to save the values and close the Add Virtual Directory window.
Define a JBoss Native ISAPI Redirect Filter
- In the tree view pane, expand Sites → Default Web Site.
- Double-click ISAPI Filters. The ISAPI Filters Features view appears.
- In the Actions pane, click Add. The Add ISAPI Filter window appears.
Specify the following values in the Add ISAPI Filter window:
-
Filter name:
jboss
-
Executable:
C:\connectors\isapi_redirect.dll
-
Filter name:
- Click OK to save the values and close the Add ISAPI Filters window.
Enable the ISAPI-dll handler
- Double-click the IIS 7 item in the tree view pane. The IIS 7 Home Features View opens.
- Double-click Handler Mappings. The Handler Mappings Features View appears.
- In the Group by combo box, select State. The Handler Mappings are displayed in Enabled and Disabled Groups.
-
Find
ISAPI-dll
. If it is in the Disabled group, right-click it and select Edit Feature Permissions. Enable the following permissions:
- Read
- Script
- Execute
- Click OK to save the values, and close the Edit Feature Permissions window.
Microsoft IIS is now configured to use the ISAPI connector.
24.9.2. Configure the ISAPI Connector to Send Client Requests to JBoss EAP
This task configures a group of JBoss EAP servers to accept requests from the ISAPI connector. It does not include configuration for load-balancing or high-availability failover.
This configuration is done on the IIS server, and assumes that you already have JBoss EAP configured to accept requests from an external web server. You also need full administrator access to the IIS server and to have configured IIS to use the ISAPI connector.
Create Property Files and Set Up Redirection
Create a directory to store logs, property files, and lock files.
The rest of this procedure assumes that you are using the directory
C:\connectors\
for this purpose. If you use a different directory, modify the instructions accordingly.Create the
isapi_redirect.properties
file.Create a new file called
C:\connectors\isapi_redirect.properties
. Copy the following contents into the file.# Configuration file for the ISAPI Connector # Extension uri definition extension_uri=/jboss/isapi_redirect.dll # Full path to the log file for the ISAPI Connector log_file=c:\connectors\isapi_redirect.log # Log level (debug, info, warn, error or trace) log_level=info # Full path to the workers.properties file worker_file=c:\connectors\workers.properties # Full path to the uriworkermap.properties file worker_mount_file=c:\connectors\uriworkermap.properties #Full path to the rewrite.properties file rewrite_rule_file=c:\connectors\rewrite.properties
If you do not want to use a
rewrite.properties
file, comment out the last line by placing a#
character at the beginning of the line.Create the
uriworkermap.properties
fileThe
uriworkermap.properties
file contains mappings between deployed application URLs and which worker handles requests to them. The following example file shows the syntax of the file. Place youruriworkermap.properties
file intoC:\connectors\
.# images and css files for path /status are provided by worker01 /status=worker01 /images/*=worker01 /css/*=worker01 # Path /web-console is provided by worker02 # IIS (customized) error page is used for http errors with number greater or equal to 400 # css files are provided by worker01 /web-console/*=worker02;use_server_errors=400 /web-console/css/*=worker01 # Example of exclusion from mapping, logo.gif won't be displayed # !/web-console/images/logo.gif=* # Requests to /app-01 or /app-01/something will be routed to worker01 /app-01|/*=worker01 # Requests to /app-02 or /app-02/something will be routed to worker02 /app-02|/*=worker02
Create the
workers.properties
file.The
workers.properties
file contains mapping definitions between worker labels and server instances. This file follows the syntax of the same file used for Apache mod_jk worker properties configuration.The following is an example of a
workers.properties
file. The worker names,worker01
andworker02
, must match theinstance-id
configured in the JBoss EAPundertow
subsystem.Place this file into the
C:\connectors\
directory.# An entry that lists all the workers defined worker.list=worker01, worker02 # Entries that define the host and port associated with these workers # First JBoss EAP server definition, port 8009 is standard port for AJP in EAP worker.worker01.host=127.0.0.1 worker.worker01.port=8009 worker.worker01.type=ajp13 # Second JBoss EAP server definition worker.worker02.host=127.0.0.100 worker.worker02.port=8009 worker.worker02.type=ajp13
Create the
rewrite.properties
file.The
rewrite.properties
file contains simple URL rewriting rules for specific applications. The rewritten path is specified using name-value pairs, as shown in the example below. Place this file into theC:\connectors\
directory.#Simple example # Images are accessible under abc path /app-01/abc/=/app-01/images/
Restart your IIS server by using the
net stop
andnet start
commands.C:\> net stop was /Y C:\> net start w3svc
The IIS server is configured to send client requests to the specific JBoss EAP servers you have configured, on an application-specific basis.
24.9.3. Configure the ISAPI Connector to Balance Client Requests Across Multiple JBoss EAP Servers
This configuration balances client requests across the JBoss EAP servers you specify. This configuration is done on the IIS server, and assumes that you already have JBoss EAP configured to accept requests from an external web server. You also need full administrator access to the IIS server and to have configured IIS to use the ISAPI connector.
Balance Client Requests Across Multiple Servers
Create a directory to store logs, property files, and lock files.
The rest of this procedure assumes that you are using the directory
C:\connectors\
for this purpose. If you use a different directory, modify the instructions accordingly.Create the
isapi_redirect.properties
file.Create a new file called
C:\connectors\isapi_redirect.properties
. Copy the following contents into the file.# Configuration file for the ISAPI Connector # Extension uri definition extension_uri=/jboss/isapi_redirect.dll # Full path to the log file for the ISAPI Connector log_file=c:\connectors\isapi_redirect.log # Log level (debug, info, warn, error or trace) log_level=info # Full path to the workers.properties file worker_file=c:\connectors\workers.properties # Full path to the uriworkermap.properties file worker_mount_file=c:\connectors\uriworkermap.properties #OPTIONAL: Full path to the rewrite.properties file rewrite_rule_file=c:\connectors\rewrite.properties
If you do not want to use a
rewrite.properties
file, comment out the last line by placing a#
character at the beginning of the line.Create the
uriworkermap.properties
file.The
uriworkermap.properties
file contains mappings between deployed application URLs and which worker handles requests to them. The following example file shows the syntax of the file, with a load-balanced configuration. The wildcard (*
) character sends all requests for various URL sub-directories to the load balancer called router. The configuration of the load balancer is covered in the next step.Place your
uriworkermap.properties
file intoC:\connectors\
.# images, css files, path /status and /web-console will be # provided by nodes defined in the load-balancer called "router" /css/*=router /images/*=router /status=router /web-console|/*=router # Example of exclusion from mapping, logo.gif won't be displayed # !/web-console/images/logo.gif=* # Requests to /app-01 and /app-02 will be routed to nodes defined # in the load-balancer called "router" /app-01|/*=router /app-02|/*=router # mapping for management console, nodes in cluster can be enabled or disabled here /jkmanager|/*=status
Create the
workers.properties
file.The
workers.properties
file contains mapping definitions between worker labels and server instances. This file follows the syntax of the same file used for Apache mod_jk worker properties configuration.The following is an example of a
workers.properties
file. The load balancer is configured near the end of the file, to comprise workersworker01
andworker02
. These worker names must match theinstance-id
configured in the JBoss EAPundertow
subsystem.Place this file into the
C:\connectors\
directory.# The advanced router LB worker worker.list=router,status # First EAP server definition, port 8009 is standard port for AJP in EAP # # lbfactor defines how much the worker will be used. # The higher the number, the more requests are served # lbfactor is useful when one machine is more powerful # ping_mode=A – all possible probes will be used to determine that # connections are still working worker.worker01.port=8009 worker.worker01.host=127.0.0.1 worker.worker01.type=ajp13 worker.worker01.ping_mode=A worker.worker01.socket_timeout=10 worker.worker01.lbfactor=3 # Second EAP server definition worker.worker02.port=8009 worker.worker02.host=127.0.0.100 worker.worker02.type=ajp13 worker.worker02.ping_mode=A worker.worker02.socket_timeout=10 worker.worker02.lbfactor=1 # Define the LB worker worker.router.type=lb worker.router.balance_workers=worker01,worker02 # Define the status worker for jkmanager worker.status.type=status
Create the
rewrite.properties
file.The
rewrite.properties
file contains simple URL rewriting rules for specific applications. The rewritten path is specified using name-value pairs, as shown in the example below. Place this file into theC:\connectors\
directory.#Simple example # Images are accessible under abc path /app-01/abc/=/app-01/images/ Restart the IIS server. Restart your IIS server by using the net stop and net start commands. C:\> net stop was /Y C:\> net start w3svc
The IIS server is configured to send client requests to the JBoss EAP servers referenced in the workers.properties
file, spreading the load across the servers in a 1:3
ratio. This ratio is derived from the load-balancing factor, lbfactor
, assigned to each server.
24.10. Oracle NSAPI Connector
The Netscape Server API (NSAPI) is an API provided by Oracle iPlanet Web Server, formerly Netscape Web Server, for implementing extensions to the server. These extensions are known as server plugins. The NSAPI connector is used in nsapi_redirector.so
, which is an extension of mod_jk adjusted to Oracle iPlanet Web Server. The NSAPI connector enables you to configure JBoss EAP instances as worker nodes with Oracle iPlanet Web Server as a load balancer.
See the JBoss EAP supported configurations for information on the supported configurations of Solaris and Oracle iPlanet Web Server.
24.10.1. Configure Oracle iPlanet Web Server to use the NSAPI Connector
Prerequisites
- JBoss EAP is installed and configured on each server that will serve as a worker.
Download the NSAPI connector from the Red Hat Customer Portal:
- Open a browser and log in to the Red Hat Customer Portal JBoss Software Downloads page.
- Select Web Connectors in the Product drop-down menu.
- Select the latest JBoss Core Services version from the Version drop-down menu.
- Find the Red Hat JBoss Core Services NSAPI Connector in the list, ensuring that you select the correct platform and architecture for your system, and click the Download link.
-
Extract the
nsapi_redirector.so
file, which is located in either thelib/
or thelib64/
directory, into either theIPLANET_CONFIG/lib/
or theIPLANET_CONFIG/lib64/
directory.
Set up the NSAPI Connector:
In these instructions, IPLANET_CONFIG
refers to the Oracle iPlanet configuration directory, which is usually /opt/oracle/webserver7/config/
. If your Oracle iPlanet configuration directory is different, modify the instructions accordingly.
Disable servlet mappings.
Open the
IPLANET_CONFIG/default.web.xml
file and locate the section with the heading Built In Server Mappings. Disable the mappings to the following three servlets, by wrapping them in XML comment characters (<!--
and-->
).- default
- invoker
jsp
The following example configuration shows the disabled mappings.
<!-- ============== Built In Servlet Mappings =============== --> <!-- The servlet mappings for the built in servlets defined above. --> <!-- The mapping for the default servlet --> <!--servlet-mapping> <servlet-name>default</servlet-name> <url-pattern>/</url-pattern> </servlet-mapping--> <!-- The mapping for the invoker servlet --> <!--servlet-mapping> <servlet-name>invoker</servlet-name> <url-pattern>/servlet/*</url-pattern> </servlet-mapping--> <!-- The mapping for the JSP servlet --> <!--servlet-mapping> <servlet-name>jsp</servlet-name> <url-pattern>*.jsp</url-pattern> </servlet-mapping-->
Save and exit the file.
Configure the iPlanet Web Server to load the NSAPI connector module.
Add the following lines to the end of the
IPLANET_CONFIG/magnus.conf
file, modifying file paths to suit your configuration. These lines define the location of thensapi_redirector.so
module, as well as theworkers.properties
file, which lists the workers and their properties.Init fn="load-modules" funcs="jk_init,jk_service" shlib="/lib/nsapi_redirector.so" shlib_flags="(global|now)" Init fn="jk_init" worker_file="IPLANET_CONFIG/connectors/workers.properties" log_level="info" log_file="IPLANET_CONFIG/connectors/nsapi.log" shm_file="IPLANET_CONFIG/connectors/tmp/jk_shm"
The configuration above is for a 32-bit architecture. If you use 64-bit Solaris, change the string
lib/nsapi_redirector.so
tolib64/nsapi_redirector.so
.Save and exit the file.
Configure the NSAPI connector.
You can configure the NSAPI connector for a basic configuration, with no load balancing, or a load-balancing configuration. Choose one of the following options, after which your configuration will be complete.
24.10.2. Configure the NSAPI Connector to Send Client Requests to JBoss EAP
This task configures the NSAPI connector to redirect client requests to JBoss EAP servers with no load balancing or failover. The redirection is done on a per-deployment, and therefore per-URL, basis.
You must have already configured the NSAPI connector before continuing with this task.
Set Up the Basic HTTP Connector
Define the URL paths to redirect to the JBoss EAP servers.
NoteIn
IPLANET_CONFIG/obj.conf
, spaces are not allowed at the beginning of a line, except when the line is a continuation of the previous line.Edit the
IPLANET_CONFIG/obj.conf
file. Locate the section which starts with <Object name="default">, and add each URL pattern to match, in the format shown by the example file below. The string jknsapi refers to the HTTP connector which will be defined in the next step. The example shows the use of wildcards for pattern matching.<Object name="default"> [...] NameTrans fn="assign-name" from="/status" name="jknsapi" NameTrans fn="assign-name" from="/images(|/*)" name="jknsapi" NameTrans fn="assign-name" from="/css(|/*)" name="jknsapi" NameTrans fn="assign-name" from="/nc(|/*)" name="jknsapi" NameTrans fn="assign-name" from="/jmx-console(|/*)" name="jknsapi" </Object>
Define the worker which serves each path.
Continue editing the
IPLANET_CONFIG/obj.conf
file. Add the following directly after the closing tag of the section you have just finished editing: </Object>.<Object name="jknsapi"> ObjectType fn=force-type type=text/plain Service fn="jk_service" worker="worker01" path="/status" Service fn="jk_service" worker="worker02" path="/nc(/*)" Service fn="jk_service" worker="worker01" </Object>
The example above redirects requests to the URL path /status to the worker called worker01, and all URL paths beneath
/nc/
to the worker called worker02. The third line indicates that all URLs assigned to the jknsapi object which are not matched by the previous lines are served to worker01.Save and exit the file.
Define the workers and their attributes.
Create a file called
workers.properties
in theIPLANET_CONFIG/connectors/
directory. Paste the following contents into the file, and modify them to suit your environment.# An entry that lists all the workers defined worker.list=worker01, worker02 # Entries that define the host and port associated with these workers worker.worker01.host=127.0.0.1 worker.worker01.port=8009 worker.worker01.type=ajp13 worker.worker02.host=127.0.0.100 worker.worker02.port=8009 worker.worker02.type=ajp13
The
workers.properties
file uses the same syntax as Apache mod_jk.Save and exit the file.
Restart the iPlanet Web Server
Issue the following command to restart the iPlanet Web Server.
IPLANET_CONFIG/../bin/stopserv IPLANET_CONFIG/../bin/startserv
iPlanet Web Server now sends client requests to the URLs you have configured to deployments on JBoss EAP.
24.10.3. Configure the NSAPI Connector to Balance Client Requests Across Multiple JBoss EAP Servers
This task configures the NSAPI connector to send client requests to JBoss EAP servers in a load-balancing configuration.
You must have already configured the NSAPI connector before continuing with this task.
Configure the Connector for Load Balancing
Define the URL paths to redirect to the JBoss EAP servers.
NoteIn
IPLANET_CONFIG/obj.conf
, spaces are not allowed at the beginning of a line, except when the line is a continuation of the previous line.Edit the
IPLANET_CONFIG/obj.conf
file. Locate the section which starts with<Object name="default">
, and add each URL pattern to match, in the format shown by the example file below. The stringjknsapi
refers to the HTTP connector that will be defined in the next step. The example shows the use of wildcards for pattern matching.<Object name="default"> [...] NameTrans fn="assign-name" from="/status" name="jknsapi" NameTrans fn="assign-name" from="/images(|/*)" name="jknsapi" NameTrans fn="assign-name" from="/css(|/*)" name="jknsapi" NameTrans fn="assign-name" from="/nc(|/*)" name="jknsapi" NameTrans fn="assign-name" from="/jmx-console(|/*)" name="jknsapi" NameTrans fn="assign-name" from="/jkmanager/*" name="jknsapi" </Object>
Define the worker that serves each path.
Continue editing the
IPLANET_CONFIG/obj.conf
file. Directly after the closing tag for the section you modified in the previous step,</Object>
, add the following new section and modify it to your needs:<Object name="jknsapi"> ObjectType fn=force-type type=text/plain Service fn="jk_service" worker="status" path="/jkmanager(/*)" Service fn="jk_service" worker="router" </Object>
This
jksnapi
object defines the worker nodes used to serve each path that was mapped to thename="jksnapi"
mapping in thedefault
object. Everything except for URLs matching/jkmanager/*
is redirected to the worker calledrouter
.Define the workers and their attributes.
Create a file called
workers.properties
inIPLANET_CONFIG/connector/
. Paste the following contents into the file, and modify them to suit your environment.# The advanced router LB worker # A list of each worker worker.list=router,status # First JBoss EAP server # (worker node) definition. # Port 8009 is the standard port for AJP # worker.worker01.port=8009 worker.worker01.host=127.0.0.1 worker.worker01.type=ajp13 worker.worker01.ping_mode=A worker.worker01.socket_timeout=10 worker.worker01.lbfactor=3 # Second JBoss EAP server worker.worker02.port=8009 worker.worker02.host=127.0.0.100 worker.worker02.type=ajp13 worker.worker02.ping_mode=A worker.worker02.socket_timeout=10 worker.worker02.lbfactor=1 # Define the load-balancer called "router" worker.router.type=lb worker.router.balance_workers=worker01,worker02 # Define the status worker worker.status.type=status
The
workers.properties
file uses the same syntax as Apache mod_jk.Save and exit the file.
Restart the iPlanet Web Server 7.0.
IPLANET_CONFIG/../bin/stopserv IPLANET_CONFIG/../bin/startserv
The iPlanet Web Server redirects the URL patterns you have configured to your JBoss EAP servers in a load-balancing configuration.
Chapter 25. Eclipse MicroProfile
25.1. Using Eclipse MicroProfile Config to Manage Configuration
Eclipse Microprofile Config is provided as Technology Preview only. Technology Preview features are not supported with Red Hat production service level agreements (SLAs), might not be functionally complete, and Red Hat does not recommend to use them for production. These features provide early access to upcoming product features, enabling customers to test functionality and provide feedback during the development process.
See Technology Preview Features Support Scope on the Red Hat Customer Portal for information about the support scope for Technology Preview features.
25.1.1. About the MicroProfile Config SmallRye Subsystem
Configuration data can change dynamically and applications need to be able to access the latest configuration information without restarting the server. Eclipse MicroProfile Config provides portable externalization of configuration data. This allows applications and microservices to be configured to run in multiple environments without a need for modification or repackaging. Eclipse MicroProfile Config functionality is implemented in JBoss EAP using the SmallRye Config component and is provided by the microprofile-config-smallrye
subsystem. This subsystem is included in the default JBoss EAP 7.3 configuration.
25.1.2. ConfigSources Supported by the MicroProfile Config SmallRye Subsystem
MicroProfile Config configuration properties, which can be in different formats and can come from different locations, are provided by ConfigSources, which are implementations of the org.eclipse.microprofile.config.spi.ConfigSource
interface.
The MicroProfile Config specification provides the following default ConfigSource
implementations for retrieving configuration values.
-
Using
System.getProperties()
. -
Using
System.getenv()
. -
From all
META-INF/microprofile-config.properties
files on the class path.
The microprofile-config-smallrye
subsystem supports the following additional types of ConfigSource
resources for retrieving configuration values.
- From properties.
- From a files in a directory.
-
From a
ConfigSource
class. -
From a
ConfigSourceProvider
class.
Although the sections below use the management CLI to configure the microprofile-config-smallrye
subsystem, you can also use the management console to accomplish these tasks by navigating to Configuration → Subsystems → MicroProfile Config → and clicking View.
See MicroProfile Config SmallRye Subsystem Attributes for the list of attributes available for configuring the MicroProfile Config SmallRye subsystem.
Obtaining ConfigSource Configuraton from Properties
You can store properties directly for access by a ConfigSource
by adding a config-source
attribute and specifying the properties
as a list.
The following management CLI command creates a ConfigSource
containing configuration data for the property1
and property2
properties.
/subsystem=microprofile-config-smallrye/config-source=props:add(properties={property1=value1,property2=value2})
This command results in the following XML configuration for the microprofile-config-smallrye
subsystem.
<subsystem xmlns="urn:wildfly:microprofile-config-smallrye:1.0"> <config-source name="props"> <property name="property1" value="value1"/> <property name="property2" value="value2"/> </config-source> </subsystem>
Obtaining ConfigSource Configuraton from a Directory
You can create a ConfigSource
to read properties from files in a directory by adding the config-source
attribute and specifying the directory that contains the files. The name of each file in the dir
directory is the name of a property and the file content is the value of the property,
The following management CLI command creates a ConfigSource
that reads configuration properties from files in the /etc/config/numbers-app/
directory.
/subsystem=microprofile-config-smallrye/config-source=file-props:add(dir={path=/etc/config/numbers-app})
This command results in the following XML configuration for the microprofile-config-smallrye
subsystem.
<subsystem xmlns="urn:wildfly:microprofile-config-smallrye:1.0"> <config-source name="file-props"> <dir path="/etc/config/numbers-app"/> </config-source> </subsystem>
This structure corresponds to the structure used by OpenShift ConfigMaps
. The dir
value corresponds to the mountPath
in the ConfigMap
definition in OpenShift or Kubernetes.
Any application deployed in JBoss EAP can programmatically access the properties that are stored in the directory.
Assume that the directory /etc/config/numbers-app/
contains the following two files:
-
num.size
: This file contains the value5
. -
num.max
: This file contains the value100
.
In the code example below, num.size
returns 5
and num.max
returns 100
.
@Inject @ConfigProperty(name = "num.size") int numSize; @Inject @ConfigProperty(name = "num.max") int numMax;
Obtaining ConfigSource Configuraton from a ConfigSource Class
You can create and configure a custom org.eclipse.microprofile.config.spi.ConfigSource
implementation class to provide a source for the configuration values.
The following management CLI command creates a ConfigSource
for the implementation class named org.example.MyConfigSource
that is provided by a JBoss Module named org.example
.
/subsystem=microprofile-config-smallrye/config-source=my-config-source:add(class={name=org.example.MyConfigSource, module=org.example})
This command results in the following XML configuration for the microprofile-config-smallrye
subsystem.
<subsystem xmlns="urn:wildfly:microprofile-config-smallrye:1.0"> <config-source name="my-config-source"> <class name="org.example.MyConfigSource" module="org.example"/> </config-source> </subsystem>
Properties provided by this ConfigSource
class are available to any JBoss EAP deployment.
For information about how to add a global module to the JBoss EAP server, see Define Global Modules.
Obtaining ConfigSource Configuraton from a ConfigSourceProvider Class
You can create and configure a custom org.eclipse.microprofile.config.spi.ConfigSourceProvider
implementation class that registers implementations for multiple ConfigSource
instances.
The following management CLI command creates a config-source-provider
for the implementation class named org.example.MyConfigSourceProvider
that is provided by a JBoss Module named org.example
.
/subsystem=microprofile-config-smallrye/config-source-provider=my-config-source-provider:add(class={name=org.example.MyConfigSourceProvider, module=org.example})
This command results in the following XML configuration for the microprofile-config-smallrye
subsystem.
<subsystem xmlns="urn:wildfly:microprofile-config-smallrye:1.0"> <config-source-provider name="my-config-source-provider"> <class name="org.example.MyConfigSourceProvider" module="org.example"/> </config-source-provider> </subsystem>
Properties provided by the ConfigSourceProvider
implementation are available to any JBoss EAP deployment.
For information about how to add a global module to the JBoss EAP server, see Define Global Modules.
25.1.3. Deploying Applications that Access ConfigSources
Applications that access MicroProfile Config in their Java code must enable CDI, either by including a META-INF/beans.xml
or WEB-INF/beans.xml
file in the deployment archive, or by including a CDI bean annotation.
For more information about CDI, see Contexts and Dependency Injection (CDI) in the JBoss EAP Development Guide.
25.2. Tracing Requests with the MicroProfile OpenTracing SmallRye Subsystem
Eclipse Microprofile OpenTracing is provided as Technology Preview only. Technology Preview features are not supported with Red Hat production service level agreements (SLAs), might not be functionally complete, and Red Hat does not recommend to use them for production. These features provide early access to upcoming product features, enabling customers to test functionality and provide feedback during the development process.
See Technology Preview Features Support Scope on the Red Hat Customer Portal for information about the support scope for Technology Preview features.
25.2.1. About Eclipse MicroProfile OpenTracing
The ability to trace requests across service boundaries is important, especially in a microservices environment where a request can flow through multiple services during its life cycle. The Eclipse Microprofile OpenTracing specification defines behaviors and an API for accessing an OpenTracing compliant Tracer
object within a Jakarta RESTful Web Services application. The behaviors specify how OpenTracing Spans are to be created automatically for incoming and outgoing requests. The API defines how to explicitly disable or enable tracing for given endpoints.
25.2.2. About the MicroProfile OpenTracing SmallRye Subsystem
Eclipse Microprofile OpenTracing functionality is implemented in JBoss EAP using the SmallRye OpenTracing component and is provided by the microprofile-opentracing-smallrye
subsystem. This subsystem implements Microprofile 1.3.0, which includes support for tracing requests to JAX-RS endpoints and CDI beans and is included in the default JBoss EAP 7.3 configuration.
The microprofile-opentracing-smallrye
subsystem ships with the Jaeger Client as the default tracer, plus a set of instrumentation libraries for components commonly used in Jakarta EE applications, such as Jakarta RESTful Web Services and Contexts and Dependency Injection. Each individual WAR deployed to the JBoss EAP server automatically has its own Tracer
instance. Each WAR within an EAR is treated as an individual WAR, and each has its own Tracer
instance. By default, the service name used with the Jaeger Client is derived from the deployment’s name, which is usually the WAR file name.
25.2.3. Configuring the MicroProfile OpenTracing SmallRye Subsystem
The microprofile-opentracing-smallrye
subsystem is included in the default JBoss EAP 7.3 configuration. Because there can be a memory or performance costs associated with OpenTracing enabled, you might want to disable this subsystem.
Use the following management CLI commands to disable the MicroProfile OpenTracing feature globally for the server instance by removing the subsystem from the server configuration.
Remove the subsystem.
/subsystem=microprofile-opentracing-smallrye:remove()
Reload the server for the changes to take effect.
reload
Use the following management CLI commands to enable the MicroProfile OpenTracing feature globally for the server instance by adding the subsystem to the server configuration.
Add the subsystem.
/subsystem=microprofile-opentracing-smallrye:add()
Reload the server for the changes to take effect.
reload
There are no other configuration options available for the microprofile-opentracing-smallrye
subsystem. Instead, you configure the Jaeger Client by setting system properties or environment variables. See the Jaeger documentation for information about how to configure the Jaeger Client. See Configuration via Environment in the Jaeger documentation for the list of valid system properties.
Because this feature is provided as Technology Preview, the current configuration options, particularly those related to configuring the Jaeger Client tracer using system properties and environment variables, might change in incompatible ways in future releases.
Also be aware that, by default, the Jaeger Client for Jakarta has a probabilistic sampling strategy that is set to 0.001
, meaning that only approximately one in one thousand traces will be sampled. To sample every request, set the system properties JAEGER_SAMPLER_TYPE
to const
and JAEGER_SAMPLER_PARAM
to 1
.
For information about how to override the default tracer and how to trace CDI beans, see Using Eclipse MicroProfile OpenTracing to Trace Requests in the Development Guide.
25.3. Monitor Server Health Using Eclipse MicroProfile Health
Eclipse MicroProfile Health is provided as Technology Preview only. Technology Preview features are not supported with Red Hat production service level agreements (SLAs), might not be functionally complete, and Red Hat does not recommend to use them for production. These features provide early access to upcoming product features, enabling customers to test functionality and provide feedback during the development process.
See Technology Preview Features Support Scope on the Red Hat Customer Portal for information about the support scope for Technology Preview features.
25.3.1. MicroProfile Health SmallRye Subsystem
JBoss EAP includes the SmallRye Health component, which provides Eclipse MicroProfile Health functionality using the microprofile-health-smallrye
subsystem. This subsystem is used to determine whether the JBoss EAP instance is responding as expected, and is enabled by default.
By default, the MicroProfile Health SmallRye subsystem only evaluates whether the server is running. To include custom health checks, see the Implement a Custom Health Check section in the Development Guide.
Microprofile Health is only available when running JBoss EAP as a standalone server.
25.3.2. Health Check Using the Management CLI Examples
Health checks can be examined using the management CLI.
-
The
:check
attribute demonstrates obtaining the current health of the server (liveness
andreadiness
probes).
/subsystem=microprofile-health-smallrye:check { "outcome" => "success", "result" => { "outcome" => "UP", "checks" => [] } }
-
The
:check-live
attribute obtains the health data forliveness
probes only.
/subsystem=microprofile-health-smallrye:check-live { "outcome" => "success", "result" => { "outcome" => "UP", "checks" => [] } }
-
The
:check-ready
attribute obtains the health data forreadiness
probes only.
/subsystem=microprofile-health-smallrye:check-ready { "outcome" => "success", "result" => { "outcome" => "UP", "checks" => [] } }
25.3.3. Examining the Health Check Using the Management Console
The management console includes a check runtime operation that shows the health checks and the global outcome as boolean value.
To obtain the current health status of the server from the management console:
- Navigate to the Runtime tab and select the server.
- In the Monitor column, click MicroProfile Health → View.
25.3.4. Examine the Health Check Using the HTTP Endpoint
Health check is automatically deployed to the health
context on JBoss EAP.
That means that in addition to being able to examine it using the management CLI, you can also obtain the current health using the HTTP endpoint. The default address for the `/health` endpoint, accessible from the management interfaces, is `http://127.0.0.1:9990/health`.
- To obtain the current health of the server using the HTTP endpoint, the following URL would be used.
http://HOST:9990/health
Accessing this context displays the health check in JSON format, indicating whether the server is healthy.This endpoint checks the health of both liveness
and readiness
probes.
-
The
/health/live
endpoint checks the current health ofliveness
probes.
http://HOST:9990/health/live
-
The
/health/ready
endpoint checks the current health ofreadiness
probes.
http://HOST:9990/health/ready
25.3.5. Global Status When Probes are not Defined
The :empty-readiness-checks-status
and :empty-liveness-checks-status
are management attributes that specify the global status when no readiness
or liveness
probes are defined. These attributes allow applications to report ‘DOWN’ until their probes verify that the application is ready/live. By default, these attributes will report ‘UP’.
-
The
:empty-readiness-checks-status
attribute specifies the global status forreadiness
probes if noreadiness
probes have been defined.
/subsystem=microprofile-health-smallrye:read-attribute(name=empty-readiness-checks-status) { "outcome" => "success", "result" => expression "${env.MP_HEALTH_EMPTY_READINESS_CHECKS_STATUS:UP}" }
-
The
:empty-liveness-checks-status`attribute specifies the global status for `liveness
probes if noliveness
probes have been defined.
/subsystem=microprofile-health-smallrye:read-attribute(name=empty-liveness-checks-status) { "outcome" => "success", "result" => expression "${env.MP_HEALTH_EMPTY_LIVENESS_CHECKS_STATUS:UP}" }
The /health
HTTP endpoint and :check
operation that check both readiness
and liveness
probes also take into account these attributes.
25.3.6. Enable Authentication for the HTTP Endpoint
The health
context can be configured to require that users be authorized to access the context.
To enable authentication on this endpoint:
Set the
security-enabled
attribute totrue
on themicroprofile-health-smallrye
subsystem./subsystem=microprofile-health-smallrye:write-attribute(name=security-enabled,value=true)
Reload the server for the changes to take effect.
reload
Any subsequent attempts to access the health
endpoint result in an authentication prompt.
25.4. Eclipse MicroProfile Metrics
Eclipse MicroProfile Metrics is provided as Technology Preview only. Technology Preview features are not supported with Red Hat production service level agreements (SLAs), might not be functionally complete, and Red Hat does not recommend to use them for production. These features provide early access to upcoming product features, enabling customers to test functionality and provide feedback during the development process.
See Technology Preview Features Support Scope on the Red Hat Customer Portal for information about the support scope for Technology Preview features.
25.4.1. About the MicroProfile Metrics Subsystem
JBoss EAP includes the SmallRye Metrics component, which provides Eclipse MicroProfile Metrics functionality using the microprofile-metrics-smallrye
subsystem. This subsystem is used to provide monitoring data for the JBoss EAP instance, and is enabled by default.
The microprofile-metrics-smallrye
subsystem is only enabled in standalone configurations.
25.4.2. Examine Metrics Using the HTTP Endpoint
Metrics are automatically available on the JBoss EAP management interface, with the following contexts available.
-
/metrics/
- Contains metrics specified in the MicroProfile 3.0 specification. -
/metrics/vendor
- Contains vendor-specific metrics, such as memory pools. -
/metrics/application
- Contains metrics from deployed applications and subsystems that use the MicroProfile Metrics API.
The JBoss EAP subsystem metrics are exposed in the Prometheus format.
The metric names are based on subsystem and attribute names. For example, the subsystem undertow
exposes a metric attribute request-count
for every servlet in an application deployment. The name of this metric is jboss_undertow_request_count
. The prefix jboss helps identify the metrics source.
To see a list of the metrics exposed by EAP, execute the following command in the CLI:
$ curl -v http://localhost:9990/metrics | grep -i type
Example: Obtaining the request count for a JAX-RS application
The following example demonstrates how to find the number of requests made to a web service deployed on JBoss EAP. The example uses the helloworld-rs quickstart as the web service. Download the quickstart from: jboss-eap-quickstarts.
To examine the request-count
metric in the helloworld-rs quickstart:
Enable statistics for the
undertow
subsystem:Start the standalone server with statistics enabled:
$ ./standalone.sh -Dwildfly.statistics-enabled=true
For an already running server, enable the statistics for the
undertow
subsystem:/subsystem=undertow/:write-attribute(name=statistics-enabled,value=true)
Deploy the helloworld-rs quickstart:
In the root directory of the quickstart, deploy the web application using Maven:
$ mvn clean install wildfly:deploy
Query the
http
endpoint in the CLI using thecurl
command and filter forrequest_count
:$ curl -v http://localhost:9990/metrics | grep request_count
Output:
jboss_undertow_request_count_total{server="default-server",http_listener="default",} 0.0
The attribute value returned is
0.0
.- Access the quickstart, located at http://localhost:8080/helloworld-rs/, in a web browser and click any of the links.
Query the
http
endpoint again from the CLI:$ curl -v http://localhost:9990/metrics | grep request_count
Output:
jboss_undertow_request_count_total{server="default-server",http_listener="default",} 1.0
The value is updated to
1.0
.You can verify that the request count is updated correctly by repeating the last two steps.
25.4.3. Configure MicroProfile Metrics using the Management Console
In the management console, you can perform the following configurations:
- Enable or disable exposing metrics.
- Edit prefix for the exposed metrics.
- Enable or disable security.
- Reset non-required fields to initial or default values.
To configure the MicroProfile metrics using the management console:
- Access the management console and navigate to Configuration → Subsystems → MicroProfile Metrics and click View to open the MicroProfile Metrics page.
25.4.4. Enable Authentication for the HTTP Endpoint
The metrics
context, and all subcontexts, can be configured to require that users be authorized to access the context. The following procedure enables authentication on this endpoint.
Set the
security-enabled
attribute totrue
on themicroprofile-metrics-smallrye
subsystem./subsystem=microprofile-metrics-smallrye:write-attribute(name=security-enabled,value=true)
Reload the server for the changes to take effect.
reload
Any subsequent attempts to access the metrics
endpoint will now result in an authentication prompt.
Appendix A. Reference Material
A.1. Server Runtime Arguments
The application server startup script accepts arguments and switches at runtime. This allows the server to start under alternative configurations to those defined in the standalone.xml
, domain.xml
, and host.xml
configuration files.
Alternative configurations might include starting the server with an alternative socket bindings set or a secondary configuration.
The available parameters list can be accessed by passing the help switch -h
or --help
at startup.
Argument or Switch | Operating Mode | Description |
---|---|---|
--admin-only | Standalone |
Set the server’s running type to |
--admin-only | Domain |
Set the host controller’s running type to |
-b=<value>, -b <value> | Standalone, Domain |
Set system property |
-b<interface>=<value> | Standalone, Domain |
Set system property |
--backup | Domain | Keep a copy of the persistent domain configuration even if this host is not the domain controller. |
-c=<config>, -c <config> | Standalone |
Name of the server configuration file to use. The default is |
-c=<config>, -c <config> | Domain |
Name of the server configuration file to use. The default is |
--cached-dc | Domain | If the host is not the domain controller and cannot contact the domain controller at boot, boot using a locally cached copy of the domain configuration. |
--debug [<port>] | Standalone | Activate debug mode with an optional argument to specify the port. Only works if the launch script supports it. |
-D<name>[=<value>] | Standalone, Domain | Set a system property. |
--domain-config=<config> | Domain |
Name of the server configuration file to use. The default is |
--git-repo | Standalone |
The location of the Git repository that is used to manage and persist server configuration data. This can be |
--git-branch | Standalone | The branch or tag name in the Git repository to use. This argument should name an existing branch or tag name as it will not be created if it does not exist. If you use a tag name, you put the repository in a detached HEAD state, meaning future commits are not attached to any branches. Tag names are read-only and are normally used when you need to replicate a configuration across several nodes. |
--git-auth | Standalone |
The URL to an Elytron configuration file that contains the credentials to be used when connecting to a remote Git repository. This argument is required if your remote Git repository requires authentication. Although Git supports SSH authentication, Elytron does not; therefore, it is currently only possible to specify credentials to authenticate with HTTP or HTTPS, not SSH. This argument is not used with a |
-h, --help | Standalone, Domain | Display the help message and exit. |
--host-config=<config> | Domain |
Name of the host configuration file to use. The default is |
--interprocess-hc-address=<address> | Domain | Address on which the host controller should listen for communication from the process controller. |
--interprocess-hc-port=<port> | Domain | Port on which the host controller should listen for communication from the process controller. |
--master-address=<address> | Domain |
Set system property |
--master-port=<port> | Domain |
Set system property |
--read-only-server-config=<config> | Standalone |
Name of the server configuration file to use. This differs from |
--read-only-domain-config=<config> | Domain |
Name of the domain configuration file to use. This differs from |
--read-only-host-config=<config> | Domain |
Name of the host configuration file to use. This differs from |
-P=<url>, -P <url>, --properties=<url> | Standalone, Domain | Load system properties from the given URL. |
--pc-address=<address> | Domain | Address on which the process controller listens for communication from processes it controls. |
--pc-port=<port> | Domain | Port on which the process controller listens for communication from processes it controls. |
-S<name>[=<value>] | Standalone | Set a security property. |
-secmgr | Standalone, Domain | Runs the server with a security manager installed. |
--server-config=<config> | Standalone |
Name of the server configuration file to use. The default is |
--start-mode=<mode> | Standalone |
Set the start mode of the server. This option cannot be used in conjunction with
|
-u=<value>, -u <value> | Standalone, Domain |
Set system property |
-v, -V, --version | Standalone, Domain | Display the application server version and exit. |
The configuration files that ship with JBoss EAP are set up to handle the behavior of the switches, for example, -b
and -u
. If you change your configuration files to no longer use the system property controlled by the switch, then adding it to the launch command will have no effect.
A.2. RPM Service Configuration Files
The RPM installation of JBoss EAP includes two additional configuration files compared to a ZIP or installer installation. These files are used by the service init script to specify the JBoss EAP launch environment. The location of these service configuration files differ for Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6, and Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7 and later versions.
For Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7 and later, RPM service configuration files are loaded using systemd
, so variable expressions are not expanded.
File | Description |
---|---|
/etc/sysconfig/eap7-standalone | Settings specific to standalone JBoss EAP servers on Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6. |
/etc/sysconfig/eap7-domain | Settings specific to JBoss EAP running as a managed domain on Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6. |
File | Description |
---|---|
/etc/opt/rh/eap7/wildfly/eap7-standalone.conf | Settings specific to standalone JBoss EAP servers on Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7 and later. |
/etc/opt/rh/eap7/wildfly/eap7-domain.conf | Settings specific to JBoss EAP running as a managed domain on Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7 and later. |
A.3. RPM Service Configuration Properties
The following table shows a list of available configuration properties for the JBoss EAP RPM service along with their default values.
If a property has the same name in both the RPM service configuration file, such as /etc/sysconfig/eap7-standalone
, and in the JBoss EAP startup configuration file, such as EAP_HOME/bin/standalone.conf
, the value that takes precedence is the one in the JBoss EAP startup configuration file. One such property is JAVA_HOME
.
Property | Description |
---|---|
JAVA_HOME | The directory where your Java Runtime Environment is installed.
Default value: |
JAVAPTH | The path where the Java executable files are installed.
Default value: |
WILDFLY_STARTUP_WAIT | The number of seconds that the init script will wait until confirming that the server has launched successfully after receiving a start or restart command. This property only applies to Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6.
Default value: |
WILDFLY_SHUTDOWN_WAIT | The number of seconds that the init script will wait for the server to shutdown before continuing when it receives a stop or restart command. This property only applies to Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6.
Default value: |
WILDFLY_CONSOLE_LOG | The file that the CONSOLE log handler will be redirected to.
Default value: |
WILDFLY_SH | The script which is used to launch to JBoss EAP server.
Default value: |
WILDFLY_SERVER_CONFIG | The server configuration file to use.
There is no default for this property. Either |
WILDFLY_HOST_CONFIG |
For a managed domain, this property allows a user to specify the host configuration file, such as |
WILDFLY_MODULEPATH | The path of the JBoss EAP module directory.
Default value: |
WILDFLY_BIND |
Sets the |
WILDFLY_OPTS | Additional arguments to include on startup. For example: -Dorg.wildfly.openssl.path=PATH_TO_OPENSSL_LIBS
|
A.4. Overview of JBoss EAP Subsystems
The table below gives a brief description of the JBoss EAP subsystems.
JBoss EAP Subsystem | Description |
---|---|
batch-jberet | Configure an environment for running batch applications and manage batch jobs. |
bean-validation | Configure bean validation for validating Java object data. |
core-management | Register listeners for server lifecycle events and track configuration changes. |
datasources | Create and configure datasources and manage JDBC database drivers. |
deployment-scanner | Configure deployment scanners to monitor particular locations for applications to deploy. |
ee | Configure common functionality in the Jakarta EE platform, such as defining global modules, enabling descriptor-based property replacement, and configuring default bindings. |
ejb3 | Configure Enterprise JavaBeans (EJBs), including session and message-driven beans.
More information for the |
elytron | Configure server and application security.
More information on the |
iiop-openjdk |
Configure Common Object Request Broker Architecture (CORBA) services for JTS transactions and other ORB services, including security. In JBoss EAP 6, this functionality was contained in the |
infinispan | Configure caching functionality for JBoss EAP high availability services. |
io | Define workers and buffer pools to be used by other subsystems. |
jaxrs | Enable the deployment and functionality of JAX-RS applications. |
jca | Configure the general settings for the JCA container and resource adapter deployments. The Jakarta equivalent is Jakarta Connectors. |
jdr | Enable the gathering of diagnostic data to aid in troubleshooting. JBoss EAP subscribers can provide this information to Red Hat when requesting support. |
jgroups | Configure the protocol stacks and communication mechanisms for how servers in a cluster talk to each other. |
jmx | Configure remote Java Management Extensions (JMX) access. |
jpa | Manages the Jakarta Persistence 2.2 container-managed requirements and allows you to deploy persistent unit definitions, annotations, and descriptors.
More information for the |
jsf | Manage JavaServer Faces (JSF) implementations. The Jakarta equivalent is Jakarta Server Faces. |
jsr77 | Provide Jakarta EE management capabilities defined by the Jakarta Management specification. |
logging | Configure system and application-level logging through a system of log categories and log handlers. |
| Configure mail server attributes and custom mail transports to create a mail service that allows applications deployed to JBoss EAP to send mail using that service. |
messaging-activemq |
Configure JMS destinations, connection factories, and other settings for Artemis, the integrated messaging provider. In JBoss EAP 6, messaging functionality was contained in the
More information for the |
microprofile-config-smallrye | Use MicroProfile Config SmallRye to provide portable externalization of configuration data, allowing applications to access the latest configuration properties without restarting the server. Important Eclipse Microprofile Config is provided as Technology Preview only. Technology Preview features are not supported with Red Hat production service level agreements (SLAs), might not be functionally complete, and Red Hat does not recommend to use them for production. These features provide early access to upcoming product features, enabling customers to test functionality and provide feedback during the development process. See Technology Preview Features Support Scope on the Red Hat Customer Portal for information about the support scope for Technology Preview features. |
microprofile-health-smallrye |
Use SmallRye Health to monitor server health. See Monitor Server Health Using Eclipse MicroProfile Health for information about the Important Eclipse Microprofile Health is provided as Technology Preview only. Technology Preview features are not supported with Red Hat production service level agreements (SLAs), might not be functionally complete, and Red Hat does not recommend to use them for production. These features provide early access to upcoming product features, enabling customers to test functionality and provide feedback during the development process. See Technology Preview Features Support Scope on the Red Hat Customer Portal for information about the support scope for Technology Preview features. |
microprofile-opentracing-smallrye |
Use SmallRye OpenTracing to trace requests across service boundaries. See Tracing Requests with the MicroProfile OpenTracing SmallRye Subsystem for information about the Important Eclipse Microprofile OpenTracing is provided as Technology Preview only. Technology Preview features are not supported with Red Hat production service level agreements (SLAs), might not be functionally complete, and Red Hat does not recommend to use them for production. These features provide early access to upcoming product features, enabling customers to test functionality and provide feedback during the development process. See Technology Preview Features Support Scope on the Red Hat Customer Portal for information about the support scope for Technology Preview features. |
modcluster | Configure the server-side mod_cluster worker node. |
naming | Bind entries into global JNDI namespaces and configure the remote JNDI interface. |
picketlink-federation | Configure PicketLink SAML-based single sign-on (SSO).
More information on the |
picketlink-identity-management | Configure PicketLink identity management services. This subsystem is unsupported. |
pojo | Enable deployment of applications containing JBoss Microcontainer services, as supported by previous versions of JBoss EAP. |
remoting | Configure settings for inbound and outbound connections for local and remote services. |
discovery | The discovery subsystem is currently for internal subsystem use only; it is a private API and is not available for public use. |
request-controller | Configure settings to suspend and shut down servers gracefully. |
resource-adapters | Configure and maintain resource adapters for communication between Jakarta EE applications and an Enterprise Information System (EIS) using the Jakarta Connectors specification. |
rts | Unsupported implementation of REST-AT. |
sar | Enable deployment of SAR archives containing MBean services, as supported by previous versions of JBoss EAP. |
security | Legacy method to configure application security settings.
More information on the |
security-manager | Configure Java security policies to be used by the Java Security Manager.
More information on the |
singleton | Define singleton policies to configure the behavior of singleton deployments or to create singleton MSC services.
More information on the |
transactions | Configure the Transaction Manager (TM) options, such as timeout values, transaction logging, and whether to use Java Transaction Service (JTS).
More information on the |
undertow |
Configure JBoss EAP’s web server and servlet container settings. In JBoss EAP 6, this functionality was contained in the |
webservices | Configure published endpoint addresses and endpoint handler chains, as well as the host name, ports, and WSDL address for the web services provider.
More information for the |
weld | Configure Contexts and Dependency Injection (CDI) functionality for JBoss EAP. |
xts | Configure settings for coordinating web services in a transaction. |
A.5. Add-User Utility Arguments
The following table describes the arguments available for the add-user.sh
or add-user.bat
script, which is a utility for adding new users to the properties file for out-of-the-box authentication.
Command Line Argument | Description |
---|---|
-a | Create a user in the application realm. If omitted, the default is to create a user in the management realm. |
-dc <value> |
The domain configuration directory that will contain the properties files. If it is omitted, the default directory is |
-sc <value> |
An alternative standalone server configuration directory that will contain the properties files. If omitted, the default directory is |
-up, --user-properties <value> |
The name of the alternative user properties file. It can be an absolute path or it can be a file name used in conjunction with the |
-g, --group <value> | A comma-separated list of groups to assign to this user. |
-gp, --group-properties <value> |
The name of the alternative group properties file. It can be an absolute path or it can be a file name used in conjunction with the |
-p, --password <value> | The password of the user. |
-u, --user <value> | The name of the user. User names can only contain the following characters, in any number and in any order:
|
-r, --realm <value> |
The name of the realm used to secure the management interfaces. If omitted, the default is |
-s, --silent |
Run the |
-e, --enable | Enable the user. |
-d, --disable | Disable the user. |
-cw, --confirm-warning | Automatically confirm warning in interactive mode. |
-h, --help |
Display usage information for the |
-ds, --display-secret | Print the secret value in non-interactive mode. |
A.6. Management Audit Logging Attributes
Attribute names in these tables are listed as they appear in the management model, for example, when using the management CLI. See the schema definition file located at EAP_HOME/docs/schema/wildfly-config_5_0.xsd
to view the elements as they appear in the XML, as there may be differences from the management model.
Attribute | Description |
---|---|
enabled | Whether audit logging is enabled. |
log-boot | Whether operations should be logged on server boot. |
log-read-only | Whether operations that do not modify the configuration or any runtime services should be logged. |
Attribute | Description |
---|---|
compact |
If |
date-format |
The date format to use as understood by |
date-separator |
The separator between the date and the rest of the formatted log message. This is ignored if |
escape-control-characters |
If |
escape-new-line |
If |
include-date | Whether or not to include the date in the formatted log record. |
Attribute | Description |
---|---|
disabled-due-to-failure | Whether this handler has been disabled due to logging failures (read-only). |
failure-count | The number of logging failures since the handler was initialized (read-only). |
formatter | The JSON formatter used to format the log messages. |
max-failure-count | The maximum number of logging failures before disabling this handler. |
path | The path of the audit log file. |
relative-to |
The name of another previously named path, or of one of the standard paths provided by the system. If |
rotate-at-startup | Whether the old log file should be rotated at server startup. |
Attribute | Description |
---|---|
app-name | The application name to add to the syslog records as defined in section 6.2.5 of RFC-5424. If not specified it will default to the name of the product. |
disabled-due-to-failure | Whether this handler has been disabled due to logging failures (read-only). |
facility | The facility to use for syslog logging as defined in section 6.2.1 of RFC-5424 and section 4.1.1 of RFC-3164. |
failure-count | The number of logging failures since the handler was initialized (read-only). |
formatter | The JSON formatter used to format the log messages. |
max-failure-count | The maximum number of logging failures before disabling this handler. |
max-length |
The maximum length in bytes a log message, including the header, is allowed to be. If undefined, it will default to |
protocol |
The protocol to use for the syslog handler. Must be one and only one of |
syslog-format |
The syslog format: |
truncate |
Whether or not a message, including the header, should truncate the message if the length in bytes is greater than the value of the |
Syslog servers vary in their implementation, so not all settings are applicable to all syslog servers. Testing has been conducted using the rsyslog syslog implementation.
This table lists only the high-level attributes. Each attribute has configuration parameters, and some have child configuration parameters.
A.7. Interface Attributes
Attribute names in this table are listed as they appear in the management model, for example, when using the management CLI. See the schema definition file located at EAP_HOME/docs/schema/wildfly-config_5_0.xsd
to view the elements as they appear in the XML, as there may be differences from the management model.
Interface Element | Description |
---|---|
any | Element indicating that part of the selection criteria for an interface should be that it meets at least one, but not necessarily all, of the nested set of criteria. |
any-address |
Empty element indicating that sockets using this interface should be bound to a wildcard address. The IPv6 wildcard address ( |
inet-address | Either an IP address in IPv6 or IPv4 dotted decimal notation, or a host name that can be resolved to an IP address. |
link-local-address | Empty element indicating that part of the selection criteria for an interface should be whether or not an address associated with it is link-local. |
loopback | Empty element indicating that part of the selection criteria for an interface should be whether or not it is a loopback interface. |
loopback-address | A loopback address that may not actually be configured on the machine’s loopback interface. Differs from inet-address type in that the given value will be used even if no NIC can be found that has the IP address associated with it. |
multicast | Empty element indicating that part of the selection criteria for an interface should be whether or not it supports multicast. |
name | The name of the interface. |
nic | The name of a network interface (e.g. eth0, eth1, lo). |
nic-match | A regular expression against which the names of the network interfaces available on the machine can be matched to find an acceptable interface. |
not | Element indicating that part of the selection criteria for an interface should be that it does not meet any of the nested set of criteria. |
point-to-point | Empty element indicating that part of the selection criteria for an interface should be whether or not it is a point-to-point interface. |
public-address | Empty element indicating that part of the selection criteria for an interface should be whether or not it has a publicly routable address. |
site-local-address | Empty element indicating that part of the selection criteria for an interface should be whether or not an address associated with it is site-local. |
subnet-match |
A network IP address and the number of bits in the address' network prefix, written in slash notation, for example, |
up | Empty element indicating that part of the selection criteria for an interface should be whether or not it is currently up. |
virtual | Empty element indicating that part of the selection criteria for an interface should be whether or not it is a virtual interface. |
A.8. Socket Binding Attributes
Attribute names in these tables are listed as they appear in the management model, for example, when using the management CLI. See the schema definition file located at EAP_HOME/docs/schema/wildfly-config_5_0.xsd
to view the elements as they appear in the XML, as there may be differences from the management model.
The following tables show the attributes that can be configured for each of the three types of socket bindings.
Attribute | Description |
---|---|
client-mappings | Specifies the client mappings for this socket binding. A client connecting to this socket should use the destination address specified in the mapping that matches its desired outbound interface. This allows for advanced network topologies that use either network address translation, or have bindings on multiple network interfaces to function. Each mapping should be evaluated in declared order, with the first successful match used to determine the destination. |
fixed-port | Whether the port value should remain fixed even if numeric offsets are applied to the other sockets in the socket group. |
interface |
Name of the interface to which the socket should be bound, or, for multicast sockets, the interface on which it should listen. This should be one of the declared interfaces. If not defined, the value of the |
multicast-address | Multicast address on which the socket should receive multicast traffic. If unspecified, the socket will not be configured to receive multicast. |
multicast-port |
Port on which the socket should receive multicast traffic. Must be configured if |
name | The name of the socket. Services needing to access the socket configuration information will find it using this name. This attribute is required. |
port | Number of the port to which the socket should be bound. Note that this value can be overridden if servers apply a port-offset to increment or decrement all port values. |
Attribute | Description |
---|---|
fixed-source-port | Whether the port value should remain fixed even if numeric offsets are applied to the other outbound sockets in the socket group. |
host | The host name or IP address of the remote destination to which this outbound socket will connect. |
port | The port number of the remote destination to which the outbound socket should connect. |
source-interface | The name of the interface that will be used for the source address of the outbound socket. |
source-port | The port number that will be used as the source port of the outbound socket. |
Attribute | Description |
---|---|
fixed-source-port | Whether the port value should remain fixed even if numeric offsets are applied to the other outbound sockets in the socket group. |
socket-binding-ref | The name of the local socket binding that will be used to determine the port to which this outbound socket connects. |
source-interface | The name of the interface that will be used for the source address of the outbound socket. |
source-port | The port number that will be used as the source port of the outbound socket. |
A.9. Default Socket Bindings
The following tables show the default socket bindings for each socket binding group.
Socket Binding | Port | Description |
---|---|---|
ajp | 8009 | Apache JServ Protocol. Used for HTTP clustering and load balancing. |
http | 8080 | The default port for deployed web applications. |
https | 8443 | SSL-encrypted connection between deployed web applications and clients. |
management-http | 9990 | Used for HTTP communication with the management layer. |
management-https | 9993 | Used for HTTPS communication with the management layer. |
txn-recovery-environment | 4712 | The JTA transaction recovery manager. |
txn-status-manager | 4713 | The JTA / JTS transaction manager. |
Socket Binding | Port | Multicast Port | Description |
---|---|---|---|
ajp | 8009 | Apache JServ Protocol. Used for HTTP clustering and load balancing. | |
http | 8080 | The default port for deployed web applications. | |
https | 8443 | SSL-encrypted connection between deployed web applications and clients. | |
jgroups-mping | 45700 | Multicast. Used to discover initial membership in a HA cluster. | |
jgroups-tcp | 7600 | Unicast peer discovery in HA clusters using TCP. | |
jgroups-udp | 55200 | 45688 | Multicast peer discovery in HA clusters using UDP. |
management-http | 9990 | Used for HTTP communication with the management layer. | |
management-https | 9993 | Used for HTTPS communication with the management layer. | |
modcluster | 23364 | Multicast port for communication between JBoss EAP and the HTTP load balancer. | |
txn-recovery-environment | 4712 | The JTA transaction recovery manager. | |
txn-status-manager | 4713 | The JTA / JTS transaction manager. |
Socket Binding | Port | Description |
---|---|---|
ajp | 8009 | Apache JServ Protocol. Used for HTTP clustering and load balancing. |
http | 8080 | The default port for deployed web applications. |
https | 8443 | SSL-encrypted connection between deployed web applications and clients. |
iiop | 3528 | CORBA services for JTS transactions and other ORB-dependent services. |
iiop-ssl | 3529 | SSL-encrypted CORBA services. |
management-http | 9990 | Used for HTTP communication with the management layer. |
management-https | 9993 | Used for HTTPS communication with the management layer. |
txn-recovery-environment | 4712 | The JTA transaction recovery manager. |
txn-status-manager | 4713 | The JTA / JTS transaction manager. |
Name | Port | Multicast Port | Description |
---|---|---|---|
ajp | 8009 | Apache JServ Protocol. Used for HTTP clustering and load balancing. | |
http | 8080 | The default port for deployed web applications. | |
https | 8443 | SSL-encrypted connection between deployed web applications and clients. | |
iiop | 3528 | CORBA services for JTS transactions and other ORB-dependent services. | |
iiop-ssl | 3529 | SSL-encrypted CORBA services. | |
jgroups-mping | 45700 | Multicast. Used to discover initial membership in a HA cluster. | |
jgroups-tcp | 7600 | Unicast peer discovery in HA clusters using TCP. | |
jgroups-udp | 55200 | 45688 | Multicast peer discovery in HA clusters using UDP. |
management-http | 9990 | Used for HTTP communication with the management layer. | |
management-https | 9993 | Used for HTTPS communication with the management layer. | |
modcluster | 23364 | Multicast port for communication between JBoss EAP and the HTTP load balancer. | |
txn-recovery-environment | 4712 | The JTA transaction recovery manager. | |
txn-status-manager | 4713 | The JTA / JTS transaction manager. |
Name | Port | Multicast Port | Description |
---|---|---|---|
http | 8080 | The default port for deployed web applications. | |
https | 8443 | SSL-encrypted connection between deployed web applications and clients. | |
management-http | 9990 | Used for HTTP communication with the management layer. | |
management-https | 9993 | Used for HTTPS communication with the management layer. | |
mcmp-management | 8090 | The port for the Mod-Cluster Management Protocol (MCMP) connection to transmit lifecycle events. | |
modcluster | 23364 | Multicast port for communication between JBoss EAP and the HTTP load balancer. |
A.10. Module Command Arguments
The following arguments can be passed to the module add
management CLI command:
Argument | Description |
---|---|
--absolute-resources |
Use this argument to specify a list of absolute file system paths to reference from its
See |
--allow-nonexistent-resources |
Use this argument to create empty directories for resources specified by |
--dependencies | Use this argument to provide a comma-separated list of module names that this module depends on. |
--export-dependencies | Use this argument to specify exported dependencies. module add --name=com.mysql --resources=/path/to/mysql-connector-java-8.0.12.jar --export-dependencies=javaee.api,sun.jdk,ibm.jdk,javax.api,javax.transaction.api
|
--main-class | Use this argument to specify the fully qualified class name that declares the module’s main method. |
--module-root-dir |
Use this argument if you have defined an external JBoss EAP module directory to use instead of the default module add --module-root-dir=/path/to/my-external-modules/ --name=com.mysql --resources=/path/to/mysql-connector-java-8.0.12.jar --dependencies=javaee.api,sun.jdk,ibm.jdk,javax.api,javax.transaction.api |
--module-xml |
Use this argument to provide a file system path to a |
--name | Use this argument to provide the name of the module to add. This argument is required. |
--properties |
Use this argument to provide a comma-separated list of |
--resource-delimiter |
Use this argument to set a user-defined file path separator for the list of resources provided to the |
--resources |
Use this argument to specify the resources for this module by providing a list of file system paths. The files are copied to this module directory and referenced from its
See |
--slot |
Use this argument to add the module to a slot other than the default module add --name=com.mysql --slot=8.0 --resources=/path/to/mysql-connector-java-8.0.12.jar --dependencies=javaee.api,sun.jdk,ibm.jdk,javax.api,javax.transaction.api
|
A.11. Deployment Scanner Marker Files
Marker files are used by the deployment scanner to mark the status of an application within the deployment directory of the JBoss EAP server instance. A marker file has the same name as the deployment, with the file suffix indicating the state of the application’s deployment.
For example, a successful deployment of test-application.war
would have a marker file named test-application.war.deployed
.
The following table lists the available marker file types and their meanings.
Filename Suffix | Origin | Description |
---|---|---|
.deployed | System-generated | Indicates that the content has been deployed. The content will be undeployed if this file is deleted. |
.dodeploy | User-generated | Indicates that the content should be deployed or redeployed. |
.failed | System-generated | Indicates deployment failure. The marker file contains information about the cause of failure. If the marker file is deleted, the content will be eligible for auto-deployment again. |
.isdeploying | System-generated | Indicates that the deployment is in progress. This marker file will be deleted upon completion. |
.isundeploying | System-generated |
Triggered by deleting a |
.pending | System-generated | Indicates that the deployment scanner recognizes the need to deploy content, but an issue is currently preventing auto-deployment (for example, if content is in the process of being copied). This marker serves as a global deployment road-block, meaning that the scanner will not instruct the server to deploy or undeploy any content while this marker file exists. |
.skipdeploy | User-generated | Disables auto-deploy of an application while present. Useful as a method of temporarily blocking the auto-deployment of exploded content, preventing the risk of incomplete content edits being pushed. Can be used with zipped content, although the scanner detects in-progress changes to zipped content and waits until completion. |
.undeployed | System-generated | Indicates that the content has been undeployed. Deletion of this marker file has no impact to content redeployment. |
A.12. Deployment Scanner Attributes
The deployment scanner contains the following configurable attributes.
Attribute names in this table are listed as they appear in the management model, for example, when using the management CLI. See the schema definition file located at EAP_HOME/docs/schema/jboss-as-deployment-scanner_2_0.xsd
to view the elements as they appear in the XML, as there may be differences from the management model.
Name | Default | Description |
---|---|---|
auto-deploy-exploded | false |
Allows the automatic deployment of exploded content without requiring a |
auto-deploy-xml | true |
Allows the automatic deployment of XML content without requiring a |
auto-deploy-zipped | true |
Allows the automatic deployment of zipped content without requiring a |
deployment-timeout | 600 | The time value in seconds for the deployment scanner to allow a deployment attempt before being canceled. |
path | deployments |
The actual file system path to be scanned. Treated as an absolute path, unless the |
relative-to | jboss.server.base.dir | Reference to a file system path defined as a path in the server configuration. |
runtime-failure-causes-rollback | false | Whether a runtime failure of a deployment causes a rollback of the deployment as well as all other (possibly unrelated) deployments as part of the scan operation. |
scan-enabled | true |
Allows the automatic scanning for applications by |
scan-interval | 5000 |
The time interval in milliseconds that the repository should be scanned for changes. A value of less than |
A.13. Managed Domain JVM Configuration Attributes
The following JVM configuration options can be set for a managed domain at the host, server group, or server level. Note that valid values for some of these attributes are dependent upon your JVM. See your JDK vendor’s documentation for additional information.
Attribute names in this table are listed as they appear in the management model, for example, when using the management CLI. See the schema definition file located at EAP_HOME/docs/schema/wildfly-config_5_0.xsd
to view the elements as they appear in the XML, as there may be differences from the management model.
Attribute | Description |
---|---|
agent-lib |
Sets the value of the |
agent-path |
Sets the value of the |
debug-enabled | Whether to enable debug. This attribute only applies to JVM configurations at the server level. |
debug-options | Specifies the JVM options to use when debug is enabled. This attribute only applies to JVM configurations at the server level. |
env-classpath-ignored |
Whether to ignore the |
environment-variables | Specifies key/value pair environment variables. |
heap-size |
Sets the value of the |
java-agent |
Sets the value of the |
java-home |
Sets the value of the |
jvm-options | Specifies any additional JVM options needed. |
launch-command |
Specifies an operating system level command to prefix before the |
max-heap-size |
Sets the value of the |
max-permgen-size | Sets the maximum size of the permanent generation. Deprecated: The JVM no longer provides a separate permanent generation space. |
permgen-size | Sets the initial permanent generation size. Deprecated: The JVM no longer provides a separate permanent generation space. |
stack-size |
Sets the value of the |
type |
Specifies which vendor provided the JVM in use. Available options are |
A.14. Mail Subsystem Attributes
The following tables describe the attributes in the mail
subsystem for mail sessions and the following mail server types:
Attribute names in these tables are listed as they appear in the management model, for example, when using the management CLI. See the schema definition file located at EAP_HOME/docs/schema/wildfly-mail_3_0.xsd
to view the elements as they appear in the XML, as there may be differences from the management model.
Attribute | Description |
---|---|
debug | Whether to enable Jakarta Mail debugging. |
from | The default "from" address to use if not set when sending. |
jndi-name | The JNDI name to which the mail session should be bound. |
Attribute | Description |
---|---|
credential-reference | Credential, from a credential store, to authenticate on the server. |
outbound-socket-binding-ref | Reference to the outbound socket binding for the mail server. |
password | The password to authenticate on the server. |
ssl | Whether the server requires SSL. |
tls | Whether the server requires TLS. |
username | The username to authenticate on the server. |
Attribute | Description |
---|---|
credential-reference | Credential, from a credential store, to authenticate on the server. |
outbound-socket-binding-ref | Reference to the outbound socket binding for the mail server. |
password | The password to authenticate on the server. |
ssl | Whether the server requires SSL. |
tls | Whether the server requires TLS. |
username | The username to authenticate on the server. |
Attribute | Description |
---|---|
credential-reference | Credential, from a credential store to authenticate on the server. |
outbound-socket-binding-ref | Reference to the outbound socket binding for the mail server. |
password | The password to authenticate on the server. |
ssl | Whether the server requires SSL. |
tls | Whether the server requires TLS. |
username | The username to authenticate on the server. |
Attribute | Description |
---|---|
credential-reference | Credential, from a credential store, to authenticate on the server. |
outbound-socket-binding-ref | Reference to the outbound socket binding for the mail server. |
password | The password to authenticate on the server. |
properties | The Jakarta Mail properties for this server. |
ssl | Whether the server requires SSL. |
tls | Whether the server requires TLS. |
username | The username to authenticate on the server. |
A.15. Root Logger Attributes
Attribute names in this table are listed as they appear in the management model, for example, when using the management CLI. See the schema definition file located at EAP_HOME/docs/schema/jboss-as-logging_3_0.xsd
to view the elements as they appear in the XML, as there may be differences from the management model.
Attribute | Description |
---|---|
filter |
Defines a simple filter type. Deprecated in favor of |
filter-spec |
An expression value that defines a filter. The following expression defines a filter that excludes log entries that do not match a pattern: |
handlers | A list of log handlers that are used by the root logger. |
level | The lowest level of log message that the root logger records. |
A filter-spec
specified for the root logger is not inherited by other handlers. Instead a filter-spec
must be specified per handler.
A.16. Log Category Attributes
Attribute names in this table are listed as they appear in the management model, for example, when using the management CLI. See the schema definition file located at EAP_HOME/docs/schema/jboss-as-logging_6_0.xsd
to view the elements as they appear in the XML, as there may be differences from the management model.
Attribute | Description |
---|---|
category | The log category from which log messages will be captured. |
filter |
Defines a simple filter type. Deprecated in favor of |
filter-spec |
An expression value that defines a filter. The following expression defines a filter that does not match a pattern: |
handlers | A list of log handlers associated with the logger. |
level | The lowest level of log message that the log category records. |
use-parent-handlers |
If set to |
A.17. Log Handler Attributes
Attribute names in these tables are listed as they appear in the management model, for example, when using the management CLI. See the schema definition file located at EAP_HOME/docs/schema/jboss-as-logging_6_0.xsd
to view the elements as they appear in the XML, as there may be differences from the management model.
Attribute | Description |
---|---|
autoflush |
If set to |
enabled |
If set to |
encoding | The character encoding scheme to be used for the output. |
filter |
Defines a simple filter type. Deprecated in favor of |
filter-spec |
An expression value that defines a filter. The following expression defines a filter that does not match a pattern: |
formatter | The log formatter used by this log handler. |
level | The lowest level of log message the log handler records. |
name | The name of the log handler. Deprecated since the handler’s address contains the name. |
named-formatter | The name of the defined formatter to be used on the handler. |
target | The system output stream where the output of the log handler is sent. This can be one of the following:
|
Attribute | Description |
---|---|
append |
If set to |
autoflush |
If set to |
enabled |
If set to |
encoding | The character encoding scheme to be used for the output. |
file |
The object that represents the file where the output of this log handler is written to. It has two configuration properties, |
filter |
Defines a simple filter type. Deprecated in favor of |
filter-spec |
An expression value that defines a filter. The following expression defines a filter that does not match a pattern: |
formatter | The log formatter used by this log handler. |
level | The lowest level of log message the log handler records. |
name | The name of the log handler. Deprecated since the handler’s address contains the name. |
named-formatter | The name of the defined formatter to be used on the handler. |
Attribute | Description |
---|---|
append |
If set to |
autoflush |
If set to |
enabled |
If set to |
encoding | The character encoding scheme to be used for the output. |
file |
Object that represents the file to which the output of this log handler is written. It has two configuration properties, |
filter |
Defines a simple filter type. Deprecated in favor of |
filter-spec |
An expression value that defines a filter. The following expression defines a filter that does not match a pattern: |
formatter | The log formatter used by this log handler. |
level | The lowest level of log message the log handler records. |
name | The name of the log handler. Deprecated since the handler’s address contains the name. |
named-formatter | The name of the defined formatter to be used on the handler. |
suffix |
This string is included in the suffix appended to rotated logs. The format of the |
Attribute | Description |
---|---|
append |
If set to |
autoflush |
If set to |
enabled |
If set to |
encoding | The character encoding scheme to be used for the output. |
file |
Object that represents the file where the output of this log handler is written to. It has two configuration properties, |
filter |
Defines a simple filter type. Deprecated in favor of |
filter-spec |
An expression value that defines a filter. The following expression defines a filter that does not match a pattern: |
formatter | The log formatter used by this log handler. |
level | The lowest level of log message the log handler records. |
max-backup-index |
The maximum number of rotated logs that are kept. When this number is reached, the oldest log is reused. The default is
If the |
name | The name of the log handler. Deprecated since the handler’s address contains the name. |
named-formatter | The name of the defined formatter to be used on the handler. |
rotate-on-boot |
If set to |
rotate-size |
The maximum size that the log file can reach before it is rotated. A single character appended to the number indicates the size units: |
suffix |
This string is included in the suffix appended to rotated logs. The format of the |
Attribute | Description |
---|---|
append |
If set to |
autoflush |
If set to |
enabled |
If set to |
encoding | The character encoding scheme to be used for the output. |
file |
Object that represents the file where the output of this log handler is written to. It has two configuration properties, |
filter-spec |
An expression value that defines a filter. The following expression defines a filter that does not match a pattern: |
formatter | The log formatter used by this log handler. |
level | The lowest level of log message the log handler records. |
max-backup-index |
The maximum number of rotated logs that are kept. When this number is reached, the oldest log is reused. The default is
If the |
name | The name of the log handler. Deprecated since the handler’s address contains the name. |
named-formatter | The name of the defined formatter to be used on the handler. |
rotate-on-boot |
If set to |
rotate-size |
The maximum size that the log file can reach before it is rotated. A single character appended to the number indicates the size units: |
suffix |
This string is included in the suffix appended to rotated logs. The format of the |
Attribute | Description |
---|---|
app-name |
The app name used when formatting the message in RFC5424 format. By default the app name is |
enabled |
If set to |
facility | The facility as defined by RFC-5424 and RFC-3164. |
hostname | The name of the host from which the messages are being sent. For example, the name of the host the application server is running on. |
level | The lowest level of log message the log handler records. |
port | The port on which the syslog server is listening. |
server-address | The address of the syslog server. |
syslog-format | Formats the log message according to the RFC specification. |
named-formatter | Formats the message of the syslog payload. With this attribute, you can customize the message as required. |
Attribute | Description |
---|---|
autoflush | Whether to automatically flush after each write. |
block-on-reconnect |
If set to |
enabled |
If set to |
encoding | The character encoding used by this handler |
filter-spec |
An expression value that defines a filter. The following expression defines a filter that does not match a pattern: |
level | The lowest level of log message the log handler records. |
named-formatter | The name of the defined formatter to be used on the handler. |
outbound-socket-binding-ref | The reference to the outbound socket binding for the socket connection. |
protocol |
The protocol the socket should communicate over. Allowed values are |
ssl-context |
The reference to the defined SSL context. This is only used if |
Attribute | Description |
---|---|
class | The logging handler class to be used. |
enabled |
If set to |
encoding | The character encoding scheme to be used for the output. |
filter |
Defines a simple filter type. Deprecated in favor of |
filter-spec |
An expression value that defines a filter. The following expression defines a filter that does not match a pattern: |
formatter | The log formatter used by this log handler. |
level | The lowest level of log message the log handler records. |
module | The module one which the logging handler depends. |
name | The name of the log handler. Deprecated since the handler’s address contains the name. |
named-formatter | The name of the defined formatter to be used on the handler. |
properties | The properties used for the logging handler. |
Attribute | Description |
---|---|
enabled |
If set to |
filter |
Defines a simple filter type. Deprecated in favor of |
filter-spec |
An expression value that defines a filter. The following expression defines a filter that does not match a pattern: |
level | The lowest level of log message the log handler records. |
name | The name of the log handler. Deprecated since the handler’s address contains the name. |
overflow-action |
How this handler responds when its queue length is exceeded. This can be set to |
queue-length | Maximum number of log messages that will be held by this handler while waiting for sub-handlers to respond. |
subhandlers | The list of log handlers to which this async handler passes its log messages. |
A.18. Log Formatter Attributes
Symbol | Description |
---|---|
%c | The category of the logging event. |
%p | The level of the log entry (INFO, DEBUG, etc.). |
%P | The localized level of the log entry. |
%d |
The current date/time ( |
%r | The relative time (milliseconds since the log was initialized). |
%z |
The time zone, which must be specified before the date ( |
%k | A log resource key (used for localization of log messages). |
%m | The log message (including exception trace). |
%s | The simple log message (no exception trace). |
%e | The exception stack trace (no extended module information). |
%E | The exception stack trace (with extended module information). |
%t | The name of the current thread. |
%n | A newline character. |
%C | The class of the code calling the log method (slow). |
%F | The filename of the class calling the log method (slow). |
%l | The source location of the code calling the log method (slow). |
%L | The line number of the code calling the log method (slow). |
%M | The method of the code calling the log method (slow). |
%x | The Nested Diagnostic Context. |
%X | The Message Diagnostic Context. |
%% |
A literal percent ( |
Attribute | Description |
---|---|
date-format |
The date-time format pattern. The pattern must be a valid |
exception-output-type | Indicates how the cause of the logged message, if one is available, is added to the JSON output. The allowed values are:
|
key-overrides | Allows the names of the keys for the JSON properties to be overridden. |
meta-data | Sets the metadata to be used in the JSON formatter. |
pretty-print | Whether or not pretty printing should be used when formatting. |
print-details | Whether or not details should be printed. The details include the source class name, source file name, source method name, source module name, source module version and source line number. Note Printing the details can be expensive as the values are retrieved from the caller. |
record-delimiter | The value to be used to indicate the end of a record. If set to null no delimiter will be used at the end of the record. The default value is a line feed. |
zone-id | The zone ID for formatting the date and time. The system default is used if left undefined. |
Attribute | Description |
---|---|
date-format |
The date-time format pattern. The pattern must be a valid |
exception-output-type | Indicates how the cause of the logged message, if one is available, is added to the XML output. The allowed values are:
|
key-overrides | Allows the names of the keys for the XML properties to be overridden. |
meta-data | Sets the meta data to use in the XML format. Properties are added to each log message. |
namespace-uri |
Sets the namespace URI used for each record if print-namespace attribute is true. Note that if no namespace-uri is defined and there are overridden keys no namespace will be written regardless if the |
pretty-print | Whether or not pretty printing should be used when formatting. |
print-details | Whether or not details should be printed. The details include the source class name, source file name, source method name, source module name, source module version and source line number. Note Printing the details can be expensive as the values are retrieved from the caller. |
record-delimiter | The value to be used to indicate the end of a record. If this is null, no delimiter is used at the end of the record. The default value is a line feed. |
zone-id | The zone ID for formatting the date and time. The system default is used if left undefined. |
A.19. Datasource Connection URLs
Datasource | Connection URL |
---|---|
IBM DB2 | jdbc:db2://SERVER_NAME:PORT/DATABASE_NAME |
MariaDB | jdbc:mariadb://SERVER_NAME:PORT/DATABASE_NAME |
MariaDB Galera Cluster | jdbc:mariadb://SERVER_NAME:PORT,SERVER_NAME:PORT/DATABASE_NAME |
Microsoft SQL Server | jdbc:sqlserver://SERVER_NAME:PORT;DatabaseName=DATABASE_NAME |
MySQL | jdbc:mysql://SERVER_NAME:PORT/DATABASE_NAME |
Oracle | jdbc:oracle:thin:@SERVER_NAME:PORT:ORACLE_SID |
PostgreSQL | jdbc:postgresql://SERVER_NAME:PORT/DATABASE_NAME |
Sybase | jdbc:sybase:Tds:SERVER_NAME:PORT/DATABASE_NAME |
A.20. Datasource Attributes
Attribute names in this table are listed as they appear in the management model, for example, when using the management CLI. See the schema definition file located at EAP_HOME/docs/schema/wildfly-datasources_5_0.xsd
to view the elements as they appear in the XML, as there may be differences from the management model.
Attribute | Datasource Type | Description |
---|---|---|
allocation-retry | Non-XA, XA |
The number of times that allocating a connection should be tried before throwing an exception. The default is |
allocation-retry-wait-millis | Non-XA, XA |
The amount of time, in milliseconds, to wait between retrying to allocate a connection. The default is |
allow-multiple-users | Non-XA, XA |
Whether multiple users will access the datasource through the |
authentication-context | Non-XA, XA |
The Elytron authentication context which defines the |
background-validation | Non-XA, XA |
Whether connections should be validated on a background thread versus being validated prior to use. Background validation is typically not to be used with |
background-validation-millis | Non-XA, XA | The frequency, in milliseconds, that background validation will run. |
blocking-timeout-wait-millis | Non-XA, XA | The maximum time, in milliseconds, to block while waiting for a connection before throwing an exception. Note that this blocks only while waiting for locking a connection, and will never throw an exception if creating a new connection takes an inordinately long time. |
capacity-decrementer-class | Non-XA, XA | Class defining the policy for decrementing connections in the pool. |
capacity-decrementer-properties | Non-XA, XA | Properties to be injected in the class defining the policy for decrementing connections in the pool. |
capacity-incrementer-class | Non-XA, XA | Class defining the policy for incrementing connections in the pool. |
capacity-incrementer-properties | Non-XA, XA | Properties to be injected in the class defining the policy for incrementing connections in the pool. |
check-valid-connection-sql | Non-XA, XA | An SQL statement to check validity of a pool connection. This may be called when a managed connection is obtained from the pool. |
connectable | Non-XA, XA | Enable the use of CMR, which means that a local resource can reliably participate in an XA transaction. |
connection-listener-class | Non-XA, XA |
Specifies class name extending |
connection-listener-property | Non-XA, XA |
Properties to be injected into the class specified in the |
connection-properties | Non-XA Only |
Arbitrary string name/value pair connection properties to pass to the |
connection-url | Non-XA Only | The JDBC driver connection URL. |
credential-reference | Non-XA, XA | Credential, from a credential store, to authenticate on datasource. |
datasource-class | Non-XA Only | The fully-qualified name of the JDBC datasource class. |
driver-class | Non-XA Only | The fully-qualified name of the JDBC driver class. |
driver-name | Non-XA, XA | Defines the JDBC driver the datasource should use. It is a symbolic name matching the name of installed driver. If the driver is deployed as JAR, the name is the name of the deployment. |
elytron-enabled | Non-XA, XA |
Enables Elytron security for handling authentication of connections. The Elytron |
enabled | Non-XA, XA | Whether the datasource should be enabled. |
enlistment-trace | Non-XA, XA |
Whether enlistment traces should be recorded. This is |
exception-sorter-class-name | Non-XA, XA |
An instance of |
exception-sorter-properties | Non-XA, XA | The exception sorter properties. |
flush-strategy | Non-XA, XA | Specifies how the pool should be flushed in case of an error. Valid values are:
|
idle-timeout-minutes | Non-XA, XA |
The maximum time, in minutes, a connection may be idle before being closed. If not specified, the default is |
initial-pool-size | Non-XA, XA | The initial number of connections a pool should hold. |
interleaving | XA Only | Whether to enable interleaving for XA connections. |
jndi-name | Non-XA, XA | The unique JNDI name for the datasource. |
jta | Non-XA Only | Enable JTA integration. |
max-pool-size | Non-XA, XA | The maximum number of connections that a pool can hold. |
mcp | Non-XA, XA |
The |
min-pool-size | Non-XA, XA | The minimum number of connections that a pool can hold. |
new-connection-sql | Non-XA, XA | An SQL statement to execute whenever a connection is added to the connection pool. |
no-recovery | XA Only | Whether the connection pool should be excluded from recovery. |
no-tx-separate-pool | XA Only |
Whether to create a separate sub-pool for each context. This may be required for some Oracle datasources, which may not allow XA connections to be used both inside and outside of a JTA transaction. Using this option will cause your total pool size to be twice the |
pad-xid | XA Only | Whether to pad the Xid. |
password | Non-XA, XA | The password to use when creating a new connection. |
pool-fair | Non-XA, XA |
Defines if pool should be fair. This setting is part of a |
pool-prefill | Non-XA, XA | Whether the pool should be prefilled. |
pool-use-strict-min | Non-XA, XA |
Whether |
prepared-statements-cache-size | Non-XA, XA | The number of prepared statements per connection in a Least Recently Used (LRU) cache. |
query-timeout | Non-XA, XA | The timeout for queries, in seconds. The default is no timeout. |
reauth-plugin-class-name | Non-XA, XA | The fully-qualified class name of the reauthentication plugin implementation to reauthenticate physical connections. |
reauth-plugin-properties | Non-XA, XA | The properties for the reauthentication plugin. |
recovery-authentication-context | XA Only |
The Elytron authentication context which defines the |
recovery-credential-reference | XA Only | Credential, from a credential store, to authenticate on datasource. |
recovery-elytron-enabled | XA Only |
Enables Elytron security for handling authentication of connections for recovery. The Elytron |
recovery-password | XA Only | The password to use to connect to the resource for recovery. |
recovery-plugin-class-name | XA Only | The fully-qualified class name of the recovery plugin implementation. |
recovery-plugin-properties | XA Only | The properties for the recovery plugin. |
recovery-security-domain | XA Only | The security domain to use to connect to the resource for recovery. |
recovery-username | XA Only | The user name to use to connect to the resource for recovery. |
same-rm-override | XA Only |
Whether the |
security-domain | Non-XA, XA | The name of a JAAS security-manager which handles authentication. This name correlates to the application-policy/name attribute of the JAAS login configuration. |
set-tx-query-timeout | Non-XA, XA | Whether to set the query timeout based on the time remaining until transaction timeout. Any configured query timeout will be used if no transaction exists. |
share-prepared-statements | Non-XA, XA |
Whether JBoss EAP should cache, instead of close or terminate, the underlying physical statement when the wrapper supplied to the application is closed by application code. The default is |
spy | Non-XA, XA |
Enable spy functionality on the JDBC layer. This logs all JDBC traffic to the datasource. Note that the logging category |
stale-connection-checker-class-name | Non-XA, XA |
An instance of |
stale-connection-checker-properties | Non-XA, XA | The stale connection checker properties. |
statistics-enabled | Non-XA, XA |
Whether runtime statistics are enabled. The default is |
track-statements | Non-XA, XA | Whether to check for unclosed statements when a connection is returned to a pool and a statement is returned to the prepared statement cache. If false, statements are not tracked. Valid values:
|
tracking | Non-XA, XA | Whether to track connection handles across transaction boundaries. |
transaction-isolation | Non-XA, XA |
The
|
url-delimiter | Non-XA, XA | The delimiter for URLs in connection-url for High Availability (HA) datasources. |
url-property | XA Only |
The property for the |
url-selector-strategy-class-name | Non-XA, XA |
A class that implements |
use-ccm | Non-XA, XA | Enable the cached connection manager. |
use-fast-fail | Non-XA, XA | If true, fail a connection allocation on the first attempt if the connection is invalid. If false, keep trying until the pool is exhausted. |
use-java-context | Non-XA, XA | Whether to bind the datasource into global JNDI. |
use-try-lock | Non-XA, XA |
A timeout value for internal locks. This attempts to obtain the lock for the configured number of seconds, before timing out, rather than failing immediately if the lock is unavailable. Uses |
user-name | Non-XA, XA | The user name to use when creating a new connection. |
valid-connection-checker-class-name | Non-XA, XA |
An implementation of |
valid-connection-checker-properties | Non-XA, XA | The valid connection checker properties. |
validate-on-match | Non-XA, XA |
Whether connection validation is performed when a connection factory attempts to match a managed connection. This should be used when a client must have a connection validated prior to use. Validate-on-match is typically not to be used with |
wrap-xa-resource | XA Only |
Whether to wrap the XAResource in an |
xa-datasource-class | XA Only |
The fully-qualified name of the |
xa-datasource-properties | XA Only | String name/value pair of XA datasource properties. |
xa-resource-timeout | XA Only |
If non-zero, this value is passed to the |
Attribute | Datasource Type | Description |
---|---|---|
datasource-class-info | Non-XA, XA |
The available properties for the |
A.21. Datasource Statistics
Name | Description |
---|---|
ActiveCount | The number of active connections. Each of the connections is either in use by an application or available in the pool. |
AvailableCount | The number of available connections in the pool. |
AverageBlockingTime | The average time spent blocking on obtaining an exclusive lock on the pool. This value is in milliseconds. |
AverageCreationTime | The average time spent creating a connection. This value is in milliseconds. |
AverageGetTime | The average time spent obtaining a connection. This value is in milliseconds. |
AveragePoolTime | The average time that a connection spent in the pool.This value is in milliseconds. |
AverageUsageTime | The average time spent using a connection. This value is in milliseconds. |
BlockingFailureCount | The number of failures trying to obtain a connection. |
CreatedCount | The number of connections created. |
DestroyedCount | The number of connections destroyed. |
IdleCount | The number of connections that are currently idle. |
InUseCount | The number of connections currently in use. |
MaxCreationTime | The maximum time it took to create a connection. This value is in milliseconds. |
MaxGetTime | The maximum time for obtaining a connection. This value is in milliseconds. |
MaxPoolTime | The maximum time for a connection in the pool. This value is in milliseconds. |
MaxUsageTime | The maximum time using a connection. This value is in milliseconds. |
MaxUsedCount | The maximum number of connections used. |
MaxWaitCount | The maximum number of requests waiting for a connection at the same time. |
MaxWaitTime | The maximum time spent waiting for an exclusive lock on the pool. This value is in milliseconds. |
TimedOut | The number of timed out connections. |
TotalBlockingTime | The total time spent waiting for an exclusive lock on the pool. This value is in milliseconds. |
TotalCreationTime | The total time spent creating connections. This value is in milliseconds. |
TotalGetTime | The total time spent obtaining connections. This value is in milliseconds. |
TotalPoolTime | The total time spent by connections in the pool. This value is in milliseconds. |
TotalUsageTime | The total time spent using connections. This value is in milliseconds. |
WaitCount | The number of requests that had to wait to obtain a connection. |
XACommitAverageTime | The average time for an XAResource commit invocation. This value is in milliseconds. |
XACommitCount | The number of XAResource commit invocations. |
XACommitMaxTime | The maximum time for an XAResource commit invocation. This value is in milliseconds. |
XACommitTotalTime | The total time for all XAResource commit invocations. This value is in milliseconds. |
XAEndAverageTime | The average time for an XAResource end invocation. This value is in milliseconds. |
XAEndCount | The number of XAResource end invocations. |
XAEndMaxTime | The maximum time for an XAResource end invocation. This value is in milliseconds. |
XAEndTotalTime | The total time for all XAResource end invocations. This value is in milliseconds. |
XAForgetAverageTime | The average time for an XAResource forget invocation. This value is in milliseconds. |
XAForgetCount | The number of XAResource forget invocations. |
XAForgetMaxTime | The maximum time for an XAResource forget invocation. This value is in milliseconds. |
XAForgetTotalTime | The total time for all XAResource forget invocations. This value is in milliseconds. |
XAPrepareAverageTime | The average time for an XAResource prepare invocation. This value is in milliseconds. |
XAPrepareCount | The number of XAResource prepare invocations. |
XAPrepareMaxTime | The maximum time for an XAResource prepare invocation. This value is in milliseconds. |
XAPrepareTotalTime | The total time for all XAResource prepare invocations. This value is in milliseconds. |
XARecoverAverageTime | The average time for an XAResource recover invocation. This value is in milliseconds. |
XARecoverCount | The number of XAResource recover invocations. |
XARecoverMaxTime | The maximum time for an XAResource recover invocation. This value is in milliseconds. |
XARecoverTotalTime | The total time for all XAResource recover invocations. This value is in milliseconds. |
XARollbackAverageTime | The average time for an XAResource rollback invocation. This value is in milliseconds. |
XARollbackCount | The number of XAResource rollback invocations. |
XARollbackMaxTime | The maximum time for an XAResource rollback invocation. This value is in milliseconds. |
XARollbackTotalTime | The total time for all XAResource rollback invocations. This value is in milliseconds. |
XAStartAverageTime | The average time for an XAResource start invocation. This value is in milliseconds. |
XAStartCount | The number of XAResource start invocations. |
XAStartMaxTime | The maximum time for an XAResource start invocation. This value is in milliseconds. |
XAStartTotalTime | The total time for all XAResource start invocations. This value is in milliseconds. |
Name | Description |
---|---|
PreparedStatementCacheAccessCount | The number of times that the statement cache was accessed. |
PreparedStatementCacheAddCount | The number of statements added to the statement cache. |
PreparedStatementCacheCurrentSize | The number of prepared and callable statements currently cached in the statement cache. |
PreparedStatementCacheDeleteCount | The number of statements discarded from the cache. |
PreparedStatementCacheHitCount | The number of times that statements from the cache were used. |
PreparedStatementCacheMissCount | The number of times that a statement request could not be satisfied with a statement from the cache. |
A.22. Agroal Datasource Attributes
Attribute names in this table are listed as they appear in the management model, for example, when using the management CLI. See the schema definition file located at EAP_HOME/docs/schema/wildfly-agroal_1_0.xsd
to view the elements as they appear in the XML, as there may be differences from the management model.
Attribute | Description |
---|---|
connectable | Whether to enable CMR (Commit Markable Resource) functionality on this datasource. This applies to non-XA datasources only. |
jndi-name | Specifies the JNDI name for the datasource. |
jta | Whether to enable JTA integration. This applies to non-XA datasources only. |
statistics-enabled |
Whether to enable statistics for this datasource. Defaults to |
Attribute | Description |
---|---|
authentication-context |
Reference to an authentication context in the |
connection-properties | Properties to be passed to the JDBC driver when creating a connection. |
credential-reference | Credential, from a credential store, to authenticate with. |
driver | A unique reference to the JDBC driver. |
new-connection-sql | A SQL statement to be executed on a connection after creation. |
password | The password to use for basic authentication with the database. |
transaction-isolation |
Set the |
url | The JDBC driver connection URL. |
username | The username to use for basic authentication with the database. |
Attribute | Description |
---|---|
background-validation | The time, in milliseconds, between background validation runs. |
blocking-timeout | The maximum time, in milliseconds, to block while waiting for a connection before throwing an exception. |
idle-removal | The time, in minutes, that a connection must be idle before it can be removed. |
initial-size | The initial number of connections the pool should hold. |
leak-detection | The time, in milliseconds, that a connection must be held before a leak warning. |
max-size | The maximum number of connections in the pool. |
min-size | The minimum number of connections the pool should hold. |
A.23. Transaction Manager Configuration Options
Attribute names in this table are listed as they appear in the management model, for example, when using the management CLI. See the schema definition file located at EAP_HOME/docs/schema/wildfly-txn_5_0.xsd
to view the elements as they appear in the XML, as there may be differences from the management model.
Attribute | Description |
---|---|
default-timeout |
The default transaction timeout. This defaults to |
enable-statistics |
Deprecated in favor of |
enable-tsm-status |
Whether to enable the transaction status manager (TSM) service, which is used for out-of-process recovery. This option is not supported, as running an out-of-process recovery manager to contact the |
hornetq-store-enable-async-io |
Deprecated in favor of |
jdbc-action-store-drop-table |
Whether JDBC action store should drop tables. The default is |
jdbc-action-store-table-prefix | Optional prefix for table used to write transaction logs in configured JDBC action store. |
jdbc-communication-store-drop-table |
Whether JDBC communication store should drop tables. The default is |
jdbc-communication-store-table-prefix | Optional prefix for table used to write transaction logs in configured JDBC communication store. |
jdbc-state-store-drop-table |
Whether JDBC state store should drop tables. The default is |
jdbc-state-store-table-prefix | Optional prefix for table used to write transaction logs in configured JDBC state store. |
jdbc-store-datasource |
JNDI name of non-XA datasource used. Datasource should be defined in the |
journal-store-enable-async-io |
Whether |
jts |
Whether to use Java Transaction Service (JTS) transactions. Defaults to |
maximum-timeout |
If a transaction is set to have a transaction timeout of |
node-identifier | The node identifier for the transaction manager. If this option is not set, you will see a warning upon server startup. This option is required in the following situations:
The node-identifier must be unique for each transaction manager as it is required to enforce data integrity during recovery. The node-identifier must also be unique for JTA because multiple nodes may interact with the same resource manager or share a transaction object store. |
object-store-path |
A relative or absolute file system path where the transaction manager object store stores data. By default relative to the |
object-store-relative-to |
References a global path configuration in the domain model. The default value is the data directory for JBoss EAP, which is the value of the property |
process-id-socket-binding |
The name of the socket binding configuration to use if the transaction manager should use a socket-based process ID. Will be |
process-id-socket-max-ports | The transaction manager creates a unique identifier for each transaction log. Two different mechanisms are provided for generating unique identifiers: a socket-based mechanism and a mechanism based on the process identifier of the process.
In the case of the socket-based identifier, a socket is opened and its port number is used for the identifier. If the port is already in use, the next port is probed, until a free one is found. The process-id-socket-max-ports represents the maximum number of sockets the transaction manager will try before failing. The default value is |
process-id-uuid |
Set to |
recovery-listener |
Whether or not the transaction recovery process should listen on a network socket. Defaults to |
socket-binding |
Specifies the name of the socket binding used by the transaction periodic recovery listener when |
statistics-enabled |
Whether statistics should be enabled. The default is |
status-socket-binding | Specifies the socket binding to use for the transaction status manager. This configuration option is not supported. |
use-hornetq-store |
Deprecated in favor of |
use-jdbc-store |
Use the JDBC store for writing transaction logs. Set to |
use-journal-store |
Use Apache ActiveMQ Artemis journaled storage mechanisms instead of file-based storage for the transaction logs. This is disabled by default, but can improve I/O performance. It is not recommended for JTS transactions on separate transaction managers. When changing this option, the server has to be restarted using the |
Attribute | Description |
---|---|
expose-all-logs |
Whether to expose all logs. The default is |
type |
Specifies the implementation type of the logging store. The default is |
Attribute | Description |
---|---|
batch-size |
The batch size for this CMR resource. The default is |
immediate-cleanup |
Whether to perform immediate cleanup for this CMR resource. The default is |
jndi-name | The JNDI name of this CMR resource. |
name |
The table name for storing XIDs. The default is |
A.24. IIOP Subsystem Attributes
Attribute names in this table are listed as they appear in the management model, for example, when using the management CLI. See the schema definition file located at EAP_HOME/docs/schema/wildfly-iiop-openjdk_3_0.xsd
to view the elements as they appear in the XML, as there may be differences from the management model.
Attribute | Description |
---|---|
add-component-via-interceptor | Indicates whether SSL components should be added by an IOR interceptor. Deprecated. |
auth-method |
The authentication method. Valid values are |
authentication-context |
The name of the authentication context used when the security initializer is set to |
caller-propagation |
Indicates whether the caller identity should be propagated in the SAS context. Valid values are |
client-requires |
Value that indicates the client SSL required parameters. Valid values are |
client-requires-ssl | Indicates whether IIOP connections from the server require SSL. |
client-ssl-context | The name of the SSL context used to create client-side SSL sockets. |
client-supports |
Value that indicates the client SSL supported parameters. Valid values are |
confidentiality |
Indicates whether the transport must require confidentiality protection or not. Valid values are |
detect-misordering |
Indicates whether the transport must require misordering detection or not. Valid values are |
detect-replay |
Indicates whether the transport must require replay detection or not. Valid values are |
export-corbaloc |
Indicates whether the root context should be exported as |
giop-version | The GIOP version to be used. |
high-water-mark |
TCP connection cache parameter. Each time the number of connections exceeds this value, the ORB tries to reclaim connections. The number of reclaimed connections is specified by the |
integrity |
Indicates whether the transport must require integrity protection or not. Valid values are |
number-to-reclaim |
TCP connection cache parameter. Each time the number of connections exceeds the |
persistent-server-id | Persistent ID of the server. Persistent object references are valid across many activations of the server and they identify it using this property. As a result of that, many activations of the same server should have this property set to the same value, and different server instances running on the same host should have different server IDs. |
properties | A list of generic key/value properties. |
realm | The authentication service realm name. |
required | Indicates whether authentication is required. |
root-context | The naming service root context. |
security |
Indicates whether the security interceptors are to be installed. Valid values are |
security-domain | The name of the security domain that holds the keystores and truststores that will be used to establish SSL connections. |
server-requires |
Value that indicates the server SSL required parameters. Valid values are |
server-requires-ssl | Indicates whether IIOP connections to the server require SSL. |
server-ssl-context | The name of the SSL context used to create server-side SSL sockets. |
server-supports |
Value that indicates the server SSL supported parameters. Valid values are |
socket-binding | The name of the socket binding configuration that specifies the ORB port. |
ssl-socket-binding | The name of the socket binding configuration that specifies the ORB SSL port. |
support-ssl | Indicates whether SSL is supported. |
transactions |
Indicates whether the transactions interceptors are to be installed or not. Valid values are |
trust-in-client |
Indicates if the transport must require trust in client to be established. Valid values are |
trust-in-target |
Indicates if the transport must require trust in target to be established. Valid values are |
A.25. Resource Adapter Attributes
The following tables describe the resource adapter attributes.
Attribute names in these tables are listed as they appear in the management model, for example, when using the management CLI. See the schema definition file located at EAP_HOME/docs/schema/wildfly-resource-adapters_5_0.xsd
to view the elements as they appear in the XML, as there may be differences from the management model.
Attribute | Description |
---|---|
archive | The resource adapter archive. |
beanvalidationgroups | The bean validation groups that should be used. |
bootstrap-context | The unique name of the bootstrap context that should be used. |
config-properties | Custom defined config properties. |
module | The module from which the resource adapter will be loaded. |
statistics-enabled | Whether runtime statistics are enabled or not. |
transaction-support |
The transaction support level of the resource adapter. Valid values are |
wm-elytron-security-domain | Defines the name of the Elytron security domain that should be used. |
wm-security |
Toggle on/off |
wm-security-default-groups |
A default groups list that should be added to the used |
wm-security-default-principal |
A default principal name that should be added to the used |
wm-security-domain | The name of the security domain that should be used. |
wm-security-mapping-groups | List of groups mappings. |
wm-security-mapping-required | Defines if a mapping is required for security credentials. |
wm-security-mapping-users | List of user mappings. |
If your resource adapter is using bootstrap-context
along with a work manager that has elytron-enabled
set to true
, you must use the wm-elytron-security-domain
attribute instead of the wm-security-domain
attribute for security domain specification.
Attribute | Description |
---|---|
class-name | The fully qualified class name of an administration object. |
enabled | Specifies if the administration object should be enabled. |
jndi-name | The JNDI name for the administration object. |
use-java-context | Setting this to false will bind the object into global JNDI. |
Attribute | Description |
---|---|
allocation-retry | Indicates the number of times that allocating a connection should be tried before throwing an exception. |
allocation-retry-wait-millis | The amount of time, in milliseconds, to wait between retrying to allocate a connection. |
authentication-context |
The Elytron authentication context which defines the |
authentication-context-and-application |
Indicates that either application-supplied parameters, such as from |
background-validation | Specifies that connections should be validated on a background thread versus being validated prior to use. Changing this value requires a server restart. |
background-validation-millis | The amount of time, in milliseconds, that background validation will run. Changing this value requires a server restart. |
blocking-timeout-wait-millis | The maximum time, in milliseconds, to block while waiting for a connection before throwing an exception. Note that this blocks only while waiting for locking a connection, and will never throw an exception if creating a new connection takes an inordinately long time. |
capacity-decrementer-class | Class defining the policy for decrementing connections in the pool. |
capacity-decrementer-properties | Properties to inject in class defining the policy for decrementing connections in the pool. |
capacity-incrementer-class | Class defining the policy for incrementing connections in the pool. |
capacity-incrementer-properties | Properties to inject in class defining the policy for incrementing connections in the pool. |
class-name | The fully qualified class name of a managed connection factory or admin object. |
connectable | Enable the use of CMR. This feature means that a local resource can reliably participate in an XA transaction. |
elytron-enabled |
Enables Elytron security for handling authentication of connections. The Elytron |
enabled | Specifies if the resource adapter should be enabled. |
enlistment | Specifies if lazy enlistment should be used if supported by the resource adapter. |
enlistment-trace |
Specifies if JBoss EAP/IronJacamar should record enlistment traces. This is |
flush-strategy | Specifies how the pool should be flushed in case of an error. Valid values are:
|
idle-timeout-minutes |
The maximum time, in minutes, a connection may be idle before being closed. The actual maximum time depends also on the |
initial-pool-size | The initial number of connections a pool should hold. |
interleaving | Specifies whether to enable interleaving for XA connections. |
jndi-name | The JNDI name for the connection factory. |
max-pool-size | The maximum number of connections for a pool. No more connections will be created in each sub-pool. |
mcp |
The |
min-pool-size | The minimum number of connections for a pool. |
no-recovery | Specifies if the connection pool should be excluded from recovery. |
no-tx-separate-pool | Oracle does not like XA connections getting used both inside and outside a JTA transaction. To workaround the problem you can create separate sub-pools for the different contexts. |
pad-xid | Specifies whether the Xid should be padded. |
pool-fair | Specifies if pool use should be fair. |
pool-prefill | Specifies if the pool should be prefilled. Changing this value requires a server restart. |
pool-use-strict-min |
Specifies if the |
recovery-authentication-context |
The Elytron authentication context used for recovery. If no |
recovery-credential-reference | Credential, from a credential store, to authenticate on recovery of the connection. |
recovery-elytron-enabled |
Indicates that an Elytron authentication context will be used for recovery. The default is |
recovery-password | The password used for recovery. |
recovery-plugin-class-name | The fully qualified class name of the recovery plugin implementation. |
recovery-plugin-properties | The properties for the recovery plugin. |
recovery-security-domain | The security domain used for recovery. |
recovery-username | The user name used for recovery. |
same-rm-override |
Unconditionally set whether |
security-application |
Indicates that application-supplied parameters, such as from |
security-domain |
The security domain which defines the |
security-domain-and-application |
Indicates that either application-supplied parameters, such as from |
sharable | Enable the use of sharable connections, which allows lazy association to be enabled if supported. |
tracking | Specifies if IronJacamar should track connection handles across transaction boundaries. |
use-ccm | Enable the use of a cached connection manager. |
use-fast-fail |
When set to |
use-java-context |
Setting this to |
validate-on-match | Specifies if connection validation should be done when a connection factory attempts to match a managed connection. This is typically exclusive to the use of background validation. |
wrap-xa-resource |
Specifies whether |
xa-resource-timeout |
The value is passed to |
A.26. Resource Adapter Statistics
Name | Description |
---|---|
ActiveCount | The number of active connections. Each of the connections is either in use by an application or available in the pool |
AvailableCount | The number of available connections in the pool. |
AverageBlockingTime | The average time spent blocking on obtaining an exclusive lock on the pool. The value is in milliseconds. |
AverageCreationTime | The average time spent creating a connection. The value is in milliseconds. |
CreatedCount | The number of connections created. |
DestroyedCount | The number of connections destroyed. |
InUseCount | The number of connections currently in use. |
MaxCreationTime | The maximum time it took to create a connection. The value is in milliseconds. |
MaxUsedCount | The maximum number of connections used. |
MaxWaitCount | The maximum number of requests waiting for a connection at the same time. |
MaxWaitTime | The maximum time spent waiting for an exclusive lock on the pool. |
TimedOut | The number of timed out connections. |
TotalBlockingTime | The total time spent waiting for an exclusive lock on the pool. The value is in milliseconds. |
TotalCreationTime | The total time spent creating connections. The value is in milliseconds. |
WaitCount | The number of requests that had to wait for a connection. |
A.27. Undertow Subsystem Attributes
See the tables below for the attributes of the various elements of the undertow
subsystem.
Attribute names in these tables are listed as they appear in the management model, for example, when using the management CLI. See the schema definition file located at EAP_HOME/docs/schema/wildfly-undertow_4_0.xsd
to view the elements as they appear in the XML, as there may be differences from the management model.
Attribute | Default | Description |
---|---|---|
default-security-domain | other | The default security domain used by web deployments. |
default-server | default-server | The default server to use for deployments. |
default-servlet-container | default | The default servlet container to use for deployments. |
default-virtual-host | default-host | The default virtual host to use for deployments. |
instance-id | ${jboss.node.name} | The cluster instance ID. |
statistics-enabled | false | Whether statistics are enabled. |
Application Security Domain Attributes
The application security domain attributes has the following structure:
application-security-domain Attributes
Attribute | Default | Description |
---|---|---|
enable-jacc | false | Enable authorization using JACC. |
enable-jaspi | true | Enable JASPI authentication for the associated deployments. |
http-authentication-factory | The HTTP authentication factory to be used by deployments that reference the mapped security domain. | |
integrated-jaspi | true |
Whether integrated JASPI should be used. When set to |
override-deployment-config | false | Whether the authentication configuration in the deployment should be overridden by the factory. |
referencing-deployments | The deployments currently referencing this mapping. | |
security-domain |
The |
single-sign-on Attributes
Attribute | Default | Description |
---|---|---|
client-ssl-context | Reference to the SSL context used to secure back-channel logout connection. | |
cookie-name | JSESSIONIDSSO | Name of the cookie. |
credential-reference | The credential reference to decrypt the private key entry. | |
domain | The cookie domain that will be used. | |
http-only | false | Set cookie httpOnly attribute. |
key-alias | Alias of the private key entry used for signing and verifying back-channel logout connection. | |
key-store | Reference to keystore containing a private key entry. | |
path | / | Cookie path. |
secure | false | Set cookie secure attribute. |
Buffer Cache Attributes
Attribute | Default | Description |
---|---|---|
buffer-size | 1024 | The size of the buffers. Smaller buffers allow space to be utilized more effectively. |
buffers-per-region | 1024 | The numbers of buffers per region. |
max-regions | 10 | The maximum number of regions. This controls the maximum amount of memory that can be used for caching. |
Byte Buffer Pool Attributes
Attribute | Default | Description |
---|---|---|
buffer-size | The size, in bytes, of each buffer slice. If not specified, the size is set based on the available RAM of your system:
For performance tuning advice on this attribute, see Configuring Buffer Pools in the JBoss EAP Performance Tuning Guide. | |
direct | Boolean value that denotes if this buffer is a direct or heap pool. If not specified, the value is set based on the available RAM of your system:
Note that direct pools also have a corresponding heap pool. | |
leak-detection-percent | 0 | The percentage of buffers that should be allocated with a leak detector. |
max-pool-size | The maximum number of buffers to keep in the pool. Buffers will still be allocated above this limit, but will not be retained if the pool is full. | |
thread-local-cache-size | 12 | The size of the per-thread cache. This is a maximum size, the cache will use smart sizing to only keep buffers on the thread if the thread is actually allocating buffers. |
Servlet Container Attributes
The servlet container component has the following structure:
servlet-container Attributes
Attribute | Default | Description |
---|---|---|
allow-non-standard-wrappers | false | Whether request and response wrappers that do not extend the standard wrapper classes can be used. |
default-buffer-cache | default | The buffer cache to use for caching static resources. |
default-cookie-version | 0 | The default cookie version to use for cookies created by the application. |
default-encoding | Default encoding to use for all deployed applications. | |
default-session-timeout | 30 | The default session timeout in minutes for all applications deployed in the container. |
directory-listing | If directory listing should be enabled for default servlets. | |
disable-caching-for-secured-pages | true | Whether to set headers to disable caching for secured paged. Disabling this can cause security problems, as sensitive pages may be cached by an intermediary. |
disable-file-watch-service | false |
If set to |
disable-session-id-reuse | false |
If set to |
eager-filter-initialization | false | Whether to call filter init() on deployment start rather than when first requested. |
ignore-flush | false | Ignore flushes on the servlet output stream. In most cases these just hurt performance for no good reason. |
max-sessions | The maximum number of sessions that can be active at one time. | |
proactive-authentication | true |
Whether proactive authentication should be used. If this is |
session-id-length | 30 | Longer session ID’s are more secure. This value specifies the length of the generated session ID in bytes. The system encodes the generated session ID as a Base64 string and provides the result to the client as a session ID cookie. As a result of this processing, the server sends to the client a cookie value that is approximately 33% larger than the session ID that it originally generated. For example, a session ID length of 30 results in a cookie value length of 40. |
stack-trace-on-error | local-only |
If an error page with the stack trace should be generated on error. Values are |
use-listener-encoding | false | Use encoding defined on listener. |
mime-mapping Attributes
Attribute | Default | Description |
---|---|---|
value | The mime type for this mapping. |
crawler-session-management Attributes
Configures special session handling for crawler bots.
When using the management CLI to manage the crawler-session-management
element, it is available under settings
in the servlet-container
element. For example:
/subsystem=undertow/servlet-container=default/setting=crawler-session-management:add /subsystem=undertow/servlet-container=default/setting=crawler-session-management:read-resource
Attribute | Default | Description |
---|---|---|
session-timeout | The session timeout in seconds for sessions that are owned by crawlers. | |
user-agents | Regular expression that is used to match the user agent of a crawler. |
jsp Attributes
When using the management CLI to manage the jsp
element, it is available under settings
in the servlet-container
element. For example:
/subsystem=undertow/servlet-container=default/setting=jsp:read-resource
Attribute | Default | Description |
---|---|---|
check-interval | 0 | Check interval for JSP updates using a background thread. This has no effect for most deployments where JSP change notifications are handled using the file system notification API. This only takes effect if the file watch service is disabled. |
development | false | Enable development mode which enables reloading JSP on-the-fly. |
disabled | false | Enable the JSP container. |
display-source-fragment | true | When a runtime error occurs, attempts to display corresponding JSP source fragment. |
dump-smap | false | Write SMAP data to a file. |
error-on-use-bean-invalid-class-attribute | false | Enable errors when using a bad class in useBean. |
generate-strings-as-char-arrays | false | Generate String constants as char arrays. |
java-encoding | UTF8 | Specify the encoding used for Java sources. |
keep-generated | true | Keep the generated servlets. |
mapped-file | true | Map to the JSP source. |
modification-test-interval | 4 | Minimum amount of time between two tests for updates, in seconds. |
optimize-scriptlets | false | If JSP scriptlets should be optimized to remove string concatenation. |
recompile-on-fail | false | Retry failed JSP compilations on each request. |
scratch-dir | Specify a different work directory. | |
smap | true | Enable SMAP. |
source-vm | 1.8 | Source VM level for compilation. |
tag-pooling | true | Enable tag pooling. |
target-vm | 1.8 | Target VM level for compilation. |
trim-spaces | false | Trim some spaces from the generated servlet. |
x-powered-by | true | Enable advertising the JSP engine in x-powered-by. |
persistent-sessions Attributes
When using the management CLI to manage the persistent-sessions
element, it is available under settings
in the servlet-container
element. For example:
/subsystem=undertow/servlet-container=default/setting=persistent-sessions:add /subsystem=undertow/servlet-container=default/setting=persistent-sessions:read-resource
Attribute | Default | Description |
---|---|---|
path | The path to the persistent session data directory. If this is null, sessions will be stored in memory. | |
relative-to | The directory the path is relative to. |
session-cookie Attributes
When using the management CLI to manage the session-cookie
element, it is available under settings
in the servlet-container
element. For example:
/subsystem=undertow/servlet-container=default/setting=session-cookie:add /subsystem=undertow/servlet-container=default/setting=session-cookie:read-resource
Attribute | Default | Description |
---|---|---|
comment | Cookie comment. | |
domain | Cookie domain. | |
http-only | Whether the cookie is http-only. | |
max-age | Maximum age of the cookie. | |
name | Name of the cookie. | |
secure | Whether the cookie is secure. |
websockets Attributes
When using the management CLI to manage the websockets
element, it is available under settings
in the servlet-container
element. For example:
/subsystem=undertow/servlet-container=default/setting=websockets:read-resource
Attribute | Default | Description |
---|---|---|
buffer-pool | default | The buffer pool to use for websocket deployments. |
deflater-level | 0 | Configures the level of compression of the DEFLATE algorithm. |
dispatch-to-worker | true |
Whether callbacks should be dispatched to a worker thread. If this is |
per-message-deflate | false | Enables websocket’s per-message compression extension. |
worker | default | The worker to use for websocket deployments. |
welcome-file Attributes
Defines a welcome file and has no options.
Filter Attributes
These components can be found at /subsystem=undertow/configuration=filter
.
custom-filter Filters
Attribute | Default | Description |
---|---|---|
class-name | Class name of HttpHandler. | |
module | Module name where class can be loaded from. | |
parameters | Filter parameters. |
error-page Filters
The error pages
Attribute | Default | Description |
---|---|---|
code | Error page code. | |
path | Error page path. |
expression-filter Filters
A filter parsed from the Undertow expression language.
Attribute | Default | Description |
---|---|---|
expression | The expression that defines the filter. | |
module | Module to use to load the filter definitions. |
gzip Filters
Defines the gzip filter and has no attributes.
mod-cluster Filters
The mod-cluster filter component has the following structure:
Attribute | Default | Description |
---|---|---|
advertise-frequency | 10000 | The frequency in milliseconds that mod_cluster advertises itself on the network. |
advertise-path | / | The path that mod_cluster is registered under. |
advertise-protocol | http | The protocol that is in use. |
advertise-socket-binding | The multicast group that is used to advertise. | |
broken-node-timeout | 60000 | The amount of time that must elapse before a broken node is removed from the table. |
cached-connections-per-thread | 5 | The number of connections that will be kept alive indefinitely. |
connection-idle-timeout | 60 |
The amount of time a connection can be idle before it will be closed. Connections will not time out once the pool size is down to the configured minimum, which is configured by |
connections-per-thread | 10 | The number of connections that will be maintained to back-end servers, per IO thread. |
enable-http2 | false | Whether the load balancer should attempt to upgrade back-end connections to HTTP/2. If HTTP/2 is not supported, HTTP or HTTPS will be used as normal. |
failover-strategy | LOAD_BALANCED | The attribute that determines how a failover node is chosen, in the event that the node to which a session has affinity is not available. |
health-check-interval | 10000 | The frequency of health check pings to back-end nodes. |
http2-enable-push | true | Whether push should be enabled for HTTP/2 connections. |
http2-header-table-size | 4096 | The size of the header table used for HPACK compression, in bytes. This amount of memory will be allocated per connection for compression. Larger values use more memory but may give better compression. |
http2-initial-window-size | 65535 | The flow control window size, in bytes, that controls how quickly the client can send data to the server. |
http2-max-concurrent-streams | The maximum number of HTTP/2 streams that can be active at any time on a single connection. | |
http2-max-frame-size | 16384 | The maximum HTTP/2 frame size, in bytes. |
http2-max-header-list-size | The maximum size, in bytes, of request headers the server is prepared to accept. | |
management-access-predicate |
A predicate that is applied to incoming requests to determine if they can perform mod cluster management commands. Provides additional security on top of what is provided by limiting management to requests that originate from the | |
management-socket-binding | The socket binding of the mod_cluster management port. When using mod_cluster two HTTP listeners should be defined, a public one to handle requests, and one bound to the internal network to handle mod cluster commands. This socket binding should correspond to the internal listener, and should not be publicly accessible. | |
max-ajp-packet-size | 8192 | The maximum size, in bytes, for AJP packets. Increasing this will allow AJP to work for requests and responses that have a large amount of headers. This must be the same between load balancers and backend servers. |
max-request-time | -1 | The maximum amount of time that a request to a back-end node can take before it is killed. |
max-retries | 1 | The number of times that an attempt to retry a request will be made, if the request fails. Note If a request is not considered idempotent, it will only be retried if the proxy can be sure that it was not sent to the backend server. |
request-queue-size | 10 | The number of requests that can be queued if the connection pool is full before requests are rejected with a 503. |
security-key | The security key that is used for the mod_cluster group. All members must use the same security key. | |
security-realm |
The security realm that provides the SSL configuration. Deprecated: Use the | |
ssl-context |
The reference to the | |
use-alias | false | Whether an alias check is performed. |
worker | default | The XNIO worker that is used to send the advertise notifications. |
Attribute | Default | Description |
---|---|---|
max-attempts | The number of attempts to send the request to a back-end server. | |
sticky-session | If sticky sessions are enabled. | |
sticky-session-cookie | The session cookie name. | |
sticky-session-force |
If this is | |
sticky-session-path | The path of the sticky session cookie. | |
sticky-session-remove | Remove the session cookie if the request cannot be routed to the correct host. | |
wait-worker | The number of seconds to wait for an available worker. |
load-balancing-group Attributes
Defines a load balancing group and has no options.
Attribute | Default | Description |
---|---|---|
aliases | The nodes aliases. | |
cache-connections | The number of connections to keep alive indefinitely. | |
elected | The elected count. | |
flush-packets | If received data should be immediately flushed. | |
load | The current load of this node. | |
load-balancing-group | The load balancing group this node belongs to. | |
max-connections | The maximum number of connections per IO thread. | |
open-connections | The current number of open connections. | |
ping | The nodes ping. | |
queue-new-requests | If a request is received and there is no worker immediately available should it be queued. | |
read | The number of bytes read from the node. | |
request-queue-size | The size of the request queue. | |
status | The current status of this node. | |
timeout | The request timeout. | |
ttl |
The time connections will stay alive with no requests before being closed, if the number of connections is larger than | |
uri | The URI that the load balancer uses to connect to the node. | |
written | The number of bytes transferred to the node. |
Attribute | Default | Description |
---|---|---|
requests | The number of requests against this context. | |
status | The status of this context. |
request-limit Filters
Attribute | Default | Description |
---|---|---|
max-concurrent-requests | Maximum number of concurrent requests. | |
queue-size | Number of requests to queue before they start being rejected. |
response-header Filters
Response header filter allows you to add custom headers.
Attribute | Default | Description |
---|---|---|
header-name | The header name. | |
header-value | The header value. |
rewrite Filters
Attribute | Default | Description |
---|---|---|
redirect | false | Whether a redirect will be done instead of a rewrite. |
target | The expression that defines the target. If you are redirecting to a constant target put single quotes around the value. |
Handler Attributes
These components can be found at /subsystem=undertow/configuration=handler
.
file Attributes
Attribute | Default | Description |
---|---|---|
cache-buffer-size | 1024 | Size of the buffers. |
cache-buffers | 1024 | Number of buffers. |
case-sensitive | true |
Whether to use case-sensitive file handling. Note that setting this to |
directory-listing | false | Whether to enable directory listing. |
follow-symlink | false | Whether to enable following symbolic links. |
path | Path on the file system from where file handler will serve resources. | |
safe-symlink-paths | Paths that are safe to be targets of symbolic links. |
Using WebDAV for Static Resources
Previous versions of JBoss EAP allowed for using WebDAV with the web
subsystem, by way of the WebdavServlet
, to host static resources and enable additional HTTP methods for accessing and manipulating those files. In JBoss EAP 7, the undertow
subsystem does provide a mechanism for serving static files using a file handler, but the undertow
subsystem does not support WebDAV. If you want to use WebDAV with JBoss EAP 7, you can write a custom WebDAV servlet.
reverse-proxy attributes
The reverse-proxy handler component has the following structure:
Attribute | Default | Description |
---|---|---|
cached-connections-per-thread | 5 | The number of connections that will be kept alive indefinitely. |
connection-idle-timeout | 60 | The amount of time a connection can be idle before it will be closed. Connections will not time out once the pool size is down to the configured minimum (as configured by cached-connections-per-thread). |
connections-per-thread | 40 | The number of connections that will be maintained to back-end servers, per IO thread. |
max-request-time | -1 | The maximum time that a proxy request can be active for, before being killed. Defaults to unlimited. |
max-retries | 1 | The number of times that an attempt to retry a request will be made, if the request fails. Note If a request is not considered idempotent, it will only be retried if the proxy can be sure that it was not sent to the backend server. |
problem-server-retry | 30 | Time in seconds to wait before attempting to reconnect to a server that is down. |
request-queue-size | 10 | The number of requests that can be queued if the connection pool is full before requests are rejected with a 503. |
session-cookie-names | JSESSIONID | Comma-separated list of session cookie names. Generally this will just be JSESSIONID. |
Attribute | Default | Description |
---|---|---|
enable-http2 | false |
If |
instance-id | The instance ID, or JVM route, that will be used to enable sticky sessions. | |
outbound-socket-binding | Outbound socket binding for this host. | |
path | / | Optional path if host is using non root resource. |
scheme | http | The kind of scheme that is used. |
security-realm | The security realm that provides the SSL configuration for the connection to the host. | |
ssl-context | Reference to the SSLContext to be used by this handler. |
Server Attributes
The server component has the following structure:
server Attributes
Attribute | Default | Description |
---|---|---|
default-host | default-host | The server’s default virtual host. |
servlet-container | default | The server’s default servlet container. |
ajp-listener Attributes
Attribute | Default | Description |
---|---|---|
allow-encoded-slash | false |
If a request comes in with encoded characters, for example |
allow-equals-in-cookie-value | false | Whether to allow non-escaped equals characters in unquoted cookie values. Unquoted cookie values may not contain equals characters. If present the value ends before the equals sign. The remainder of the cookie value will be dropped. |
allow-unescaped-characters-in-url | false |
Whether to allow non-escaped characters in a URL. If set to |
always-set-keep-alive | true | Whether a Connection: keep-alive header will be added to responses, even when it is not strictly required by the specification. |
buffer-pipelined-data | false | Whether to buffer pipelined requests. |
buffer-pool | default | The AJP listener’s buffer pool. |
decode-url | true |
If this is |
disallowed-methods | ["TRACE"] | A comma-separated list of HTTP methods that are not allowed. |
enabled | true | If the listener is enabled. Deprecated: Enabled attributes can cause problems in enforcement of configuration consistency. |
max-ajp-packet-size | 8192 | The maximum supported size of AJP packets. If this is modified it has be increased on the load balancer and the back-end server. |
max-buffered-request-size | 16384 | Maximum size of a buffered request, in bytesRequests are not usually buffered, the most common case is when performing SSL renegotiation for a POST request, and the post data must be fully buffered in order to perform the renegotiation. |
max-connections |
The maximum number of concurrent connections. If no value is set in the server configuration, the limit for the number of concurrent connections is | |
max-cookies | 200 | The maximum number of cookies that will be parsed. This is used to protect against hash vulnerabilities. |
max-header-size | 1048576 | The maximum size in bytes of an HTTP request header. |
max-headers | 200 | The maximum number of headers that will be parsed. This is used to protect against hash vulnerabilities. |
max-parameters | 1000 | The maximum number of parameters that will be parsed. This is used to protect against hash vulnerabilities. This applies to both query parameters, and to POST data, but is not cumulative. For example, you can potentially have max parameters * 2 total parameters. |
max-post-size | 10485760 | The maximum size of a post that will be accepted |
no-request-timeout | 60000 | The length of time in milliseconds that the connection can be idle before it is closed by the container. |
read-timeout |
Configure a read timeout for a socket, in milliseconds. If the given amount of time elapses without a successful read taking place, the socket’s next read will throw a | |
receive-buffer | The receive buffer size. | |
record-request-start-time | false | Whether to record the request start time, to allow for request time to be logged. This has a small but measurable performance impact. |
redirect-socket | If this listener is supporting non-SSL requests, and a request is received for which a matching requires SSL transport, whether to automatically redirect the request to the socket binding port specified here. | |
request-parse-timeout | The maximum amount of time in milliseconds that can be spent parsing the request. | |
resolve-peer-address | false | Enables host DNS lookup. |
scheme | The listener scheme, can be HTTP or HTTPS. By default the scheme will be taken from the incoming AJP request. | |
secure | false |
If this is |
send-buffer | The send buffer size. | |
socket-binding | The AJP listener’s socket binding. | |
tcp-backlog | Configure a server with the specified backlog. | |
tcp-keep-alive | Configure a channel to send TCP keep-alive messages in an implementation-dependent manner. | |
url-charset | UTF-8 | URL charset. |
worker | default | The listener’s XNIO worker. |
write-timeout |
Configure a write timeout for a socket, in milliseconds. If the given amount of time elapses without a successful write taking place, the socket’s next write will throw a |
host Attributes
Attribute | Default | Description |
---|---|---|
alias | Comma-separated list of aliases for the host. | |
default-response-code | 404 | If set, this will be response code sent back in case requested context does not exist on server. |
default-web-module | ROOT.war | Default web module. |
disable-console-redirect | false |
If set to |
queue-requests-on-start | true |
If set to |
filter-ref Attributes
Attribute | Default | Description |
---|---|---|
predicate | Predicates provide a simple way of making a true/false decision based on an exchange. Many handlers have a requirement that they be applied conditionally, and predicates provide a general way to specify a condition. | |
priority | 1 |
Defines filter order. A lower number instructs the server to be included earlier in the handler chain than others above the same context. Values range from |
location Attributes
Attribute | Default | Description |
---|---|---|
handler | Default handler for this location. |
filter-ref Attributes
Attribute | Default | Description |
---|---|---|
predicate | Predicates provide a simple way of making a true/false decision based on an exchange. Many handlers have a requirement that they be applied conditionally, and predicates provide a general way to specify a condition. | |
priority | 1 | Defines filter order. It should be set to 1 or more. A higher number instructs the server to be included earlier in the handler chain than others under the same context. |
access-log Attributes
When using the management CLI to manage the access-log
element, it is available under settings
in the host
element. For example:
/subsystem=undertow/server=default-server/host=default-host/setting=access-log:add /subsystem=undertow/server=default-server/host=default-host/setting=access-log:read-resource
Attribute | Default | Description |
---|---|---|
directory | ${jboss.server.log.dir} | The directory in which to save logs. |
extended | false | Whether the log uses the extended log file format. |
pattern | common | The access log pattern. For details about the options available for this attribute, see Provided Undertow Handlers in the JBoss EAP Development Guide. Note
If you set the /subsystem=undertow/server=default-server/http-listener=default:write-attribute(name=record-request-start-time,value=true) |
predicate | Predicate that determines whether the request should be logged. | |
prefix | access_log. | Prefix for the log file name. |
relative-to | The directory the path is relative to. | |
rotate | true | Whether to rotate the access log every day. |
suffix | log | Suffix for the log file name. |
use-server-log | false | Whether the log should be written to the server log, rather than a separate file. |
worker | default | Name of the worker to use for logging. |
console-access-log Attributes
Attribute | Default | Description |
---|---|---|
attributes | {remote-host={},remote-user={},date-time={},request-line={},response-code={},bytes-sent={}} | Specifies log data to include in the console access log output, or customizations to default data. |
include-host-name | false |
Specifies whether to include the host name in the JSON structured output. If set to |
metadata | Specifies custom metadata to include in console access log output. | |
predicate | Predicate that determines whether the request should be logged. | |
worker | default | Name of the worker to use for logging. |
http-invoker Attributes
Attribute | Default | Description |
---|---|---|
http-authentication-factory | The HTTP authentication factory to use for authentication. | |
path | wildfly-services | The path that the services are installed under. |
security-realm | The legacy security realm to use for authentication. |
single-sign-on Attributes
When using the management CLI to manage the single-sign-on
element, it is available under settings
in the host
element. For example:
/subsystem=undertow/server=default-server/host=default-host/setting=single-sign-on:add /subsystem=undertow/server=default-server/host=default-host/setting=single-sign-on:read-resource
While distributed single sign-on is no different from an application perspective from previous versions of JBoss EAP, in JBoss EAP 7 the caching and distribution of authentication information is handled differently. For JBoss EAP 7, when running the ha profile, by default each host will have its own Infinispan cache which will store the relevant session and SSO cookie information. This cache is based on the default cache of the web cache container. JBoss EAP will also handle propagating information between all hosts' individual caches.
Attribute | Default | Description |
---|---|---|
cookie-name | JSESSIONIDSSO | Name of the cookie. |
domain | The cookie domain that will be used. | |
http-only | false | Set cookie httpOnly attribute. |
path | / | Cookie path. |
secure | false | Set cookie secure attribute. |
http-listener Attributes
Attribute | Default | Description |
---|---|---|
allow-encoded-slash | false |
If a request comes in with encoded characters, for example |
allow-equals-in-cookie-value | false | Whether to allow non-escaped equals characters in unquoted cookie values. Unquoted cookie values may not contain equals characters. If present the value ends before the equals sign. The remainder of the cookie value will be dropped. |
allow-unescaped-characters-in-url | false |
Whether to allow non-escaped characters in a URL. If set to |
always-set-keep-alive | true | Whether a Connection: keep-alive header will be added to responses, even when it is not strictly required by the specification. |
buffer-pipelined-data | false | Whether to buffer pipelined requests. |
buffer-pool | default | The listener’s buffer pool. |
certificate-forwarding | false |
Whether certificate forwarding should be enabled. If this is enabled then the listener will take the certificate from the |
decode-url | true | Whether the parser will decode the URL and query parameters using the selected character encoding, defaulting to UTF-8. If this is false they will not be decoded. This will allow a later handler to decode them into whatever charset is desired. |
disallowed-methods | ["TRACE"] | A comma-separated list of HTTP methods that are not allowed. |
enable-http2 | false | Whether to enable HTTP/2 support for this listener. |
enabled | true | Whether the listener is enabled. Deprecated: Enabled attributes can cause problems in enforcement of configuration consistency. |
http2-enable-push | true | Whether server push is enabled for this connection. |
http2-header-table-size | 4096 | The size, in bytes, of the header table used for HPACK compression. This amount of memory will be allocated per connection for compression. Larger values use more memory but may give better compression. |
http2-initial-window-size | 65535 | The flow control window size, in bytes, that controls how quickly the client can send data to the server. |
http2-max-concurrent-streams | The maximum number of HTTP/2 streams that can be active at any time on a single connection. | |
http2-max-frame-size | 16384 | The maximum HTTP/2 frame size, in bytes. |
http2-max-header-list-size | The maximum size of request headers the server is prepared to accept. | |
max-buffered-request-size | 16384 | Maximum size of a buffered request, in bytesRequests are not usually buffered, the most common case is when performing SSL renegotiation for a POST request, and the post data must be fully buffered in order to perform the renegotiation. |
max-connections |
The maximum number of concurrent connections. If no value is set in the server configuration, the limit for the number of concurrent connections is | |
max-cookies | 200 | The maximum number of cookies that will be parsed. This is used to protect against hash vulnerabilities. |
max-header-size | 1048576 | The maximum size in bytes of an HTTP request header. |
max-headers | 200 | The maximum number of headers that will be parsed. This is used to protect against hash vulnerabilities. |
max-parameters | 1000 | The maximum number of parameters that will be parsed. This is used to protect against hash vulnerabilities. This applies to both query parameters, and to POST data, but is not cumulative. For example, you can potentially have max parameters * 2 total parameters). |
max-post-size | 10485760 | The maximum size of a post that will be accepted. |
no-request-timeout | 60000 | The length of time in milliseconds that the connection can be idle before it is closed by the container. |
proxy-address-forwarding | false | Whether to enable x-forwarded-host and similar headers and set a remote IP address and host name. |
proxy-protocol | false |
Whether to use the PROXY protocol to transport connection information. If set to |
read-timeout |
Configure a read timeout for a socket, in milliseconds. If the given amount of time elapses without a successful read taking place, the socket’s next read will throw a | |
receive-buffer | The receive buffer size. | |
record-request-start-time | false | Whether to record the request start time, to allow for request time to be logged. This has a small but measurable performance impact. |
redirect-socket | If this listener is supporting non-SSL requests, and a request is received for which a matching requires SSL transport, whether to automatically redirect the request to the socket binding port specified here. | |
request-parse-timeout | The maximum amount of time in milliseconds that can be spent parsing the request. | |
require-host-http11 | false |
It requires all HTTP/1.1 requests to have a |
resolve-peer-address | false | Enables host DNS lookup. |
secure | false |
If this is |
send-buffer | The send buffer size. | |
socket-binding | The listener’s socket binding | |
tcp-backlog | Configure a server with the specified backlog. | |
tcp-keep-alive | Configure a channel to send TCP keep-alive messages in an implementation-dependent manner. | |
url-charset | UTF-8 | URL charset. |
worker | default | The listener’s XNIO worker. |
write-timeout |
Configure a write timeout for a socket, in milliseconds. If the given amount of time elapses without a successful write taking place, the socket’s next write will throw a |
https-listener Attributes
Attribute | Default | Description |
---|---|---|
allow-encoded-slash | false |
If a request comes in with encoded characters, for example |
allow-equals-in-cookie-value | false | Whether to allow non-escaped equals characters in unquoted cookie values. Unquoted cookie values may not contain equals characters. If present the value ends before the equals sign. The remainder of the cookie value will be dropped. |
allow-unescaped-characters-in-url | false |
Whether to allow non-escaped characters in a URL. If set to |
always-set-keep-alive | true | Whether a Connection: keep-alive header will be added to responses, even when it is not strictly required by the specification. |
buffer-pipelined-data | false | Whether to buffer pipelined requests. |
buffer-pool | default | The listener’s buffer pool. |
certificate-forwarding | false |
Whether certificate forwarding should be enabled or not. If this is enabled then the listener will take the certificate from the |
decode-url | true | Whether the parser will decode the URL and query parameters using the selected character encoding, defaulting to UTF-8. If this is false they will not be decoded. This will allow a later handler to decode them into whatever charset is desired. |
disallowed-methods | ["TRACE"] | A comma-separated list of HTTP methods that are not allowed. |
enable-http2 | false | Enables HTTP/2 support for this listener. |
enable-spdy | false | Enables SPDY support for this listener. Deprecated: SPDY has been replaced by HTTP/2. |
enabled | true | If the listener is enabled. Deprecated: Enabled attributes can cause problems in enforcement of configuration consistency. |
enabled-cipher-suites | Configures Enabled SSL ciphers. Deprecated: Where an SSLContext is referenced it should be configured with the cipher suites to be supported. | |
enabled-protocols | Configures SSL protocols. Deprecated: Where an SSLContext is referenced it should be configured with the cipher suites to be supported. | |
http2-enable-push | true | If server push is enabled for this connection. |
http2-header-table-size | 4096 | The size, in bytes, of the header table used for HPACK compression. This amount of memory will be allocated per connection for compression. Larger values use more memory but may give better compression. |
http2-initial-window-size | 65535 | The flow control window size, in bytes, that controls how quickly the client can send data to the server. |
http2-max-concurrent-streams | The maximum number of HTTP/2 streams that can be active at any time on a single connection. | |
http2-max-frame-size | 16384 | The maximum HTTP/2 frame size, in bytes. |
http2-max-header-list-size | The maximum size of request headers the server is prepared to accept. | |
max-buffered-request-size | 16384 | Maximum size of a buffered request, in bytesRequests are not usually buffered, the most common case is when performing SSL renegotiation for a POST request, and the post data must be fully buffered in order to perform the renegotiation. |
max-connections |
The maximum number of concurrent connections. If no value is set in the server configuration, the limit for the number of concurrent connections is | |
max-cookies | 100 | The maximum number of cookies that will be parsed. This is used to protect against hash vulnerabilities. |
max-header-size | 1048576 | The maximum size in bytes of an HTTP request header. |
max-headers | 200 | The maximum number of headers that will be parsed. This is used to protect against hash vulnerabilities. |
max-parameters | 1000 | The maximum number of parameters that will be parsed. This is used to protect against hash vulnerabilities. This applies to both query parameters, and to POST data, but is not cumulative. For example, you can potentially have max parameters * 2 total parameters. |
max-post-size | 10485760 | The maximum size of a post that will be accepted. |
no-request-timeout | 60000 | The length of time in milliseconds that the connection can be idle before it is closed by the container. |
proxy-address-forwarding | false | Enables handling of x-forwarded-host header, and other x-forwarded-* headers, and uses this header information to set the remote address. This should only be used behind a trusted proxy that sets these headers otherwise a remote user can spoof their IP address. |
proxy-protocol | false |
Whether to use the PROXY protocol to transport connection information. If set to |
read-timeout |
Configure a read timeout for a socket, in milliseconds. If the given amount of time elapses without a successful read taking place, the socket’s next read will throw a | |
receive-buffer | The receive buffer size. | |
record-request-start-time | false | Whether to record the request start time, to allow for request time to be logged. This has a small but measurable performance impact. |
request-parse-timeout | The maximum amount of time in milliseconds that can be spent parsing the request. | |
require-host-http11 | false | Require that all HTTP/1.1 requests have a 'Host' header. If the request does not include this header it will be rejected with a 403. |
resolve-peer-address | false | Enables host DNS lookup. |
secure | false |
If this is |
security-realm |
The listener’s security realm. Deprecated: Use the | |
send-buffer | The send buffer size. | |
socket-binding | The listener’s socket binding. | |
ssl-context | Reference to the SSLContext to be used by this listener. | |
ssl-session-cache-size | The maximum number of active SSL sessions. Deprecated: This can now be configured on the Elytron security context. | |
ssl-session-timeout | The timeout for SSL sessions, in seconds. Deprecated: This can now be configured on the Elytron security context. | |
tcp-backlog | Configure a server with the specified backlog. | |
tcp-keep-alive | Configure a channel to send TCP keep-alive messages in an implementation-dependent manner. | |
url-charset | UTF-8 | URL charset. |
verify-client | NOT_REQUESTED | The desired SSL client authentication mode for SSL channels. Deprecated: Where an SSLContext is referenced it should be configured directly for the required mode of client verification. |
worker | default | The listener’s XNIO worker. |
write-timeout |
Configure a write timeout for a socket, in milliseconds. If the given amount of time elapses without a successful write taking place, the socket’s next write will throw a |
A.28. Undertow Subsystem Statistics
Name | Description |
---|---|
bytes-received | The number of bytes that have been received by this listener. |
bytes-sent | The number of bytes that have been sent out on this listener. |
error-count | The number of 500 responses that have been sent by this listener. |
max-processing-time | The maximum processing time taken by a request on this listener. |
processing-time | The total processing time of all requests handed by this listener. |
request-count | The number of requests this listener has served. |
Name | Description |
---|---|
bytes-received | The number of bytes that have been received by this listener. |
bytes-sent | The number of bytes that have been sent out on this listener. |
error-count | The number of 500 responses that have been sent by this listener. |
max-processing-time | The maximum processing time taken by a request on this listener. |
processing-time | The total processing time of all requests handed by this listener. |
request-count | The number of requests this listener has served. |
Name | Description |
---|---|
bytes-received | The number of bytes that have been received by this listener. |
bytes-sent | The number of bytes that have been sent out on this listener. |
error-count | The number of 500 responses that have been sent by this listener. |
max-processing-time | The maximum processing time taken by a request on this listener. |
processing-time | The total processing time of all requests handed by this listener. |
request-count | The number of requests this listener has served. |
A.29. Default Behavior of HTTP Methods
Compared to the web
subsystem in previous JBoss EAP releases, the undertow
subsystem in JBoss EAP 7.3 has different default behaviors of HTTP methods. The following table outlines the default behaviors in JBoss EAP 7.3.
HTTP Method | JSP | Static HTML | Static HTML by File Handler |
---|---|---|---|
GET | OK | OK | OK |
POST | OK | NOT_ALLOWED | OK |
HEAD | OK | OK | OK |
PUT | NOT_ALLOWED | NOT_ALLOWED | NOT_ALLOWED |
TRACE | NOT_ALLOWED | NOT_ALLOWED | NOT_ALLOWED |
DELETE | NOT_ALLOWED | NOT_ALLOWED | NOT_ALLOWED |
OPTIONS | NOT_ALLOWED | OK | NOT_ALLOWED |
For servlets, the default behavior depends on its implementation, except for the TRACE
method, which has a default behavior of NOT_ALLOWED
.
A.30. Remoting Subsystem Attributes
Attribute names in these tables are listed as they appear in the management model, for example, when using the management CLI. See the schema definition file located at EAP_HOME/docs/schema/wildfly-remoting_4_0.xsd
to view the elements as they appear in the XML, as there may be differences from the management model.
Attribute | Default | Description |
---|---|---|
worker-read-threads | 1 | The number of read threads to create for the remoting worker. |
worker-task-core-threads | 4 | The number of core threads for the remoting worker task thread pool. |
worker-task-keepalive | 60 | The number of milliseconds to keep non-core remoting worker task threads alive. |
worker-task-limit | 16384 | The maximum number of remoting worker tasks to allow before rejecting. |
worker-task-max-threads | 16 | The maximum number of threads for the remoting worker task thread pool. |
worker-write-threads | 1 | The number of write threads to create for the remoting worker. |
The above attributes of the remoting
element are deprecated. These attributes should now be configured using the io
subsystem.
Attribute | Default | Description |
---|---|---|
auth-realm | The authentication realm to use if no authentication CallbackHandler is specified. | |
authentication-retries | 3 | Specify the number of times a client is allowed to retry authentication before closing the connection. |
authorize-id | The SASL authorization ID. Used as authentication user name to use if no authentication CallbackHandler is specified and the selected SASL mechanism demands a user name. | |
buffer-region-size | The size of allocated buffer regions. | |
heartbeat-interval | 2147483647 | The interval to use for connection heartbeat, in milliseconds. If the connection is idle in the outbound direction for this amount of time, a ping message will be sent, which will trigger a corresponding reply message. |
max-inbound-channels | 40 | The maximum number of concurrent inbound messages on a channel. |
max-inbound-message-size | 9223372036854775807 | The maximum inbound message size to be allowed. Messages exceeding this size will cause an exception to be thrown on the reading side as well as the writing side. |
max-inbound-messages | 80 | The maximum number of inbound channels to support for a connection. |
max-outbound-channels | 40 | The maximum number of concurrent outbound messages on a channel. |
max-outbound-message-size | 9223372036854775807 | The maximum outbound message size to send. No messages larger than this well be transmitted; attempting to do so will cause an exception on the writing side. |
max-outbound-messages | 65535 | The maximum number of outbound channels to support for a connection. |
receive-buffer-size | 8192 | The size of the largest buffer that this endpoint will accept over a connection. |
receive-window-size | 131072 | The maximum window size of the receive direction for connection channels, in bytes. |
sasl-protocol |
|
When a |
send-buffer-size | 8192 | The size of the largest buffer that this endpoint will transmit over a connection. |
server-name | The server side of the connection passes it’s name to the client in the initial greeting, by default the name is automatically discovered from the local address of the connection or it can be overridden using this. | |
transmit-window-size | 131072 | The maximum window size of the transmit direction for connection channels, in bytes. |
worker |
| Worker to use |
When using the management CLI to update the endpoint
element, it is available under configuration
in the remoting
element. For example: /subsystem=remoting/configuration=endpoint/
.
Connector Attributes
The connector component has the following structure:
Attribute | Default | Description |
---|---|---|
authentication-provider |
The | |
sasl-authentication-factory | Reference to the SASL authentication factory to secure this connector. | |
sasl-protocol |
| The protocol to pass into the SASL mechanisms used for authentication. |
security-realm | The associated security realm to use for authentication for this connector. | |
server-name | The server name to send in the initial message exchange and for SASL based authentication. | |
socket-binding | The name (or names) of the socket binding(s) to attach to. | |
ssl-context | Reference to the SSL context to use for this connector. |
Attribute | Default | Description |
---|---|---|
value | The property value. |
Security Attributes
The security
component allows you to configure the security for the connector, but contains no direct configuration attributes. It can be configured using its nested components, such as sasl.
Attribute | Default | Description |
---|---|---|
include-mechanisms |
The optional nested | |
qop |
The optional nested Quality-of-protection values for this list are:
| |
reuse-session | false |
The optional nested |
server-auth | false |
The optional nested |
strength |
The optional nested Cipher strength values for this list are:
|
sasl-policy Attributes
The sasl-policy
component allows you to specify an optional policy to use to narrow down the available set of mechanisms, but contains no direct configuration attributes. It can be configured using its nested components, such as policy.
Attribute | Default | Description |
---|---|---|
forward-secrecy | true |
The optional nested |
no-active | true |
The optional nested |
no-anonymous | true |
The optional nested |
no-dictionary | true |
The optional nested |
no-plain-text | true |
The optional nested |
pass-credentials | true |
The optional nested |
HTTP Connector Attributes
The http-connector component has the following structure:
Attribute | Default | Description |
---|---|---|
authentication-provider |
The | |
connector-ref |
The name (or names) of a connector in the | |
sasl-authentication-factory | Reference to the SASL authentication factory to secure this connector. | |
sasl-protocol |
| The protocol to pass into the SASL mechanisms used for authentication. |
security-realm | The associated security realm to use for authentication for this connector. | |
server-name | The server name to send in the initial message exchange and for SASL based authentication. |
Outbound Connection Attributes
The outbound-connection
component has the following structure:
Attribute | Default | Description |
---|---|---|
uri | The connection URI for the outbound connection. |
Attribute | Default | Description |
---|---|---|
value | The property value. |
The above property
attributes are related to the XNIO Options that will be used during the connection creation.
Remote Outbound Connection
The remote-outbound-connection
component has the following structure:
Attribute | Default | Description |
---|---|---|
authentication-context | Reference to the authentication context instance containing the configuration for outbound connections. | |
outbound-socket-binding-ref |
Name of the | |
protocol |
|
The protocol to use for the remote connection. Defaults to |
security-realm |
Reference to the security realm to use to obtain the password and SSL configuration. Deprecated: Outbound security settings should be migrated to an | |
username |
The user name to use when authenticating against the remote server. Deprecated: Outbound security settings should be migrated to an |
Local Outbound Connection Attributes
The local-outbound-connection
component has the following structure:
Attribute | Default | Description |
---|---|---|
outbound-socket-binding-ref |
Name of the |
A.31. IO Subsystem Attributes
Attribute names in these tables are listed as they appear in the management model, for example, when using the management CLI. See the schema definition file located at EAP_HOME/docs/schema/wildfly-io_3_0.xsd
to view the elements as they appear in the XML, as there may be differences from the management model.
Attribute | Default | Description |
---|---|---|
io-threads | The number of I/O threads to create for the worker. If not specified, the number of threads is set to the number of CPUs × 2. | |
stack-size | 0 | The stack size, in bytes, to attempt to use for worker threads. |
task-keepalive | 60000 | The number of milliseconds to keep non-core task threads alive. |
task-core-threads | 2 | The number of threads for the core task thread pool. |
task-max-threads |
The maximum number of threads for the worker task thread pool. If not specified, the maximum number of threads is set to the number of CPUs × 16, taking the |
Attribute | Default | Description |
---|---|---|
buffer-size | The size, in bytes, of each buffer slice. If not specified, the size is set based on the available RAM of your system:
For performance tuning advice on this attribute, see Configuring Buffer Pools in the JBoss EAP Performance Tuning Guide. | |
buffers-per-slice | How many slices, or sections, to divide the larger buffer into. This can be more memory efficient than allocating many separate buffers. If not specified, the number of slices is set based on the available RAM of your system:
| |
direct-buffers | Whether the buffer pool uses direct buffers, which are faster in many cases with NIO. Note that some platforms do not support direct buffers. |
A.32. Jakarta Server Faces Module Templates
The following are example templates used for the various Jakarta Server Faces modules required when installing a different Jakarta Server Faces version for JBoss EAP. See Installing a Jakarta Server Faces Implementation for full instructions.
Example: Mojarra Jakarta Server Faces Implementation JAR module.xml
Be sure to use the appropriate values for the following replaceable variables in the template:
-
IMPL_NAME
-
VERSION
<module xmlns="urn:jboss:module:1.8" name="com.sun.jsf-impl:IMPL_NAME-VERSION"> <properties> <property name="jboss.api" value="private"/> </properties> <dependencies> <module name="javax.faces.api:IMPL_NAME-VERSION"/> <module name="javaee.api"/> <module name="javax.servlet.jstl.api"/> <module name="org.apache.xerces" services="import"/> <module name="org.apache.xalan" services="import"/> <module name="org.jboss.weld.core"/> <module name="org.jboss.weld.spi"/> <module name="javax.xml.rpc.api"/> <module name="javax.rmi.api"/> <module name="org.omg.api"/> </dependencies> <resources> <resource-root path="impl-VERSION.jar"/> </resources> </module>
Example: MyFaces Jakarta Server Faces Implementation JAR module.xml
Be sure to use the appropriate values for the following replaceable variables in the template:
-
IMPL_NAME
-
VERSION
<module xmlns="urn:jboss:module:1.8" name="com.sun.jsf-impl:IMPL_NAME-VERSION"> <properties> <property name="jboss.api" value="private"/> </properties> <dependencies> <module name="javax.faces.api:IMPL_NAME-VERSION"> <imports> <include path="META-INF/**"/> </imports> </module> <module name="javaee.api"/> <module name="javax.servlet.jstl.api"/> <module name="org.apache.xerces" services="import"/> <module name="org.apache.xalan" services="import"/> <!-- extra dependencies for MyFaces --> <module name="org.apache.commons.collections"/> <module name="org.apache.commons.codec"/> <module name="org.apache.commons.beanutils"/> <module name="org.apache.commons.digester"/> <!-- extra dependencies for MyFaces 1.1 <module name="org.apache.commons.logging"/> <module name="org.apache.commons.el"/> <module name="org.apache.commons.lang"/> --> <module name="javax.xml.rpc.api"/> <module name="javax.rmi.api"/> <module name="org.omg.api"/> </dependencies> <resources> <resource-root path="IMPL_NAME-impl-VERSION.jar"/> </resources> </module>
Example: Mojarra Jakarta Server Faces API JAR module.xml
Be sure to use the appropriate values for the following replaceable variables in the template:
-
IMPL_NAME
-
VERSION
<module xmlns="urn:jboss:module:1.8" name="javax.faces.api:IMPL_NAME-VERSION"> <dependencies> <module name="com.sun.jsf-impl:IMPL_NAME-VERSION"/> <module name="javax.enterprise.api" export="true"/> <module name="javax.servlet.api" export="true"/> <module name="javax.servlet.jsp.api" export="true"/> <module name="javax.servlet.jstl.api" export="true"/> <module name="javax.validation.api" export="true"/> <module name="org.glassfish.javax.el" export="true"/> <module name="javax.api"/> <module name="javax.websocket.api"/> </dependencies> <resources> <resource-root path="jsf-api-VERSION.jar"/> </resources> </module>
Example: MyFaces Jakarta Server Faces API JAR module.xml
Be sure to use the appropriate values for the following replaceable variables in the template:
-
IMPL_NAME
-
VERSION
<module xmlns="urn:jboss:module:1.8" name="javax.faces.api:IMPL_NAME-VERSION"> <dependencies> <module name="javax.enterprise.api" export="true"/> <module name="javax.servlet.api" export="true"/> <module name="javax.servlet.jsp.api" export="true"/> <module name="javax.servlet.jstl.api" export="true"/> <module name="javax.validation.api" export="true"/> <module name="org.glassfish.javax.el" export="true"/> <module name="javax.api"/> <!-- extra dependencies for MyFaces 1.1 <module name="org.apache.commons.logging"/> <module name="org.apache.commons.el"/> <module name="org.apache.commons.lang"/> --> </dependencies> <resources> <resource-root path="myfaces-api-VERSION.jar"/> </resources> </module>
Example: Mojarra Jakarta Server Faces Injection JAR module.xml
Be sure to use the appropriate values for the following replaceable variables in the template:
-
IMPL_NAME
-
VERSION
-
INJECTION_VERSION
-
WELD_VERSION
<module xmlns="urn:jboss:module:1.8" name="org.jboss.as.jsf-injection:IMPL_NAME-VERSION"> <properties> <property name="jboss.api" value="private"/> </properties> <resources> <resource-root path="wildfly-jsf-injection-INJECTION_VERSION.jar"/> <resource-root path="weld-core-jsf-WELD_VERSION.jar"/> </resources> <dependencies> <module name="com.sun.jsf-impl:IMPL_NAME-VERSION"/> <module name="java.naming"/> <module name="java.desktop"/> <module name="org.jboss.as.jsf"/> <module name="org.jboss.as.web-common"/> <module name="javax.servlet.api"/> <module name="org.jboss.as.ee"/> <module name="org.jboss.as.jsf"/> <module name="javax.enterprise.api"/> <module name="org.jboss.logging"/> <module name="org.jboss.weld.core"/> <module name="org.jboss.weld.api"/> <module name="javax.faces.api:IMPL_NAME-VERSION"/> </dependencies> </module>
Example: MyFaces Jakarta Server Faces Injection JAR module.xml
Be sure to use the appropriate values for the following replaceable variables in the template:
-
IMPL_NAME
-
VERSION
-
INJECTION_VERSION
-
WELD_VERSION
<module xmlns="urn:jboss:module:1.8" name="org.jboss.as.jsf-injection:IMPL_NAME-VERSION"> <properties> <property name="jboss.api" value="private"/> </properties> <resources> <resource-root path="wildfly-jsf-injection-INJECTION_VERSION.jar"/> <resource-root path="weld-jsf-WELD_VERSION.jar"/> </resources> <dependencies> <module name="com.sun.jsf-impl:IMPL_NAME-VERSION"/> <module name="javax.api"/> <module name="org.jboss.as.web-common"/> <module name="javax.servlet.api"/> <module name="org.jboss.as.jsf"/> <module name="org.jboss.as.ee"/> <module name="org.jboss.as.jsf"/> <module name="javax.enterprise.api"/> <module name="org.jboss.logging"/> <module name="org.jboss.weld.core"/> <module name="org.jboss.weld.api"/> <module name="org.wildfly.security.elytron"/> <module name="javax.faces.api:IMPL_NAME-VERSION"/> </dependencies> </module>
Example: MyFaces commons-digester JAR module.xml
Be sure to use the appropriate value for the VERSION
replaceable variable in the template.
<module xmlns="urn:jboss:module:1.5" name="org.apache.commons.digester">
<properties>
<property name="jboss.api" value="private"/>
</properties>
<resources>
<resource-root path="commons-digester-VERSION.jar"/>
</resources>
<dependencies>
<module name="javax.api"/>
<module name="org.apache.commons.collections"/>
<module name="org.apache.commons.logging"/>
<module name="org.apache.commons.beanutils"/>
</dependencies>
</module>
A.33. JGroups Subsystem Attributes
See the tables below for the attributes of the various elements of the jgroups
subsystem.
Attribute names in these tables are listed as they appear in the management model, for example, when using the management CLI. See the schema definition file located at EAP_HOME/docs/schema/jboss-as-jgroups_5_0.xsd
to view the elements as they appear in the XML, as there may be differences from the management model.
Attribute | Default | Description |
---|---|---|
default-channel | ee | The default JGroups channel. |
default-stack | The default JGroups protocol stack. |
Channel Attributes
The channel element has the following structure:
fork
-
protocol
-
-
protocol
channel Attributes
Attribute | Default | Description |
---|---|---|
cluster | The cluster name of the JGroups channel. If undefined, the name of the channel will be used. | |
module | org.wildfly.clustering.server | The module from which to load channel services. |
stack | The protocol stack of the JGroups channel. | |
statistics-enabled | false | Whether statistics are enabled. |
stats-enabled | false |
Whether statistics are enabled. Deprecated: Use the |
Stack Attributes
The stack element has the following structure:
stack Attributes
Attribute | Default | Description |
---|---|---|
statistics-enabled | false | Indicates whether or not all protocols in the stack will collect statistics. |
protocol Attributes
For a list of commonly used protocols, see the JGroups Protocols section.
Attribute | Default | Description |
---|---|---|
module | org.jgroups | The module with which to resolve the protocol type. |
properties | Properties of this protocol. | |
statistics-enabled | false | Indicates whether or not this protocol will collect statistics, overriding the stack configuration. |
relay Attributes
Attribute | Default | Description |
---|---|---|
module | org.jgroups | The module with which to resolve the protocol type. |
properties | Properties of this protocol. | |
site | The name of the local site. | |
statistics-enabled | false | Indicates whether or not this protocol will collect statistics, overriding the stack configuration. |
remote-site Attributes
Attribute | Default | Description |
---|---|---|
channel | The name of the bridge channel used to communicate with this remote site. | |
cluster |
The cluster name of the bridge channel to this remote site. Deprecated: Use an explicitly defined | |
stack |
The stack from which to create a bridge to this remote site. Deprecated: Use an explicitly defined |
transport Attributes
Attribute | Default | Description |
---|---|---|
default-executor |
The thread pool executor to handle incoming messages. Deprecated: Configure the predefined | |
diagnostics-socket-binding | The diagnostics socket binding specification for this protocol layer, used to specify IP interfaces and ports for communication. | |
machine | Machine, or host, identifier for this node. Used by Infinispan’s topology-aware consistent hash. | |
module | org.jgroups | Module with which to resolve the protocol type. |
oob-executor |
The thread pool executor to handle incoming out-of-band messages. Deprecated: Configure the predefined | |
properties | Properties of this transport. | |
rack | Rack, such as the server rack, identifier for this node. Used by Infinispan’s topology-aware consistent hash. | |
shared | false |
If |
site | Site, such as the data center, identifier for this node. Used by Infinispan’s topology-aware consistent hash. | |
socket-binding | The socket binding specification for this protocol layer, used to specify IP interfaces and ports for communication. | |
statistics-enabled | false | Indicates whether or not this protocol will collect statistics, overriding the stack configuration. |
thread-factory |
The thread factory to use for handling asynchronous transport-specific tasks. Deprecated: Configure the predefined | |
timer-executor |
The thread pool executor to handle protocol-related timing tasks. Deprecated: Configure the predefined |
thread-pool Attributes
Attribute | Default | Description |
---|---|---|
keepalive-time | 5000L | The amount of milliseconds that pool threads should be kept running when idle. If not specified, then threads will run until the executor is shut down. |
max-threads | 4 | The maximum thread pool size. |
min-threads | 2 |
The core thread pool size, which is smaller than |
queue-length | 500 | The queue length. |
A.34. JGroups Protocols
Protocol | Protocol Type | Description |
---|---|---|
ASYM_ENCRYPT | Encryption | Uses a secret key, stored in a coordinator on the cluster, for encrypting messages between cluster members. |
AUTH | Authentication | Provides a layer of authentication to cluster members. |
azure.AZURE_PING | Discovery | Supports node discovery using Microsoft Azure’s blob storage. |
FD_ALL | Failure Detection | Provides failure detection based on a simple heartbeat protocol. |
FD_SOCK | Failure Detection | Provides failure detection based on a ring of TCP sockets created between cluster members. |
JDBC_PING | Discovery | Discovers cluster members by using a shared database where members write their address. |
MERGE3 | Merge | Merges the subclusters together in the event of a cluster split. |
MFC | Flow Control | Provides multicast flow control between a sender and all cluster members. |
MPING | Discovery | Discovers cluster members with IP multicast. |
pbcast.GMS | Group Membership |
Handles group membership, including new members joining the cluster, leave requests by existing members, and |
pbcast.NAKACK2 | Message Transmission | Ensures message reliability and order, guaranteeing that all messages sent by one sender will be received in the order they were sent. |
pbcast.STABLE | Message Stability | Deletes messages that have been seen by all members. |
PING | Discovery | Initial discovery of members, with support for dynamic discovery of cluster members. |
SASL | Authentication | Provides a layer of authentication to cluster members using SASL mechanisms. |
SYM_ENCRYPT | Encryption | Uses a shared keystore for encrypting messages between cluster members. |
S3_PING | Discovery | Uses Amazon S3 to discover initial members. |
TCPGOSSIP | Discovery | Discovers cluster members by using an external gossip router. |
TCPPING | Discovery | Contains a static list of cluster member’s addresses to form the cluster. |
UFC | Flow Control | Provides unicast flow control between a sender and all cluster members |
UNICAST3 | Message Transmission | Ensures message reliability and order for unicast messages, guaranteeing that all messages sent by one sender will be received in the order they were sent. |
VERIFY_SUSPECT | Failure Detection | Verifies that a suspected member has died by pinging the member one final time before evicting it. |
Generic Protocol Attributes
All of the protocols have access to the following attributes.
Attribute | Default | Description |
---|---|---|
module | org.jgroups | The module with which to resolve the protocol type. |
properties | Properties of this protocol. | |
statistics-enabled | false | Whether statistics are enabled. |
Authentication Protocols
The authentication protocols are used to perform authentication, and are primarily responsible for ensuring that only authenticated members can join the cluster. These protocols sit below the GMS
protocol, so that they may listen for requests to join the cluster.
AUTH Attributes
While the AUTH
protocol contains no additional attributes, it must have a token defined as a child element.
When defining this protocol, the auth-protocol
element is used instead of the protocol
element.
Token Types
When using Elytron for security, it is recommended to use one of the following authentication tokens. These authentication tokens were intentionally designed for use with Elytron, and may not be used with legacy security configurations.
Token | Description |
---|---|
cipher-token | An authentication token where the shared secret is transformed. RSA is the default algorithm used for the transformation. |
digest-token | An authentication token where the shared secret is transformed. SHA-256 is the default algorithm used for the transformation. |
plain-token | An authentication token with no additional transformations to the shared secret. |
The following authentication tokens are inherited from JGroups, and are eligible for use in any configuration where authentication is desired.
Token | Description |
---|---|
MD5Token | An authentication token where the shared secret is encrypted using either an MD5 or SHA hash. MD5 is the default algorithm used for the encryption. |
SimpleToken | An authentication token with no additional transformations to the shared secret. This token is case-insensitive, and case is not considered when determining if strings match. |
X509Token | An authentication token where the shared secret is encrypted using an X509 certificate. |
SASL Attributes
Attribute | Default | Description |
---|---|---|
client_callback_handler |
The class name of the | |
client_name | The name to use when a node acts as a client. This name will also be used to obtain the subject if using a JAAS login module. | |
client_password | The password to use when a node acts as a client. This password will also be used to obtain the subject if using a JAAS login module. | |
login_module_name |
The name of the JAAS login module to use as a subject for creating the SASL client and server. This attribute is only required by certain | |
mech |
The name of the SASL authentication mechanism. This name can be any mechanism supported by the local SASL provider, and the JDK supplies | |
sasl_props |
Properties of the defined | |
server_callback_handler |
The class name of the | |
server_name | The fully qualified server name. | |
timeout | 5000 | The number of milliseconds to wait for a response to a challenge. |
Discovery Protocols
The following protocols are used to find an initial membership for the cluster, which can then be used to determine the current coordinator. A list of the discovery protocols are below.
- AZURE_PING
- JDBC_PING
- MPING
- PING
- S3_PING
- TCPGOSSIP
- TCPPING
AZURE_PING Attributes
Attribute | Default | Description |
---|---|---|
container | The name of the blob container to use for PING data. This must be a valid DNS name. | |
storage_access_key | The secret access key for the storage account. | |
storage_account_name | The name of the Microsoft Azure storage account that contains your blob container. |
JDBC_PING Attributes
Attribute | Default | Description |
---|---|---|
data-source | Datasource reference, to be used instead of the connection and JNDI lookup properties. |
When defining a JDBC_PING
protocol, the jdbc-protocol
element is used instead of the protocol
element.
S3_PING Attributes
Attribute | Default | Description |
---|---|---|
access_key | The Amazon S3 access key used to access an S3 bucket. | |
host | s3.amazonaws.com | Destination of the S3 web service. |
location | Name of the Amazon S3 bucket to use. The bucket must exist and use a unique name. | |
pre_signed_delete_url | The pre-signed URL to be used for the DELETE operation. | |
port |
| The port on which the web service is listening. |
pre_signed_put_url | The pre-signed URL to be used for the PUT operation. | |
prefix |
If set, and | |
secret_access_key | The Amazon S3 secret access key used to access an S3 bucket. | |
use_ssl | true | Determines if SSL is used when contacting the host and port combination. |
TCPGOSSIP Attributes
Attribute | Default | Description |
---|---|---|
socket-binding |
The socket binding specification for this protocol layer. Deprecated: Use | |
socket-bindings | The outbound socket bindings for this protocol. |
When defining a TCPGOSSIP
protocol, the socket-discovery-protocol
element is used instead of the protocol
element.
TCPPING Attributes
Attribute | Default | Description |
---|---|---|
socket-binding |
The socket binding specification for this protocol layer. Deprecated: Use | |
socket-bindings | The outbound socket bindings for this protocol. |
When defining a TCPPING
protocol, the socket-discovery-protocol
element is used instead of the protocol
element.
Encrypt Protocols
The following protocols are used to secure the communication stack. Encryption is based on a shared secret key that all members of the cluster have. This key is either acquired from a shared keystore, when using SYM_ENCRYPT
or from a public/private key exchange, when using ASYM_ENCRYPT
. When defining any of the following protocols an encrypt-protocol
element is created in the resulting XML.
If using ASYM_ENCRYPT
, then the same stack must have an AUTH
protocol defined. The AUTH
protocol is optional when using SYM_ENCRYPT
.
ASYM_ENCRYPT Attributes
Attribute | Default | Description |
---|---|---|
key-alias | The alias of the encryption key from the specified keystore. | |
key-credential-reference | The credentials required to obtain the encryption key from the keystore. | |
key-store | A reference to a keystore containing the encryption key. |
SYM_ENCRYPT Attributes
Attribute | Default | Description |
---|---|---|
key-alias | The alias of the encryption key from the specified keystore. | |
key-credential-reference | The credentials required to obtain the encryption key from the keystore. | |
key-store | A reference to a keystore containing the encryption key. |
Failure Detection Protocols
The following protocols are used to probe members of the cluster to determine if they are still alive. These protocols do not have any additional attributes beyond the generic attributes.
- FD_ALL
- FD_SOCK
- VERIFY_SUSPECT
Flow Control Protocols
The following protocols are responsible for flow control, or the process of adjusting the rate of a message sender to the slowest receiver. If a sender continuously sends messages at a rate faster than the receiver, then the receivers will either queue up or discard messages, resulting in retransmissions. These protocols do not have any additional attributes beyond the generic attributes.
- MFC - Multicast Flow Control
- UFC - Unicast Flow Control
Group Membership Protocols
The pbcast.GMS
protocol is responsible for new members joining the cluster, existing members leaving the cluster, and members that are suspected of having crashed. This protocol does not have any additional attributes beyond the generic attributes.
Merge Protocols
If the cluster becomes split, then the MERGE3
protocol is responsible for merging the subclusters back together. While this protocol is responsible for merging the cluster members back together, this will not merge the state of the cluster. The application is responsible for handling the callback to merge states. This protocol does not have any additional attributes beyond the generic attributes.
Message Stability
The pbcast.STABLE
protocol is responsible for garbage collecting messages that have been seen by all members of the cluster. This protocol initiates a stable message containing message numbers for a given member, called a digest. Once all members of the cluster have received the others' digests, then the message may be removed from the retransmission table. This protocol does not have any additional attributes beyond the generic attributes.
Reliable Message Transmission
The following protocols provide reliable message delivery and FIFO properties for messages sent to all nodes in a cluster. Reliable delivery means that no messages sent by a sender will ever be lost, as all messages are numbered, and retransmission requests are sent if a sequence number is not received. These protocols do not have any additional attributes beyond the generic attributes.
- pbcast.NAKACK2
- pbcast.UNICAST3
Deprecated Protocols
The following protocols have been deprecated, and have been replaced by a protocol that contains only the class name. For instance, instead of specifying org.jgroups.protocols.ASYM_ENCRYPT
, the protocol name would be ASYM_ENCRYPT
.
- org.jgroups.protocols.ASYM_ENCRYPT
- org.jgroups.protocols.AUTH
- org.jgroups.protocols.JDBC_PING
- org.jgroups.protocols.SYM_ENCRYPT
- org.jgroups.protocols.TCPGOSSIP
- org.jgroups.protocols.TCPPING
A.35. MicroProfile Config SmallRye Subsystem Attributes
Attribute names in these tables are listed as they appear in the management model, for example, when using the management CLI. See the schema definition file located at EAP_HOME/docs/schema/wildfly-microprofile-config-smallrye_1_0.xsd
to view the elements as they appear in the XML, as there may be differences from the management model.
Attribute | Description |
---|---|
class |
The |
dir | The directory to scan. This directory contains properties files where each file name is the name of the property and the file content is its value. |
ordinal |
The ordinal value, or priority, for the |
properties |
Properties to store directly in the |
Attribute | Description |
---|---|
class |
The |
A.36. Apache HTTP Server mod_cluster Directives
The mod_cluster connector is an Apache HTTP Server-based load balancer. It uses a communication channel to forward requests from the Apache HTTP Server to one of a set of application server nodes. The following directives can be set to configure mod_cluster.
There is no need to use ProxyPass directives because mod_cluster automatically configures the URLs that must be forwarded to Apache HTTP Server.
Directive | Description | Values |
---|---|---|
CreateBalancers |
Defines how the balancers are created in the Apache HTTP Server VirtualHosts. This allows directives like: |
|
UseAlias | Check that the alias corresponds to the server name. |
|
LBstatusRecalTime | Time interval in seconds for load-balancing logic to recalculate the status of a node. | Default: 5 seconds |
WaitBeforeRemove | Time in seconds before a removed node is forgotten by httpd. | Default: 10 seconds |
ProxyPassMatch/ProxyPass |
ProxyPassMatch and ProxyPass are mod_proxy directives which, when using ! instead of the back-end URL, prevent reverse-proxy in the path. This is used to allow Apache HTTP Server to serve static content. For example: |
Due to performance optimizations for sessions in JBoss EAP 7, configuring hot-standby nodes is not supported.
mod_manager
The context of a mod_manager directive is VirtualHost in all cases, except when mentioned otherwise. server config context implies that the directive must be outside a VirtualHost configuration. If not, an error message is displayed and the Apache HTTP Server does not start.
Directive | Description | Values |
---|---|---|
EnableMCPMReceive | Allow the VirtualHost to receive the MCPM from the nodes. Include EnableMCPMReceive in the Apache HTTP Server configuration to allow mod_cluster to work. Save it in the VirtualHost where you configure advertising. | |
MemManagerFile | The base name for the names that mod_manager uses to store configuration, generate keys for shared memory or locked files. This must be an absolute path name; the directories are created if needed. It is recommended that these files are placed on a local drive and not an NFS share. Context: server config |
|
Maxcontext | The maximum number of contexts supported by mod_cluster. Context: server config |
Default: |
Maxnode | The maximum number of nodes supported by mod_cluster. Context: server config |
Default: |
Maxhost | The maximum number of hosts, or aliases, supported by mod_cluster. It also includes the maximum number of balancers. Context: server config |
Default: |
Maxsessionid | The number of active sessionid stored to provide the number of active sessions in the mod_cluster-manager handler. A session is inactive when mod_cluster does not receive any information from the session within 5 minutes. Context: server config. This field is for demonstration and debugging purposes only. |
|
MaxMCMPMaxMessSize | The maximum size of MCMP messages from other Max directives |
Calculated from other Max directives. Min: |
ManagerBalancerName | The name of balancer to use when the JBoss EAP instance does not provide a balancer name. | mycluster |
PersistSlots | Tells mod_slotmem to persist nodes, aliases and contexts in files. Context: server config | Off |
CheckNonce | Switch check of nonce when using mod_cluster-manager handler. | on/off Default: on - Nonce checked |
AllowDisplay | Switch additional display on mod_cluster-manager main page. | on/off Default: off - only version is displayed |
AllowCmd | Allow commands using mod_cluster-manager URL. | on/off Default: on - Commands allowed |
ReduceDisplay | Reduce the information displayed on the main mod_cluster-manager page, so that more nodes can be displayed on the page. | on/off Default: off - full information is displayed |
SetHandler mod_cluster-manager | Displays information about the node that mod_cluster sees from the cluster. The information includes generic information and additionally counts the number of active sessions. <Location /mod_cluster-manager> SetHandler mod_cluster-manager Require ip 127.0.0.1 </Location> | on/off Default: off |
When accessing the location defined in httpd.conf
:
- Transferred: Corresponds to the POST data sent to the back-end server.
- Connected: Corresponds to the number of requests that have been processed when the mod_cluster status page was requested.
- Num_sessions: Corresponds to the number of sessions mod_cluster report as active (on which there was a request within the past 5 minutes). This field is not present when Maxsessionid is zero and is for demonstration and debugging purposes only.
A.37. ModCluster Subsystem Attributes
The modcluster
subsystem has the following structure:
- load-provider=simple
- ssl
The load-provider=dynamic
resource allows you to configure factors, such as CPU, sessions, heap, memory, and weight to determine the load balancing behavior.
The load-provider=simple
resource allows setting only a static constant as the factor attribute. This helps when the user does not need dynamic or complex rules to load balance the incoming HTTP requests.
Attribute names in these tables are listed as they appear in the management model, for example, when using the management CLI. See the schema definition file located at EAP_HOME/docs/schema/jboss-as-mod-cluster_3_0.xsd
to view the elements as they appear in the XML, as there may be differences from the management model.
Attribute | Default | Description |
---|---|---|
advertise | true | Whether to enable multicast-based advertise mechanism. |
advertise-security-key | It is a shared secret between an httpd instance and the JBoss EAP servers listening for advertisements from the httpd instance. | |
advertise-socket | The name of the balancer on the reverse proxy to register with. | |
auto-enable-contexts | true |
If set to |
balancer |
The name of the balancer on the reverse proxy to register with. If not set, the value is configured on the Apache HTTP Server side with the | |
connector | The name of Undertow listener that mod_cluster reverse proxy will connect to. | |
excluded-contexts |
A list of contexts to exclude from registration with the reverse proxies. If no host is indicated, the host is assumed to be | |
flush-packets | false | Whether or not to enable packet flushing to the web server. |
flush-wait | -1 |
Time to wait before flushing packets in httpd. Max value is |
listener | The name of the Undertow listener that will be registered with the reverse proxy. | |
load-balancing-group | If set, requests are sent to the specified load balancing group on the load balancer. | |
max-attempts | 1 | The number of times the reverse proxy will attempt to send a given request to a worker before giving up. |
node-timeout | -1 |
Timeout, in seconds, for proxy connections to a worker. This is the time that mod_cluster will wait for the back-end response before returning an error. If the |
ping | 10 | Time, in seconds, in which to wait for a pong answer to a ping. |
proxies |
List of proxies for mod_cluster to register with defined by | |
proxy-list |
List of proxies. The format is | |
proxy-url | / | Base URL for MCMP requests. |
session-draining-strategy | DEFAULT |
Session draining strategy used during undeployment of a web application. Valid values are
|
load-provider=simple |
A load provider to use if no dynamic load provider is present. It assigns each cluster member a load factor of | |
smax | -1 | Soft maximum idle connection count in httpd. |
socket-timeout | 20 | Number of seconds to wait for a response from an httpd proxy to MCMP commands before timing out, and flagging the proxy as in error. |
ssl-context |
Reference to the | |
status-interval | 10 |
Number of seconds a STATUS message is sent from the application server to the reverse proxy. Allowed values are between |
sticky-session | true | Whether subsequent requests for a given session should be routed to the same node, if possible. |
sticky-session-force | false | Whether the reverse proxy should return an error in the event that the balancer is unable to route a request to the node to which it is stuck. This setting is ignored if sticky sessions are disabled. |
sticky-session-remove | false | Remove session information on failover. |
stop-context-timeout | 10 | The maximum time, in seconds, to wait for a context to process pending requests, for a distributable context, or to destroy active sessions, for a non-distributable context. |
ttl | -1 |
Time to live, in seconds, for idle connections above smax. Allowed values are between |
worker-timeout | -1 |
Timeout to wait in httpd for an available worker to process the requests. Allowed values are between |
Attribute | Default | Description |
---|---|---|
decay | 2 | The decay. |
history | 9 | The history. |
initial-load | 0 |
The initial load reported by a node. The valid range is This attribute helps to gradually increase the load value of a newly joined node to avoid overloading it while joining a cluster.
You can disable this behavior by setting the value as |
Attribute | Default | Description |
---|---|---|
capacity | 1.0 | The capacity of the metric. |
class | The class name of the custom metric. | |
property | The properties for the metric. | |
weight | 1 | The weight of the metric. |
Attribute | Default | Description |
---|---|---|
capacity | 1.0 | The capacity of the metric. |
property | The properties for the metric. | |
type |
The type of the metric. Valid values are | |
weight | 1 | The weight of the metric. |
Attribute | Default | Description |
---|---|---|
ca-certificate-file | Certificate authority. | |
ca-revocation-url | Certificate authority revocation list. | |
certificate-key-file | ${user.home}/.keystore | Key file for the certificate. |
cipher-suite | The allowed cipher suite. | |
key-alias | The key alias. | |
password | changeit | Password. |
protocol | TLS | The SSL protocols that are enabled. |
A.38. mod_jk Worker Properties
The workers.properties
file defines the behavior of the workers to which mod_jk passes client requests. The workers.properties
file defines where the different application servers are located and the way the workload should be balanced across them.
The general structure of a property is worker.WORKER_NAME.DIRECTIVE
. The WORKER_NAME
is a unique name that must match the instance-id
configured in the JBoss EAP undertow
subsystem. The DIRECTIVE
is the setting to be applied to the worker.
Configuration Reference for Apache mod_jk Load Balancers
Templates specify default per-load-balancer settings. You can override the template within the load-balancer settings itself.
Property | Description |
---|---|
worker.list | A comma separated list of worker names that will be used by mod_jk. |
Property | Description |
---|---|
type |
The type of worker. The default type is |
Property | Description |
---|---|
balance_workers | Specifies the worker nodes that the load balancer must manage. You can use the directive multiple times for the same load balancer. It consists of a comma-separated list of worker node names. |
sticky_session |
Specifies whether requests from the same session are always routed to the same worker. The default is |
Property | Description |
---|---|
host |
The host name or IP address of the back-end server. The back-end server must support the |
port |
The port number of the back-end server instance listening for defined protocol requests. The default value is |
ping_mode | The conditions under which connections are probed for network status. The probe uses an empty AJP13 packet for CPing, and expects a CPong in response. Specify the conditions by using a combination of directive flags. The flags are not separated by a comma or any white-space. The ping_mode can be any combination of C, P, I, and A.
|
ping_timeout, connect_timeout, prepost_timeout, connection_ping_interval |
The timeout values for the connection probe settings above. The value is specified in milliseconds, and the default value for |
lbfactor |
Specifies the load-balancing factor for an individual back-end server instance. This is useful to give a more powerful server more of the workload. To give a worker 3 times the default load, set this to |
The example below demonstrates load balancing with sticky sessions between two worker nodes, node1
and node2
, listening on port 8009
.
Example: workers.properties
File
# Define list of workers that will be used for mapping requests worker.list=loadbalancer,status # Define Node1 # modify the host as your host IP or DNS name. worker.node1.port=8009 worker.node1.host=node1.mydomain.com worker.node1.type=ajp13 worker.node1.ping_mode=A worker.node1.lbfactor=1 # Define Node2 # modify the host as your host IP or DNS name. worker.node2.port=8009 worker.node2.host= node2.mydomain.com worker.node2.type=ajp13 worker.node2.ping_mode=A worker.node2.lbfactor=1 # Load-balancing behavior worker.loadbalancer.type=lb worker.loadbalancer.balance_workers=node1,node2 worker.loadbalancer.sticky_session=1 # Status worker for managing load balancer worker.status.type=status
Further configuration details for Apache mod_jk are out of the scope of this document and can be found in the Apache documentation.
A.39. Security Manager Subsystem Attributes
The security-manager
subsystem itself does not have configurable attributes, but it has one child resource with configurable attributes: deployment-permissions=default
.
Attribute names in this table are listed as they appear in the management model, for example, when using the management CLI. See the schema definition file located at EAP_HOME/docs/schema/wildfly-security-manager_1_0.xsd
to view the elements as they appear in the XML, as there may be differences from the management model.
Attribute | Description |
---|---|
maximum-permissions | The maximum set of permissions that can be granted to a deployment or JARs. |
minimum-permissions | The minimum set of permissions to be granted to a deployment or JARs. |
A.40. Install OpenSSL from JBoss Core Services
The JBoss Core Services OpenSSL files can be installed either from the ZIP or from the RPM distributions. Follow the below steps depending on your installation method of choice.
On Red Hat Enterprise Linux 8, standard system OpenSSL is supported thus installation of OpenSSL from JBoss Core Services is not necessary anymore.
Using JBoss Core Services OpenSSL ZIP File Distribution
The path to libs/
directory in the ZIP archive is jbcs-openssl-VERSION/openssl/lib(64)
for Linux and jbcs-openssl-VERSION/openssl/bin
for Windows.
- Download the OpenSSL package from the Software Downloads page that pertains to your operating system and architecture.
- Extract the downloaded ZIP file to your installation directory.
Notify JBoss EAP where to find the OpenSSL libaries.
You can do this using either of the following methods. In each of the following commands, be sure to replace
JBCS_OPENSSL_PATH
with the path to the JBoss Core Services OpenSSL libraries, for example,/opt/rh/jbcs-httpd24/root/usr/lib64
.You can add the OpenSSL path to the
JAVA_OPTS
variable in thestandalone.conf
ordomain.conf
configuration file using the following argument.JAVA_OPTS="$JAVA_OPTS -Dorg.wildfly.openssl.path=JBCS_OPENSSL_PATH
You can define a system property that specifies the OpenSSL path using the following management CLI command.
/system-property=org.wildfly.openssl.path:add(value=JBCS_OPENSSL_PATH)
ImportantRegardless of the method you use, you must perform a server restart for either the
JAVA_OPTS
value or the system property to take effect. A server reload is not sufficient.
Using JBoss Core Services OpenSSL RPM Distribution
Ensure that the system is registered to the JBoss Core Services channel:
Determine the JBoss Core Services CDN repository name for your operating system version and architecture:
- RHEL 6: jb-coreservices-1-for-rhel-6-server-rpms
- RHEL 7: jb-coreservices-1-for-rhel-7-server-rpms
Enable the repository on the system:
# subscription-manager repos --enable REPO_NAME
Ensure the following message is seen:
Repository REPO_NAME is enabled for this system.
Install OpenSSL from this channel:
# yum install jbcs-httpd24-openssl
-
Once the installation completes, the JBCS OpenSSL libraries will be available in
/opt/rh/jbcs-httpd24/root/usr/lib64
, or just/opt/rh/jbcs-httpd24/root/usr/lib
on x86 architecture. Notify JBoss EAP where to find the OpenSSL libaries.
You can do this using either of the following methods. In each of the following commands, be sure to replace
JBCS_OPENSSL_PATH
with the path to the JBoss Core Services OpenSSL libraries, for example,/opt/rh/jbcs-httpd24/root/usr/lib64
.You can update the
WILDFLY_OPTS
variable for theeap7-standalone
oreap7-domain
settings in the service configuration file.WILDFLY_OPTS="$WILDFLY_OPTS -Dorg.wildfly.openssl.path=JBCS_OPENSSL_PATH"
You can define a system property that specifies the OpenSSL path using the following management CLI command.
/system-property=org.wildfly.openssl.path:add(value=JBCS_OPENSSL_PATH)
ImportantRegardless of the method you use, you must perform a server restart for either the
WILDFLY_OPTS
value or the system property to take effect. A server reload is not sufficient.
A.41. Configure JBoss EAP to Use OpenSSL
There are multiple ways in which you can configure JBoss EAP to use OpenSSL:
You can reconfigure the
elytron
subsystem to give OpenSSL priority so that it is used in all cases by default.NoteAlthough OpenSSL is installed in the
elytron
subsystem, it is not the default TLS provider./subsystem=elytron:write-attribute(name=initial-providers, value=combined-providers) /subsystem=elytron:undefine-attribute(name=final-providers) reload
In the
elytron
subsystem, the OpenSSL provider can also be specified on thessl-context
resource. That way, the OpenSSL protocol can be selected on a case-by-case basis instead of using the default priority.To create the
ssl-context
resource and use the OpenSSL libraries in your Elytron-based SSL/TLS configuration, use the following command./subsystem=elytron/server-ssl-context=httpsSSC:add(key-manager=localhost-manager, trust-manager=ca-manager, provider-name=openssl) reload
To use the OpenSSL libraries in your legacy
security
subsystem SSL/TLS configuration:/core-service=management/security-realm=ApplicationRealm/server-identity=ssl:write-attribute(name=protocol,value=openssl.TLSv1.2) reload
The different OpenSSL protocols that can be used are:
- openssl.TLS
- openssl.TLSv1
- openssl.TLSv1.1
- openssl.TLSv1.2
JBoss EAP will automatically try to search for the OpenSSL libraries on the system and use them. You can also specify a custom OpenSSL libraries location by using the org.wildfly.openssl.path
property during JBoss EAP startup. Only the OpenSSL library version 1.0.2 or greater provided by JBoss Core Services is supported.
If OpenSSL is loaded properly, you will see a message in the server.log
during JBoss EAP startup, similar to:
15:37:59,814 INFO [org.wildfly.openssl.SSL] (MSC service thread 1-7) WFOPENSSL0002 OpenSSL Version OpenSSL 1.0.2k-fips 23 Mar 2017
A.42. Platform Modules Provided for Java 8
-
java.base
: This dependency is always included in the provided module loaders -
java.compiler
-
java.datatransfer
-
java.desktop
-
java.instrument
-
java.jnlp
-
java.logging
-
java.management
-
java.management.rmi
-
java.naming
-
java.prefs
-
java.rmi
-
java.scripting
java.se
: This module alias aggregates the following set of base modules:-
java.compiler
-
java.datatransfer
-
java.desktop
-
java.instrument
-
java.logging
-
java.management
-
java.management.rmi
-
java.naming
-
java.prefs
-
java.rmi
-
java.scripting
-
java.security.jgss
-
java.security.sasl
-
java.sql
-
java.sql.rowset
-
java.xml
-
java.xml.crypto
-
-
java.security.jgss
-
java.security.sasl
-
java.smartcardio
-
java.sql
-
java.sql.rowset
-
java.xml
-
java.xml.crypto
-
javafx.base
-
javafx.controls
-
javafx.fxml
-
javafx.graphics
-
javafx.media
-
javafx.swing
-
javafx.web
-
jdk.accessibility
-
jdk.attach
-
jdk.compiler
-
jdk.httpserver
-
jdk.jartool
-
jdk.javadoc
-
jdk.jconsole
-
jdk.jdi
-
jdk.jfr
-
jdk.jsobject
-
jdk.management
-
jdk.management.cmm
-
jdk.management.jfr
-
jdk.management.resource
-
jdk.net
-
jdk.plugin.dom
-
jdk.scripting.nashorn
-
jdk.sctp
-
jdk.security.auth
-
jdk.security.jgss
-
jdk.unsupported
-
jdk.xml.dom
Revised on 2022-02-01 13:01:54 UTC